Home

Reports Cards Plus Manual

1. PERI AT R ET P PNET OPS W BRAY SCHED Detailed Example of an End of Year Updating The student s transcript before printing the final report cards looks like Year 0 VIEW MODE SQP 0 1 050 01 Ad Eng Use 2 058 01 Essay 2 3 07001 Mod Am Hum 4 131 02 Pre Calc 5 231 02 H Chemist 6 830 02 AP Am Hst 7 433 01 Latin 3 8 580 01 Chorus 9 r001 Accting 1 Note that the student has added a ninth course for the second semester Accting I Report Cards Manual 8 55 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated This school has designated the MIDYEAR and FINAL columns to be credit columns In other words they have two credit columns The school has done this because they want a student who passes half of a full year course and fails the other half to still gets half of the possible credit for the course Consequently GPA s will be updated based on both the midyear and final grades as opposed to just on the final grades The detailed complete update report appears on the next three pages 8 56 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Final Update Report Page 1 UPDATE COLUMNS ALL CREDIT COLUMNS FINAL GRADE UPDATE BASED ON WHICH YEARS CURRENT YEAR YEAR 0 THIRD Q
2. 2002 03 School Year Year 1 Year 0 Grade 9 Courses rade 10 Courses Archival File Report Card File 2003 04 School Year Year 2 Year 1 Year 0 Grade 9 Courses Grade 10 Courses Grade 11 Courses Report Cards Manual C 3 Chapter C Transfer Credits amp GPA Specifications Specifications The specification window is Specifications Transfer GPA And Archival Data ini xl SPECIFICATIONS TRANSFER GPA AND ARCHIVAL DATA 1 SOURCE FOLDER 2001 02 E 2 SOURCE START GRADE Grade 3 3 SOURCE END GRADE Grade 12 OF SELECTED SOURCE GRADE LEVELS 4 OF SOURCE ARCHIVED YEARS 4 4 DESTINATION FOLDER 2002 03 E 5 DESTINATION START GRADE Gre Grade 12 6 DESTINATION END GRADE OF SELECTED DEST GRADE LEVELS OF DEST ARCHIVED YEARS 7 ALSO TRANSFER DATA BASE INFO C Yes No 8 ARCHIVE DATA DURING TRANSFER C Yes C No Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE From the specification window you will enter the source and destination directories as well as the source and destination starting and ending grade levels The starting and ending grade levels in each directory MUST encompass the same number of grade levels In the above example the data for grade 9 student 1 in the 2001 02 directory will be transferred to grade 10 student 1 in the destination directory C 4 Report Cards Manual Main Menu Transfer Credits amp
3. 2055 8 4 yo vovierdse od ak Bee aia ur Oe weed oon Print honor roll 1 5 sex ake eae 8 4 Inspect Change Universal HR Specifications 8 5 Inspect Change Honor Roll Print Specifications 8 10 Defining Honor Roll Reports 8 15 Individual Student Audit 8 19 How Honor Roll Averages Are Calculated 8 21 Grade Point Averages Menu 8 23 How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated aaa Sein Brune de 8 24 Update Un update GPA s amp Credits 8 27 Inspect Change Universal GPA Specifications 8 28 UPDATE GPA S amp CREDITS SPECIFICATIONS 8 30 How To Perform a Third Quarter Update 8 35 The Permanent Third Quarter Update 8 35 The Temporary Third Quarter Update8 36 Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits ros ree ata wach Ar die es 8 37 Un Update GPAs amp Credits 8 37 Reprint Last Update Summary Report 8 39 Reset Last Update Data Only to Zero8 39 Reset Credits GPAs Last Update Data To Zero 8 40 How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated 8 41 General Updating Rules 8 41 General Rules For Calculating Credits cat ce el eu Med e eR Bol 5 8 41 General Rules For Calculating Quality Points amp Weight 8 42 BRIEF EXAMPLE OF A COMPLETE UPDATING 8 45 DETAILED EXAMPLE OF A MIDYEAR UPDATING
4. 4 13 Report Cards Manual 4 1 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Introduction and Main Menu Introduction and Main Menu 4 2 Report Cards Manual Users can input grades into Report Cards Plus in the following ways Manually by typing grades directly into the Enter Grades Manually window Entering grades and skills manually Using an NCS scanner to scan grades from bubble sheets into the program By importing grades from Grade Quick grade book software Each of these options can be accessed through the Enter Grades window pictured below T Administrator s Plus 1 enter grades Manually 2 enter grades and sKills manually 3 Scan grades 4 receive from Grade quick 5 End program Enter Grades Entering Grades Manually Entering Grades Manually The Enter Grades Manually option has two pages of specification windows Press the PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP key or click on the appropriate tab to toggle between them The first specification window appears below Specification Window 1 Specifications Enter Grades E lol xl SPECIFICATION SCREEN 1 OF 2 ENTER GRADES Page 1 Yes C Na ui C Yes No 9 ENTER FOURTH MARKING PERIOD Yes C No A ENTER FINAL EXAM Yes No Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Specification USE WHICH ROSTER Description The Enter Grades Manually window contains a roster of students in a section This roster
5. 2 14 Understanding Meeting Times 2 14 Print Reports iud esito rw aries 2 18 Inspect Change Specifications 2 18 Page 1 Initial Specifications 2 19 PAGE 2 More Specifications 2 22 Skills Specifications 2 24 New Master amp Section List Files 2 25 New Section List File Only 2 25 Rebuild Section Rosters 2 25 Rebuild Section List File 2 25 Rebuild Skills File 2 26 Send Skills to GradeQuick 2 26 Import Section List rom SAMSA 2 27 Batch Enter HoOms ska sere 2 27 View Edit Sections 2 28 Entry Forms 3 Introduction amp Main Menu 3 2 The Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More Window 3 2 Manual Grade Entry Forms 3 4 The Entry Form Print Window 3 7 Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms 3 8 SITUATION 1 0 000000 5 3 8 SITUATION 2 0 0 0 0 0 000000 cae 3 9 SITUATION 23 lees 3 9 SITUATION 4 llle esee 3 10 SITUATION 5 1 ostrea tne 3 11 SITUATION 6 000000 3 11 SITUATION 7 eim be redd p 3 12 SITUATION 8 ore tnt at E ALES 3 12 SITUATION 49 0 2 0 0 00 e eae 3 13 SITUATION 10 2222 cen ease eds 3 13 Scanner Grade Entry Forms 3 13 Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms 3 19 SCANNING LETTER GRADES 3 21 SCANNING NUMBER GRADES 3 22 Grade Verificatio
6. 8 46 Midyear Update Report Page 1 8 48 Midyear Update Report Page 2 8 49 Midyear Update Report Page 3 8 49 TOP OF THE REPORT ew 8 50 Detailed Example of an End of Year Updating 5 esa ce stone ne E 8 55 Final Update Report Page 1 8 57 How to Obtain Class Rank Reports 8 65 Defining Class Rank Reports 8 68 Report Cards Manual 8 1 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Introduction amp Main Menu Introduction amp Main Menu 8 2 Report Cards Manual xl STATISTICAL REPORTS c 1 Honor rolls C 2 Grade point averages C 3 End program The Statistical Reports program lets you perform four actions Print Honor Roll Reports Update students career credits and grade point averages Print Class Rank Reports Print Eligibility Reports Using Honor Rolls This portion of the program calculates students grade point averages for one marking period at a time Honor roll reports may be generated based on these averages and other criteria based on students grades in this marking period Honor roll lists are written to the disk so that the report card report writer program is able to print on the report card which honor roll the student made Note that Upto FIVE honor rolls may be defined Each honor roll can be viewed on the window before printing While being viewed students may be deleted from the honor roll for any reason with a single keystroke The honor roll pr
7. Midyear Update Report Page 3 TOP OF THE REPORT 2226 22 0855 Detailed Example of an End of Year Updating ne enews deans Final Update Report Page 1 How to Obtain Class Rank Reports Defining Class Rank Reports Archive ECHO S iro tei oot a ed heated ee E HOW TO CHANGE THE NUMBERS OF ARCHIVED COURSES Print Schedule Scan Forms IntrOCU CHO DE etre Son por prede Printing Schedule Scan Forms Performing a Spacing Test Sorting by Your Chosen Fields Scan Students Schedules Introduction Main Menu The Actual Scanning Of The Request Forms Scanner Error llle STUDENT NUMBER ERROR Resolving Errors Transfer Credits amp GPA C Introduction naana ete mds C 2 How to Archive Grades C 2 Specifications s Ne ee oat ee C 4 GPA WARNING 005 C 5 Main Ml a ter due E dow ert lici die pao mets C 5 BEGIN TRANSFER 8 C 6 INDIVIDUAL STUDENT OVERRIDE C 6 Skills and Concepts D Introd ctlori Lure sore EM RERTEER D 2 Initial Sellipz 2 versata UE Uv Rea D 2 Entering Customized Lists of Skills and Concepts 2 05 D 4 Link Skills and Concepts to Courses D 6 Enter Skills Grades Manually D 9 Interfacing with GradeQuick D 10 Preparing Administrator s Plus D 10 Sending Skills to GradeQuick D 12
8. SF Search Field e TF Sort Field e SFC Search Field s and Criteria e DATE Current Date T Tab Code in inches Turns off the printer s line feed so that the next line can be an underline If you do not turn it back on again the printer will stay at the same line Turns the printer s line feed on again after it has been turned off by LFOFF The Lines Per Inch code determines the number of lines per vertical inch This code was added to the Report Writer so that certain portions of a report could have a fixed Lines Per Inch setting regardless of the font height As a result users have a wider range of font options to choose from when generating reports on pre printed forms Essentially the Lines Per Inch code causes large print to cram together and smaller print to expand in order to adhere to the lines per inch setting X represents the lines per inch in character spaces It may be replaced with a 1 through 10 with 10 being the most tightly spaced When there is no Lines Per Inch code present or when the code reads LPI 0 the lines per inch is determined by the size of the font All the lines between the PGSTART and PGEND codes make up a Page Header The Page Header prints at the top of every page of a report Page Headers are used on lists that DO NOT require a search Often times Page Headers contain page numbers Report Cards Manual 7 79 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard C
9. ILLEGAL COURSE NUMBER A course number that does not exist has been requested ILLEGAL SECTION NUMBER A section number that does not exist has been requested BLANK DIGIT Scan Students Schedules The Actual Scanning Of The Request Forms You will be told which course or section has a blank column If a student has course 59 they should bubble in 059 and not just 59 STUDENT HAS AT LEAST ONE COURSE WITH A SECTION The student has already been scheduled into at least one section This student must be un scheduled before his schedule can be re scanned Use the ADD amp DROP portion of the View Change Add Drop program to unschedule students Some errors cause the entire form to be skipped while other errors cause just one course and section to be ignored with the rest tabulated The above errors cause the entire form to be skipped When they are corrected the form may be re scanned Other errors will cause just one or more courses to be skipped These include duplicate requests and requests for sections that are full with 50 students In other words if a student requests the same course and section number twice the second request will be ignored and the rest of the student s requests will be tabulated to the disk The printout produced as the scanning takes place will clearly list each type of error and inform you if each form has been tabulated Remember once a student has a section in their schedule their forms may
10. LT CONI Ea Wa daora SOIF TEG ApagfqaunT oif qdeiboaoqg sio 2 Od Piof ETL FOI PION GOL T7021 E qarg 3p 25 TAUI s f Ti aH Sh 2 Tee 70 asrwaq J 2 2 Wa z Tiq3b 93T 701 p Bur rp 30 AT asnon SBPE SESELF ogo Spy aul JOOHIS SIH L NI Q3NH Y3 SLI paund oq pynoys soureu s19go 91 pue oouepuoge oy JOU 10 JogjouA pue popn our oq p nous suun J09 pred podas yorym Ajroeds noA ssury 19440 1sSuoure spIom Il onol I9q 0 u e qezrumosno 1osn 9j0j si jduosueg oy s eA e ONION Y sy juejpenb yoy 1oddn oy ur sr p1ooo1 6 opeJ8 sjuopnis y od Wes siu uo o durexo 104 1eo ouo 10 p1ooo1 sauopnis e FUTU uoo juejpenb yoeo YM sju ipenb moj surejuoo jduosuen smpp 78 Joded oj1A ure d uo se JIM se woy 10709 OM YOO s prey uo paud oq Lew d JOYA 12o qns Aq pouos sosinoo sjuopnjs e YM ouo smoys o dures jxou ou e Aq poos sosinoo sjuopus e uir 3duosue o dures e sr sqq s amp ea JUSIOIJIP OM ur poonpoud oq Aew dosue ou sTy se ooru se YOo jeu s disosuey soonpoud SQ 1d SQIVO LAOdAY AMO ema Apag fqauny THT Ea UVAA A GALYOS LdINOSNVAL he ERLER Uu 9 tb H IT Ij 37am 0 20 2T 0S T log o6 q3 uaTqo Toy ABototg 3 0 20 2T o0 T lee amp q sra3 T TO Azqauoag 0 20 2T 90 T I s E poog To Sur os 10 aia D Lida IWA IMN IOL ATI gusanos sid 0 HL amp sav ZiT 20 TO TT 20 T0 TT 20 T0 TT 00g lee c EAA 20 T0 TT 0070 a yb oa ApagqaunT 20 T0
11. Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits Finally the current weight of 5 00 is added to the previous career weight of 10 to give a new career weight total of 15 This student s career adjusted GPA is now 1100 15 or 73 33 and his simple GPA is 1070 15 or 71 33 After this update the student s report card record will now contain these eight figures CAREER CREDITS 12 50 LAST CREDITS UPDATE 4 00 CAREER ADJUSTED QP 1100 00 LAST ADJUSTED QP UPDATE 400 00 CAREER WEIGHT 15 00 LAST WEIGHT UPDATE 5 00 CAREER SIMPLE QP 1070 00 LAST SIMPLE QP UPDATE 390 00 Un updating will reverse everything to the way it was before the update leaving the following in the student s record CAREER CREDITS 8 50 LAST CREDITS UPDATE 0 00 CAREER ADJUSTED QP 700 00 LAST ADJUSTED QP UPDATE 0 00 CAREER WEIGHT 10 00 LAST WEIGHT UPDATE 0 00 CAREER SIMPLE QP 680 00 LAST SIMPLE QP UPDATE 0 00 Un updating subtracted the LAST CREDITS UPDATE of 4 00 from the CAREER CREDITS of 12 50 to get the old credits of 8 50 The OLD CREDITS of 8 50 are then stored in the CAREER CREDITS column and the LAST CREDITS UPDATE column is set to zero Similar calculations un update the quality points and weight Once everything has been un updated the student may be updated again Note that this option is rarely used for all students in a grade level Normally it is used to un update an INDIVIDUAL student 8 3
12. es1noo JEY 10 pouJeo SHPI JO 1equinu 9303 Y DIV SIMOO YOLI 107 IYF Ie oy UO OpeIs YORd 10 poured SHPI Jo Joquinu oy YM guo e paud ore Sopess 19jsouios ATUO YOTYM UI JeULIOJ JOISOUIIS JO o durexo ue SI STY JEULIOJ 1O SOUIdS IO up1epuejs e ur pojurd oq Aew ydirosuey jo odAq JONI SeoI SIY JO qoeo 10J pojunoo oq p nous sos1noo yoryM Ajruopr pue sea1e josfqns juo1ogpyip us 0j dn ougop Aew nox w Aq pasy ore Ady SspIOM JOYJO UT UNEI OTIM Ady Jop1o ot Ul pojsi o1 sosunoo sjuopnis e 5joofqns qoeo opun I o AQ poros sos1noo sjuoprnis YM ouo smoys o dums snor4oud ou joalqns Aq pojios sosinod sQjuopnis e YM dosue o durs e si sm joofqng Ag ponos 1duosuei 1o1sourog ApagfqaunT amp 20 T0 TT q Anus Tq Apagfqauny o 6 T 00 0T MS anpTog ApasMIUNyT 06 00 6660 ia qao arue Tg 0 d d ST 0 20 2T I raat qdeiboaoqq S 20 TO TT q Iaster W3IT H 022 T0 00 0T dd ST 00 66 60 di usua stiqj 43 Pan fad twag sIpouoIg STL 0 20 3T piumorq 3 oig Pre ETL 20 TO TT Sf pong sorg PIO GOL F0 TO TT pitIId ITuorara3on TI grano HWIA HS HoH Tra gEDIOU dlZ LOOZL 00 05 00 90 oo 90 05 05 00 00 Os 05 Os os os 00 90 00 00 oo 00 oo 00 00 SBBL EL 60 dod d Xas VIN SLVLS dddd dddd eeddce dddd dddd 00 sz HII uaaal Tay IOLT s o 007 007 oo oo e n n oH os 0s oo 007 os 0s LS E 05
13. Determines whether to count the course in the honor roll See Defining Honor Roll Reports on page 8 15 Determines whether to count the course when calculating simple GPA Determines whether to count the course when calculating adjusted GPA You may enter a text book name and the next two items if you have turned on the USE TEXTS COST AND FEES specification see Specification E on page E USE TEXTS COSTS amp FEES on page 2 21 A 12 character limit applies The text book name will appear both on the printout of all master courses and on students schedules Enter Courses Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List Field Name Description Cost This is the cost of the text s entered in the previous field Do not use a dollar sign The cost may not be more than 999 99 You will be asked to enter a cost only if you have turned on the USE TEXTS COST AND FEES specification see Specification E on page E USE TEXTS COSTS amp FEES on page 2 21 The cost will appear both on the printout of all master courses and on students schedules in Scheduling Plus This amount can also be used by Billing Plus to automatically generate an invoice for course costs Fee This is any fee that may be needed for a course An example would be a lab fee for science courses The same rules apply as for Cost Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List NOTE NOTE NOTE The easiest way to edit course section lists
14. However credits are awarded because P is a passing grade Because it is a full year course 50 of the possible credits of 1 00 are awarded giving the student 50 credits for this grade Bottom Of The Report STUDENT GRAND TOTALS PREVIOUS CREDITS 1z 0000 ADJ QP 1067 5000 SIMPLE QP 1067 5000 WEIGHT 1i 0000 PREV IGPA 9552 THIS UPDATE 1 7500 130 2500 127 7500 1 5000 NE IGPA 5270 NEW 12 7500 1137 7500 1135 2500 13 5000 PREV AGPA 6 9583 ND AGPA 88 Ttt For his midyear grades the student earned 1 75 credits 127 simple quality points 130 25 adjusted quality points and a weight of 1 50 These CURRENT values are added to the PREVIOUS career values to produce the NEW values The NEW values are then stored on the disk as the student s career credits quality points and weight they are replacing the old PREVIOUS values Note that due to this update the student s simple GPA changed from 88 96 to 88 54 and his adjusted GPA changed form 88 96 to 88 72 The GPA is calculated by dividing the appropriate quality points by the weight 8 54 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated After the MIDYEAR update has been performed the student s View Change Add Drop window lists the cea credit wei eu and GPA values amm Transcripts Rediker Richard Grade E Essay 2 Mod AmHum 93 87 Pre Calc H Chemist AP Am Hst Latin 3 Chorus
15. In this course the student obtained a midyear grade of F that was below the minimum grade Consequently the grade was raised to the minimum grade of 50 which is worth 50 simple quality points Because there is no GPA factor the adjusted quality points equals the simple quality points Note that this is the only course with a code entered into the OVR column Because the code was a 2 the second line displays that this course is worth HALF CREDIT amp HALF GPA Since the course is a full year course the possible weight of 1 00 is cut in half for each semester This is then cut in half because the OVR column code says to only count this grade half of what it normally will count towards the student s GPA Consequently the weight for this grade is 25 The weight of 0 5 times the simple and adjusted quality points of 0 produces 0 simple and adjusted quality points for the midyear grade If the grade was a passing grade the credits would have been cut in half like the weight 8 62 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated The final grade of an F is now examined In the grade table the grade of F is assigned 0 quality points Course 7 7 COURSE l 1 02 Pre Cale Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE WR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE Loo CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number o
16. Nu 147 MEDIAN 6 names are the courses they taught and the number and per cent of each type of grade they gave The last line for each teacher shows that teacher s totals for all of their courses Totals for the entire school appear at the very end of the report Only REPORT CARDS PLUS pays attention to details such as not splitting a teacher between two pages of the report If there isn t enough room for all of the courses of the next teacher on the current page it moves to the top of the next page XXIV FIRST MARKING PERIOD GRADE DISTRIBUTION REPORT BY COURSE AND DEPARTMENT 07 22 2002 Eq pm 0 0 0 0 004 0 004 0 0 0 0 004 0 004 0 0 0 0 004 0 004 0 0 0 0 004 0 004 0 i 0 0 004 20 004 0 0 0 0 004 0 004 0 0 0 0 005 0 004 0 0 0 0 004 0 004 0 0 0 0 004 0 004 0 i 0 9 005 11 115 0 1 0 0 004 5 564 0 0 0 0 004 90 005 0 0 0 0 004 90 005 0 3 0 0 005 6 124 0 5 0 0 004 2 854 A s B s C s D s F s P N COURSE 12 Col Fr Eng 012 01 Col Fr Eng 4 i l L 0 0 Elias Jane 52 334 26 674 12 334 6 674 9 005 0 005 9 005 012 02 Col Fr Eng 6 5 l l 0 0 0 Elias Jane 46 154 38 464 7 635 7 635 0 005 0 005 90 005 COURSE 1 TOTALS 14 3 3 i d 0 0 Iam i MEDIAN A B 56 005 32 144 14 715 7 145 0 005 0 005 90 005 TOURSE 20 Eng Reviem o a O O a a a a 020 01 Eng Review l i l 0 9 0 0 Bachelder May 25 005 50 004 25 004 6 004 90 005 0 00
17. SORT BY NAME HONOR ROLL 1 HIGH HONORS zT A 1 Baldwin Missy 86 er 5 Berube Russ 58 4 Keefe Mary 1 HELP 2 Nappi Thaddeus 5B You may highlight 8 Southard Heather 8 amp DELETE students from this honor roll Then press F9 to print it In this example there are six students on the HIGH HONORS list You can use the F6 SEARCH option to find any student in the list The F8 DEL option may be used to delete any student from the list The F10 SORT option allows you to toggle the list between sorting by name or by average The upper left corner of the window identifies that this list is currently sorted by name Report Cards Manual 8 13 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Honor Rolls After viewing the list and making any necessary adjustments click the F9 PRINT button to save it to disk You will then see the following print preview 07 17 2003 HONOR ROLL 1 HIGH HONORS FOR GRADE 12 27 students 1ST MARKING PERIOD CRS Number of courses used in calculating the average RANK NAME ID AVERAGE CRS INC F HOMEROOM SEX 23 Missy Baldwin 86 90 29 8 i 103 F 5 Erin Bartlett 8 94 43 9 103 F 20 Julian Berry 88 91 08 8 103 M 24 Russ Berube 58 90 20 11 103 M 2 Sherry Bullerwell 10 93 23 6 104 F 10 Milli Carrigan 59 92 86 7 104 F 8 Michelle Chute 72 93 33 6 104 F 14 Sharon Egan 15 92 50 6 102 F 19 Jaime Hagan 64 91 15 6 107 F 15 Amy Hage
18. Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Course 5 5 COURSE 220 02 AP Am Hst Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Column i HALF Credits HALF Average MIDYEAR GRADE 45 OVE CREDITS ADJUSTMENT code of i or 4 or in the WR column means to use half the possible credits 0 5000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 45 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS GPA FACTOR NOT USED because the grade is less than the MINIMUM grade for the GPA factor 45 0000 OVE WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT code of i in the WE column means to use half the weight so that this grade counts 504 90 5000 WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Full year course 4 weight 50 0 2500 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 11 2500 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 11 2500 FUNNINC TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 90 7500 ADI QP 113 0000 SIMPLE QP ll 5000 WEIGHT 1 2500 PREV IGPA 32 2000 THIS GRADE 0 0000 11 2500 d 11 2500 90 2500 NE SCP 5 1667 NEW 0 7500 130 2500 127 7500 1 5000 PREY ALPA 35 2000 ND A UCP 86 8332 In this course the student obtained a midyear grade of 45 which according to the grade table is worth 45 simple quality points Because the GPA factor is 0 it is also worth 45 adjusted quality points Note that this is the only
19. Thickness of border in inches Determines whether or not a border prints around the box Determines what text will print in the box as well as the font and size EVERY line of text must be preceded by a ContentAndFont code even blank lines and they must be numbered consecutively These lines may include codes including tabs Denotes the end of the box specifications Determines the position on the page in which the box prints The number after PrintBox must match the number after BoxStart The X and Y represent coordinates from the left margin and the top of the page Inserting a Graphic into a Report You can insert a school logo or other graphics file directly into the body of the report Graphics files can be created in any graphics program but must be in one of the following formats bmp ico gif or jpg To insert a graphic when in the body of a report click on the Insert Image button at the top of the page A Windows dialog box will appear allowing you to locate the file Once you select the file the following codes will be inserted which control the placement of the graphic on the page Code Description ImageStart 1 Zoom Filename lt string gt Denotes the start of the image specifications is the spec number Multiple image specifications can be included on one report with each set numbered consecutively Zoom percentage Zoom 100 prints the image actual size Zoom 200 prints the imag
20. To Link Skills to Standards 1 To create new standards click the Standards button STANDARDS E x MANAGE STANDARDS NAME General i s S DESCRIPTION Default Standard TEACHER NOTES ADD DELETE A OK X Cancel Help The General standard is the default and cannot be deleted or changed 2 Toadda new standard click Aad 3 Type a name and description for the new standard Enter additional information about the standard into the Teacher Notes text box optional 4 Click OK to save the standard and return to the Edit Skills window 5 Toassociate skills with a standard select the desired standard from the corresponding cell s drop down list Skills for Standard View Skils for Al Stands v Skill Name Standard Assessment Scale Date Instruction Time Spent Completed 1 Works Wellin Cooperative Groups General z Scale 2 2 Works Well Independently mm 3 3 Works Well with Peers General cale 4 4 Works Well with Adults General Scale 5 5 Works Independently General Scale 6 NOTE You can display only those skills associated with a particular standard using the Skills for Standards drop down list D 14 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick Skills Assessment Scale GradeQuick allows you to set up custom assessment scales to grade students specifically on course skills Your assessment scal
21. 0s 0s oo e n cid 9007 007 oo 9007 adda ddd qIwl0 L 26 26 06 P 3 S6 6 36 29 26 3 6 T6 06 63 36 3L LE T gogez os zozzlarss ll st L1 1d Ino Wd9 140 INC SNIO pur Th 10 puar 101 puar 101 3 qauar 101 T puar ABoTot ao a5 TI 101 3H so THATI 953 Tol gapos Tol 9 apog Toy amA Tol 3a Twaq 103 4Aborperg 102 3s qara dq SnI qe 103 3 Tiq3bT 1032 Arqauoa 103 T T d bug xcd 101 p buy x 103 Bug os To 103 Sug xi T ATI grano pieuBuuds Lerl XOg CE HH ajaa Beauly SIA R IA Me Jay gaz Il LOL oro 1990 05 oo 05 oo 00 os 05 oo 00 Lids did cede cde o0 00 oo o0 os Os oo os oo os 00 o0 Lids ddddsdscsssscoc osz ogi WwEsH 3d EUNE gA OT SIA HVL 196 46 l66 0T q uotz Is6 S6 X stuupa d 233 430o1j 126 96 YAI Is6 96 d saqbng l 6 a6 G rasaqaueg I36 96 jt urtig 0 I26 6 piruooiq Mal AN AIDH SIA T HVL lop T6 l l EN a rgan ld qisa o n lee jt TIT lpe 6 d qaronsoq lo ag qiu Is pi pu wiry 136 96 p puso wiry Ite 6 q uooiq 194 22 a 1aa T Ite 26 pruooiq Mal Git AIDH 96010 VW uepduieH SAu 49018 BEF BE TOOHO2S H9IH 33Id38 ogo Lyf pE 6 SN iT SIAE 3 d sT z231wouo IT 6TL purg 255 T7021 p qarg 3p ABoTotz0s git 7032 sar qq J 33 dy snIna T SET dy bug rin dw T0 AT Ssunoo PI iI
22. 1 5000 165 0000 160 0000 2 2500 PREV AGPA ND AGPA COURSE 550 01 Chorus Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 99 00 ALL YEAR WR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number of credit columns 1 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE It has a GPA factor of 33 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 1 5000 ADI QP 165 0000 SIMPLE QP 160 0000 WEIGHT 2 2500 PREY IGPA THIS GRADE 1 0000 H 9 0000 E 9 0000 H 0 0000 ND IGPA NEW f 2 5000 165 0000 gt 160 0000 z 2500 PREV AGPA ND GPA 7 COURSE l321 02 Pre Calc Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPR Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR OR CreditfAverage verride Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE Loo CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number of credit colums 1 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Number of credit column 1 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 2 5000 ADJ QP 165 0000 SIMPLE QP 160 0000 WEIGHT 2 2500 PREV IGPA THIS GRADE 1 60000 100 0000 100 0000 i 1 0000 NE IGPA NEW 2 5000 h ip5
23. C B 2 1 2 NOTE SITUATION 6 The End of the 2nd Marking Period e Semester Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section Follow the situation 5 instructions except that you must enter a final grade for the course unless you are having the program calculate it If you are going to update your students career credits and GPAs based on their midyear grades you must also enter a midyear grade for the course unless you are going to have the program calculate it Also enter any exam grades into the appropriate exam columns If the program is going to calculate the midyear average the exam grade must be placed into the midyear exam column If you do not give a course a grade in a credit column either manually or through Calculate Averages credits will NOT be awarded and the course will NOT count toward students GPAs See Chapter 5 for more information SITUATION 6 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Doe Jon 12 43 A B C B B 2 1 2 Report Cards Manual 3 11 Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms NOTE This sample entry assumes that the program is NOT going to calculat
24. Reports 6 7 36 and 37 have the COMPAR code in them These reports will incorporate the comment paragraph when printing one report card per course per student Reports 6 amp 7 print these report cards sorted by student while reports 36 and 37 print them sorted by teacher When the COMPAR code is encountered REPORT CARDS PLUS checks the RS4COM directory for a comment for the current course for the current student If it is found it is printed Otherwise the space is left blank Put this code near the beginning of a transcript report to force any CL codes to print XX characters of the course description if there is one instead of the course name Report Cards Manual 7 61 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Code Preliminaries Many of these codes use certain parameters defined as follows Code YR 00 to 14 7 62 Report Cards Manual Description YEAR If you see YR in a code enter a two digit number from 00 to 14 Year 00 is for year 0 or the current year Year 01 is for Year 1 or the first year in the archival files Use year 99 to be the year designated by Specification 3 The 99 code allows you to use the same report and change the year from the specification window For example the same report may be used to print a report card for the current year or any archival year by changing the Specification 3 setting YEAR
25. Skills grades are recorded using the Enter Grades or View Change Add Drop programs For instructions on importing skills grades from GradeQuick Interfacing with GradeQuick on page D 10 NOTE Also see Entering Grades Or Skills Manually on page 4 10 for another way to enter skills grades To access the View Skills window from the Enter Grades Manual Entry window 1 Call up the course and highlight a student name 2 Click the Skills button in the upper right corner of the window ERES EN xj Conroy Julian Michael EIN EDIT MODE Cade C3 Heading Description Progresses toward conducting an independent investigation 1T172 3 4 5 6 6 7z 8 9 159 un 12 13 CRS SC STDS 1st 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS EFT or 2 213 01 0008 2 213 01 0009 213 01 0010 3 To access the View Skills window from View Change Add Drop 1 Call up a student and highlight a course in his or her schedule 2 Click the Skills button in the lower right corner of the View Change Add Drop window The View Skills window displays each skill linked to the selected course in the students record The report card columns are listed across the top of the window in the same order as the windows for View Change Add Drop and Enter Grades Highlight any skill to view the code heading and full description at the top of
26. View Edit Courses amp Sections on page 2 3 for more information on these settings Choose Yes to view reports generated from the Enter Courses program in a Print Preview window Choose No to bypass Print Previewer and send the report directly to the printer Use the drop down list to decide your font size small medium or large The Inactive checkbox in the View Edit Courses and Sections determines whether or not a course is considered active or inactive This option lets you print only active inactive or both active and inactive courses Report Cards Manual 2 23 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Inspect Change Specifications Skills Specifications Specifications Enter Courses SPECIFICATIONS SKILLS Skills 1 SKILLS TO GQ FOLDER A 2 WHICH COURSES TO SEND JALL z 3 START COURSE TO SEND 1 4 END COURSE TO SEND 999 E Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Specification Description 1 Skills to GQ This specification indicates the path of the shared directory used to Folder export Grade Quick Skills files It is only for informational purposes A user with Supervisor rights must use the SOS interface options to set this path See the GradeQuick Administrator s Plus Interface Guide for more information 2 WHICH Use this specification to control which skills are sent to Grade Quick COURSES when you choose Option 8 Send Skills to GradeQuick in the Enter TO SEND Courses window You may choose to s
27. Y PrintColumnHeaderAndFont Y CourseCellEnd CommentCellStart 2 Print Y CellHeight Auto LeftBorder Width 0 RightBorder Width 0 TopBorderwidth 0 BottomBorder Width 0 TitleHorizontalAlign Left PrintBorder Y TitleBorder N TitleAndFont Comments PrintBodyAndFont Y CommentCellEnd ConceptsCellStart 3 Print Y CellHeight Auto Report Cards Manual D 43 Ch apter D Skills and Concepts Sample Skill based Report Card Template LeftBorderWidth 0 continued RightBorder Width 0 TopBorder Width 0 BottomBorder Width 0 TitleHorizontalAlign Left PrintBorder Y TitleBorder N TitleAndFont Concepts PrintBodyAndFont Y ConceptsCellEnd NarrativeCellStart 4 Print Y WidthIfRight 1 CellHeight Auto LeftBorder Width 0 RightBorder Width 0 TopBorder Width 0 BottomBorder Width 0 TitleHorizontalAlign Left PrintBorder Y TitleBorder N TitleAndFont Narratives PrintBodyAndFont Y NarrativeCellEnd AdvancedSpecEnd PrintAdvancedBox 1 WhichCourses Skills Left 2 Top 1 8 D 44 Report Cards Manual Index Numerics 1 Student Per Phone 7 37 A Adding Students to Courses amp Sections 4 8 Adjusted GPA Definition 1 9 Archive description 1 10 Archiving Grades how to 1 4 C 2 ASCII Export Export ASCII 7 37 Averages how are they calculated 5 8 B Before You Begin prerequisites 1 2 Blank Report Card Columns 5 16 Buttons in View Edi
28. 1 e a grade of 98 is worth 98 quality points If you are using a Split grading system note the following cautions Report Cards Plus will determine students honor roll status career GPA and class rank based on the quality points associated with the grades found in each student s transcript record These quality points are defined in the Grade Table as noted above The honor roll criteria for grade levels using one grading system 1 e 4 point scale should be defined separately from the honor roll criteria for grade levels using the other grading system i e 100 point scale Please refer to Chapter 8 for more information on defining your honor rolls f you use the New Files program to promote a student from a grade level using one grading system to a grade level using the other grading system and the student continues with any of his or her previous courses the grades for those courses should be adjusted to reflect the equivalent values on the new grading system For example an 8th grade student with a B in English 1A who is moved to grade 9 should have the grade changed to the numeric equivalent of a B on the grading system used for high school students When students are promoted into a grade level using a different grading system 1 e from middle school to high school use the Update GPAs amp Credits program to reset their GPAs and credits to zero see Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits on p
29. 2 H Jr Eng 031 02 Sonett Kar 112 B12345 ALL 1 10 00 Jr Eng 4 032 01 Sonett Kar 110 12345 0 00 30 12 Jr Eng 4 032 02 Sonett Kar 110 H12345 Jr Eng 4 032 03 Sonett Kar 107 D12345 0 00 30 13 Jr Eng 3 ere Faye 12345 Jr Eng 3 033 joz 3 0 00 3 14 Pir Eng 1 2 34 joi jl COURSE SECTION LIST AP Sr Eng 041 jol HH i 0 0 If you have already used SCHEDULING PLUS to schedule your students into their courses your course section list has already been built Otherwise each master course must be divided into sections a RC J on ch Cn CO CO CO ooo EEEE E E r tm Em rr tr Ld Es E rp w wf oos KR C in rex eile oe Pie ee 8 8 2 2 ca e co 30 1 ET PEITIExI Px ELE Sx Eng 3 043 joz Sx Eng 1 2 044 oi i Appl Math ERE MER Each section of a master course may meet at a different time SP Algebra 16 01 i in a different room and be taught by a different teacher SP Algebra 116 02 i Moreover if the master course is a semester or quarter course SP Algebra Sh Alqebrs the sections may meet different semesters or quarters For Algebra l example on this report course 001 Reading has been 0 00 Al ebra 1a divided into six sections The first three sections meet semes 1 00 0 00 i 1 00 0 00 Algebra 1 CO CO CO wje i f oo O gco mua ao 3 3 3 o a ter one S 1 while the last three sections meet se
30. 2 re Stern career in your school As with the honor roll report the class rank Lacy Kess 2 shee eae ea See report may be printed in many different ways The top report con __ 7 Helen Judi tains all 149 students in grade 12 listed in alphabetical order with 7 Mariana Ki their rank and career GPA printed next to their name 9 Million La 9 Shawn Jame Class rank reports may also be printed using quality points or 11 Jasmine By credits instead of the GPA as the ranking factor The bottom 11 Jannine Ed report is an example of a class rank report using credits as the ranking factor By entering 12 as the maximum number of cred its a report can be produced that in effect searches for and prints those grade 12 students with less than 12 career credits xviii STUDENT Keefe Mary 12001 REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL PAR GUAR Mr amp Mrs Ernest Keefe 38 East Brook Drive ADDRESS RR 2 Box 1441 Hampden MA 01036 CITY Springfield STATE MA ZIP 01036 PHONE 655 7350 SEX F_ DOB 0913 1985 Phone 4135663495 CODE 210 333 LBR VERR _ COURSE LEV TEACHER MID FNL CREDIT tE SEAR COURSE LEU TEACHER MID FNL CREDIT NE English PE Health 03 33 00 012 Col Fr Eng COL Elias 9 1 00 11 09 99 00 15 P E Zion D 3 1 600 10 00 01 022 Col 5o Eng COL Dowd 5 5 4 1 00 1 10 00 01 20 Health Whitney C 906 0 50 11 01 02 022 Jr Eng 4 COL PBrown J 32 31 1 00 1 11 01 02 635 Ph
31. 4 section list by staFf 5 section list by Time 6 section list by Course name 7 section list by Room 8 course List with skills 9 Inspect change specifications A Do not print a report E This window allows you to print master course and section lists Selecting an option generates the corresponding report which is automatically displayed as a print preview The following table describes each option Option 1 Master Course List by Course Number 2 Master Course List by Course Name 3 Section List by Course Section Number 4 Section List by Staff 5 Section List by Time 6 Section List by Course Name 7 Section List by Room 8 Course List with Skills Description Prints the master course list in numerical ascending order Prints the master course list in alphabetical ascending order Prints the courses and their sections together in numerical ascending order Prints the staff members in alphabetical ascending order as well as which classes they teach Print each section by both the day of the week and block each section meets Prints the section list in alphabetical ascending order Lists the room numbers in numerical ascending order along with the corresponding section Lists all courses that have skills associated with them course number in ascending order Report Cards Manual 3 35 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Skills Grade Verification Form Option Description 9
32. 9999 for none _ 8998 00 o wu were B MINIMUM WEIGHT 0 for none a 780 9 Do one ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE EE Specification Description TITLE OF The title of your report may be up to 25 characters long The title will be REPORT printed centered at the top of the page It will print in the same case of letters that you enter 8 68 Report Cards Manual Specification ALSO PRINT TO DISK USE CAREER OR LAST UPDATE DATA Statistical Reports Defining Class Rank Reports Description In order for students class rank to be printed on transcripts or report cards it must first be written to the disk If this specification is set to YES students rank will be written to the disk at the same time that is printed on paper It will match what is printed As an example if Karen Amato is 23rd out of 250 students on the report you are printing a 23 will be put in her record in her report cards file The LAST CALCULATED CLASS RANK is another figure stored in each students report cards record along with their career credits quality points weight last updated credits last updated quality points and last updated weight All of the students in a grade level who are not included in the current defined report will have their class ranks blanked Each time a report is also written to the disk the total number of students in that report is stored on the disk for that grade level In this example the c
33. Administrator s Plus PRINT ENTRY FORMS ROSTERS amp MORE 2 2 Scanner grade entry forms 3 grade Verification forms 4 section Rosters 5 grade Distribution report 6 Comment distribution report 7 eNrollment report by teacher 8 master course and section Lists 7 9 sKills grade verification forms A Teacher grade search report B End program e C C Li Li C C C L Before printing manual or scanner forms containing students names you must first enter students into their course sections in one of the following four ways With the Scheduling Plus module With a scanner using the Scan Schedules program in Report Cards Plus From course section rosters with the Enter Grades program From students schedules with the View Change Add Drop program NOTE NOTE Entry Forms The Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More Window It is not necessary to enter students into their sections before the end of the first marking period unless you are using a scanner or want to pre print entry forms containing students names Instead teachers may record students names ID numbers and first marking period grades on a blank Manual Grade Entry Form from where they may be subsequently entered into the program Grades may be entered into the program either manually using Manual Grade Entry Forms as a reference or with a scanner using special scanner forms The Entry Forms program can produce both types of forms T
34. Courses View Edit Courses amp Sections The NAME is maximum 10 characters long COURSE DESCRIPTION The course description is found and modified in the Enter Courses View Edit Courses amp Sections The description can be up to 35 characters long For example IND9999 25 will print a course description up to 25 characters long If there is no description entered for a course in View Edit Courses amp Sections the course name will print instead This code is often used on wide reports COURSE LEVEL If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the course level will will not print on a report STAFF NAME If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the staff will will not print on a report COLUMN TITLE XX 03 05 25 for which name to use For example T10501 6 indicates the five character name XX 05 for the first column CL 01 and to allocate it 6 spaces If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the title of the column will will not print on a report Code INU YR CR NUM INA YR CR NUM ISU YR CR NUM lCM YR CR X NUM ICR YR CR3HHEL ICS YR tH BE ICC YR CR CL3HBE ICB YR CL3HHE IPCHHBELTHE Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description COURSE NUMBER If
35. FINAL grade column the computer would not erroneously give the student double credits quality points and weight for the course The midyear grade of 95 is also worth 95 quality points Because this is a semester course its full weight is used Because there is no GPA factor the adjusted quality points is the same as the simple quality points The simple and adjusted quality points for this grade 47 50 was obtained by multiplying the weight of 50 times the simple and adjusted quality points of 95 The total simple and adjusted quality points of 70 represents the simple and adjusted quality points of 47 50 for this course added to the simple and adjusted quality points of 22 50 for the first course Similarly the total weight of 75 represents the weight of 50 for this course added to the weight 25 for the first course Course 4 4 COURSE 221 02 H Chemist Possible Credits 1 50 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 5 00 ALL YEAR COURSE R CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average FINAL GRADE 90 CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number of credit column 1 1 5000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 930 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point 35 0000 WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Number of credit columns 1 H 1 0000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 90 0000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POIN
36. For example type A121 1 and press ENTER to enter the student into section 1 of course 121 Use a section number of 0 to enter a student into a study hall For example type A121 0 to enter the student into study hall 121 Type the letter A followed by the course number to add a course request For example type A121 and press ENTER to enter course 121 as a course request Do not leave any spaces Editing the OVR Column The OVR override column allows you to specify that a student is taking a course for less than full credit and or less than full GPA value With the cursor in this column click the F6 LOOKUP key to display a list of valid entries For example if a student is auditing a course you might choose the code 1 to indicate that the student should receive no credit and that the course should not count towards the career GPA Code of 2 indicates that the student should receive HALF of the possible total credit and that the course should count for HALF of what it normally does toward the GPA calculation The OVR column is available in both the current 0 year and the minus year views Printing the Transcript View F9 PRINT Press or click F9 PRINT to obtain a printed copy of the Transcript View showing the student s courses sections and grades This option can be used in both the current 0 year and in the minus year views Report Cards Manual 6 5 Chapter 6 View Change Add Drop Viewing and Ed
37. How Are Averages Calculated The average will be calculated to six decimal places using weights in the same manner as numeric grades and then converted back to a letter grade based on the following table If the averaged quality points are greater than or equal to the listed value they will obtain the corresponding letter grade A 4 16 B 3 16 C 2 16 D 1 16 F 0 00 A 3 83 B 2 83 C 1 83 D 0 83 A 3 50 B 2 50 C 1 50 D 0 50 NOTE Although they are included in the default grade table the grades E E and E cannot be averaged Thus if one of these grades appears in a weighted column other than an EXAM column no average will be calculated This table ensures that students half way between two grades will always receive the higher grade For example an A and a B equally weighted would average to an A Similarly an A and a B would also average to an A NOTE It is not advisable to use this program to calculate averages if you are using a letter grading system Instead teachers should manually calculate the averages For example if a student has two A s and two B s the program does not know if these are high or low A s and B s Consequently because the program always rounds up the student will be given an A for an average However the teacher knows if these are high or low A s and B s and is ina better position to determine if the student
38. How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated The midyear grade of 95 is also worth 95 simple quality points Because the GPA factor is 0 the adjusted quality points equals the simple quality points Because this is a semester course its full weight is used 100 was entered for how semester courses should be weighted The quality points for this grade 47 50 was obtained by multiplying the weight of 50 times the quality points of 95 The total simple and adjusted quality points of 70 represents the quality points of 47 50 for this course added to the quality points of 22 50 for the first course Similarly the total weight of 75 represents the weight of 50 for this course added to the weight 25 for the first course Course 4 4 COURSE 2231 02 H Chemist Possible Credits 1 50 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 5 00 ALL YEAR COURSE CUR Credit Everage verride Column BLANK Full Credit Tull Average MIDYEAR GRADE 2 2733 CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits full course weight 50 0 7500 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 93 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point 98 0000 WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Full year course X weight 50 0 5000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 46 5000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 49 0000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0
39. PRINT NAME FIRST NAME FIRST YES PRINT NAME LAST NAME FIRST PRINT ID NUMBER If set to Yes 5 digit Administrator s Plus ID number will print on honor roll reports PRINT OPTIONAL FIELD 1 PRINT OPTIONAL FIELD 2 You can print data from up to 2 database fields on the honor roll report Choose the fields you wish to print from the list that pops up when you click on these specifications VIEW ON WINDOW BEFORE PRINTING If you answer Yes then you will be able to use the F8 DEL key to remove any student from the honor roll or F10 SORT to change its order Note that pressing F9 PRINT while in the view window will cause the report to print to the window You must then press F9 PRINT again in order to print it to paper If you set this option to No you will still be able to view the report on the window before printing but you will not be able to remove students from the honor roll or change the order in which students are printed If you plan to print the honor roll status on the Report Card and you have set the honor roll print preview option to Yes you MUST press F9 PRINT after the honor roll is generated in order to save it to disk You can then choose to escape the print preview window or press F9 PRINT again in order to print the honor roll list to paper If you have set the honor roll Report Cards Manual 8 11 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Honor Rolls print preview option to No the honor roll will au
40. Print a Letter for Each Course Within the Search Range Use this task to print a letter for each course within the search range This task generates a letter for all students who have met a grade search specification you have set The default letter is report 12 Letter Search Use it or design your own Since this is a warning letter you will want to search for low grades of course you could edit the body of the letter so that it becomes an honorific letter instead To perform a grade search you need to set Specification 2 of the INITIAL Specifications window to some sort of grade search The default setting is one per course Set SPECIFICATIONS 5 8 to the desired the marking period and grade s on which to search NOTE You can modify this report so that the letter lists each course in which the student received the selected grade by adding the code TABLE5 to the body of the report See View Edit Letters Reports on page 7 32 for information on how to edit reports Producing a Progress Report for Each Course with Grade This task produces a progress report for each course with a grade in the search range The default report is 13 Letter Search Com Use it or design your own Room is left for the teacher to hand enter a comment paragraph REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL Hampden MA 01036 413 566 3495 Brandy Cole 040 GRADE 11 HR 208 07 02 2002 COURSE JrEng4 COL COURSE NUMBER 032 01 TEACHER Sonettk Quarter 1 50
41. REPORT or REPORT CARD depending on how you have set the Specification G on Page 2 of the specifications window Underlines the PR words listed above Report Cards Manual 7 69 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer NOTE Header Codes Many of the Report Writer codes represent words that will print only if a specification is set to print a certain item For example the code LEV will print the word LEV in the header of a report card transcript or label to indicate a course s level If the specification PRINT LEVEL is set to No this heading will not be printed It allows you to turn on and off the option to print these items without ever having to go in and modify the report These codes contain an exclamation point indicating they are controlled by a specification Code ILEV ICRS ISC ICRDT ICRDTS TEACHER IAVERAGES IRANK ICR IWT IQP IGPA IHRSTAT IHRSTATUND IHRNAME IHON 7 10 Report Cards Manual Description Prints LEV in header if spec is on to print the LEVEL Prints CRS in header if spec is on to print the course number Prints SC in header if spec is on to print the course section Prints CRDT in header if spec is on to print credits Prints CRDTS in header of spec on to print credits Prints TEACHER if spec is set to print teacher s names Prints AVERAGES
42. Sharon u Ni wl a gt N 4 Grenda Missy Hagerman Amy SON oe oy a wl Ne Hall Jaime u NES ud e Harmon Carie 2 To enter skills grades click the cell corresponding to the desired skill student and marking period Select the desired grade from the drop down list This list is determined by the assessment scale linked to the skill 3 Click Gradebook Spreadsheet to save your changes 4 Exitthe Skills Assessment window Send Skills Grades to Administrator s Plus Use the following procedure to send skills grades to Administrator s Plus To Send Skills Grades to Administrator s Plus 1 From the Gradebook Spreadsheet click File gt Send gt Send to Administrator s Plus NOTE The actual text of the Send menu item Send to Administrator s Plus is determined by the Description that has been associated with the Rediker etp in SiteManager s Export Manager For more information refer to the Site Licence Notebook The default export path and file name appears 2 Verify that this information is correct and then click OK 3 In Administrator s Plus navigate to Report Cards Plus gt Enter Grades D 18 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick 4 From the Enter Grades menu click Import from GradeQuick ENTER GRADES C 41 enter grades Manually C 2 Sean grades c 3 import from Grade quick k C 4 End program 5 Use the Im
43. TO CHANGE Report Cards Manual 2 27 Chapter 2 Enter Courses View Edit Sections 2 Click the browse button next to the Get Room From Which Staff Field text box The Select Field to Batch Enter browse window appears Administrator s Plus 3 Select the field you want to use as the homeroom number and then click Select The room number field is replace with that in the select field View Edit Sections The View Edit Sections window makes it easy to make changes to your section list from one convenient location This new window displays your school s section list in a table that can be sorted by course number section number teacher meeting time course length room size and more Of course changes made to your section list through the View Edit Sections window are saved to course section list and can be viewed and or printed from the View Edit Courses amp Sections window To View and Edit Sections 1 Inthe Enter Courses window click View Edit Sections and then click Next 2 28 Report Cards Manual Enter Courses View Edit Sections The View Edit Sections window appears View Edit Sections Meeting Time Levin Faye E12345 SEM1 125 12 1 Whitney Evan F12345 SEM2 222 12 0 Levin Faye E12345 SEM 2 125 12 0 5 Dow Joe H12345 ALLYR 123 0 12 Dow Joe F12345 ALLYR 112 10 15 5 Elias Jane G12345 ALYR 112 12 12 Elias Jane H12345 ALL YR 112 11 Elias Jane C12345 ALL YR
44. TT 00 T leg e q wor dd 20 T0 TT o0 T l T6 qa HIIT To T quaza 20 TO TT 050 Iz6 disaqbog To g agog 20 T0 TT oso le 9 u sqwooj Tod v 32308 jJ 20 T0 TT 00 T leg e HIMPIOD To Ff THFA J 20 TO TT 00T IT 39 d usuastiq To T riqa 20 T0 TT 90 T lee eg ESTI Tod Sug xi 193 aie D Lida IN3 dit OL ATI gusanos au ug S8BI EL 60 Bod ji X3S 0562 558 96010 diz WA SLVLS playBuuds Let xog ct a ajaay aw SIA R 4A 2 LoozL fue 2422 REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL GRADE RANGE SEARCH 60 to 65 who received grades of from 60 to 65 in any of their courses for the first marking period Course and teacher names are included in the report In a letter grading system a grade RANGE search could be used to find any student receiving a D D or D To accomplish this enter a D as the start of the range and a D as the end of the range The bottom report is an EXACT grade search In this case it is a search for all students who received an I for incomplete during the first marking period ID NAME GRADE COLUMN COURSE TEACHER 12069 Allen Christine 60 1st 118 01 Algebra 1B Christnsn P 12038 Gyger Dred 52 1st 721 04 Wd Pro lab Tarr M 12018 Leary Mimi 61 1st 656 01 Sr Special Ray D 12037 Smith Derrick 65 1st 043 01 Sr Eng 3 Brown 12045 Staples Regina 55 1st 128 01 Algebra 2 O Brian G 65 1st 412 02 French 1 LaFleck D 12035 Toole Karen B 1st 432 01 French 3 Frank L 12085 Watson Cortn
45. The program may also be instructed to simultaneously enter this grade as the semester or final grade for the course EXAM GRADE When the forms are scanned you will be able to tell the program into which designated exam column s this grade should be placed FINAL GRADE When the forms are scanned this grade may be entered into any report card column that has been designated as a SEMESTER or FINAL grade COMMENT ONE amp COMMENT TWO When the forms are scanned these grades may be entered into either of the two COMMENT columns or into an ABSENCE column OPTIONAL GRADE This grade may be placed in any column Note that if you are using letter grades this grade may not be placed in a comment or absence column 3 20 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms SCANNING LETTER GRADES The parts of the form containing the period grade exam grade final grade and optional grade are identical They appear as follows PERIOD GRADE EXAM GRADE FINAL GRADE If the letters A F are bubbled then either a or may also be bubbled If two or more of the letters A F are bubbled or if both the and are bubbled an error will result f nothing on the top row is bubbled one of the items on the bottom row may be bubbled The bottom row consists of the grades P through X Filling in two or more bubbles on the bottom row results in an error The bott
46. UPDATE BASED ON WHICH COLUMN S Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits Description The default setting for this specification is ALL CREDIT COLUMNS which you will use at the end of the year when all grades are in When you click on this specification a drop down list will appear containing all of your report card columns To update during the school year based on grades in a particular column choose the column on which you wish to upgrade from the drop down list Note that if you choose any option other than ALL CREDIT COLUMNS you will need to set the percent to weight courses in Specifications 4 8 These options are described in detail below Updating based on all All Credit Columns All columns that have been designated in the Customize RC program as being worth credit will be inspected when awarding credits and updating GPAs See TYPE on page 1 7 If a course is an ALL YEAR course and there are two credit columns half of the total possible credit will be awarded for a passing grade in the first semester column and half the possible credit for a passing grade in the final grade column If only one final grade column is designated as a credit column and that column is blank the following will happen when updating quarter and semester courses The program will look for a grade in an earlier column designated as a SEMESTER column If it finds one it will look for any additional grades after it
47. for this course Press F2 SECTION to enter or edit sections If no previous sections have been entered for this course you will jump immediately to entering a new section The cursor will be in front of the default section number of 01 You may change it if you would like Press ENTER or tab to the Teacher column where you will enter the ID number of the teacher assigned to the current section The F6 LOOKUP option will be available if you do not know the teacher s ID number Keep pressing ENTER or tab to then enter a meeting time course length a room and the applicable grade levels for scheduling if you have chosen to limit sections to specific grade levels The Size column shows the current number of students in the section and the Rec column is the Record Number of the section from 1 to 2000 which helps you keep track of how many sections you have entered Each of the fields that you will enter for a section will be explained on the following pages To save a new section choose F10 ACCEPT To abandon the new section without saving press the ESC key Enter Courses Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List You can tell the program to automatically move the cursor to the next section after saving a section using the Enter Courses specifications see 2 AFTER ENTERING A SECTION ADD ANOTHER SECTION on page 2 22 If you set this specification to Yes after saving section number 01 the cursor will automatically move to the Sec
48. orientation and margins Page Setup 21x r Paper Size Letter m Source Upper Paper Tray Y r Orientation m Margins inches C Portrait Left os Right 0 5 Landscape Top 0 25 Bottom 0 25 1 OK Cancel Printer Option Description Size The drop down window lists possible paper types available for any report The default size is letter 81 2 x 11 Source Allows you to specify from what printer tray or manual feed source the paper will originate when printing Orientation Can be set to either portrait or landscape The initial default setting for all reports is portrait including wide report cards and transcripts 7 42 Report Cards Manual Margins Printer Report Cards Report Writer Page Setup The page margins are measured in inches You may change left right top and bottom margins by typing a value in the corresponding boxes Be aware that the smallest margin you can have is what your print driver will allow If you type 0 00 in the box and the smallest margin your print driver will accept is 166 that is what will appear here Clicking Printer brings you to the printer setup window Printer Setup Menu From the Printer Setup window you may change the default printer for the report This window also displays the printer s status type and network path Click Properties to change options that are specific to the type of printer you have such as paper sour
49. page 2 18 Report Cards Manual 2 3 Chapter 2 Enter Courses NOTE Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window Note that the bottom of the window now displays a help message about the field containing the cursor You can use the specification window to turn off these help messages See SPECIFICATION 2 2 PRINT HELP MESSAGES WHEN ENTERING COURSES on page 2 19 When you are finished entering the course information choose F10 ACCEPT to permanently save the course in your Master Course List To abort and abandon the new course press or click ESC While viewing a master course use F4 PREVIOUS or F5 NEXT to scan through your master courses Unused numbers will automatically be skipped Once entered a course may be called up to the window by entering its number typing a few letters of its name or by using the F6 LOOKUP option It can then be edited by using the F3 EDIT or arrow keys If you are archiving transcript information using the Transfer Credits amp GPA program we recommend that you do NOT change existing master course information If you need to change course information simply add a new course Using the Transfer Credits amp GPA option lets you store students courses and grades from previous school years When students courses are stored in the archival file only the master course number is recorded When transcripts are printed the Report Card Report Writer uses the inf
50. the final grade has been entered into both the midyear and final columns SITUATION 8 The End of the 3rd Marking Period ALL YEAR Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section Fill out the form in the same manner as you did for this course in the 1st marking period See situations 2 and 3 on page SITUATION 2 on page 3 9 SITUATION 8 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 A B C B C 2 1 2 3 12 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Scanner Grade Entry Forms SITUATION 9 The End of the 3rd Marking Period Quarter 3 Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section Enter the grades and optional comments in the usual manner However a final grade must be placed into the final grade column unless the program is going to calculate it Optionally a final exam grade may be placed into the final exam column SITUATION 9 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 A A 2 1 2 NOTE This sample entry assumes that the program is NOT going to calculate final averages SITUATION 10 The End of the 4th Marking Period ALL YEAR QUARTER 4
51. 0 Default Auto Default 0 2 Default 0 16 Default 0 16 Default 0 16 Default Y Default N Default Center Default Left Default Center Default Y Default 0 PrintWhichColumns 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Select Columns you wish to appear on the card PrintColumnHeaderEveryCourse N or Y Default N PrintCommentTextWhere Right1 Column Right2Column Below De fault Right1 Column PrintColumnAveragesAndFont Y or N TitleAndFont Text String PrintColumnHeaderAndFont Y or N PrintBodyAndFont Y or N PrintNarrativeAndFont N or Y CourseTableSpecEnd Default Y Default Course Table Default Y Default Y Default N PrintCourseTable WhichCourses See Below Left X Top Y Default is PrintCourseTable WhichCourses All Left 0 Top 0 5 WhichCourses can equal Skills Nonskills ALL ALLSkillsFirst A LLNonSkills First Course numbers separated by commas 121 221 50 60 Range of Courses 400 900 200 300 Course numbers and range together 121 400 500 600 Report Cards Manual D 27 Chapter D Skills and Concepts New Box Codes Advanced Specification Box This box is used to print courses with skills amp without skills within the same box on the report card More than one box can be used in designing where courses are to print AdvancedSpecBox Default 1 Defines the global specifications for the advanced box to include the course commen
52. 0000 i60 0000 2 2500 PREV AGPA ND GPA 8 58 Report Cards Manual 4 COURSE 221 02 H Chemist Possible Credits 1 50 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 5 00 ALL YEAR COURSE 93 3333 91 4286 93 3323 94 2657 COURSE 91 4286 71 1111 94 2657 73 3333 COURSE 71 1111 71 1111 72 2233 72 2333 COURSE 71 1111 0 0000 72 2233 61 5385 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Final Update Report Page 3 COURSE 422 01 Latin Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR Credit Everage verride Colwnn BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE P CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number of credit column 1 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE grade of P is never included in an average RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 3 5000 ADJ QP 265 0000 SIMPLE QP i60 0000 WEIGHT 2 2500 PREV IGPA 0 0000 THIS GRADE I 1 0000 9 0000 f 0 0000 0 0000 NE IGPA 0 0000 265 0000 H i60 0000 PREV ALPA 1 5385 1 5385 COURSE 700 01 Accting l Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 SEMESTER OUR CreditfAverage Override Colwnn BLANK Full Credit Full Average FINAL GRADE 5 CREDITS AWARDED Qtr or Sem course Possible credits SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT Qtr or Sem c
53. 0000 ADI QP 70 0000 SIMPLE QP 70 0000 WEIGHT 0 7500 PREY IGPA 93 3333 THIS GRADE 0 7500 49 0000 46 5000 0 5000 NE OGRA 32 2000 NEW 0 7500 113 0000 116 5000 1 2500 PREY AGPS 93 3333 NE ACPA 35 2000 This is a full year course which means that only 50 of its entered weight of 1 00 is used This means that the weight for this grade will be 50 As a result of this being an honors chemistry course the GPA factor has been entered as 5 00 Because this school chooses to ADD the GPA factor 5 points are added to the number grade quality point table value of 93 to produce 98 adjusted quality points for this course The weight for this grade of 50 is multiplied by the simple quality points of 93 to produce 46 50 simple quality points for this grade The weight of 50 is also multiplied by the adjusted quality points of 98 to produce 49 adjusted quality points for this course Note that because this course has a GPA factor the total simple quality points is now different from the total adjusted quality points This course is the first course worth credit in which the student has obtained a passing grade Because this is a full year course as with the weight only 5096 of the possible 1 50 credits are awarded Consequently the student has earned 75 credits for this grade Because this course has a GPA factor the simple quality points for this are less than the adjusted quality points 8 52 Report Cards Manual
54. 005 0 005 o o0s 0 005 0 005 005 20 005 216 04 SPE Sri i 1 i i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 575 14 294 28 574 28 574 0 00 0 00s o 004 0 005 0 004 00s 0 004 222 01 Biology 1 i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 225 16 675 58 234 16 675 0 005 0 005 o 004 0 005 0 005 005 0 005 Bolduc Kathy TOTALS 6 13 10 6 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Yom 26 MEDIAN 1 5 16 224 25 145 27 034 16 225 704 0 005 0 004 0 005 0 005 os 2 705 Bosworth Elise 016 01 SP Fr Eng 1 i i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 004 40 004 40 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 o o0s o 00s 0 005 004 0 004 016 02 SP Fr Eng 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 004 80 005 0 004 z0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 005 0 005 016 02 SP Fr Eng 0 4 i 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 004 57 145 28 574 0 005 14 294 0 005 o 004 0 005 0 004 00s 0 004 016 04 SP Fr Eng 1 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 12 505 50 005 27 505 0 004 0 005 o oo 0 005 0 004 0 004 005 0 005 720 01 Rotetaking 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 005 0 005 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 005 0 005 0 00s 005 0 005 Bosworth Elise TOTALS 2 l4 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Yom i6 MEDIAN 82 5 11 545 52 855 26 924 3 654 3 854 o 00s 0 004 0 005 0 004 00s 0 0045 Brom Dale 21 02 H Chemist 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 005 50 005 o 00 0 005 0 005 0 005 o 00s 0 005 0 005 31 01 H Chemist 15 5 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 i32 02 E Chemi EXE Grade Distribution Report By Teacher 22 01 E Chemi GRAND TOTALS of GRAND TOTALS
55. 1 4 inch In addition to giving you more control of the printing position of each line of a report this code will allow you to print more than one font per line as well as text upon text Used to insert text into the body of the report that will not be printed on the report or read by the report writer as code i e REM print courses 010 060 positioned to the right of an AdvancedSpecStart 1 code could be used to indicate that this part of the report will print courses 010 to 060 without affecting the actual printing of the report The REM code must appear BEFORE the text being ignored Whenever the Report Writer encounters an ENDPAGE code the report will move to the beginning of the next page ENDPAGE codes are commonly used in Search Headers so that each found search category starts on a new page Code GHSTART Start of Grand Header printed at the beginning of a report GHEND End of Grand Header LFOFF Line Feed Off LFON Line Feed On LPI X Lines Per Inch PGSTART Page Start PGEND Page End Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description All the lines between the GHSTART and GHEND codes make up a Grand Header The Grand Header prints at the top of the first page of a report only Codes that may be used in a Grand Header are listed below e L1 thru L17 School Information fields 1 thru 17 GR Student s Grade Level 2 digits
56. 112 10 Elias Jane E12345 ALL YR n 12 11 Bosworth Elise F12345 ALLYR 202 12 Bosworth Elise C12345 ALLYR 202 12 Bosworth Elise G12345 ALYR 202 12 Bosworth Elise D12345 ALL YR 202 12 Bachelder May B12345 ALLYR CHAL ENTER CRS or CRS SC D Highlight the row you want to edit and then click F3 Edit to begin editing See Adding to amp Editing the Master Course List on page 2 3 for information on each option Report Cards Manual 2 29 Chapter 2 Enter Courses View Edit Sections 2 30 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Introduction amp Main Menu 3 2 The Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More Window 3 2 Manual Grade Entry Forms 3 4 The Entry Form Print Window 3 7 Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms 3 8 SITUATION 1 5s d cbr c aeacanls 3 8 SITUATION 42 3 9 SITUATION 43 oa ceret 3 9 SITUATION 44 2 3 10 SITUATION 5 i22uica SE ERA 3 11 SITUATION 36 5 Lyr ean es 3 11 SI PUATIONAE tees dote Sd es amas 3 12 SITUATION 8 3 12 SITUATION 495 n Rx Rs 3 13 SITUATION 10 ol ater 3 13 Scanner Grade Entry Forms 3 13 Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms 3 19 SCANNING LETTER GRADES 3 21 SCANNING NUMBER GRADES 3 22 Grade Verification Forms 3 23 Section Rosters 3 24 Grade Distribution Report 3 27 Comment Dist
57. 4 Similarly if the top row is blank and the bottom row has the 4 bubbled the comment will also be 4 Report Cards Manual 3 21 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms f any comment is left totally blank a blank will replace whatever comment may already exist in the student s transcript For example assume that during the first marking period a student received comment 56 as his first comment If his first comment is blank for the second marking period his first comment will now be blank in the transcript For the four categories besides the comments scanning a blank will result in any prior grade in the transcript remaining SCANNING NUMBER GRADES The parts of the form containing the period grade exam grade and final grade are identical They look like PERIOD 9 C0 2 9 9 G 9 C 9 6 E GRADE 000605 9 9 9 O 9 9 0 GO EXAM 9000900 0 09 Q9 9 5 GRADE OO OOOOODOOO FINAL 00009000 9 O 9 9 6 O GRADE _ OO O OOOOOOOO To give the student a number grade bubble one digit from the top row and one digit from the bottom row Two or more digits bubbled in any row results in an error If only one row has a bubble that will become the student s grade For example if the top row has a 9 bubbled and the bottom row is blank the student s grade becomes a 9 Bubbling both zeroes 00 will result in a grade of 100 To give an actual gra
58. 5000 2 5000 PREV AGPA 0 0000 NE ACPA 30 0000 Report Cards Manual 8 59 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Ho w Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated The first line for each course shows the course number and the number of possible credits and weight that you have entered for that course It also shows the GPA factor that you have entered for the course and the course length quarter semester or full year This quarter length course is not worth any credits it has an entered weight of 25 and a GPA factor of 0 00 The second line displays the status of the OVR column The OVR column for this course is blank so it will count fully towards credits and GPA The third line shows the student s actual final grade in the course This course is a quarter course that met in the first quarter The student received a 90 in the course which was entered both into the FIRST MARKING PERIOD column as well as into the MIDYEAR GRADE column For this course the FINAL grade column is blank Because this is a quarter course no further credit columns are looked at Even if the grade of 90 had been also entered into the FINAL grade column the computer would not erroneously give the student double credits quality points and weight for the course The next six lines show the total credits awarded the simple quality points the adjusted quality points the weight the course simple quality points and the course adjusted quality These values are b
59. 6 00 f Tardes 600 60 REDIKER ACADEMY E PER DEVLP 00141 CRDT 1 00 1st 2nd 3rd 4th WORK HAB 002 01 CRDT 1 00 1st 2nd 3rd ah Naone C 101 102 103 104 Naone C 101 102 103 104 LANGUAGE ARTS PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT Writes Letters and Numbers B A E A Works Wellin Cooperative Groups A B B G WORK HABITS Works Well Independertly D D C Listening Skills B B B B Works Well with Peers A B B B Works Well with Adults D c c c WORK HABITS Works Independently A amp A A Comments Puts forth effort Puts forth effort Concepts WORK HAB 1st Watching for irrational behavior 1st Evaluate each individual s personal work habits 2nd Using constructive reasoning to resalve interraction related problems with peers 2nd Develop constructive work habit patterns 3rd Conducting an evaluation for entrance into 1st 3rd Evaluate progress for entrance into 1st grade Earth Sci 00401 CRDT 1 00 101 102 103 Alo L Science Communicates mathem aical ideas with numbers B B Questions predicts and makes observations words drawings Uses datato support conclusions Formulates and implements a variety of straegiesto Progresses toward conducting an independent solve problem s investigation Consistently and accurately computers measures and estimates Comments Comments Shows imprownent Shows improvment Interested in this subject Interested in this subject Concepts Earth Sci 1st Eart
60. 6 and 7 will be used to set the grade range for which to search Specification 8 sets the report card column to search Report Cards Manual 7 15 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications HONOR ROLL SEARCH 1 5 ON ANY HONOR ROLL SEARCH NOT ON ANY HONOR ROLL SEARCH ACTIVE LETTER REPORT YEAR R CARDS LABELS SEARCHES GRADE FOR EXACT GRADE SEARCH LOW GRADE FOR RANGE SEARCH HIGH GRADE FOR RANGE SEARCH 7 16 Report Cards Manual Use when printing honor roll letters or certificates for students who are on a particular honor roll list The honor roll must first be run with the Statistical Reports program and saved to disk press F9 PRINT after generating the honor roll See chapter 8 for more information on running honor rolls The honor roll must first be run with the Statistical Reports program and saved press F9 PRINT after generating the honor roll The active report will then be printed for those students on any honor roll For example a letter could be sent congratulating all of those students that made the honor roll The honor roll must first be run with the Statistical Reports program and saved to disk press F9 PRINT after generating the honor roll The active report will then be printed only for those students who were NOT on any honor roll Click the browse button to display the letters and reports come with Report Cards Plus All reports can be printed and searches conducted usin
61. 86 zpz 10 IqEH HON poog SsE oj Apusbijeyy sanguu oy y ueug oat 96 B8 6 t 86 6 86 66 Sel d YOM 1x39 illam BUND op OF psqenuougAJuDH um oug oot 6 06 6 z v6 r6 6 06 eo d Z LN3ANO2D V 1N3AWO2 W3H2V3L SLON2 NSSV TV HJ X3Nl4 WW Pig MOOI XIAN PUZ b SUD AT 1OOHOS H9SIH S35lQd038 00 c00 2L 0 L1 00 8 9 0L0 VIN 6 19quieAoN epunjges LPPL S9DUSIBJUOD JUdIEY 9J99M 3souJ3 39vssaMW SS3MWMaav 8 3 NVN NYIOSY AINN AIAN HOSIAQV 80L HH cy 3avdo LOOR xiii S e10 199172 sjuopnys paund ysnf savy A pesu poyepdn uooq oAtQ SVD UP SHP 199192 sjuopnjs MOY MOYS 0 LON U soqo sey oouos sty pres 1odo1 ayy Jo Wwoyoq 34 UG I JO pue oy pojuud Joded ure d uo pred podar opr o dums e si sn ST 8WONOH HOIH pre Wodey opi TEE ENIYIE TION WONOH TOOZ 92 0 Ob uvHA TID0Z 92 0 OL 0002 T0 60 or eg Ydd YATAY oo sz LHOTIA HZSHYO T6 dO T PANY OS Z022 ld ALITWAO W33WY2 O0 S2 sLliaguo N33WY2 ogg 96 r6 696 8 96 896 0 26 96 96 3 yepras CUIPYESING g uor ool z 66 66 26 96 ool 66 86 66 13 3 pexEAnour AHDH epo ooo LSF usod sagre doog aw UD papau og swau DE THEN ool 86 6 66 26 86 66 66 66 bt li t L O PU EIN Ass VOWS EPS Spapay spEK g ssubnH ogo 6 26 66 z6 96 86 6 r6 gee 9meg SSE poog SsE U AEH OL UNEA OAIN 0g L 86 66 86 66 26 6 26 86 bz li SYEH Honn poog sseE OL Apuabiayy sanguu g g ueug 0 ool 0 96 68 96 t 86 6 86 66 gel
62. 9 10 11 After selecting a course it appears similar to the following picture Enter Grades And Skills ROSTER CURRENT DER om slo ME 001 01 DET i Social Dev UZ Canavan Dawn kjri 28 FIRST MARKING PERIOD M USE RE DEFINED NUMBER KEYS I Editable COURSE SKILL Adams Camille Barans Julie PK 016 Bebe Mark PK 001 Bemis Bridgett PK 004 Carter Stefanie PK 020 Couchon Elizabeth PK 008 Couchon Emily PK 009 Forbes Mark PK Hall Lawrence PK 007 10 Hemingway Meadow 024 11 Inglis Mackenzie PK 12 Kelman Aurianna PK 022 13 Kornreich Norman 14 Kruse Tasha PK 026 N N N vV N Vt Wt V Vt 4 4 vV vV vJ Vv V V V SN N y v v V V orooro oaro Orom r oomo ooroo y 4 SKILL DESCRIPTION SHARES AND TAKES TURNS Narratives Alt C Place your cursor in the field you want to edit and then edit the field as desired Pressing ENTER moves your cursor to the right stopping only in those columns in which you denoted in the specification window that you want to enter grades Note that each field description appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window Select the checkbox labeled Use Re Defined Number Keys to enable the grade shortcuts you defined on page 2 of the specifications At any time press the F10 ACCEPT key to save all of your changes or press the ESC key to abort and lose all of your changes Report Cards Manual 4 15 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Scanning Grades S
63. ABSENCES C SEARCHIPRINT EFFORT D SEARCHIPRINT CITIZENSHIP uw uuu uuu u uui uuu uuu u uui Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE These options determine which report card columns to search and or print depending on the selected checkbox Selecting Search for an option means that report card column will be searched to see if it meets the search criteria set on page one of the specifications This report card column and its value prints on the report whether it meet the search criteria Selecting Print for an option prints that report card column and its value on the report whether or not the grade in those columns meet the search criteria 4 Setthe specifications for both pages as desired and then click Done The Entry Forms Print window appears 5 Select your range of teachers and then click Next The report generates See The Entry Form Print Window on page 3 7 for more information on this window 3 42 Report Cards Manual Enter Grades Introduction and Main Menu ee ee 4 2 Enter Grades Manually 4 3 Specification Window1 4 3 Specification Window 2 4 5 Adding Students To Courses Sections4 6 Removing Students From Courses Sections 4 7 Entering Or Editing Grades 4 7 Entering Or Editing Skills Grades 4 8 Scanning Grades 4 9 Troubleshooting Problems with Scanning Grades 2 5 6 Mi oan v ERIS 4 10 Import From GradeQuick
64. Add Drop in the minus years use this specification to create a report showing the distribution of grades in a past year The default setting is always the current year Report Cards Manual 3 29 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Grade Distribution Report Pressing Enter takes you to the next window shown below T Administrator s Plus GRADE DISTRIBUTION REPORTS PRINT WHICH TEACHERS 2 Range of teachers 3 individual Teachers 4 Set column limits for numeric grades 5 New report 6 Change specifications for this report 7 End program DD SET COLUMN LIMITS FOR NUMERIC GRADES If you are using numeric grades you may set the beginning and ending grades for up to six columns When you first use this option you will see the following table which will contain the default settings Set Column Limits For Numeric Grades E COLUMN 1 LOW GRADE 90 B COLUMN 1 HIGH GRADE 110 4 3 COLUMN 2 LOW GRADE ES D COLUMN 2 HIGH GRADE o 2i B COLUMN 3 LOW GRADE o 3 6 COLUMN 3 HIGH GRADE 7 COLUMN 4 LOW GRADE eo 4 Enter 999 as your low grade to not use 8 COLUMN 4 HIGH GRADE 9 the column 9 COLUMN 5 LOW GRADE lo i A COLUMN 5 HIGH GRADE 569 B COLUMN 6 LOW GRADE b99 C COLUMN 6 HIGH GRADE ooo ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE PRESS ENTER OR CLICK DONE WHEN FINISHED These default settings will produce a Grade Distribution Report If you never change them the default setting will aut
65. Averages 8 3 Honor Rolls 0000000 8 4 Print honor roll 1 5 8 4 Inspect Change Universal HR Specifications sa os ere 8 5 Inspect Change Honor Roll Print Specifications 8 10 Defining Honor Roll Reports 8 15 Individual Student Audit 8 19 How Honor Roll Averages Are Calculated 8 21 Grade Point Averages Menu 8 23 How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated 8 24 Update Un update GPA s amp Credits 8 27 Inspect Change Universal GPA Specifications 8 28 UPDATE GPA S amp CREDITS SPECIFICATIONS 4 etnies 8 30 How To Perform a Third Quarter Update 8 35 The Permanent Third Quarter Update 8 35 The Temporary Third Quarter Update 8 36 Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits 8 37 Un Update GPAs amp Credits 8 37 Reprint Last Update Summary Report 8 39 Reset Last Update Data Only to Zero 8 39 Reset Credits GPAs Last Update Data To Z6 0 ooi bean How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated General Updating Rules General Rules For Calculating Credits General Rules For Calculating Quality Points amp Weight BRIEF EXAMPLE OF A COMPLETE UPDATING d deg aiti Noe NE es DETAILED EXAMPLE OF A MIDYEAR UPDATING Midyear Update Report Page 1 Midyear Update Report Page 2
66. Course COURSE 003 Math Skill Code MS21 Heading Math Description Formulates and implements a variety of strategies to solve problems Available Skills 182 Selected Skills 3 Accurate Observations Communicates mathematical ideas wit Actively Participates in Activities Consistently and accurately compute Addition Computation Formulates and implements a variety Addition Facts Memorization Addition with Trading Behaves in Class in Class in Class Behavior in Class Behavior in Class Behavior in Class Capitalization Punctuation Gramma Classifies Objects and Events Collects and Uses Information for D ne Ee EE me eS ee ee 3 Highlight the desired skill in the Available Skills window on the left and then click the right arrow button The skill moves to the Selected Skills window on the right To deselect a skill highlight it in the Selected Skills window on the right and then click the left arrow button You can make multiple selections all at once by holding down the Ctrl or Shift keys while clicking a selection To highlight a block of skills hold down the Shift key and click the first and last skill to highlight To highlight multiple skills not listed in order hold down the Ctrl key and click once on each skill 4 To copy all skills from one course to another after linking the desired skills to the selected course click the Copy Skills button A lookup window of all master courses appears When you select a course
67. Definitions PrintLineAfter X Courses Course Table To print lines between a specified number of courses set in the command to a number If you choose not to print lines set to 0 Print NarrativeAndFont Y or N Course Table If set to Y it prints the narratives with the font of the keyword iPrintNarrativeAndFonti PrintSkillHeaderAndFont Y or N Advanced Specifications Course The skill header is printed with the font of this keyword N suppresses printing De fault is Black Arial 8 point size PrintSkillsAndFont Y or N Advanced Specifications Course The Skills description and grades are printed with the font of this keyword iN sup presses printing Default is black Arial 8 point size PrintTeacherAndFont Y or N Advance The Teacher name if flagged to print is printed with the font of this keyword N sup presses printing PrintVerticalLines Y or N If you choose Y for iYesi this specification allows you to draw vertical lines between the columns Choose N for iNoi if no lines are to print Course Table PrintWhichColumns Course Table Advanced Specifications Course Any or all of the 13 marking periods separated by commas may entered in the desired order When column numbers are specified this setting overrides the Report Card Specification settings If you have a request to print skills courses using columns 1 3 5 and academic courses where you need to show 1 2 3 4 5 using two boxes
68. Edit Courses amp Sections See Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window on page 2 4 NOTE Note that although P W WP I X and N are set in the grade table not to count in calculating the weight and quality points if you assign them a quality point value and set the Average column to Y in the grade table they will count in weight and quality point calculations 8 42 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Each grade is then given a certain number of quality points based on either the letter grade or number grade quality point tables These tables may be customized through the Customize RC program If you do not touch these tables the default quality points for number grades is the value of the grade itself In other words a grade of 95 will be awarded 95 quality points The default quality points for letter grades are A 4 33 B 3 33 C 2 33 D 1 33 F 0 00 A 4 00 B 3 00 C 2 00 D 1 00 F 0 00 A 3 67 B 2 67 C 1 67 D 0 67 F 0 00 A grade of WF is always awarded 0 quality points For schools using number grades any grade below the minimum grade as well as grades of F and WF will be awarded the number of quality points that would be awarded for the minimum grade The Customize RC program is used to enter a minimum grade The original default is 50 For example if a student receives a 35 using the default number grade qual
69. FACTOR USE COURSES WITH A GPA FACTOR OF 99 MINIMUM LETTER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR USE WEIGHT PRO RATED DO NOT USE NO c MINIMUM NUMBER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR 75 MAJOR COURSES HAVE PRIORITY O TO 3 INCLUDE WHICH COURSES IN AVERAGES ALL COURSES INCLUDE WHICH COURSES FOR OTHER CHECKS ALL COURSES ADD OR MULTIPLY GPA FACTOR ADD use CUST RC prog to change SPECIFICATIONS FOR HCNOR ROLL 1 HIGH HONORS MARKING PERIOD FIRST MARKING PERIOD INCLUDE STUDENTS CN A PREVIOUS HONOR ROLL YES AVERAGE LOWER LIMIT O for no limit 95 00 AVERAGE UPPER LIMIT 999 for no limit 999 00 COMMENT CODE LOWER LIMIT O for no limit 0 00 COMMENT CODE UPPER LIMIT 999 for no limit 999 00 OMIT IF 1 MAJOR GRADE LESS THAN 90 OMIT IF Z MAJOR GRADES LESS THAN OMIT IF 1 MINOR GRADE LESS THAN OMIT IF 2 MINOR GRADES LESS THAN OMIT FROM HCNOR ROLL IF 1 OR MORE INCOMPLETES NO MINIMUM OF GRADES USED FOR THE AVERAGE 5 MINIMUM OF GRADES USED FOR THE AVERAGE 5 COURSE 042 01 Sr Eng Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 Priority 0 MAJOR ALL YEAR COURSE GRADE 89 OUR Credit Average Override Column QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 69 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS equals quality point because you have chosen not to use the GPA factor 89 0000 WEIGHT PRO RATING An all year course s weight is divided by the of marking period 4 0 2500 WEIGHT times ADJUSTED QUALIT
70. Grade Verification Forms choose option 3 from the Entry Forms window on page 3 2 and then refer to section 3B which explains how to print manual grade entry forms Specifications Grade Verification Forms SPECIFICATIONS GRADE VERIFICATION FORMS 1 INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN ALL SECTIONS 2 PRINT WHICH MARKING PERIOD AT TOP FIRST MARKING PERIOD 3 PRINT FORMS WITHOUT ANY STUDENTS C Yes No 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN 1 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 999 6 START GRADE Grade 9 7 END GRADE Grade 12 8 LINE SPACING Fit To Page 9 PRINT TEXT OF CANNED COMMENTS No A PRINT NARRATIVES No B PRINT PREVIEW Y N No le Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Note that you can set Specification 9 PRINT TEXT OF CANNED COMMENTS to Yes to print canned comments and set Specification A PRINT NARRATIVES to Yes to print narrative comments Report Cards Manual 3 23 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Section Rosters When you finish entering specifications you will see the following window ra Administrator s Plus GRADE VERIFICATION FORMS PRINT WHICH SECTIONS 1 All sections 2 Range of teachers 3 individual Teachers 4 Individual sections 5 Blank form 6 New report 7 Change specifications for this report 8 End program Gi E a m P x f DO These options allow you to print Grade Verification forms for individual teachers o
71. HonorRollBoxEnd Indicates the start and end of the parameters for the Honor Roll box ImageLeft Image Determines the Left position of the image if EveryPage Y If EveryPage N the ImageLeft parameter is ignored ImageTop Image Determines the Top position of the image if EveryPage Y This parameter is ig nored if EveryPage N ImageStart Image ImageEnd Image Denotes the start and end of the image specification Since multiple images can be de fined in a report the symbol in the ImageStart code is replaced by the image num ber The PrintImage command searches for this number and tells the program where the image will print IncludeSkills Y or N Advanced Specifications Course If you wish the skills to print this parameter is set to Y for Yes Y is the default There may be a case where the course has skills but only certain grade levels use them Setting this to N removes them from the report card Left Draw Box Left indicates distance in inches from the left hand margin Level Width Course Table Sets the width of the level column in inches Default is 35 MaxBoxDown Advanced Specifications Gener al This setting determines the number of courses to print in a column If a high value is set the program fits the maximum number of boxes possible depending on page height Default is Auto MiddleGap Honor Roll Sets the height of the gap between th
72. ID number For example while in grade 12 you may call up student 50 in grade 9 by typing 09050 and pressing ENTER Once in grade 9 you can type a name to search for the first student in grade 9 matching the ID number you entered If you choose to sort By School and if you have a slow computer upon selecting a grade level from the main window there will be a noticeable delay while the key file for the entire school is read This delay will be barely noticeable to those of you with fast computers Consequently if you have a slow computer you may want to use the By Grade option You will also want to use this option if you are entering grades by grade level NOTE By default students appear alphabetically in the F6 LOOKUP window To view students in the LOOKUP listed by ID number click on the column heading ID in the lookup window To return to an alphabetical view click on the column heading NAME 6 4 Report Cards Manual Page 2 8 EXPORT GRADE QUICK ROSTERS ON EXIT 9 GRADE QUICK EXPORT PATH A YEAR FOR GQ EXPORT Specification 8 determines whether rosters will automatically export to Grade Quick when a change is made to the roster such as adding a course section which you can do in the Transcript View using the Alternate Add method described below Specifications 9 and 9 A also relate to exporting rosters to GradeQuick View Change Add Drop Viewing and Editing Grades NEXT PREV ORDER Set this specification
73. IF 1 MINOR GRADE LESS THAN B OMITIF2MINORGRADESLESSTHAN B OMIT FROM HONOR ROLL IF 1 OR MORE INCOMPLETES D MINIMUM OF GRADES USED FOR THE AVERAGE b 3 ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Specification Description 1 TITLE OF THIS The title of your report may be up to 25 characters long The title will HONOR ROLL be printed centered at the top of the page It will be printed in the same case of letters that you enter The title of the report may also be optionally printed on the report card for each student who made that honor roll For example if the title of an honor roll is High Honors a student who is on the honor roll report could have the following printed in the lower right corner of his report card 2 MARKING Enter the report card column whose grades will be used to produce PERIOD the honor roll Report Cards Manual 8 15 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Defining Honor Roll Reports Specification 3 INCLUDE STUDENTS ALREADY ON ANY HONOR ROLL 4 AVERAGE LOWER LIMIT 0 FOR NO LOWER LIMIT 8 16 Report Cards Manual Description This setting should always be Yes for the highest honor roll and No for all subsequent honor rolls When students make an honor roll that honor roll number is stored in their report card file This is called the student s HONOR ROLL STATUS For each grade level always print the highest honor roll first and make sure that this specification is set to Yes This
74. Inspect Change Opens the Master Course and Section Lists Specifications specifications window See Specifications for the Master Course And Section Lists on page 3 33 for more information A Do Not Print a Report Closes this window and returns you to the Print Entry Forms Rosters and More window See The Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More Window on page 3 2 Skills Grade Verification Form This option lets you print skills grade verification forms for specific courses and section To Print Grade Verification Forms 1 Inthe Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More window click Skills Grade Verification from The Specifications Skills Grade Verification Forms window appears Specifications Skills Grade Verification Forms SPECIFICATIONS SKILLS GRADE VERIFICATION FORMS Page1 1 INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN ALL SECTIONS 2 MARKING PERIOD FOR SKILLS FIRST MARKING PERIOD 3 PRINT FORMS WITHOUT ANY STUDENTS C Yes No 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN fi 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 99 6 START GRADE GRADE 3 7 END GRADE GRADE 12 8 LINE SPACING Single Spacing Yes Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 2 Set the specifications as desired The specifications are described in the following table 3 36 Report Cards Manual Specification 1 INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN 2 MARKING PERIOD FOR SKILLS 3 PRINT FORMS WITHOUT ANY
75. Letters Reports you will be prompted to select the report you would like to edit from the window pictured below Note that this is the same window you see when you click on Specification 2 ACTIVE LETTER REPORT on page 1 of specifications except that you can copy or delete a report using the options in the lower right of the window If you want to create a new report from scratch select a report designated UNUSED Using the View Edit Letters Reports Toolbar When you open the body of a report the toolbar will be replaced by the Report Writer toolbar Each toolbar window is described on the following pages Li E File Edit Search Options Window plela Sle amp Bs e dA ol a z u Arial e B eue Report Key Words ALT X to select Data Base Field Names ALT Z to select Data Base Report Cards MEET Re E ISP GU rait j EMailReportWizard Insert Image Quic REM LETTER LANDSCAPE L 0 25 R 0 25 T 0 25 B 0 25 7 32 Report Cards Manual File Menu administrator s Plus File Edit Search Options Window Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports New Ctrl N Open Ctri o Close Report Key Words ALT x to select Save Ctri S Save As Print Ctrl P Delete Report Exit From the File menu you can Open Close Save and Delete reports You also have the ability to print the body of the report you are editing Note that the Windows shortcut
76. MEETING choose Option 1 to print forms only for sections meeting during the 1st WHEN marking period This will include sections meeting during the 1st quarter 1st semester and all year courses Courses meeting during the 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter or 2nd semester will be excluded The next window includes the option to further limit forms to staff members whose ID s fall within a designated range PRINT After choosing the sections for which you want forms printed you may WHICH select from a drop down list which marking period you want printed at MARKING the top of the form PERIOD AT TOP This drop down list will display the 25 character names for each report card column that you have defined as a marking period in the Customize Report Card Columns window This specification determines ONLY what the top of the form will say The previous specification determines for which sections forms will be printed Specification 3 PRINT FORMS WITHOUT ANY STUDENTS 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 6 Start Grade 7 End Grade Entry Forms Manual Grade Entry Forms Description You can set this specification to No in order to print forms for only those sections that have students enrolled in them Forms may be printed for courses within a numeric range For example forms for courses from 200 to 299 will be printed if specification 4 is set to 200 and speci
77. OR SEMESTER 2 Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section Enter the grades and optional comments in the usual manner However enter a final grade unless the program is going to calculate it Optionally a final exam grade may be entered SITUATION 10 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 A B C B C B B A 2 1 2 NOTE This sample entry shows an ALL YEAR course and assumes that the program is NOT going to calculate final averages Scanner Grade Entry Forms Administrator s Plus supports the entry of grades with the NCS Opscan scanner which is sold by Rediker Software Pages ix x of the appendix contain samples of the forms which must be used with the scanner With dot matrix printers these forms are continuous feed so that this program may be used to print students names on them With laser printers you simply need to place the laser forms in the paper tray Note that you can use old dot matrix forms with a laser printer by tearing off the tractor feed guides at the perforations Report Cards Manual 3 13 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Scanner Grade Entry Forms In order to actually use the scanner to enter grades the SCANNER INTERFACE SOFTWARE module must be installed on the computer which you will use to scan grades This software can be purchased from Rediker Software Call 1 800 213 9860 for more informat
78. SGPA 76 8235 NE i 5 5000 340 0000 325 0000 4 2500 PRE AGPA 61 5385 HE ACPA 0 0000 This is a second semester course which is why the midyear grade is a blank Consequently the student is awarded the full possible credit and weight for the passing grade of 75 The awarded weight of 1 is multiplied times the 75 simple and adjusted quality points to produce 75 simple and adjusted quality points for this grade Bottom of the Report STUDENT GRAND TOTALS PREVIOUS CREDITS 12 0000 ADI QP 1067 5000 SIMPLE QP 1067 5000 WEIGHT l 0000 PREV IGPA 6 9583 THIS UPDATE 5 5000 340 0000 335 0000 4 2500 NB OSGPA 56 2077 NES E 17 5000 1407 5000 l1402 5000 16 2500 PREV ACPA 6 9583 NE ACPA 5 5154 The student earned 5 50 credits 335 00 simple quality points 340 00 adjusted quality points and a weight of 4 25 These CURRENT values are added to the PREVIOUS career values to produce the NEW career values These NEW career values are then stored on the disk as the student s career credits simple quality points adjusted quality points and weight Note that due to this updating the student s simple GPA changed from 88 96 to 86 31 while the adjusted GPA changed from 88 96 to 86 62 The GPA is calculated by dividing the appropriate quality points by the weight 8 64 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How to Obtain Class Rank Reports How to Obtain Class Rank Reports The previous three sections pr
79. This code is used to identify the grade level when a course in the transcript was taken If the course identified by CR does not exist no grade level will be printed On the report the code prints 12 01 02 12 is the grade level of the quadrant that will show the 12 grade classes that this student took followed by the year in which he took those classes see transcript year below If a student only has 10 courses the grade level will not be printed for courses 11 through 16 TRANSCRIPT YEAR Prints the year in which a course is taken Year 0 will be current year s data directory such as 01 02 If printing from a past directory that has already been archived you may change this value to force the correct year to be printed Use 80 year 0 if printing year 81 year 1 and so on If the course identified by CR does not exist no year will be printed DEPARTMENT NAME Name of department X 0 to 9 RANK rank in class Use the Statistical Reports program to calculate the rank to disk before printing it OUT OF For rank in class If a student is ranked 24 out of 82 students this prints the 82 DEPARTMENT CREDITS Prints credits for department 0 to 9 or a T for the total of all departments Used at the bottom of transcripts Only prints if the credit specification is set to print bottom totals Department credits are only counted for courses in years that are in the transcript year interval which is set on Pag
80. Use the special YR codes of 80 to 94 to indicate how many years from 0 to 14 after the START YEAR FOR TRANSCRIPTS specification Assume that you want to print transcripts for years 3 to 0 with year 3 being in the upper left quadrant You would enter the year as 80 to print in the upper left quadrant of a transcript for the year 0 Enter the year as 81 to print in the lower left quadrant of a transcript for the year 1 Enter 82 to print in the upper right quadrant for year 2 and enter 83 to print in the lower right quadrant to print year 3 If the code is outside of the transcript start and stop years then nothing will be printed For example if you want years 3 and 2 to be on the transcript you may use the same report with nothing printed in quadrants designated by codes 82 to 94 Code 80 prints year 3 and code 81 prints year 2 Any other code is outside of the specification settings for the transcript start and stop years Code CR 01 to 16 CL 01 to 13 NUM HHH Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description COURSE Enter a two digit number from 01 to 16 to indicate which course s to print from course 1 to 16 Courses are always printed in order by master course number The numbers range from 001 to 999 If you are in a course loop defined by the CRSSTART and CRSEND codes using a course number of 99 indicates y
81. Wide Transcript By Year By Viewing and Editing Report Cards Department see cer aar tm OR e ER 7 5 Reports Letters Window 7 32 Printing a Narrow Transcript By Year 7 5 Using the View Edit Letters Printing a Narrow Transcript Reports Toolbar 7 32 By Department L 7 6 File Menu ou ek hae Se dee oa EYES 7 33 Printing a Permanent Label 7 6 Edit Menu to s zc toes or ed te aA 7 34 Printing One Separate Report Card Search Menus bias tase Rees 7 35 Per COlI SO s looo e rg ER e Ea 7 6 Options Menu lllsssesss 7 36 Printing an Honor Roll Certificate 7 7 Window Menu sse 7 38 Exporting the Honor Roll to an ASCII File Function KeyS CoA nta 7 38 Named HROLL ASC 7 7 Page Selup cecs eiar e oA tees 7 42 Generating a Form Letter Congratulations Page Layout Menu seeds 7 42 on Making the Honor Roll 7 8 Printer Setup Menu 7 43 Print a Letter for Each Course Within the Printer Properties 7 44 Search Range s ex eher ite the ko 7 9 Report Card Codes 7 45 Producing a Progress Report for Each Table Codes For Skills and Non Course with Grade a seed es 7 9 Skills Based Report Cards 7 45 Search for List of Students with Exact Course Table BOX 14 o n nunnana 7 45 Co rse Grade es wo rote Rips 7 10 Advanced Specification Box for Printing a List of Students with Grades ski
82. a Report on page 7 57 or export the report to an ascii file for importing into another program This report generates a comma delimited ASCII file composed of the names of the students on an honor roll which honor roll they made and the marking period on which they made the honor roll You can import the file into a graphics program See Inserting a Graphic into a Report on page 7 57 and design your own honor roll certificate Once again you need to set Specification 42 of the INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS window to search on one or any honor roll This report prints a letter for all students who have made an honor roll As with the above two reports you must set Specification 2 of the INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS window to search on one or any honor roll Report Cards Manual 7 85 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer The Pre defined Reports Report Name Letter Search Letter Search Com Search List Exact Search List Range RC Multi comment pg New Progress RC Pre Print LASER RC Nar Plain LASER RC Wide Plain LASER 20 7 86 Report Cards Manual Description This report generates a letter for all students who have met a grade search specification you have set Since this is a warning letter you will want to search for low grades of course you could edit the body of the letter so that it becomes an honorific letter instead To perform a grade search you need to set Specification 42 of the INITIAL S
83. any word processor The Path and Name of the file is C R54 SFW RcScan Log Low jDo columns you want the is will be displayed Click ciated with this Scan Form Report Card Columns 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 8 10 11 12 13 1st 2nd S1EX STGRD 3rd 4th S2bX JOB S2GRD ABS COM1 COM2 Click Yes to view the log or click No and open the file later in a program like Microsoft Word NOTE Scanning any form more than once will not cause any harm The grades on the form will simply replace the same grades in the transcript Consequently if the form has not been changed the transcript will not be changed Report Cards Manual 4 19 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Import From GradeQuick Import From GradeQuick This option is used to bring grades into Report Cards Plus from GradeQuick Gradebook Software See the GradeQuick Administrator s Plus Interface manual for detailed information on how to import grades 4 20 Report Cards Manual Calculate Averages Introduction i225 cet ter cant nae oe ea 5 2 Specifications Calculate Averages 5 3 Entering the Weight For Each Column 5 5 Calculating Averages For Which Golumris osi 5 7 How Are Averages Calculated 5 8 NUMBER GRADES 5 9 LETTER GRADES 4 ei uper xs 5 9 Examples of Midyear Average Calculations 5 11 Examples of Final Average Calculations 5 12 Reading the Lo
84. aware that modifications you make to these figures in the current year will affect the student s career credits and GPA Entering and Editing Information for Previous Minus Years Whether in the Schedule or Transcript view the PLUS and MINUS keys will change the year you are viewing provided you have set up the program to archive grades in Database Plus New Files Specifications See the DATABASE PLUS manual for information on how to do this For example while viewing YEAR 0 pressing the MINUS key will display YEAR 1 which contains the previous year s transcript Pressing the MINUS key again will bring up a view of the student s transcript from two years ago and so on For example a grade 12 student YEAR 1 is the 11th grade transcript and YEAR 2 is the 10th grade transcript and so on To return to the current year s view simply press the PLUS key Alternatively you can click on the Year and Year keys at the bottom of the window Entering and Editing Grades in the Minus Years When in the Minus year view you can enter or edit grades the same way you can in the current 0 year view Remember that in order to view a student s courses and grades in the minus year you must run the Transfer Credits amp GPA option to archive previous years grades See the Viewing and Editing Grades on page 6 3 for detailed information on how to perform this function NOTE Note that after entering or changing a student s g
85. be ended There are three types of errors that may occur e Scanner Errors Student Number Error Resolving Error Scanner Error If there is a scanner error the scanner stops and the scanner s display flashes ERROR The computer does not know that there has been an error because it is patiently waiting for data to arrive from the scanner The most common scanner errors are caused by forms being entered backwards paper jams or from a dirty read head If a scanner error occurs fix the problem reset the forms in the automatic feeder if necessary and press the START button on the scanner to resume the scanning process Report Cards Manual B 3 Chapter B Scan Students Schedules The Actual Scanning Of The Request Forms B 4 Report Cards Manual STUDENT NUMBER ERROR After a form has been successfully scanned the scanner sends the data from that form to the computer If you have inserted the wrong type of form if the data received by the computer is garbled or if the computer can t read the student number information from the form the computer will buzz and inform you of the problem You will be instructed to remove the last scan form that passed through the scanner from the collection bin and then press the G key on the computer to continue the scanning process If the sheet that caused the problem is a proper form it may later be re scanned with the next batch of forms A STUDENT NUMBER error may result from the printer ribbon
86. be explained in detail Report Cards Manual 8 49 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated TOP OF THE REPORT UPDATING WILL BE BASED CN CNE COLUMN MIDYEAR GRADE PERCENT OF ENTERED WEIGHTS USED FULL YEAR COURSES 50 00 SEMESTER 1 COURSES 100 005 SEMESTER 2 COURSES 100 005 QUARTER COURSES 100 004 UPDATE BASED ON WHICH YEARS CURRENT YEAR YEAR O THIRD QUARTER UPDATE NO UNIVERSAL UPDATING SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM LETTER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR D MINIMUM NUMBER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR 60 REGENTS OPTION NO ADD OR MULTIPLY GPA FACTOR ADD The top of the report shows that the update was performed on the MIDYEAR grade column Full year courses were given 50 of their entered weight while semester and quarter courses were given 100 of their entered weights This weighing system will mean that the first half of full year courses in the senior year will count half as much as full year courses in other years In other words they will count for 1 8th of the student s career GPA If full year courses had been weighted 100 they would have counted 1 4 of the student s career GPA This based on certain assumptions such as the same number of full year courses Course 1 1 COURSE 050 01 Ad Eng Use Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 25 GPA Factor 0 00 QUARTER 1 COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYEAR GRADE g CREDITS A
87. by teacher In other words all of the report cards or progress reports for one teacher will be printed followed by those for the next teacher You may also use report 36 which will give you the same report as that produced by Task 8 Print One Separate Report Card Per Course See Printing One Separate Report Card Per Course on page 7 6 Printing Mailing Labels for a Course The default report for this task is 33 which prints a mailing label with the parent s name and address information These labels can be used to send report cards or transcripts to parents You can copy and modify the report to pull the desired address information from the database If you choose to print the report by section you can obtain mailing labels for only those students taking a particular course or range of courses To print labels you must use the SECTIONS option from the main window 7 12 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Specifications After you choose the task you wish to perform you will see the initial specification window You can accept the default specifications for the task you have chosen or change them as needed Note the following To perform a different task choose Specification 1 and you will be returned to the task list Specifications are user specific so that the next time you choose this task they will appear as the defaults If after experimenting with some of the specifications you wan
88. can choose to generate either a Summary or a Detailed Update Report The report will print to the window and you can then choose to escape from the preview or press F9 PRINT to print the report to paper The Detailed Update Report is very useful when you want to analyze one student s GPA and credit calculation on a course by course basis When updating all students in one or more grade levels it is generally recommended that you keep this specification set to Summary Report especially if you intend to print a hard copy of the report as the detailed report tends to be quite lengthy The percents entered into specifications 4 7 are used only if specification 1 has been set to update based on one designated column When updating based on ALL CREDIT COLUMNS you can ignore these specifications Report Cards Manual 8 33 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits Specification 4 PERCENT TO WEIGHT FULL YEAR COURSES 5 PERCENT TO WEIGHT SEM 1 COURSES 6 PERCENT TO WEIGHT SEM 2 COURSES 7 PERCENT TO WEIGHT QTR COURSES 8 THIRD QUARTER UPDATE 8 34 Report Cards Manual Description The number you enter here should reflect the percentage of the ALL YEAR course that is complete at the time of the update If you are updating on the Semester 1 grade enter 50 00 as the weight If you are updating on the quarter grade enter 25 00 as the weight The grade the student receive
89. click Select You can select multiple students using the Windows standard Shift click or Ctrl click 5 After selecting your students click F10 Accept Note that an add drop form will not automatically print when you add or drop a student from a section using Enter Grades Manually If you need to print an add drop form use View Change Add Drop to add a course or remove a course from a student s schedule Removing Students From Courses Sections To remove a student from a course or section highlight the student s name and then press F8 WTH You will be given the option to leave the course in the student s transcript or to delete it from the student s transcript altogether You may instantly generate a Grade Verification Form on the window with the F9 PRINT key Press or click F9 PRINT again to print the form to paper If you choose the option to remove from transcript when withdrawing a student you will no longer have the option to print the course section on report cards or on the transcript If you need to show the course on reports choose the option Leave course amp section in transcript Entering Or Editing Skills Grades You can enter or edit skills grades for courses which have skills linked to them by clicking on the student s name and then clicking on the Skills button to the left of the Specifications button The first skill associated with that course will be highlighted Press F3 EDIT to move the cursor to the field
90. contain positive comments numbers 51 76 contain negative comments To print a list of all of your comments use the F9 PRINT option These printouts may be distributed to teachers who will use them when they enter the comment codes on data entry forms as well as in their GradeQuick grade books Report Cards Manual 1 9 Chapter 1 Customize RC Editing Report Card Comments Changing Generic Comment Codes You can change the generic comment codes as follows To Change the Generic Comment Codes Log in to Administrator s Plus as Supervisor 2 Select the Report Cards module then select the Customize RC icon The Customize Report Cards Plus window appears Administrator s Plus CUSTOMIZE REPORT CARDS PLUS 2 2 Gpa factor 3 cuStomize report card columns 4 edit report card Comments 5 edit number grade pRint table 6 enter Department names 7 sKills and concepts 8 cOurse settings 9 Maintain grade change log A End program xL DO 3 Select 4 edit report Comments and click Next 4 Click Done to display the Enter Edit Report Card Comments window Enter Edit Report Card Comments ess IGREAT WORK I ELE Outstanding Student Good Work Habits E Very Neat And Accurate Work EE Highly motivated to do quite welll meom Contributes Intelligently To Class ae A Pleasure To Have In Class zee Good Class Participation LESE Grade Reflects Extra Effort Has Shown Improvement Assignments Completed On Time Coope
91. count equally since they are weighted 20 each The Final Exam counts half of a marking period because it has a weight of 10 This is how the final average is calculated 1st marking period grade Blank 2nd marking period grade Blank Midyear Exam grade Blank 3rd marking period grade 90 times 20 1800 4th marking period grade 80 times 20 1600 Final Exam grade 75 times 1096 750 TOTALS 5096 4150 5 14 Report Cards Manual Calculate Averages Examples of Final Average Calculations When 4150 is divided by 50 the result is 83 00 In this example if there were no Final Exam grade the 3rd and 4th marking periods would count equally producing a final average of 85 Reading the Log The following is a page from a log printed after calculating averages for an individual section which shows students for whom an average calculated and others for whom it did not See Option 6 View Log on the Calculate Average For Which Sections window on page 5 8 REPLACE EXISTING GRADES YES NUMBER OR LETTER GRADES NUMBER lst 20 00 2nd 20 00 SEMESTER 1 EXAM gt 30 00 SEMESTER 1 GRADE 0 00 3rd 20 00 4th 20 00 Final Exam 10 00 Final THIS COLUMN BEING CALCULATED 0 00 0 00 Adgent Libby 11005 001 02 Average 85 Altmeyer Emily 09003 001 02 Average WP Grades of I W WP or WF ina weighted column automatically become the average Baggett Brittany 12071 001 02 Average NOT A wildcard gradeis in a
92. defined in a WLABEL file Each table should have its own number CreditWidth Course Table Sets the width of the credit column in inches Default width is 5 Description Width Advanced Specifications Course Sets the width of the column containing the course amp skills description Minimum de scription width is 1 75 inches The default width is 2 25 EveryPage Y or N Image If EveryPage Y the image will be printed on every page as a background image The Left and Top positions are determined by the ImageLeft and ImageTop parameters re spectively When printing a background image the PrintImage code should be de leted Filename Image The file name of the image This must be a valid image file that is stored inside the fold er RS4 PPImages GeneralSpecStart Advanced Specifications General GeneralSpecEnd Indicates the start and end of the global specifications for the Advanced Specifications box GPABoxStart GPA GPABoxEnd Indicates the start and end of the parameters for the GPA box Report Cards Manual D 35 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions Height or Blank for Auto Attendance The Attendance box Height in inches If left blank auto the box height is determined by the number of rows to print If the available space is insufficient to print all the at tendance then rows from the bottom will be truncated HonorRollBoxStart Attendance
93. do NOT need to use this option for this purpose If you do use this option it will most likely be for one grade level or for an individual student NOTE Remember to backup the school year BEFORE doing any of the un update procedures described above 8 40 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated NOTE The previous two sections have given you some background on the update process and how it is used to update students career credits quality points and weight This section will provide details on exactly how the program updates these totals for students After reading it you should have a better understanding of how a student s current grades are used to calculate that student s new credits quality points and weight Following this overview are detailed examples of both a temporary update and a complete update General Updating Rules A complete update is based upon grades in all of the columns that you have designated as credit columns The Customize RC program is used to designate report card columns as credit columns See CREDIT on page 1 8 A complete update is generally performed at the end of the year immediately before printing students final report cards A temporary update may be performed at any time during the year based on the grades in any one report card column For example half way through your students senior ye
94. during the 1st quarter 1st semester and all year courses Courses meeting during the 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter or 2nd semester will be excluded The next window includes the option to further limit forms to staff members whose ID s fall within a designated range Forms may be printed for courses within a numeric range For example forms for courses from 200 to 299 will be printed if specification 4 is set to 200 and specification 5 is set to 299 If specification 4 is set to 1 and specification 5 to 999 all courses will be included If you would like to limit printing to a range of grade levels choose the lowest grade in that range for the start grade and the highest grade in that range for the end grade Choose Yes to view reports generated from the Enter Courses program in a Print Preview window Choose No to bypass Print Preview and send the report directly to the printer Report Cards Manual 3 41 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Teacher Grade Search Report 3 Click the Page 2 tab Specifications Teacher Grade Search Report SPECIFICATION SCREEN 2 OF 2 TEACHER GRADE SEARCH REPORT 1 SEARCH PRINT FIRST MARKING PERIOD 2 SEARCH PRINT SECOND MARKING PERIOD 3 SEARCH PRINT MIDYEAR EXAM 4 SEARCH PRINT MIDYEAR GRADE 5 SEARCH PRINT 0 6 SEARCH PRINT THIRD MARKING PERIOD 7 SEARCH PRINT FOURTH MARKING PERIOD 8 SEARCH PRINT FINAL EXAM 9 SEARCHIPRINT 0 A SEARCHIPRINT FINAL GRADE B SEARCHIPRINT
95. each year The exception to this would be in the case of extremely small schools whose section list doesn t change much from one year to the next for these schools it is worth the effort to keep the existing Section List and just make changes as needed Rebuild Section Rosters Your course Section List keeps track of the ID numbers of all of the students in each section which greatly speeds up the printing of reports and other functions that require knowing which students are in each section Rarely these lists of ID numbers may contain bad data such as the ID numbers of students who have been withdrawn or invalid ID numbers These errors will show up as you print class rosters or grade entry forms Selecting Option 5 Rebuild Section Rosters eliminates any invalid ID numbers in the section list file and corrects errors in printed rosters The Rebuild Section Rosters process erases the current list of ID numbers in the section file The program then goes through each of your active students current records and adds their ID number to the rosters for each of their sections in which a withdrawn grade is not found in the final grade column Withdrawn grades are W WF and WP The final grade column is defined as the right most column on the report card that has been designated as a FINAL or SEMESTER column Rebuild Section List File This option is similar to the one above except that it is used to eliminate corrupt data in course section
96. end of a line ends in the middle of a word do not leave a space so that both halves of the word will be joined When using the word wrap codes leave a blank line between paragraphs Also Tab codes should never be used inside of word wrap codes Report Cards Manual D 23 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Universal Codes UNIVERS Identifies a Search Header as a Universal Header A UNIVERS Search Header acts as a grand header when a search and sort is not being performed This code enables re ports with Search Headers SHSTART SHEND to be used both when searching on a category and when printing reports for ALL STUDENTS ALPHABETICALLY or INDIVIDUAL STUDENTS The UNIVERS code must be the first code in the Search Header CODES 4 OR LESS CHARACTERS IN LENGTH THAT MAY SHARE A LINE WITH OTHER CODES 1 thru 160 Data Base fields 1 through 160 N1 thru N160 Names of Data Base fields 1 through 160 TH Tab inches to the right of the left margin L1 thru L17 School Information fields 1 through 17 FN Student s First Name MN Student s Middle Name LN Student s Last Name GR Student s Grade Level 2 digits ID Student s Record Number 3 digits UNID Student s Unique ID number DATE Current Date DOB1 Date of birth in the format MM DD YYYY DOB6 Date of birth in the format MMDDYY PG Print the current Page number REM Ignore all code and text in the next line HI
97. entry form on page iv or page v of the appendix is being used in order to gather the names of the students in each section so that they may be input into the program BEFORE the end of the 1st marking period Entry Forms Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms The teacher should fill in each student s name on the blank entry form Enter students grade levels in the GR column and students ID numbers in the column You can find this information by using the Print Program in Database Plus to print an alphabetical listing of students and their ID numbers by grade level See the Database Plus manual SITUATION 1 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 SITUATION 2 The end of the 1st Marking Period ALL YEAR Course No students have been entered into the section Either the blank entry form on page iv or page v of the appendix is being used As in situation 1 the teacher should fill in the names of the students as well as their grade levels and ID numbers Under the column labeled 1st the grade for the 1st marking period should be entered followed by up to two comment codes The Enter Courses program can be used to provide a printout of the comments and their codes for each teacher See Editing Report Card Comments on page 1 9 Any comment codes should be
98. from the lookup all linked skills will be copied to that course All currently linked skills for the target course will be replaced by the skills for the selected course 5 Press F10 Accept to save 6 To link concepts to course sections select a section and click the Concepts button Report Cards Manual D 7 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Initial Setup 7 Inthe Concepts for Section window enter up to ten concepts for each marking period eren A Course 110 Math Skill Section 01 ae Description POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE INTEGERS Selected Concepts Markna Periods 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 esc rt r2 rs r4 r5 re rz rs ro ro wor D OD OD oo O O 7 UTACCEPT 8 To enter a concept click the desired marking period and type in the concept s record number If you do not know the record number click F6 Lookup 9 After entering each concept for the selected course section click F10 Accept to save NOTE A message appears asking if you wish to rebuild the skills file If you have just linked skills or concepts to courses that are already in student schedules it is important that you rebuild the skills file Until this step is done you will not be able to view edit or print the skills and concepts for students D 8 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Enter Skills Grades Manually Enter Skills Grades Manually
99. grade and not the grades for each marking period Report Cards Manual 7 5 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List Printing a Narrow Transcript By Department Use either the default report 54 or 55 Both are two column reports Use 54 if you offer credit based only on the final grade Use 55 if you award credit based on each semester s grades Printing a Permanent Label Use this task to print a permanent transcript label Choose from reports 21 22 or 23 Use 21 or 22 if you award credit based only on the final grade Use 23 if you award credit based on each semester s grades Printing One Separate Report Card Per Course This task allows you to print a separate report card per course per student It leaves a space for the teacher to hand write a personal comment Choose between reports 6 or 7 or design your own The default report is 6 RC 1 per course I and looks like REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL Hampden MA 01036 413 566 3495 Mary Keefe 001 GRADE 12 HR 108 07 02 2002 SUBJECT LEV CRS lst nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS CRDTS TEACHER Calculus AP 135 99 98 97 98 94 0 0 00 O Brian Contributes Intelligently To Class Good Work Habits COMMENTS Mary shows intelligence and maturity beyond her years She is truly a wonderful and unique individual and she is a joy to have in my class You may want to caution her however that she doesn t need to raise her hand quite so vigorously in class I ve h
100. grades do not earn credit W and WP are not calculated in students averages WF calculates with a value of 0 quality points Report Cards Manual 1 3 Chapter Customize RC GPA Factor GPA Factor The wildcard grades N X and P included in the default grade table can be modified unless they are used in students transcripts If you change the value of these grades in the grade table the symbol you changed them to in the grade table will print on the report cards For example if you change the N to NC for No Credit when teachers bubble in N on the scan forms NC will print on the report card Add Multiply Gpa Factor x CUSTOMIZE GRADING SYSTEM ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE PRESS ENTER OR CLICK DONE WHEN FINISHED The GPA factor calculates the adjusted GPA and may optionally be used in calculating honor rolls It enables extra quality points to be awarded for grades received in advanced level courses For example a grade of a B in Advanced Placement Chemistry could be made to count the same as an A in a lower level course In an alpha grading system this is generally accomplished by entering a as the GPA factor for the course When the program calculates the student s GPA this GPA factor of 1 will be added to the normal quality points of 3 for a B to give the student 4 quality points for the course Average level courses would have zeroes entered as their GPA factors which would cause the quality points t
101. have the same teacher time and room That teacher would later get two report card data entry forms or two attendance forms for the one real section You must enter whether the course is a Q uarter S emester or A II year course When you later enter sections for these courses you will be able to specify in which of four quarters the section meets for quarter courses or in which of two semesters it meets for semester courses If your school runs on a Trimester system you can call a course that only meets for one semester a quarter course and use the first three quarters of the year NOTE Note that the course length should NOT be changed if the course exists on students transcripts If you do change the course length from all year to semester or quarter the Course Length in the Section List will automatically appear as semester 1 If it is a semester 1 or quarter 2 3 or 4 section you will have to manually edit the course length entry in the Section List If you change the course length from semester to all year the Course Length entry in the section list will automatically change to all year Field Name Priority Credits Enter Courses Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window Description The Priority Code is used by Administrator s Plus in two ways Scheduling Plus uses the Priority code to try to resolve conflicts in students schedules If necessary the program will
102. in which you will enter the first grade As in the regular Enter Grades Manually window F6 LOOKUP brings up a list of available grades from the Grade Table After typing the grade press TAB or ENTER to move to the next column Continue until all the skills grades are entered for that student As in the Enter Grades Manually window remember to press F10 ACCEPT to save your grade entries Remember that skills grades can also be entered in View Change Add Drop For detailed information on how to enter skill grades see Entering Grades Or Skills Manually on page 4 10 Report Cards Manual 4 9 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Entering Grades Or Skills Manually Note that unlike in the Enter Grades Manually window when you press TAB or ENTER the cursor will stop in each column regardless of whether you have that column turned on in the specification window View Skills Adams Camille VIEW MODE Course 001 Social Dev Code SD1 Heading Social Development Description Has made friends in school 0003 001 01 0016 0004 001 01 0017 Pr f no ELI NEN NOTE Also see the Skills chapter at the end of this book for more information on skills Entering Grades Or Skills Manually This option lets you enter both grades and skills in one window To Enter Grades or Skills Manually 1 Inthe Enter Grades window select Enter Grades or Skills Manually and then click Next ra Administrator s Plus ENTER GRADES 1 e
103. information contained in the section list file It should be used under the recommendation of Rediker Software Technical Support whenever abnormal characters Report Cards Manual 2 25 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Rebuild Skills File appear in the course section information either on window or in printed documents Please call our Technical Support Department at 1 800 882 2994 if you believe that your Master Course or Section List contains corrupt data NOTE If you are using a scanner to enter course request forms this option must not be used until printed scan forms have been scanned into the computer If you must rebuild the section list file before scanning printed course request forms the printed scan forms must be discarded and new forms must be printed Also note that if you are on a network no other users can be logged into Administrator s Plus during this process Rebuild Skills File Use the Rebuild Skills File option whenever skills are added to master courses that have already been entered into students schedules It ensures that the newly entered skills are recorded in the students transcript records so that you may record skills grades as well as export the new skills to GradeQuick Send Skills to GradeQuick This option which can only be used if you have purchased the Skills Based Report Cards Plus module is used to export the list of course skills to Grade Quick so that teachers can import and record Skills grades using
104. is with the View Edit Sections option See View Edit Sections on page 2 28 for information how to use this option You can also batch enter the room in which a section meets see Batch Enter Rooms on page 2 27 for more information After entering your Master Course List it is necessary to break up your master courses up into one or more sections each A sample Course Section List is in the appendix On it course 1 Reading has been divided into six sections Each section has a section number between 1 and 99 You have a limit of 2000 total sections among all of your master courses Each section may have a different teacher meet in a different room at a different time of day and meet during different marking periods Each section of a master course has the exact same name credits weight GPA factor and optimum size which come from the master course list so you don t have to enter this information for each section Assume you wanted one section of Reading to have a GPA factor of 1 unlike the rest which have a GPA factor of 0 You would have to assign it a to different Master Course number In other words add a course 002 which is also called Reading However unlike course 001 all sections of course 002 would have a GPA factor of I When creating your Master Course and Section Lists note the following Atthe beginning of each school year you will probably want to start a brand new section list in your new school yea
105. not being dark enough when the student numbers were pre printed Alternately the student number marks may not be in the center of the bubbles The forms may be able to be successfully scanned if you darken these marks with a 2 pencil When a student number error occurs the computer stops the scanning process and instructs you to remove the last form because it can t identify the form in order to later tell you which forms were bad Resolving Errors Once the computer has successfully received the data from the scanner and has identified the student from the student number it then tries to make sense of the bubbled information on the form This is called the resolving process If there are any invalid entries it prints them on the printer as error messages When the computer finds the first error on a form it stops the resolving process prints the error on the printer and goes to the next form After all of the forms have been scanned you should pull the forms with errors correct the errors and re scan the form If there are no errors the printer will record that the form was successfully scanned Possible errors are ILLEGAL MULTIPLE MARKS Two or more bubbles in the same column have been filled in You will be told which course or section contains the illegal multiple marks REQUEST 1 IS BLANK The computer stops reading courses when it comes to the first blank course If course 1 is blank it has not read any courses
106. of your available comments Adding Students To Courses Sections After you set your specifications in Enter Grades Manually the following window will appear Enter Grades Manually ROSTER CURRENT F USE RE DEFINED NUMBER KEYS A EEE CEA KIE ea roto aero EXGuEX 700 00005 ooo etn To Add Students to Courses Sections 1 Inthe Enter CRS or CRS SC field enter the course or section The easiest way is to click the Browse button B which displays the list of courses and sections from which you can choose You can also type your course section choices directly into the field The course section number must be entered with a forward slash separating the master course number and section number Leading zeroes are not necessary For example you can enter 54 1 or 054 01 You can also type in just the course number which will cause the first section of that course to appear Press the F7 REPEAT SEARCH key to call up the remaining sections of this course 2 From the View Mode press the F2 ADD key to begin adding new students to this section The cursor appears in the GR Grade Level field below the last student currently in the section The default grade is the same as the previously entered student 4 8 Report Cards Manual NOTE IMPORTANT NOTE NOTE Enter Grades Entering Grades Manually 3 Press F6 Lookup to display a list of students 4 Choose a student from the list and then
107. on the report card If you use this option it is imperative that you press F9 PRINT after generating your honor rolls with the Statistical Reports program BEFORE printing your report cards Otherwise you will have the honor roll status from the previous marking period printed on your report cards for this marking period The Statistical Reports program does have an option to clear the honor roll status from all previous marking periods as it calculates another honor roll For further information see 3 INCLUDE STUDENTS ALREADY ON ANY HONOR ROLL on page 8 16 This specification allows column averages to be printed at the bottom of each report card column that has at least one grade Columns designated as ABSENT or OTHER columns will not have averages printed Report Cards Manual 7 21 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Specification USE WEIGHT USE GPA FACTOR COUNT CRS WITH GPA FACTOR OF 99 ROUND OR TRUNCATE COLUMN AVERAGES SCHOLARSHIP OR PROGRESS 7 22 Report Cards Manual Description These specifications are set in the Inspect Change Universal HR Specifications window See Inspect Change Universal HR Specifications on page 8 5 for an explanation of each of these options Note that Specification E COUNT CRS WITH GPA FACTOR OF 99 is no longer used by the program It is now possible to designate whether a course counts in GPAs in the View Edit Courses amp Sections wind
108. options 1 and 2 can be used to print class rank or eligibility reports Option 4 MUST be used to update students career grade point averages and credits Consequently this section will discuss Option 4 in detail Subsequent sections will discuss how to define and obtain reports as well as explain how averages and credits are calculated However in order to understand this section it is necessary to have read the previous section on How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated on page 8 24 After selecting Option 4 the Update Un UpDate GPA s amp Credits window the main window for updating GPAs and Credits appear administrator s Plus UPDATE UN UPDATE GPA S amp CREDITS 2 un Update 3 reprint Last update summary report 4 Reset last update data only to zeroes 5 reset credits gpa s last update data to Zero 6 inspect change uNiversal gpa specifications 7 Main menu 8 End program e e e e e e e o D S Before proceeding to do an update you should first set the Universal GPA Specifications in order to designate how GPAs and credits should be updated NOTE Only the Supervisor can modify the Universal GPA Specifications Report Cards Manual 8 27 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits Inspect Change Universal GPA Specifications When you click on Option 6 you will see the following specification window amp Universal Specifications Grade Point Averages
109. or 5 character report card column heading will print as defined in the report card column table in Customize RC Determines whether or not to print the skill information associated with each course Specifies which grade columns will be printed Columns are identified by column number defined in Customize RC Any or all of the possible 13 columns may be set This setting overrides page 3 of the report writer specifications Maximum height of each course cell Text that will not fit in this height will be truncated Set to Auto to have the Course cell AUTOCALC Height of the course title Text that will not fit in this height will be truncated Width of the course description cell Text that will not fit in this width will be truncated AUTOCALC overrides Minimum width of columns containing grades Column width will increase if needed to accommodate grades but it will not be lower than this number Controls width of border around course cell 0 thin border 3 thick border Determines the alignment left to right of the course header titles Report Cards Manual 7 49 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Code SkillHeaderAlignment Left Right or Center Print Border Y or N TitleBorder Y or N BlankLineBeforeHeader Y or N TitleAndFont lt TitleText gt PrintCourseNameAndFont Y or N PrintTeacherAndFont Y or N PrintSkillHeaderAndFont Y or N PrintSkillsAndFon
110. placed in the C1 and C2 columns SITUATION 2 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 A 1 2 SITUATION 3 The End of the 1st Marking Period All Year or Semester 1 Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section This is the same as situation 2 except that students have already been entered into the section The entry form on page vi of the appendix is being used Fill out the form out in a manner similar to situation 2 except that names grade levels and ID numbers will not have to be entered If a new student has entered the section and his name is not on the entry form write that student s name in on the bottom of the form with their grade level and ID number See the sample completed form on page vii of the appendix Note that a student has been written in at the bottom of the form Report Cards Manual 3 9 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms SITUATION 3 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 A 1 SITUATION 4 The End of the 1st Marking Period QUARTER 1 Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section This situation is similar to Situation 3 The only diff
111. printouts will then display this information Note that this option is used by Scheduling Plus to determine if it should limit students to specific sections by grade level during the scheduling process If you turn this option off although students will no longer be limited to specific sections no data will be lost Turning it on again will once again limit students to specific sections NOTE f you have some sections of a course that are limited to certain grade levels and others that are not you can still use this option Simply set Start Grade SG to lowest grade level and End Grade EG to highest grade level for sections that are not limited to specific grade levels Report Cards Manual 2 21 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Inspect Change Specifications PAGE 2 More Specifications F l Specifications Enter Courses DER MORE SPECIFICATIONS ENTER COURSES 1 PRINT DEFAULTS FOR A NEW SECTION f 2Yes 2 AFTER ENTERING A SECTION ADD ANOTHER SECTION Yes No 3 PRINT DESCRIPTION ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT Yes No 4 PRINT GPA SETTINGS ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT BGS r No 5 PRINT PREVIEWER ves No 6 FONT SIZE FOR MASTER COURSE AND SECTION LISTS Small 7 PRINT ACTIVE INAC TIVE COURSES Active Courses Only Specification 1 PRINT DEFAULTS FOR A NEW SECTION 2 AFTER ENTERING A SECTION ADD ANOTHER SECTION 3 PRINT DESCRIPTION ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT 222 Report Cards Manual i Page Setup EN
112. prints the names f gt O99900 of the students on the forms and fills in the 0000 PAGE NO bubbles in the upper right hand DO c 50900 corner Each form contains space for up to six P 1000000 different marks to be entered per student PO c O00000 When the forms are scanned you will tell the DVO 209000000 DO J O00000 computer into which report card column each 5o 6099999 mark should be placed For example you will lcl990909999099 tell the computer whether the exam grade Jo 10000000000 should be placed into the midyear exam col o c 909090990000 umn or into the final exam column It could PO 20000000000 even be placed into both columns simulta neously MPC00030202 HH FEED THIS DIRECTION GRADE REPORT FORM NUMERIC COURSE NO COURSE NAME TEACHER MARKING PERIOD Copyright 1987 1988 1989 National Comput REDIKER SOFTWARE mm PAGE NO PERIOD GRADE EXAM GRADE FINAL GRADE PERIOD GRADE EXAM GRADE 0 ic OOOO090060606 C OO OOGO OOOO 9 39 CQO QC eee ee c exo e OOO C969 C969 969 C9 COE OO amp amp Ke o Geo glo JAJO QO ee eo oeoooooooooodooooooo0 910 919 9999 G9 C969 969 C9 Ce oo 9 Oo CO Xe Ge ee exe ere Gf G9 Ie IGG go eet ee o Geo P O 69 C9 969 69 9 99 6969 69 9 C9 699 9 9 S amp amp e o ek Gier erede geJregre amp ejoecroeejroe g
113. should be given an A or a B The teacher can also take into account other mitigating factors like effort and attitude in determining final averages in borderline cases 5 10 Report Cards Manual Calculate Averages Examples of Midyear Average Calculations Examples of Midyear Average Calculations The following examples show how the midyear average is calculated by a school using the weights specified 1st marking period grade 40 2nd marking period grade 40 Midyear Exam grade 20 EXAMPLE ONE 1st marking period grade 90 2nd marking period grade 80 Midyear Exam grade Blank MIDYEAR AVERAGE 85 EXPLANATION The exam grade is not counted because it is blank Since the Ist and 2nd marking periods have the same 40 weight they are weighted equally in calculating the midyear average EXAMPLE TWO 1st marking period grade 90 2nd marking period grade Blank Midyear Exam grade Blank MIDYEAR AVERAGE 90 EXPLANATION The first marking period grade becomes the midyear grade because there are no other grades This would happen if you have a quarter course without a Midyear Exam EXAMPLE THREE 1st marking period grade 90 2nd marking period grade Blank Midyear Exam grade 100 MIDYEAR AVERAGE 93 Report Cards Manual 5 11 Ch ap ter 5 Calculate Averages Examples of Final Average Calculations EXPLANATION The 2nd marking period grade is not counted because it is blank Since the 1st marking period g
114. solid line from margin to margin The X variable indicates the width of the line with 1 thin 2 medium and 3 thick The Y variable indicates the position of the line with 1 top 2 middle and 3 bottom For example to print a solid bold line running from one side of the paper to the other dividing the heading of a report from the report body place an HLINE 31 code on the line directly above the header end code ULINE X Y This code prints an underline starting at X in inches and ending at Y on a line of a report This code is meant to be used on a report writer line with other text and codes including other ULINE codes i e you may want to underline more than one item on a line VLINE Y1 Y2 Prints a Vertical Line starting from the Y 1 coordinate and ending at the Y2 coordinate Y being the number of inches from the top margin Use a tab code in conjunction with the vertical line code to affect the X coordinate For example T5 0 VLINE 1 0 4 0 will print a three inch vertical line starting 1 inch from the top margin and moved 5 inches from the left hand margin ENDPAGE This code tells the program where to start a new page Whenever the report writer en counters an ENDPAGE code the report will move to the beginning of the next page ENDPAGE codes are commonly used in Search Headers so that each found search Report Cards Manual D 21 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Universal Codes category starts on a new
115. sorted by subject Schools also have the option to enter a text book name text book fee and course fee for each course These fees and book names can later be made to print on schedules 09 07 2002 BY COURSE NUMBER 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 10 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 10 00 1 00 10 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 1 00 0 00 m ur FECE EE 0 00 0 00 0 m CO H Pins 30 EN zi AT ES Fea BRE 20 AI 30 3LL 24 SEM 24 SEM 30 amp LL E zr fle RRR i E l2 SEM l2 SEM l2 SEMN ALL ALL RRR REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL 06 11 2002 COURSE SECTION LIST BY COURSE SECTION NUMBER NAME 4 SC TEACHER ROOM TOE CTR CRDTS WT GPR OPT SZ Reading i Faye E12345 Reading in Faye E12345 Reading in Faye F12345 Reading F12345 Reading Reading 8 0 H Fr Eng 011 02 Pow Joe 30 ll Col Fr Eng ias C12345 30 15 Col Fr Eng ias E12345 30 15 Col Fr Eng H12345 3 5 Col Fr Eng ias G12345 30 SP Fr Eng C12345 30 SP Fr Eng D12345 F12345 6512345 Bachelder 24 Edwards Be 107 F12345 ALL 13 Col So Eng in 125 C12345 30 ll Col So Eng 108 412345 30 ll Col So Eng 107 612345 30 10 Col So Eng 125 H12345 0 30 15 0 00 0 00 0 00 So English M Dowd Sam 108 30 ll o English 023 03 Dowd Sam 112 D12345 30 12 Dev 3o Eng 024 01 Bachelder
116. specification is set to print averages This occurs so that the averages Will not be printed at the bottom of the 16 course loop but after the last course is similar to the CLYR99RH described above but it prints the header with a 1 1 column after the final grade column This code is meant to be used in conjunction with the two codes listed below is similar to the CLYR99RB code but it prints the grade adjusted by the GPA factor in a column after the final grade column Report Cards Manual 7 71 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Code ICLYR99RZ Special Register Code One Description is similar to the CLYR99RA code but it prints the final grade for the additional column set up for grades adjusted by the GPA factor using the previous two CL codes above The following code contains almost any kind of value that you would want printed on a register report Each character in the code has a special meaning Z amp 01 25 1 Y E U P A S 0 1 2 3 Hb HH 7 72 Report Cards Manual Character 1 A Z which identifies this as an attendance variable Character 2 A sign which identifies this as a register code total Characters 3 4 A two digit number identifying which register code from 01 to 25 Special codes of 26 30 may also be used Code 26 The number of membership days which is calculated by subtracting the number of non membe
117. store the Regent s grade in New York should be defined as an OTHER type column A classification as an ABSENCE column will allow any number from 0 to 99 to be placed in the column This holds true even if you are using letter grades In the default table that uses four marking periods you might want to make column 11 an ABSENCE column If you are using the Period Attendance module you may have the absences in each class automatically print in this column If you have two columns available you may have an absent column and a tardy column Both would be set as column type ABSENT Columns 12 and 13 are automatically classified as COMMENT columns and their type cannot be changed NOTE The program will place a W in the right most FINAL or appropriate SEMESTER column if a student withdraws Editing Report Card Comments Each marking period students may be given up to two comments for each course that they take Use this option to enter a pool of up to 190 comments Each comment may have up to 59 characters although only 35 characters will print on the default report cards If you wish to use comments that are longer than 35 characters you must use the View edit letters reports feature in Report Cards Report Writer to edit your school s report card See Chapter 7 for more information The Edit Report Card Comments table contains 76 default comments which you can use as is or modify to meet your school s particular needs Numbers 1 to 12
118. the font and size of this keyword Denotes the end of the honor roll box specifications Determines the position on the page in which the Honor Roll Box prints The X and Y represent coordinates from the left margin and the top of the page General Box Specifications The following codes are used to align and position non course related text on the page including name and address information grading scales data from the message lines in Specifications and so on Although these codes create boxes around the text you can prevent lines from printing around the boxes by setting PrintBoarder and PrintVerticleLines to N Note that general box codes can be used in other Report Writers in Administrator s Plus as well Code StartBoxDef 7 56 Report Cards Manual Description Denotes the start of the box specifications is the spec number Multiple box specifications can be included on one report card with each set numbered consecutively Code BoxWidth in inches BoxHeight in inches Align L R C BorderWidth PrintBorder Y or N ContentAndFont1 lt Text gt ContentAndFont2 lt Text gt ContentAndFont3 lt Text gt EndBoxDef PrintBox Left X Top Y Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Description Determines width of box Determines height of box Specifies alignment of text inside the box Left Right or Center tabs do work when aligning left
119. the Beginning program promotes students up one grade level and deletes the courses and grades from the previous year See the Data Base Plus manual for more information on the Beginning program The Beginning program can erase students current courses and grades from the report card files but it does not erase their total career credits quality points and weight In other words these totals will be updated at the end of each year and will stay in students report card files as they are promoted to the next grade level Transfer Credits amp GPA How to Archive Grades After promoting students in the new year use the Transfer Credits and GPA program to copy students courses and grades from the report card files of the previous year to the archival files of the new year from where they may be viewed on the window or printed on college transcripts If you do not use the Transfer Credits and GPA program at the end of each year previous courses and grades taken by your students will be stored only in previous school years The following example demonstrates the archival process for a new 11th grade student When using the Transfer Credits amp GPAs program his or her report card record for grade 10 stored in the previous year is copied into Archival year 1 of the current year The courses and grades for this student s 9th grade year stored in archival year 1 of the previous year are copied to year 2 of the new school year
120. the Cal endar specifications DateRCSpecRange prints RCRW specs A amp B DateYTD prints Year to lt RCRW Spec 3 gt Anything else prints as entered The header is printed with the font of this code Each word may be substituted to a text string of your choice Instead of dates you may use 1 2nd grd 4th exc Column Width Attendance Indicates the width of data columns in inches If the Column Width keyword is not spec ified The default is Auto ContentAndFont Text String Draw Box This keyword requires a text string If a Draw Box requires more than one text string additional ContentAndFont lines may be added The sign indicates the line of the text string These numbers should be sequential such as ContentAndFont1 Text String ContentAndFont2 Text String To create an empty box on the report card simply set the border to 01 and leave the ContentAndFont line blank CommentCellStart Advanced Specification Comment CommentCellEnd The start and end of the comment cell parameters in an Advanced Specification Box The parameter lets you determine what order you want the comment concept and nar rative box to print CommentHeight or Auto Course Table When comments are printed below a course the height of the row of the comment box is determined by this command If auto is specified it takes the total text height without truncating any information CommentWidth Course Table Sets th
121. the Customize RC program determines whether multiplication or addition takes place See GPA Factor on page 1 4 If a negative GPA factor brings the quality point total below 0 the quality points for the course will be raised to 0 In other words a student will never receive a negative number of quality points for a course Specifications 4 and 5 in the Inspect Change Universal HR Specifications determines the minimum grade the GPA factor will modify See MINIMUM GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR on page 8 8 Use this setting to avoid applying the GPA factor to a failing grade NOTE If the setting Count in Honor Rolls is set to No for a course in View Edit Courses amp Sections that course will be skipped In the example the school uses the option to ADD the GPA factor to the number of awarded quality points Only one course AP HISTORY has a GPA factor other than 0 For this course the GPA factor of 1 is added to the awarded quality points of 3 00 to produce an adjusted quality point total of 4 00 For the other courses the adjusted quality points equal the awarded quality points Once the adjusted quality points have been calculated weight will be applied to the course depending upon how your criteria says courses should be weighted This weight will be pro rated if you have selected to do so See Universal Honor Roll Specification 1 HOW TO WEIGHT COURSES on page 8 5 In this example weights are used but they are
122. the Grade Quick Skills feature Skills grades may then be imported into Administrator s Plus and printed on students report cards Course skills are exported to the shared folder indicated in Specification 1 on the Skills page of the Enter Courses specifications See page Skills Specifications on View Edit Sections sc Teacher Meeting Time Crs Len Room SG SSCS Levin Faye E12345 SEM 1 0001 55 T Whitney Evan F12345 SEM2 222 09 12 0051 0001 02 055 Levin Faye E12345 SEM2 125 09 12 0821 0011 02 017 Dow Joe H12345 ALL YR 123 09 12 10078 0011 01 017 Dow Joe F12345 ALL YR 112 10 10 0023 0012 05 015 Elias Jane G12345 ALL YR 112 09 12 0183 0012 03 015 Elias Jane H12345 ALL YR 112 10 11 0022 0012 01 015 Elias Jane C12345 ALL YR 112 09 10 10805 0012 02 015 Elias Jane E12345 ALL YR 112 10 11 10025 0016 03 034 Bosworth Elise F12345 ALL YR 202 09 12 10056 0016 01 034 Bosworth Elise C12345 ALL YR 202 10 12 0017 0016 04 034 Bosworth Elise G12345 ALL YR 202 09 12 10062 0016 02 034 Bosworth Elise D12345 ALL YR 202 09 12 0046 0020 Bachelder May B12345 ALL YR CHAL 10 ENTER CRS or CRS SC 2 26 Report Cards Manual Enter Courses Import Section List from SAMSA page 2 24 Only those skills that have been linked to master courses will be included in the export file Each file is named according to the master course number followed by the skf extension For example the export file containing the ski
123. the YEAR 1 window above shows that in his senior year this student was a member of the school for 172 days had 23 absences 0 half absences no suspensions 9 tardies and 2 dismissals Choose F2 ATT to edit these numbers While editing attendance information as while editing grades pressing ESC aborts the edit losing any changes you may have already made To accept and save your changes choose F10 ACCEPT Scheduling View F10 SCHED When you press F10 to switch to Scheduling View you will be able to perform a variety of functions including Add or edit courses and sections Print the scheduling log Mass copy students from one section to another Mass drop all students from a section and mass unschedule all students from a section For more information on how to perform these functions see the SCHEDULING PLUS manual Hot Key Enabled This program is HOT KEY ENABLED meaning that while viewing a student s data a single keystroke will take you to that same student s data in any other module You can press another key to return to this program or stay in the new module One program in each module is Hot Key Enabled While in a Hot Key Enabled program you can move directly to the Hot Key Enabled program in any other module by pressing SHIFT the View Change Add Drop Viewing and Editing Grades function key corresponding to that module The following is a list of the programs in Administrator s Plus that are Hot Key
124. the course loop to print ONLY Minor courses Major and Minor courses are defined using the Priority setting in the Enter Courses program See Priority on page 2 7 Using the MAJOR and MINOR codes in conjunction with separate course loop codes will enable you to list major and minor courses separately on students transcripts Sets a margin for any TABLE code Without this tab code all tables start on the left margin Use this code to indent X X amount of spaces Prints bottom GPA amp update info The GPA information that goes on the bottom of report cards may be built manually code by code to give you increased flexibility It is much simpler however to use the TABLE1 code Prints the body of a transcript sorted by department X is replaced by a R L or S to indicate how each course will be printed with the final grade on the RIGHT or LEFT or if a SEMESTER label should be printed Y is replaced by a W for blank wide paper an F for forms or an N for blank narrow paper P now indicates preprinted narrow forms Allows you to print failure letters that include a list of only those courses containing a failing grade Previously you had to produce a separate letter for each failing course or include a a table containing all courses and their grades TABLE5 works the same as TABLE2 except that it only includes courses matching range exact search parameters See Print a Letter for Each Cours
125. the cursor will stop in the column when manually entering grades In order to speed up data entry you want to prevent the cursor from stopping in columns in which you will not be entering grades To enter grades most efficiently you should first separate your entry forms into LIKE piles depending upon which columns have been used Assuming it is the end of the first marking period here are some sample piles First quarter grade amp no comments First quarter grade and one comment First quarter grade and up to 2 comments First quarter grade up to 2 comments and a midyear exam grade First quarter grade up to 2 comments a midyear exam and midyear grade Then use these specifications to tell the program which columns are used in the pile of entry forms whose data you wish to enter Each time you change a pile of entry forms you will have to return to this window and re set your specifications Enter Grades Entering Grades Manually Specification Window 2 This window allows you to re define your numeric keyboard to make entering letter grades easier FS speciications Enter Grades NE lini SPECIFICATION SCREEN 2 OF 2 ENTER GRADES A USE RE DEFINED NUMBER KEYS Yes 1 ASSIGN TO KEY 1 A 2 ASSIGN TO KEY 2 3 ASSIGN TO KEY 3 4 ASSIGN TO KEY 4 5 ASSIGN TO KEY 5 6 ASSIGN TO KEY 6 7 ASSIGN TO KEY 7 8 ASSIGN TO KEY 8 9 ASSIGN TO KEY 9 Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICAT
126. the final grade Consequently as soon as a student makes up an Incomplete replace it in the transcript with the proper grade using the View Change Add Drop program See Chapter 6 EXAMPLE TWO 1st marking period grade 90 2nd marking period grade 80 Midyear Exam grade X 3rd marking period grade 90 4th marking period grade 80 Final Exam grade 75 FINAL AVERAGE 84 REASON All of the marking periods count equally since they are weighted 20 each The Final Exam counts half of a marking period because it has a weight of 10 The Midyear Exam is ignored due to a wildcard grade of X Report Cards Manual 5 13 Ch ap ter 5 Calculate Averages Examples of Final Average Calculations This is how the weighted average is calculated 1st marking period grade 90 times 20 1800 2nd marking period grade 80 times 20 1600 Midyear Exam grade X 3rd marking period grade 90 times 20 1800 4th marking period grade 80 times 20 1600 Final Exam grade 75 times 1096 750 TOTALS 90 7550 When 7550 is divided by 90 the result is 83 88 which rounds off to a final average of 84 EXAMPLE THREE 1st marking period grade Blank 2nd marking period grade Blank Midyear Exam grade Blank 3rd marking period grade 90 4th marking period grade 80 Final Exam grade 75 FINAL AVERAGE 83 EXPLANATION The first three columns are ignored because they are blank The 3rd and 4th marking periods
127. the top for pre printed information including school name and address date and so on Prints a report card on narrow 8 5 x 11 plain paper The default for the task Print a NARROW Report Card see Printing a Narrow Report Card on page 7 5 this report is designed for use with a laser printer Prints a wide report card on 11 x 8 5 plain paper The default for the task Print a WIDE Report Card See Printing a Wide Report Card on page 7 5 this report is designed for use with a laser printer Report Name LABEL FNL GRD RIGHT LABEL FNL GRD LEFT LABEL SEMESTER RC RC Form Long Commnt RC Plain Long Commnt RC Form Lng Com LAS RC Plain Lng Cm LAS ASCII Export GQ V4 Export LABEL PARENTS GQ Export Report Cards Report Writer The Pre defined Reports Description Prints a permanent transcript label with the final grade and credit columns to the right of the other grades This is the default report for the Task Print a Permanent Label See Printing a Permanent Label on page 7 6 This report is similar to Report 21 except that the final grade and credit columns appear to the left of the other grades This report prints a label for a school with two credit columns The only grade columns that print are the semester columns in the example below these are the midyear and final columns the corresponding credits earned each semester columns and the total credits earned co
128. this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the course number will will not print on a report COURSE NUMBER ALIAS Prints the alias master course number that you may have entered for a course If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the course number alias will will not print on a report SECTION NUMBER If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the section number will will not print on a report COMMENT WORDS X is 1 or 2 for comment 1 or comment 2 For example CM99012 40 prints the words for comment 2 X 2 for course 1 CR 01 for the year in the specification window YR 99 If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the comments will will not print on a report COURSE CREDITS Total credits earned for a course If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer determines if the credits will will not print on a report CREDIT SUM Sum of total credits earned for a year If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the credit sum will will not print on a report COLUMN CREDITS The amount of credits earned for a grade in a credit column for one course If you are a semester school with columns 5 a
129. to By Record to bring up the next student numerically when you press F5 NEXT in the VCAD window or set it to Alphabetically to bring up the next student alphabetically when you press F5 NEXT Withdrawing Student from Course Section Students can be withdrawn from courses sections in the Transcript View as well as in the Schedule View The same options for withdrawing are available when you press F8 WTH in either window See the SCHEDULING PLUS manual for a detailed explanation of each option Ifyou manually enter a W into the final grade column of a student s transcript either in the Transcript View of this program or in the Enter Grades program that student will NOT automatically be dropped from the roster Consequently the student will still be included in class size counts and on data entry forms You must use the F8 WTH option to remove a student from a course section roster The option to remove all of a student s courses from the transcript Shift F8 is available in the Schedule View but NOT in the Transcript View The same is true of the option to Withdraw the student from all his her courses but leave them in the transcript Control F8 Refer to the SCHEDULING PLUS manual for more information on how to use these options To add a course section to a student s schedule in the Transcript View type the letter A for ADD followed by a number a slash and a section number in the ENTER ID OR NAME field
130. to the final grade column when you update students career credits and GPAs at the end of the year It will copy this grade only if it does not find any grades after the midyear grade and only if you are doing a complete update with the final grade column being the only column worth credit For more information see Chapter 8 Update GPAs amp Credits on page Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits on page 8 37 3 10 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms SITUATION 5 The End of the 2nd Marking Period All Year Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section The data entry form in the appendix is being used This form contains students grades as they were input at the end of the Ist marking period Enter the 2nd marking period grade into the column labeled 2nd Optionally one or two comment codes may be entered in the C1 and C2 columns Also a midyear exam grade may be entered into the midyear exam column and a midyear average grade may be entered into the midyear column This midyear grade is really a 1st semester grade in other words it is the average of the 1st and 2nd quarter grades You may choose to leave the midyear grade column blank and let the program calculate your midyear averages with the Calculate Averages program See Chapter 5 SITUATION 5 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Doe Jon 12 43 A B
131. towards GPA s The archival process also takes the daily attendance data for the current year and stores it in the archival files so that it may optionally be printed on transcripts Therefore it is important to finish entering all of the daily attendance before running the archival process Lastly the archival process takes the ID numbers of the teachers for each course and stores them in students archival files These STAFF ID numbers will only be used if you later decide to print teachers names on the transcripts If you do decide to print teachers names it is important that you do not remove STAFF members from your STAFF file as long as their ID numbers are in the archival files NOTE Backup before archiving your data If there is a power failure or the archiving process aborts for some reason you will have to restore your backup and redo the archiving process Specification UNARCHIVE continued Archive Archive Description If you schedule your school for next year while using ADMINISTRATOR S PLUS for the rest of the current year you will have two active directories on your hard disk drive If you have two active directories and are using archival files the following is an outline of your end of the year tasks For the following examples assume that you are using the 2004 05 directory for the current year and you are scheduling for next year in the 2005 06 directory In the 2004 05 directory update students s
132. weighted calculated column Barrett Nathan 10002 001 02 Average 92 Battan Andrew 11064 001 02 Average NOT A letter gradeisina weighted calculated column Buckman Jesse 12122 001 02 Average 03 Gilmore Grace 11049 001 02 Average 79 Ralls Ben 12066 001 02 Average NOT A wildcard gradeis ina weighted calculated column Note the reasons averages did not calculate for three students Student 12071 Brittany Baggett has the wildcard grade P for Passing in the 4th marking period column Student 11064 Andrew Battan has the letter grade A in a weighted column and averages were calculated for number grades Student 12066 Ben Ralls has the wildcard grade O in the 4th marking period column Student 09003 Emily Altmeyer has the grade WP for Withdrawn Passing in a weighted column so that grade becomes the average See rule D on page 5 8 Report Cards Manual 5 15 Chapter 5 Calculate Averages Blank Report Card Columns Blank Report Card Columns This option allows you to erase all entries in one or two report card columns of your choice for all grades or one grade level at a time This includes COMMENT and ATTENDANCE columns Specifications Blank Report Card Column s SPECIFICATIONS BLANK REPORT CARD COLUMN S 1 FIRST COLUMN TO BLANK ERASE FINAL p 2 SECOND COLUMN TO BLANK ERASE NOT SELECTED j 3 INCLUDE WHICH SECTIONS ALL SECTIONS i 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBER
133. will be printed These specifications allow you to enter a starting master course number and an ending master course number Any courses falling within this range and including the entered numbers will NOT be printed on any reports This will enable you to specify that courses such as lunch should not be printed on report cards When printing by SECTIONS courses within this range will NOT be printed Specification ACTIVE INACTIVE STUDENTS INCLUDE BLANK SEARCH SORT CATEGORIES START GRADE FOR ALL GRADES END GRADE FOR ALL GRADES PRINT CREDITS Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Description Your reports may include only active students only inactive students or both active and inactive students Inactive students are students who have withdrawn from your school When you search for students in a certain Data Base category you must decide whether or not to include students who do not have an entry in that category Answer Yes if you want to include them otherwise answer No If this specification is set to Yes and you are sorting by sex then a separate report will be printed for those students who have not yet had their sex entered into their data base records See the Data Base Plus manual for an explanation of the Search Sort options in Administrator s Plus These specifications define which grade levels will be used if you select the ALL GRADES option See page Print Menus on p
134. with separate column settings will give you the desired results RowContentsAndFont A T P D DOS MEM Attendance Any or all of these parameters may be printed in any order separated by commas Data is printed with the font of this code The codes stand for the following A Absences T Tardies D Dismissals P Present DOS Days of School Session Days MEM Membership Days for the Student RowHeadersAndFont Attendance Row Headers can be any single worded text to denote Absences Tardies Dismissals Present Session Days Membership Days for those parameters specified in RowCon tentsAndFont above RowHeader Width Attendance Width of the horizontal header column to contain the text for RowHeadersAndFont above Report Cards Manual D 39 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions RowHeight Course Table The maximum height of the subject and average rows in inches The default height is 0 16 Section Width Course Table Sets the width of the section column in inches Default is 0 3 SkillsFont Advanced Specifications Course To change the font and size of the Skills set the word iSkillsFonti to the desired font and size required for the report If this specification is omitted from the code the de fault is black Arial 8 pitch and bold SkillHeaderAlignment Left Right Center Advanced Specifications Course Alignment of the skills header can be set to Left right or center Th
135. you can enter 54 1 or 054 01 You can also type in just the course number which will cause the first section of that course to appear Press the F7 REPEAT SEARCH key to call up the remaining sections of this course The course and section may be found at the top of each data entry form While in the Enter Grades Manually window you can access Specifications at any time by clicking on the Specifications button in the upper right corner of the window 5 Place your cursor in the field you want to edit and then edit the field as desired Pressing ENTER moves your cursor to the right stopping only in those columns in which you denoted in the specification window that you want to enter grades See page ENTER WHICH COLUMNS on page 4 4 for more information about which columns you can edit At the end of a row it drops down to the first column in which you want to enter grades in the next row You may move to the left with the SHIFT TAB key or move up and down with the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Select the checkbox labeled Use Re Defined Number Keys to enable the grade shortcuts you defined on page 2 of the specifications Report Cards Manual 4 7 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Entering Grades Manually 6 At any time press the F10 ACCEPT key to save all of your changes or press the ESC key to abort and lose all of your changes NOTE When you are in either of the comment columns the F6 LOOKUP key is available to view a list of all
136. 0 1 5000 PREY IGPA 65 1667 THIS GRADE 0 5000 J 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 NB SGPA 85 1667 HES 1 2500 120 2500 127 7500 1 5000 PREY AGPA 6 6 332 ND AGRA 66 8332 7 COURSE 131 02 Pre Calc Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR Credit amp verage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYEAR GRADE i NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE OR CREDITS grade of I is never used COURSE 423 01 Latin Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Tace 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR Credit amp verage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYEAR GRADE DP CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits full course weight 50 i 9 5000 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE A grade of P is never included in an average RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 1 2500 aDJ QP 130 2500 SIMPLE QP 127 7500 WEIGHT 1 5000 PREV IGPA 85 1667 THIS GRADE 9 5000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 NE SGPA 65 1667 THES 1 7500 130 2500 1 127 7500 1 5000 PREV AGPA 6 6332 NB ACPA 66 8333 Midyear Update Report Page 3 STUDENT GRAND TOTALS PREVIOUS CREDITS 1z 0000 ADJ QP 1067 5000 SIMPLE QP 1067 5000 WEIGHT 1i 0000 PREV IGPA 6 9582 THIS UPDATE 1 7500 130 2500 127 7500 1 5000 ND SUbP 5270 NEW 13 7500 1137 7500 1135 2500 13 5000 PREV AGPA 6 9583 NE ARPA 86 7222 This temporary update report will now
137. 000 1 0000 CURR SGPA 82 7500 TCURRENT 17 5000 1489 5000 1489 5000 18 0000 PREV AGPA 82 2353 CURR AGPA 82 7500 Note that the previous credits quality points and weight are calculated by subtracting the stored current credits quality points and weight from the stored new credits quality points and weight Reset Last Update Data Only to Zero Before an update is performed the four LAST UPDATE figures are all zeroes After an update the last credits adjusted quality points simple quality points and weight that the student earned are added to his career totals The following is an example of the eight figures stored in a student s report card record AFTER an update of GPAs and credits CAREER CREDITS 12 50 LAST CREDITS UPDATE 4 00 CAREER ADJUSTED QP 1100 00 LAST ADJUSTED QP UPDATE 400 00 CAREER WEIGHT 15 00 LAST WEIGHT UPDATE 45 00 CAREER SIMPLE QP 1070 00 LAST SIMPLE QP UPDATE 390 00 Because the program stores these LAST UPDATE figures the update may later be UNDONE so that it can be redone in a different way Also by storing these LAST figures Report Cards Plus is able to show how the last update was performed on both the Detailed Update Report and on report cards See 3 REPORT DETAIL on page 8 33 When the BEGINNING program is run and students are moved up a grade these LAST UPDATE figures are reset to zero so that further updates may be done in the new ye
138. 3 Entry Forms Grade Distribution Report Specification 2 DISTRIBUTION REPORT TYPE 3 28 Report Cards Manual Description This specification allows you to sort the report four different ways By Teacher By Course and Department By Course combine teacher or By Course combine teacher on disk BY TEACHER As shown on page xxv of the Appendix this report shows the number and percentage of each grade given by each teacher for each of their courses and the totals for all of their courses Teachers will appear in alphabetical order The end of the report shows the total grade distribution for all of the grades given in your school BY COURSE AND DEPARTMENT As shown on page xxvi of the Appendix this report shows the number and percentage of each grade given for each section of a course and the totals for the entire course It also displays the teacher for each section enabling you to compare the distribution of grades for different teachers teaching the same course Departments are considered to be courses with numbers in the same hundreds For example you may have up to 10 departments Department 1 is all of the courses numbered from 100 to 199 Department 2 is all of the courses numbered from 100 to 199 This report will also display the grade distribution by department The end of the report shows the total grade distribution for all of the grades given in your school These totals will be the sam
139. 5 Tran Nar 2Col SM DP 16 RC Multi commentipg 36 1 per course Sect 56 TR Plain RTYR LASER 17 New Progress 37 1 per crse II sect 57 TR Narw RTYR LASER 18 RC Pre print LASER 38 UNUSED 58 TR PrePrt RTYR LZFM 18 RC Nar Plain LASER 39 LABEL No Table 59 TR Plain RTYR LZFRM 20 Good Blank 20 4 Enter The Report Number 116 40 LABEL SEM No Table Enter a Report Name High School Report Card 60 Tran RT YR 2 pg Copy Delete Ext Select F6 LOOKUP invokes a lookup window listing many of the available Report Writer codes You can also click the arrow to the right of the Report Keywords window at the top of the window or press Alt X to access this list You may scroll through the codes using the arrow keys on the keyboard or the up and down arrows on the drop down window s scroll bar Press Enter or double click on the desired code to enter it into the body of the report at the cursor s current position CODE DESCRIPTION al BLANK Blank line force BY ITSELF Continue current line with the next line Data base fields Date COMment PARagraph BY ITSELF First name Grade number padded to 2 characters ALL GRADES GRADE XX 7 40 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports F7 SEARCH activates a search utility which locates and highlights each instance of a particular co
140. 5 90 005 Num 4 MEDIAN B COURSE 21 H So Eng 021 01 H 3o Eng 3 i i l LU 0 0 Dow Jor 30 005 20 0045 20 004 10 004 0 004 0 004 0 004 COURSE 32 Jr Eng 4 032 01 Jr Eng 4 6 4 4 0 1 Sonett Karla 40 00 6 674 26 674 0 004 5 675 0 004 0 004 032 02 Jr Eng 4 0 6 4 0 1 0 0 Sonett Karla 0 005 54 554 36 364 6 004 9 094 6 004 90 005 032 02 Jr Eng 4 4 7 i 0 9 0 0 Sonett Karla 30 775 52 654 15 3864 6 004 6 004 9 005 9 005 COURSE 32 TOTALS 10 17 10 0 i 9 0 Nu 29 MEDIAN E 25 644 42 594 25 644 0 005 5 12 0 004 9 005 COURE TIEXPL cU DECR ci 042 01 Sr Eng 4 l 0 d 0 0 Edwards Betty 38 694 44 444 5 564 9 005 6 004 9 005 9 005 O42 02 Sr Eng 4 3 6 0 1 0 0 Edwards Betty 16 674 38 694 323 334 9 005 5 56 0 005 9 005 042 02 Sr Eng amp 6 i d 0 0 Edwards Betty 75 005 25 005 0 005 0 005 90 005 0 005 90 005 042 04 Sr Eng 4 l 3 l 0 9 0 0 Edwards Betty 20 005 50 005 20 005 0 004 0 005 0 004 0 005 COURSE 42 TOTALS 1 zo 0 1 i 0 team 46 MEDIAN B 34 694 40 824 16 334 0 004 z 044 6 004 0 004 English DEPARTMENT TOTALS of grades excluding other 130 TOTALS 45 50 i 3 3 0 0 Nus 125 MEDIAN B 34 624 38 464 18 465 z 314 z 314 0 005 0 005 Grade Distribution Report By Course amp Department This report is a sample grade distribution report by course and department for a school using letter grades Under each course is the grade distribution for each of its sections This report
141. 5012345 Zio zo 122 01 C Chemist Flt 45012345 Zio 16 TOTAL ENROLLMENT 64 NUMBER OF SECTIONS 4 AVERAGE STUDENTS PER SECTION 16 00 Brom Jims O eye ee eee 042 01 Sr Eng Al2345 125 14 041 01 AP 3r Eng Bl2345 125 l TOTAL ENROLLMENT ib NUMBER OF SECTIONS AVERAGE STUDENTS PER SECTION 13 00 Canavan Da 321 11 AIDS Group D 111 5 321 22 AIDS Group H 111 TOTAL ENROLLMENT 13 NUMBER OF SECTIONS AVERAGE STUDENTS PER SECTION 6 50 Teacher Enrollment Report This report enables you to easily see each teacher s work load for any marking period or for the entire year Teachers are printed alphabeti cally with each of their course sections printed under their names Next to each course section is the current enrollment in the section Lastly for each teacher their total number of students is printed as well as their average class size The report ends with a school summary that includes the average class size for the entire school Xxvi EEERERERBADEREREREREE 230999090909G sues 000900090009 000090090009 0000009090009 009009090009 0009000900009 H38IANCN LNAGNLS o 09999990000 Ez 99 90909000000G g O QOOOQGQLOO mE 1 00909000G0009 9 mC OO OOOLOO O QOQOOOOO em 2 9 Q9 9 0 9 9 O OOQ COOCO OOCO 599 99 9 99 9og fz oeoooo9909 29999999900 li 2099999999 590999909999 9909909909 L 9999999990 l 999900009 Jli9999
142. 6 Either the letter I for an interval total or the letter Y for the year to date total CHARACTER 7 A number from 0 to 4 Use a 0 for an individual student total which would normally be in the body of the register Use a 1 for the totals of the current sort category which would normally be printed in a sort footer Use a 2 for the totals of the current search category which would normally be printed in a search footer Use a 4 for the grand totals which would normally be printed in a grand footer For example if you are printing the register sorted by sex use the number 2 in the search footer to print the totals for each sex CHARACTER 8 Must be a colon followed by a formatting template such as This template means to print three digits to the left of the decimal and two to the right All numbers in a column will be neatly lined up OTHER ATTENDANCE CODES Code Description IATYRX 4 ATTENDANCE X 1 member days 2 absences 3 half absences 4 suspensions 5 Tardies 6 Dismissals For year 0 suspensions are linked to attendance code 12 which is EXTERNAL SUSPENSION Half absences are not available for year 0 because they are included in REGISTER absences Take them out by removing the register link for 5 abs The archived data for these 6 categories are used If year 0 1 2 abs not available unless you manually use the attendance code for these categories Only integers are archived for backw
143. 6 loops per report containing no more than 30 lines per loop The same as CRSSTART1 except that space will be included for all 16 courses a student can have even if the student has fewer courses in her course list This is useful if you want the same number of lines to be used for each student no matter how many courses they have This code is used for transcripts so that each quadrant is the same size This course loop will hold space for 22 course lines regardless of the number of courses in a student s course list This course loop gauges the amount of space needed to print the next course in the course loop so that the course information does not get divided onto 2 pages An ideal code to utilize when printing a report card with long comments it will work only if the report contains a page header This course loop allows transcripts to contain more than 22 courses per year XX is the number of courses you want included in your course loop You may have to edit the report further to allow your selected number of courses to fit Defines the end of a course loop started by any of the CRSSTART codes above NOTE Although CRRSTART and CRSEND codes are still used in Administrator s Plus and appear in default reports the newer Course Table codes can be used instead to print all or a portion of the courses in a student s course list in a box format If this code is used when a column defined in Customize Report Card Columns i
144. 8 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits Reprint Last Update Summary Report Choose option 3 from the Update Un UpDate GPA s amp Credits window to print the summary report of how students were last updated See Update Un update GPA s amp Credits on page 8 27 REPRINTING LAST UPDATE REPORT REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL GRADE 12 07 26 2002 002 Albrecht Kathy PREVIOUS CREDITS 15 0000 ADT QP 1290 0000 SIMPLE QP 1290 0000 WEIGHT 17 2500 PREV SGPA 74 7826 LAST UPDATE 0 5000 39 0000 39 0000 0 5000 CURR SGPA 74 8732 TCURRENT 15 5000 1329 0000 1329 0000 17 7500 PREV AGPA 74 7826 CURR AGPA 74 8732 069 Allen Christine PREVIOUS CREDITS 13 5000 ADT QP 1210 5000 SIMPLE QP 1210 5000 WEIGHT 16 5000 PREV SGPA 73 3636 LAST UPDATE 1 0000 164 0000 164 0000 2 5000 CURR SGPA 72 3421 TCURRENT 14 5000 1374 5000 1374 5000 19 0000 PREV AGPA 73 3636 CURR AGPA 72 3421 040 Allen Jessie PREVIOUS Ei CREDITS 12 5000 ADJ QP 1168 5000 SIMPLE QP 1168 5000 WEIGHT 17 0000 PREV SGPA 68 7353 LAST UPDATE 1 5000 123 0000 123 0000 1 5000 CURR SGPA 69 8108 TCURRENT 14 0000 1291 5000 1291 5000 18 5000 PREY AGPA 68 7353 CURR AGPA 69 8108 030 Baird Cathrine PREVIOUS CREDITS 16 5000 ADT QP 1398 0000 SIMPLE QP 1398 0000 WEIGHT 17 0000 PREV SGPA 82 2353 LAST UPDATE 1 0000 91 5000 91 5
145. 8 Report Cards Manual QUARTER 1 COURSE PREV SGPA NE SGPA PREV AGPA NE ACPA 9 0000 30 0000 9 0000 30 0000 QUARTER 1 COURSE SEMESTER 1 COURSE PREV SGPA NE IGPA PREV AGPA NE ACPA 0000 35 35 5000 47 5000 0000 0000 5000 30 0000 92 3333 30 0000 92 3333 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Midyear Update Report Page 2 4 COURSE 231 02 H Chemist Possible Credits 1 50 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 5 00 ALL YEAR COURSE WR Credit amp verage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYERR GRADE 082 CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits full course weight 50 H 0 7500 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 82 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality points 96 0000 WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Full year course X weight 50 i 0 5000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 46 5000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 49 0000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADI QP 70 0000 SIMPLE QP 70 0000 WEIGHT 0 7500 PREY SGPA 93 3332 THIS GRADE z 0 7500 49 0000 46 5000 0 5000 NH SGPA 93 2000 THES 0 7500 1193 0000 116 5000 H 1 2500 PREY AGPA 93 3332 NB AGPA 95 2000 5 COURSE 220 02 AP m Hst Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE O
146. 9 9 C 9 9 9 OI Xe G9 G Q O eto Gro Gro GO OOQ 910 99 e 9 JOQOQOO N j OOO 9 Q 9 9 9G oo OG oo OJO OG 9 amp eoe Oo C O ekee ee ge O goce 00O Rees cd AA 9 GIO SS OFS Io o OQOGCQOCQ eCgje eto OG Oo 9919 919919 919 M207180 7 9 919919919919 9999919 999999 9999919 9999919 9999919 9999 919 910910010010 9109010910 910910919 910010910 919910019 9109199019 919019010 Q OJO o 1 9 0 HOOO Printed in U S A WEM 07 05 2002 COURSE SECTION ROSTER CRSE SC 011 01 CRSE NAME H Fr Eng TEACHER Dow Joe CREDITS 1 00 TIME F12345 ROOM 112 QUARTER FULL YEAR CURR SIZE 16 GPA FACTOR 0 00 NE HR IP OERO SECU SEL Baldwin Melissa Byrnes Kathleen Danis Rebecca Fountaine Brenda Froelich Kimberly Goodman Ivy Hancock Ellen Hanson Philip Lesniak Jeremy Macdonald Joseph Mitchell Lindsay Morrill Nancy Schuettinger John Scribner Carrie Smart Caleb Sprague Devon FEMALES COURSE SECTION ROSTERS Course section rosters contain the names of all of the students in a course section They may be printed for all sections sorted by teacher or for individual sections Sort ing by teacher means that the rosters for all of the sections taught by a teacher will be printed together In this manner the rosters for all or individual teache
147. 9999909 ks 999090000009 P ooooo9O99009 E AOO wm 3 3 J 9 Se 1 559 OG lg eliam sla mm 7 5 C Te eo P 3INVN SSV 12 GGG OOOO OOOO OVOOO T Ness NENNEN aa a ON SSV19 amp oooQO OO mae Ecc as O OOCOOOOOOOE OOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOCC OQOOE o gt OOOOOOQOO 0099900909099 OQOOOOOCOQOO _ j 99999999og l em 5 O 9 9 9 0 O GJ 7 O 9 9 9 9 0 0 9 O Scanner Schedule Form em 3 9 OQ 9 6 9 9 9 O 6 If you have not scheduled your students with SCHEDUL 500000000c ING PLUS this form may used to quickly enter students 00050 0 096969 C C f schedules into the computer with a scanner wm 5 Q 9 9 O 9 9 O 000000000 Students will use this form to bubble in bubble in both the OOO0OOOOQOOQO m OOOQOOOO course and section number of each section in which they have been scheduled The computer will pre print students names and ID num bers on each form so that they will not have to be manually bubbled gt ____ as ON SSV19 93s Xxvll 1S SSV19 3INVN LN3GNLS ON Gl 73 313a0vu9 114104 Siu uo SHEIN Aes ON Oe e Ajo19 duio soBueu ose13 e e c e NM ico kae io D io N ed z J Z e un Aje1ejduio 219419 eu Il 4 e 1S3n 03H ASHNOD 3HVM L4OS H3 IQ3H Oeo Appendix xxviii
148. ADE ENTRY FORM FIRST MARKING PERIOD CRSE SC 011 01 CRSE NAME H Fr Eng TEACHER Dow Joe CREDITS 1 00 TIME F12345 ROOM 112 QUARTER FULL YEAR CURR SIZE 16 GPA FACTOR 0 00 ist 2nd MEX MID 3ra 4th FEX FNL ABS EFT CIT ME GR peu IL Lada c o NN DEOR ER NE RT A CERE ERR EN EM ul eee ee E ee eee e pop ip ups come ert tt ELLA peu ee Eee ee D ESL CL CELL TE TT poe ca see perc CLK e sea de E iJ rs porc uc LEE EL E aa Mitchell Lindsay eee fell Froelich Kimberl alli Mc MERE id j Hancock Ellen ul dents in each section Hanson Philip ET Manual Grade Entry Form Students Already In Sections Once students schedules are in the computer man ual grade entry forms may be printed for each course section that include the names of the stu Lesniak Jeremy These forms are printed sorted by teacher which makes them easy to distribute They may also be 4 printed for individual sections of your choice On this sample form a teacher would record stu dents grades for the second marking period Mid year exam grades may also be recorded in the MEX column midyear grades in the MID col umn and comment codes in the C1 and C2 col umns Although REPORT CARDS PLUS can automatically calculate midyear and final averages it will not overwrite any grades that have been pre viously entered by a teacher vi 07 05 2002 REPORT CA
149. Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual Legal Notices Legal Notices Copyright Copyright 2004 Rediker Software All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Warranty Information in this document is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Rediker Software Trademarks Administrator s Plus is a trademark of Rediker Software Incorporated The School Office Suite is a registered trademark of Rediker Software Incorporated All other hardware or software products mentioned in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or holders Part Number RC0030105 ii Report Cards Manual About this Guide Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual About this Guide The Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual details the functions and use of the Administrator s Plus Report Cards module Included in this Guide The Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual is organized as follows Chapter 1 Description Customize RC The Cutomize RC module allows you to Define your school s grading system Define the GPA factor for Ho
150. Auto Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default Left Default Y Default N Default Narratives Default Y AdvancedS pecEnd PrintAdvancedBox WhichCourses See Below Left X Top Y Default is PrintAdvancedBox 1 WhichCourses Al ILeft 0 Top 0 5 WhichCourses can equal Skills Nonskills ALL ALLSkillsFirst A LLNonSkills First Course numbers separated by commas 121 221 50 60 Range of Courses 400 900 200 300 Course numbers and range together 121 400 500 600 Report Cards Manual D 29 Chapter D Skills and Concepts New Box Codes GPA Box If you want to put a box containing GPA information on your report card or transcript use the codes below to define the box Remember that in order for the GPA box to print the Report Card Report Writer Specification 1 Print GPA Information must be set to one of the following options Current GPA Data Adjusted Current amp Update GPA Data Adjusted Current GPA Data Simple Current amp Update GPA Data Simple GpaBoxStart BoxHeight Default 0 75 Box Width Default 2 BoxGap Default 0 1 Border Width Default 0 PrintBorder Y or N Default Y TitleBorder Y or N Default N TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center Default Center TitleAndFont1 TitleAndFont2 TitleAndFont3 TitleAndFont4 BodyFont GpaBoxEnd PrintGpaBox Left X Top Y Default Left 0 Top 0 5 Honor Roll B
151. BOTTOM OPTIONAL FIELD 1 OPTIONAL FIELD 2 OPTIONAL FIELD 3 Description This specification allows you to choose for which sections you want rosters printed For example Specification 1 will print rosters for only those sections meeting during the first marking period These sections include Quarter 1 Semester 1 and All Year sections They will not include Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4 or Semester 2 sections You will subsequently be able to enter starting and ending staff names with the appropriate rosters being printed for only those staff members If this specification is set to All Sections rosters will print for all of your sections You will subsequently be able to enter starting and ending staff names with ALL rosters being printed for only those staff members This specification allows you to print the number of females and the number of males in a class It will also indicate if the sex was not entered by totalling blanks as OTHER Choosing Option 4 Individual Sections from the window lets you type the course number a slash and a section number for as many sections as you want Rosters will then be printed for only the sections that you have entered These specifications perform the same function as Specifications 3 7 in the Manual Grade Entry Forms specification window See page 3 PRINT FORMS WITHOUT ANY STUDENTS on page 3 5 These specifications allow you to choose up to three additional fields of
152. CHOOL muxpuixs e pevpsscmrerz Eng 123 Reading DEV O11 Eng 111 H Fr Eng HON 012 Eng 112 Col Fr Eng COL College Prep Freshman English Fr English Dev Fr Eng ool 013 014 Eng 114 015 015 020 Eng 120 021 Eng 121 LD Fr Eng SP Fr Eng H 3o Eng 022 Eng 122 Col So Eng COL College Preparatory Sophomore English 022 Eng 122 So English 024 Eng 124 Dev So Eng DEV Sophomore Engl ish LD So Eng H Jr Eng Jr Eng 4 Jr Eng 3 025 021 Eng 121 022 Eng 132 033 Eng 132 024 040 AP Sr Eng Sr Eng 4 Sr Eng 3 042 043 024 Sr Eng 1 2 110 Mat 610 Math Skill uel 111 ll 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Gen Math Appl Math Inv Math at 611 at 620 121 122 123 124 MAT 624 125 Com 255 126 127 126 129 131 Mat 631 132 133 Mat 133 135 136 140 143 155 157 211 212 213 Sci 513 214 215 216 221 231 232 233 234 241 242 243 255 256 Math Skil SP Algebr Algebra Algebra l Basic Geo H alg 2 Bas Geom Geometry H Geometr Computer Computer Bas Alg 2 Algebra 2 H lg 2 Pre Calc Adv Tp Ca H Precal Calculus Calculus Computer Comp Lab Computer Fr Eng L Ind lg I Earth Sci Dev E Sci Dev E Sci SP E Sci H Biology C Biology Biology H Chemist C Chemist Chemistry 142 223 H Physics C Physics Physics i Lab Sci L Eng Review Jr Eng 1 2 P English Algebra I Algebra 19 4 I
153. Card Codes Report Card Codes Code CourseTableSpecStart PrintDescription N or Y BoxWidth Auto or The following codes are specific to Report Cards Report Writer They are the newest codes used to create course tables and other boxes and also to format text properly For an explanation of universal codes used in all Report Writers in Administrator s Plus see the end of this chapter Table Codes For Skills and Non Skills Based Report Cards Note that although box codes are designed to align text within parameters defined in the body of the report in most cases you can choose not to print vertical or horizontal lines around the text by simply setting the border width to 0 The exceptions to this are the course boxes for both skills and non skills courses To print a non skills based report card without boxes around the courses choose one of the default reports for wide or narrow report cards See The Pre defined Reports on page 7 84 Course Table Box Used to print courses in a table that looks similar to default report cards 18 and 20 this box is designed to print courses not associated with skills If you have both skills and non skills courses you must use the Advanced Specifications Box code to produce a separate course box with skills more than one Table Box can be used within a report Description Denotes the start of the course table specification is the table number used to dist
154. Cards Manual 7 47 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Advanced Specification Box for skills based report cards This box is used to print courses with skills on the report card More than one box can be used to determine where specific courses will print Code AdvancedSpecStart GeneralSpecStart AutoCalcAll NumBoxAcross recommended 1 3 MaxBoxDown or Auto CellGapDown inches CellGapAcross inches TableGapDown inches TableGapAcross inches BoxWidth inches or Auto GeneralSpecEnd 7 48 Report Cards Manual Description Start of the Skills box specifications is the table number used to distinguish multiple skills boxes in a report Start of general specifications Specifications are split up into 5 sections General Course Comment Concepts and Narratives Causes the program to automatically set the dimensions of all the course boxes based on the page height and width Any entries entered into the Height and Width specification lines discussed below will be ignored REM this line if you do not want the skills table to AUTOCALC Number of course boxes to print from left to right If a high value is set the program fits the maximum boxes possible based on page width Number of course boxes in one column up and down If a high value is set the program fits the maximum boxes possible based on page height Auto will cause
155. D QUARTER UPDATE NO After performing the update print class rank and eligibility reports as needed Then PERFORM A MIDYEAR UPDATE IN ORDER TO UNDO THE THIRD QUARTER UPDATE Be sure to set specification 8 THIRD QUARTER UPDATE to No NOTE DO NOT perform the third quarter update more than once If you do students GPA data will be lost and you will have to restore data from backup 8 36 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits The following section describes the options on the Update Un Update GPAs Credits window devoted to reversing or undoing the update process See Update Un update GPA s amp Credits on page 8 27 Keep in mind that these options are rarely used and should be used only after doing a backup of the school year data Un Update GPAs amp Credits This option on the Update Un update GPAs Credits window will undo the last updating that you have performed Normally you do not need to use this option as the Update GPAs amp Credits program automatically un updates before performing a new update There may be times however when you need to undo your last update without performing a new update as for example if you have just performed a semester update and wish to restore the student s GPA and credits to what they were at the beginning of the school year The Un Update program subtracts the LAST UPDATE numbers from
156. DESCRIPTION INDEPENDENT AND GROUP READING Press F2 Add and the next unused record number appears Enter a description for each concept up to 100 characters Press F10 Accept to save You can print the entire list of concepts by pressing F9 Print O ON Oo Report Cards Manual D 5 Chapter D Sk ills and Concepts Initial Setup 2 D 6 Report Cards Manual Link Skills and Concepts to Courses You will use the Enter Courses program to link skills and concepts to courses You may link up to 20 skills to each master course and up to 10 concepts per marking period for each section To Link Skills and Concepts to Course Navigate to the Enter Courses Program and choose View Edit Courses amp Sections administrator s Plus ENTER COURSES 1 View edit courses amp sections N 2 Inspect change specifications 3 new Master amp section list files 4 new Section list file only 5 Rebuild section rosters 6 reBuild section list file 7 rebUild Skills files 8 send Skills to Grade quick 9 End program D amp To link a skill to a master course call up the course and click Skills a ee eee e View Edit Courses And Sections j Dj x Concepts Skills Math Skill EEN NOTE NOTE Skills and Concepts Initial Setup The Assign Skills to Course window appears Assign Skills to
157. E 34 94 0 50 BEI l11 01 02 713 Word Pro z Tarr M 93 90 50 BE 12 02 03 719 Economic McInnis K 35 951 0 50 EE EI NE ACADEMIC STANDING TOTAL ATENDOF RANK OUTO GPI QULPT WT CREDITS 128 1141 88 12202 50_ 250 2500 DATE PRINTED 07 14 2002 NUMBER OF CREDITS EARNED INT HIS SCHOOL English Math Sdernce Social St Language Fine Ats PractAn vocationa PE Heath Other TOTAL l 4 00 4 00 550 4 00 4 00 050 0 00 150 250 0 00 26 00 ll Narrow Transcript By Department Two Column Semester Grades This transcript was printed using Report 55 on a dot matrix printer on narrow 8 5 x 11 plain paper Because it is two columns you can get four years on a single piece of paper Use this report if you are a semester school with two credit columns in this case the midyear column and the final column These columns along with the credit earned after each semes ter are the only grade columns that print Because the courses are organized by department and not by year attendance data does not appear on the transcript oggz Il fLOL yoofqns yore 10j pojunoo ode sos1noo YIM ooo oz 09 pe soureu joo qns oy ouljop noA jos qns uoeo ur pouieo uo wed EUNT Jdbbnis otn sparo otn se Jom se ponad porroods e Jo puo ou 199738 ssepo ur gues siuopnis suud 1duosuen oui Jo uronoq ou ero oc wn si pawud oq p nous soweu sooro pue oouepuogr oq jou 1q1ogouA pu popn our oq pynoys suum oo
158. ED LOWER THAN 1 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 999 4 6 START GRADE Grade 4 X 7 END GRADE Grade 8 X Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE After selecting option 2 Blank Report Card Columns from the main Calculate Averages window you will see a specification window at which you will select the grade range and the report card column s to blank You can use this option to blank one or two report card columns at a time for all sections all year sections only semester or quarter sections You can also choose to blank columns for a range of sections One example of a scenario in which this option is useful is after calculating a final average based on the 1st and 2nd marking period and midyear exam grades which you may need to do in order to print a class rank at midyear assuming you don t have a midyear grade column on the report card You can run the Blank Report Card Columns option to blank the grades in the Final column in order to free up that column for Final grades at the end of the year This option is also often used to blank COMMENT and ABSENCE columns after importing grades into those columns from Grade Quick For example if you do not import a new comment each marking period the old comment remains in the column You can use Blank Report Card Columns to blank the comments after printing report cards so that the next time you print report cards you can be sure that the old comments will not print Lik
159. ENDER field SEX Prints son or daughter depending on entry in GENDER field SX2 Prints he or she depending on entry in GENDER field YEAR Current School Year Name YOG Year of Graduation SF Search Field SC Search Category SFC Search field s and criteria ULINE X Y Underlines text starting at X ending at Y for example ULINE 3 5 7 82 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Codes That Must Be On a Line By Themselves Code GFSTART Start Grand Footer GFEND End Grand Footer ORPHANSTART Start of text to remain together ORPHANEND End of text to remain together SFSTART Start of Search Footer SFEND End of Search Footer TFSTART Start of the Sort Footer TFEND End of the Sort Footer Description All the lines between the GFSTART and GFEND codes make up a Grand Footer The Grand Footer prints at the very end of a report only Grand Footers are often used to generate a count of all the students included in a report For example the line of code inside a Grand Footer will typically include text followed by a grand count code Total Students GCT which will print Total Students 118 All the lines between the ORHPANSTART and ORPHANEND will remain together on a report In this way text where a caption and a paragraph follow will not be split All the lines between the SFSTART and
160. EPORT WRITER CURRENT TASK RANGE SEARCH LIST PRINT WHICH SECTIONS E C 2 Range ofteachers C S individual Teachers C 4 Individual sections C Main menu C 6 End program Starting with staff member 1 the sections for each staff member will be processed one at a time Within each section Report Cards Plus will print the body of the current active report for each student in the roster Whenever a new section is encountered the search header for the report if there is one will print At the end of a section the search footer for the report if there is one will print For example if you are printing rosters the search header will print at the top of each roster including the name of the current section and the teacher as pictured below COURSE SECTION ROSTER 06 25 2003 CRSE SC 001 01 CRSE NAME MATH TEACHER ANNE SNIDER CREDITS 125 TIME E te ROOM QUARTER ALL CURR SIZE 106 GPA FACTOR 99 The body of the roster report simply contains the name and ID number of each student You can modify the body of the report to print any data base fields for each student See View Edit Letters Reports on page 7 32 for information on editing reports Specifications Description All Sections All staff members will be processed one at a time NOTE Printing reports for all sections only includes those sections meeting during the marking period s specified by Specification 1 INCLUDE COURSES MEETING WHEN on Speci
161. Enabled While in any of these programs you can DATA BASE ATTENDANCE REPORT CARDS SCHEDULING DISCIPLINE BILLING The ADDRESS program is HOT KEY ENABLED Move to the ADDRESS program from another module by pressing the SHIFT key while holding down the F1 function key The CORRECT program is HOT KEY ENABLED SHIFT F2 The View Change Add Drop program is HOT KEY ENABLED SHIFT F3 The View Change Add Drop program is HOT KEY ENABLED SHIFT F4 The INCIDENTS program is HOT KEY ENABLED SHIFT F5 The INVOICES program is HOT KEY ENABLED SHIFT F6 press SHIFT F3 to return to the VCAD Transcript View Report Cards Manual 6 9 Chapter 6 View Change Add Drop Viewing and Editing Grades 6 10 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Introductions 2s veo tae obU ERIS 7 3 Using the Task List 7 4 Using Tasks 1 7 to Print Report Cards and Transcripts 7 4 Printing a Wide Report Card 7 5 Printing a Narrow Report Card 7 5 Printing a Wide Transcript By Year 7 5 Printing a Wide Transcript By Year By Department 7 5 Printing a Narrow Transcript By Year 7 5 Printing a Narrow Transcript By Department 7 6 Printing a Permanent Lable 7 6 Printing One Separate Report Card Per COUS A Puer beet hat oet sed a Yo 7 6 Printing an Honor Roll Certificate 7 7 Exporting the Honor Roll to an ASCII File Named HROLL ASC 7 7 G
162. Essay Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 00 GPA Factor 0 00 QUARTER COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Colwnn BLANK Full Credit Full Average FINAL GRADE BLANK NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE OR CREDITS grade of BLANK is never used COURSE 070 01 Mod m Hum Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 50 GPA Factor 0 00 SEMESTER COURSE OUR Credit fAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE 95 CREDITS AWARDED Qtr or Sem course Possible credits SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT Qtr or Sem course Possible wei ght COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADI QP zz 5000 SIMPLE QP zz 5000 WEIGHT PREV IGPA 30 0000 4THIS GRADE 90 0000 H 47 5000 47 5000 NE IGPA 92 2222 NESJ 90 0000 70 0000 A 70 0000 i PREV ALPA 30 0000 NE ACPA 32 2233 Report Cards Manual 8 57 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Final Update Report Page 2 OUR CreditfAveraqe Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average FINAL GRADE 90 CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number of credit columns 1 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADIUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the G
163. GPA Main Menu GPA WARNING Only continue if you have updated the SOURCE folder s GPA s DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE Before using this program students career GPA s must have been updated in the SOURCE directory with the Statistical Reports program This program will then transfer these updated GPA s from the SOURCE directory to the DESTINATION directory Only continue if you have updated the SOURCE directory s GPA s Administrator s Plus x TRANSFER GPA AND ARCHIYAL DATA SOURCE FOLDER DESTINATION FOLDER 2001 02 2002 03 C 1 Begin transfer C 2 individual student Override C 3 Inspect change specifications C 4 End program D D Report Cards Manual C 5 Chapter C Transfer Credits amp GPA Main Menu C 6 Report Cards Manual BEGIN TRANSFER Select option 1 to begin the transfer from the source to the destination directory A transfer will NOT be done unless the names are identical In other words if source directory grade 9 student 1 is not the same name as the destination directory grade 10 student 1 the transfer will not be done This could have happened if the grade 10 student 1 had been withdrawn with a new student occupying that number All transfers NOT done will be printed on the printer INDIVIDUAL STUDENT OVERRIDE If you have students that have stayed back or had their names changed their data will not be transferred with option 1 because the names in the corresponding ID num
164. GPA See Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window on page 2 4 Note that until you change the setting in View Edit Courses amp Sections courses that currently count for the simple GPA will count for BOTH the simple and adjusted GPA Courses that now do not count for the simple GPA will NOT count for the adjusted GPA Report Cards Manual 8 29 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits UPDATE GPA S amp CREDITS SPECIFICATIONS After verifying your universal GPA specifications choose Option 1 Update GPAs amp Credits to update your students career GPAs and credits The Update Specifications window will appear allowing you to specify how the update will be performed Update Specifications a D x UPDATE SPECIFICATIONS 1 UPDATE BASE HICH COLUMNS ALL CREDIT COLUMNS e nwecHvEARSS WHICH YEARS CURRENT YEAR YEAR 0 CURRENT YEAR eano o o o EX REPORT DETAIL 9 lf specification E is set to update based on TE column the following table will be used to weight courses based on their length If updating on the semester grade usually full year courses will be weighted 50 and all other courses 100 E 5 PERCENT TO WEIGHT SEM 1 COURSES W o 6 PERCENT TO WEIGHT SEM 2 COURSES 7 PERCENT TO WEIGHT QTR COURSES r a THIRD QUARTER UPDATE Bove o ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 8 30 Report Cards Manual Specification 1
165. Grade Entry Forms If you are manually entering grades into the program see Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms on page 3 8 The process of filling out the pre printed Scanner Grade Entry Forms is fairly self explanatory However the following guidelines should be followed Always use a 2 pencil and completely darken bubbles Make sure that any erased marks are totally erased Keep all marks inside the appropriate bubbles Report Cards Manual 3 19 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms Separate forms are used depending upon whether you are using alpha or numeric grades If you are using alpha grades for your lower grade levels and numeric grades for your higher grade levels the forms may be scanned together The program will automatically differentiate them A sample of each type of form may be found in the appendix on pages ix x For each student there are six categories rectangles on the form that may be marked PERIOD GRADE EXAM GRADE FINAL GRADE OPTIONAL GRADE COMMENT ONE COMMENT TWO Before scanning a batch of forms you will be able to designate into which report card column s these grades should be placed PERIOD GRADE This will generally be the grade for the marking period printed at the top of the form When the forms are scanned you will be able to tell the program into which designated marking period column s this grade should be placed It must be a PERIOD column
166. H HONOR honor roll reports includ ing only students with GPA s of 95 or higher You enter the name of the honor roll as well as its criteria using the screen on the previous page The top report contains students printed in rank order In other words the student with the top GPA is printed first The bottom report prints students alphabetically with their rank and GPA next to their name The top report also has students first names printed first while the bottom report has them printed last Both reports contain the number of courses upon which the GPA is based next to students names In other words the GPA of the number one student Richard Rediker is only based on three courses He may have only taken three courses or received grades of P or W in his other courses xvii CLASS RANK REPORT GRADE 12 91 students CAREER DATA ADJUSTED RAHK HAME ID GPA SZ Kathy Albrecht 2 74 87 86 christine Allen 69 72 34 89 Jessie Allen 40 69 81 51 Cathrine Baird 30 82 75 3 Missy Baldwin 86 94 00 56 Saul Bardsley 4 82 20 1 Erin Bartlett 8 95 52 10 Rachael Bean 87 20 26 52 Julie Berry 88 82 60 34 Russ Berube 58 85 95 11 Zion Biondi 70 90 05 30 Jake Breton 89 86 68 07 15 2002 07 15 2002 CLASS RANK REPORT GRADE 12 91 students CAREER DATA ADJUSTED RAHK HAME ID CREDITS 1 Mary Keefg noes 2 Erin Bart CLASS RANK REPORT 2 Missy Bald sisse V4 The class rank report is based on students GPA s for their entire
167. IGHT SEM 2 COURSES 50 PERCENT TO WEIGHT QTR COURSES 100 THIRD QUARTER UPDATE NO Unlike the temporary third quarter update the permanent third quarter update can be repeated without losing data After updating for all grades return to Calculate Averages and use the option Blank Report Card Columns to blank the final grade column for ALL YEAR SECTIONS ONLY Set Specification 3 INCLUDE WHICH SECTIONS in order to free the final column for grades at the end of the year Use the Blank Report Card Columns to blank the final grade column for any other groups of sections such as Semester 2 sections if necessary Report Cards Manual 8 35 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How To Perform a Third Quarter Update The Temporary Third Quarter Update If you need to update students GPAs and credits based on the third quarter for purposes of determining eligibility but do not wish to permanently store the data you can perform a temporary third quarter update which you will have to undo by performing a midyear update afterwards When doing a third quarter update do NOT use Calculate Averages Simply do an update with Specifications set as follows UPDATE BASED ON WHICH COLUMNS THIRD QUARTER GRADE WHICH YEARS CURRENT YEAR YEAR 0 REPORT DETAIL SUMMARY REPORT PERCENT TO WEIGHT FULL YEAR COURSES 25 PERCENT TO WEIGHT SEM 1 COURSES 0 PERCENT TO WEIGHT SEM 2 COURSES 50 PERCENT TO WEIGHT QTR COURSES 100 THIR
168. II Grades on this window You can also choose to print a report for students by course section and print for only students in a particular course section by choosing the Sections option When printing section rosters you should choose the Sections option If you choose a grade number or all grades you will get a list of students alphabetically without regard to course section You should also choose this option when printing mailing labels for students in a particular course section PRINT WHICH STUDENTS Entering either a grade level or choosing all grades displays the next print window administrator s Plus x REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER PRINT WHICH STUDENTS IN ALL GRADES OM 1 All students alphabetically 2 Resume alphabetical printing 3 Individual students 4 Search by one field all categories 5 search by Field s you enter criteria 6 Main menu 7 End program D D All of the options on this window will apply to one grade if you have selected a specific grade level from the previous window or to all grades or an interval of grade levels if you have selected the all grades option from the previous window Report Cards Manual 7 27 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Print Menus Option Options 1 and 3 Resume Alphabetical Printing Search by one field all categories Search by fields you enter criteria 7 28 Report Cards Manual Description These options allow you to further specif
169. ION TO CHANGE Specification Description USE RE Note that Specification A is followed by specifications 1 thru 9 With DEFINED Specification A set to Yes when entering grades manually pressing NUMBER the number keys 1 thru 9 will enter the values you enter for KEYS specifications 1 thru 9 The above example shows that pressing a 1 will cause an A to appear and pressing a 2 will cause a B to appear You may then enter an optional or after the grade Note that in this example pressing a 7 will insert C directly When in a COMMENT column or an ABSENT column number keys automatically revert back to numbers Using re defined number keys is a way for users who are more proficient at using the numeric keypad to enter grades quickly and easily Report Cards Manual 4 5 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Entering Grades Manually Entering Or Editing Grades Manually After entering students into courses you can enter grades for each student in the roster by typing grades into the appropriate grade columns scanning grades into the program using an NCS scanner or by importing grades from GradeQuick grade book software The following sections describe the various ways to enter grades into Report Cards Plus NOTE You can store narrative comments specific to a particular marking period as well as narratives for the entire year Manually enter narrative comments for any term from t
170. If two pages are needed names will be spaced evenly on both pages Fit To Page is the recommended setting for blank Manual Grade Entry Forms NOTE Unless you are printing forms for individual sections forms are always printed by staff member alphabetically making them easy to distribute If you would like to print forms for only certain staff members choose the option Individual Teachers on the following window If you would like to print forms for several teachers you can choose the option Range of Teachers provided that the teachers for whom you wish to print forms have ID numbers within a numeric range Choose Yes to view reports generated from the Enter Courses program in a Print Preview window Choose No to bypass Print Preview and send the report directly to the printer Entry Forms Manual Grade Entry Forms The Entry Form Print Window When you finish entering specifications the following print window appears T Administrator s Plus x MANUAL GRADE ENTRY FORMS PRINT WHICH SECTIONS 1 All sections 2 Range of teachers 3 individual Teachers 4 Individual sections 5 Blank form 6 New report 7 Change specifications for this report 8 End program D amp e e e e e e e Option Description Options 1to 4 These options allow you to print Manual Grade Entry Forms for all sections as well as for individual teachers or sections or for a range of teachers When you select Range of teache
171. If you would like to limit printing to a range of grade levels choose the lowest grade in that range for the start grade and the highest grade in that range for the end grade Report Cards Manual 3 37 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Skills Grade Verification Form Specification 8 LINE SPACING 9 FONT SIZE A PRINT PREVIEW B Print SKILLS DESCRIPTION C FORM TYPE Description This specification determines whether the Manual Grade Entry Forms will be single spaced double spaced or use a combination of the two When you click on this specification a drop down list appears that contains the following 3 options Single Spacing This setting allows up to 50 names to be printed on a single sheet of paper With this option a blank form will contain 39 blank spaces Double Spacing This is the recommended setting It allows the forms to be double spaced which makes them easier to read If more than one page is needed the course name and other information will be printed at the top of each page If you print a blank form with this option 19 blank double spaces will be printed The sample manual entry forms in the appendix have all been printed using this setting Fit To Page This setting adjusts line spacing depending on the number of students in the course section The program will fit up to 48 students on one page before adding a second page If two pages are needed names will be spaced evenly on both pages Fit To Page
172. M NE 5 SEDI 11 x 90e dca testa deles LA en teu 5 lor Aa rr 6 The Report Card Plus Programs 6 Program 1 CUSTOMIZE RC 7 Program 2 ENTER COURSES 7 Program 3 DATA ENTRY FORMS 7 Program 4 ENTER GRADES 8 Program 5 CALCULATE AVERAGES 8 Program 6 VIEW CHANGE ADD DROP 8 Program 7 REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER 22200055 9 PROGRAM 8 STATISTICAL REPORTS 9 Program 9 ARCHIVE 10 Program A PRINT SCHEDULE SCAN FORMS sca what cue Rs 10 Program B SCAN SCHEDULES 10 Program C TRANSFER CREDITS amp GPA10 Customize RC 1 Introduction amp Main Menu 1 2 Edit Grade Table 1 2 The Default Grade Table 1 3 GPA Paco 36 Parti ion E oce os 1 4 Customize Report Card Columns 1 5 Editing Report Card Comments 1 9 Changing Generic Comment Codes 1 10 Edit Number Grade Print Table 1 11 Entering Department Names 1 11 Skills and Concepts 1 13 Course Settings 1 13 Maintain Grade Change Log 1 14 Enter Courses 2 Introduction amp Main Menu 2 2 View Edit Courses amp Sections 2 3 Adding to amp Editing the Master Course List2 3 Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window 2 4 Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List wore e se iud 2 11 Section List Fields
173. MS PRINTED Setting this specification to Yes causes any previous comments to be erased from the window the next time you bring up a course section in the Enter Grades or Skills Manually window Unless you enter new comment codes no comments will be printed on the report card If this specification is set to No old comments will be saved in the program and will appear on the window and on report cards if you do not replace them with new comments NOTE f you are retyping grades into a section or if you just wish to look at the grades in a section choose the option No so that you DO NOT ERASE OLD COMMENTS Otherwise your previously entered comments will be lost if you choose to save the section If no previous comment codes have been entered into your sections it does not matter which option you choose Report Cards Manual 4 13 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Entering Grades Or Skills Manually Specification SPACING FOR MANUAL FORMS USE RE DEFINED NUMBER KEYS 4 14 Report Cards Manual Description This specification determines whether the forms will be single spaced double spaced or use a combination of the two When you click on this specification a drop down list appears that contains the following 3 options Single Spacing This setting allows up to 50 names to be printed on a single sheet of paper With this option a blank form will contain 39 blank spaces Double Spacing This is the recommended sett
174. MYON Lys illam BUND op 01 p AEWNOUW AYR Um eug ool t6 06 6 z r6 r6 t6 06 WU i c LHAAINOD LIH3AINOD YIJHOY 3L SLOHD HSSV Tv HJ XdJHl4 ux PIE USO XIN Puz L Su A TOOHOS HSIH Y31034 00 2 00 Z1 0 L1 00 8 9 0LO VIN 6 18quieAoN epunjes 4d S92u2819JU07 JUSIEY 9J99 s9uJ J9vssalN SSuMaav 8 3 AVN NYIOSV AN IN HOSIAQV 80L HH cb 3avdo LOO XIV Mary Keefe 001 GRADE 12 HR 108 Page 1 07 14 2002 PARENT GUARDIAN NAME amp ADDRESS MESSAGE Mr amp Mrs Ernest Keefe Tuition payment 5 of 10 is RR 2 Box 1441 due January 15 2003 Springfield MA 01036 Have a great Vacation REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL SCHOLARSHIP REPORT SUBJECT LEY CRS ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd h FEX FNL ABS CRDT TEACHER AP Sr Eng AP 041 90 93 94 94 92 95 90 92 1 1 00 Brown Highly motivated to do quite welll GREAT WW ORKI Calculus AP 135 99 98 GF 98 94 95 88 96 0 1 00 O Brian G Contributes Intelligently To Class Good Work Habits C Physics COL 242 98 97 g7 97 99 98 99 98 1 1 50 Manchestr D A Pleasure To Have In Class Good Class Participation Sociology 336 94 93 98 96 92 gg 97 95 0 0 50 Hughes P Grade Reflects Extra Effort Very Neat And Accurate W ork French 4 COL 442 gg gg gg 98 97 gg 95 98 1 1 00 Frank L Assignments Completed On Time Cooperative Positive Attitude Band 552 0 00 Crockett R Economics 718 94 94 95 95 99 95 91 95 0 0 50 Mclnnis K Exhibits Responsibility Narrow Report Card PE 815 99 Outstanding Student 2 1 00 Zion D Althoug
175. NFORMATION printed and if yes whether or not it should be the adjusted or simple GPA data Adjusted GPAs include extra points awarded for honors courses the GPA factor while simple GPAs do not If you choose to print CURRENT amp UPDATE GPA the report card will show quality points credits and weight from before the last update in addition to the last update data PREV QUL PT 52 50 PREV WT 18 50 PREV GPA 2 84 CURR QUL PT 10 00 CURR WT 0 00 NEW GPA 3 38 NEW QUL PT 62 50 NEW WT 18 50 If you choose to print CURRENT GPA DATA the report card will display the GPA quality points and weight as of the last update CAREER QUALITY PTS 62 50 CAREER WEIGHT 18 50 CAREER GPA 3 38 Report Cards Manual 7 23 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Specification Description 2 K These specifications determine whether or not a particular piece of information prints on a report provided that the report is designed to print this information in the first place If a report is not designed to print some report card data e g Report 1 Narrow Plain Report Card does not contain the code to print section numbers the above toggles will have no effect For this reason you should print a few sample copies of a given report before you commit yourself to amass printing NOTE f something is not printing that you believe should be printing for example the staff name in a warning letter check to make sure that these specs
176. NITIAL SPECIFICATIONS window and set Specification 2 to GRADE RANGE 7 10 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List SEARCH 1 PER COURSE Specifications 6 and 7 for the range to be searched and Specification 8 to the marking period on which the search is to be performed Note that you can also search on comment codes in Comment columns REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL GRADE RANGE SEARCH 50 to 70 ID NAME GRADE COLUMN COURSE TEACHER 10022 Adams Erica 65 1st 123 02 Geometry Christnsn P 11059 Adams Keith 60 1st 032 01 Jr Eng 4 Sonett K 12069 Allen Christine 60 1st 118 01 Algebra 1B Christnsn P B 1st 243 02 Physics Manchestr D 10100 Ameika Ann 62 1st 222 03 C Biology Cottier B 60 1st 412 04 French 1 Frank L User Defined Tasks 1 11 You may design your own tasks by selecting one of the User Defined tasks setting up the desired specifications and giving the task a name User Defined tasks will be saved per user To create a new task choose one of the unused USER DEFINED TASKS from the task list After entering a task name set the specifications for the task as desired The specifications for this task will be saved per user and will be available each time you use the Report Cards Report Writer Printing Rosters This task will enable you to print class rosters that are similar to those printed by the entry forms program The default report is 35 ROSTER and may be modified
177. NOT pro rated The OVR Credit Override column in the student s transcript for the course will now be looked at Through the View Change Add Drop program codes may be entered in this column causing the course to count for less than full credit and or GPA or more than full credit and GPA for this student only See Editing the OVR Column on page 6 5 These codes are displayed below CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDIT ALWAYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C 8 22 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Honor Roll Averages Are Calculated If the code is a 1 the course will be skipped because it says 0 00 GPA which means not to count it towards this student s GPA If the code is a 2 the weight as it now stands will be cut in half A code of 5 will only use 1 4 of the weight and a code of 6 will only use 3 4 of the weight Codes of 3 and 4 will have no effect on the GPA In the example the OVR column is blank for all courses which means that they will all count for FULL GPA that is their full weight will be used The adjusted quality point total for each course is then multiplied by the weight of the course to give the total quality points for each course The total quality points for each course will be added together to produce the Grand Total Quality Points The weights for each course will be added together to pr
178. Nar 2Col RT DP 15 Search List Range 35 Roster 55 Tran Nar 2Col SM DP 16 RC Multi commentipg 17 New Progress 36 1 per course Sect 37 1 per crse Il sect 56 TR Plain RTYR LASER 57 TR Narw RTYR LASER 18 RC Pre print LASER 38 UNUSED 58 TR PrePrt RTYR LZFM 19 RC Nar Plain LASER 38 LABEL No Table 59 TR Plain RTYR LZFRM 20 RC Wide Plain LASER 40 LABEL SEM No Table 60 Tran RT YR 2 pg Copy Delete Exit Select Transcript reports must be numbered over 40 i e they must appear in the third column If you are going to copy a transcript to a new number in order to modify it copy it to an unused number in the third column 4 Enter The Report Number fd NOTE Report Name Description RC Narrow This report gives you a report card on a plain 8 5 x 11 paper Plain RC Wide Plain This report gives you a report card on plain 11 x 8 5 paper printed landscape Because it is a wide report card comments for a course print on the same line as the course s grades RC Blank Use this report if you have purchased the blank wide three part Forms forms from Rediker Software It will print both your school s name and the column headings RC Pre Printed Form This report prints a wide report card on attractive pre printed three part forms you can purchase from Rediker Software Because your school s name is pre printed on t
179. OG 11 MAINTAIN GRADE CHANGE LOG Ig s CUN ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 2 Click yes to enable the grade change log or click No to disable it 3 Click Done to confirm and exit this window The Customize Report Cards Plus window re appears Report Cards Manual 1 15 Chapter Customize RC Maintain Grade Change Log 1 16 Report Cards Manual Enter Courses Introduction amp Main Menu 2 2 View Edit Courses amp Sections 2 3 Adding to amp Editing the Master Course List Create a Master Course List 2 3 Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window 2 4 Adding to amp Editing the Course Section Listos ini cea RU ua 2 11 Section List Fields 2 13 Understanding Meeting Times 2 14 Print Reports ovr or eI ERE 2 18 Inspect Change Specifications 2 18 Page 1 Initial Specifications 2 19 PAGE 2 More Specifications 2 22 Skills Specifications 2 23 New Master amp Section List Files 2 24 New Section List File Only 2 24 Rebuild Section Rosters 2 24 Rebuild Section List File 2 24 Rebuild Skills File 2 25 Send Skills to GradeQuick 2 25 Import Section List from Somas 2 25 Report Cards Manual 2 1 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Introduction amp Main Menu Introduction amp Main Menu The enter courses icon allows you to do the fo
180. OR You have three choices DO NOT USE THE GPA FACTOR USE FOR AVERAGES ONLY e USE FOR AVERAGES amp MINIMUM GRADE CHECKS The GPA factor is used to give extra quality points to grades earned in higher level courses A GPA factor may be entered for each course through the Enter Courses program See GPA Factor on page 2 8 A specification in the Customize RC program determines whether the GPA factor is added to or multiplied by the quality points for the grade See GPA Factor on page 1 4 Report Cards Manual 8 7 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Honor Rolls 8 8 Report Cards Manual In order to determine if a student is on an honor roll their average is calculated AND their grades go through minimum grade checks For example assume that you have an HONORS course to which you will add a GPA factor of 1 In other words a C in this course will count like a B when the average is calculated Also assume that you want to omit students from the honor roll with any grade less than a B If you select Option 3 USE FOR AVERAGES amp MINIMUM GRADE CHECKS a student with a C in an honors course will NOT be omitted because the C will be raised to a B when performing the minimum grade checks INCLUDE COURSES WITH GPA FACTOR OF 99 NO LONGER USED In previous versions of Administrator s Plus a GPA factor of 99 was entered for a course in order to prevent it from being counted toward honor rolls or GPAs This setting was then set no
181. PA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Number of credit columns 1 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 90 0000 ADT QP 70 0000 SIMPLE QP 70 0000 WEIGHT 0 7500 PREY IGPA THIS GRADE x 1 5000 35 0000 J 30 0000 1 00600 NH IGPA NEW 1 5000 165 0000 160 0000 1 7500 PREV ALPA NH ACPA COURSE 220 02 AP Am Hst Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR WR CreditfAverage Override Column 2 HALF Credit HALF Average FINAL GRADE ff OVR CREDITS ADJUSTMENT code of i or 4 or in the WR column means to use half the possible credits SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS GPA FACTOR NOT USED because the grade is less than the MINIMUM grade for the GPA factor OVR WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT code of 2 in the WR column means to use half the weight so that this grade counts 504 WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Number of credit column 1 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 1 5000 ADI QP 165 0000 SIMPLE QP 160 0000 WEIGHT 1 7500 PREV IGPA 90 0000 0 5000 NE IGPA THIS GRADE 90 0000 0 0000 NEW
182. PECIFICATIONS window to some sort of grade search probably one per course and set Specifications 5 8 appropriately i e choose the marking period and grade s on which to search This report is a combination of Report 12 and Report 7 You need to search for students meeting grade specifications you have set and this report will generate a report card in the same format as Report 7 This report generates a list of students meeting an exact grade search specification To perform this search go to the INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS window and set Specification 2 to EXACT GRADE SEARCH 1 PER COURSE Specification 5 to the grade to be searched for and Specification 8 to the marking period on which the search is to be performed This is similar to Report 14 except that the search is for all students whose grades fall within a range of grades Use Specifications 6 and 7 to set the grade range This report prints a report card with narrative comments which can either be imported from Grade Quick or entered manually in View Change Add Drop See Chapter 6 A report card that includes introductory text in letter format and a table that defines each comment code in the comment code list This report was specifically designed to handle the special demands of a laser printer It is the laser equivalent of Report 2 Prints a wide report card on pre printed forms available from Rediker Software This report is designed to leave enough space at
183. Preparing GradeQuick D 12 Setting up Skills D 13 Entering Skills Grades D 17 Send Skills Grades to Administrator s Plus D 18 Skills based Report Cards D 20 Codes to Create Skill and Nonskill based Report Cards D 21 Universal Codes 05 D 21 New Box Codes 005 D 25 Attendance Box D 25 Draw BOX 0 00 e eee D 26 Course Table Box 0005 D 27 Advanced Specification Box D 28 GPA BOX eto Sethe date eek D 30 Honor Roll Box 205 D 30 Print Image ss epee s Shi aw eat ads D 31 Box Code Definitions D 32 Sample Skill based Report Card Template D 42 Introduction Introduction so ttt tet tere Go ee 2 Using a Split Grading System 3 How to Archive Grades 4 OIOD 1G oco cbr d berpepi E Seatebieieant 5 Mo 2 8 yc ut MEE Nr PPM 5 OB Je osssseu ice e bii ened ta akt en Re PI ON IEEE 5 Sep dust even oes ced 6 The Report Card Plus Programs 6 Program 1 CUSTOMIZE RC 7 Program 2 ENTER COURSES 7 Program 3 DATA ENTRY FORMS 7 Program 4 ENTER GRADES 8 Program 5 CALCULATE AVERAGES taclasrasctadexrsimuusscacscnsias 8 Program 6 VIEW CHANGE ADD DROP Leon cial Co urba rof nde 8 Program 7 REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER 9 PROGRAM 8 STATISTICAL REPORTS
184. Quality Points SQP and weight the program will automatically update the Simple GPA SGPA Note that the cursor will not stop in the AGPA or SGPA fields because there is no way to modify those fields without adjusting the Quality Points and weight A description of each of the fields at the top of the window in the Transcript View follows CREDITS The Credits shown on the top of the window for YEAR 0 are the student s career credits You may manually change this number or enter it for the first time if you have just purchased REPORT CARDS PLUS AQP Adjusted Quality Points The adjusted quality points are divided by the weight to calculate the adjusted GPA which is listed as AGPA at the top of the window The adjusted quality points includes extra points the student may have earned for taking honors courses The GPA factor is used to give extra points for honors courses WT The weight is usually the same as credits attempted It is divided into the adjusted quality points to produce the adjusted GPA Similarly it is divided into the simple quality points to produce the simple GPA SQP Simple Quality Points The simple quality points are divided by the weight 6 6 Report Cards Manual to calculate the simple GPA which is listed as SGPA at the top of the window View Change Add Drop Viewing and Editing Grades You can edit a student s GPA credits or quality points only in the current year However be
185. Quarter 2 55 Quarter 3 62 Quarter 4 COMMENT ONE Conduct Poor COMMENT TWO Effort Fair COMMENTS Report Cards Manual 7 9 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List Search for List of Students with Exact Course Grade This task is designed to print a list of students who have the exact grade you specify in at least one of their courses To perform this search go to the INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS window and set SPECIFICATION 2 to EXACT GRADE SEARCH 1 PER COURSE SPECIFICATION 5 to the grade to be searched for and SPECIFICATION 8 to the marking period on which the search is to be performed Note that you can also search on comment codes in Comment columns REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL EXACT GRADE SEARCH F ID NAME GRADE COLUMN COURSE TEACHER 10047 Dadmun Robert F 1st 834 01 Dv Behav S Fitzgerld J 10095 Hall Lisa F 1st 119 06 Algebra 1 O Brian G 10090 Horning Russell F 1st 223 01 Biology Bolduc K 09009 Kiesman Lea Ann F 1st 301 01 SP Soc Stu Carter S F 1st 610 02 Tech Ed Pomerleau T 09081 Shaw Amy F 1st 119 05 Algebra 1 McMann D 10041 Valliere William F 1st 118 01 Algebra 1B Christnsn P 09080 Wesig Michael F 1st 212 05 C Earth Sc Eaton J Printing a List of Students with Grades Within Grade Limits This task is designed to print a list of students who have a grade that falls within the range you specify in at least one of their courses To perform this search go to the I
186. Quarter Course Possible weight Qtr course weight 100 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADI QP 0 0000 SIMPLE QP 0 0000 WEIGHT 0 0000 THIS GRADE 3 0 0000 z 5000 i 5000 n 90 2500 NES B B 0 0000 i2 5000 i2 5000 0 2500 2 COURSE 0538 01 Essay i Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 00 GPA Factor 0 00 OUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYEAR GRADE BLANK NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE OR CREDITS grade of BLANK is never used 2 COURSE 070 01 Mod Am Hum Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 50 GPA Factor 0 00 OUR Credit amp verage Override Column BLANK Pull Credit Pull Average MIDYERR GRADE 095 CREDITS AWARDED Sem l course Possible credits Sem l course weight 100 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Poirt table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT Sem l course Possible weight Sem l course weight 100 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 60000 ADI QP tz 5000 SIMPLE QP i2 5000 WEIGHT 9 2500 THIS GRADE 0 0000 47 5000 47 5000 0 5000 N i 1 0 0000 E 70 0000 70 0000 i 9 7500 8 4
187. R GRADE FOR THE GPAFACTOR ZE 6 MAJOR COURSES HAVE PRIORITIES 0 TO 7 INCLUDE WHICH COURSES IN AVERAGES ALL COURSES E 8 INCLUDE WHICH COURSES FOR OTHER CHECKS ALL COURSES E 9 NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES 0 TO 4 p 5 ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE NOTE Only the Supervisor can change the Universal Honor Roll Specifications HOW TO WEIGHT COURSES You have three choices USE WEIGHT PRO RATED RECOMMENDED USE WEIGHT NOT PRO RATED COUNT ALL COURSES EQUALLY NO WEIGHT Option 1 USE WEIGHT PRO RATED is the recommended setting If all of your courses meet no more than one period each day this setting will have the same effect as Option 3 COUNT ALL COURSES EQUALLY Option 1 should be used however because it allows courses that meet more than one period each day to count more than courses meeting only one period per day Option 2 USE WEIGHT NOT PRO RATED should not be used because it also causes courses meeting all year to count more than courses meeting one semester which you do not want to do for an honor roll If you choose to use weight either pro rated or not courses will be weighted according to the weights in the master course list What Does Pro Rating Mean Pro rating allows courses that meet more than one period each day to count more than courses meeting one period per day Pro rating of weight will occur only if you are doing an honor roll based on a grade in a report card column that has been de
188. RD GRADE ENTRY FORM SECOND MARKING PERIOD CRSE SC 011 01 CRSE NAME H Fr Eng TEACHER Dow Joe CREDITS 1 00 TIME F12345 ROOM 112 QUARTER FULL YEAR CURR SIZE 16 GPA FACTOR 0 00 ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS EFT CIT E GR pen e p d du dq dg Ns p poe ge ps a p sper S eee cm d a DR RR DR E EN EN ERRORS Sr Rd Dad ERA NA MR oe D ME S DL gg LLL dl pe yep d cad DE a ed LL LA Eu pep Mitchell Lindsay 030 85 8 Manual Grade Entry Form How To Fill Them Out The italic entries demonstrate how a teacher would enter their first marking period grades and com ments Note that a student who was not on the roster was manually written in at the bottom of the form 07 05 2002 REPORT CARD GRADE ENTRY FORM SECOND MARKING PERIOD CRSE SC 011 01 CRSE NAME HFr Eng TEACHER Dow Joe CREDITS 1 00 TIME F12345 ROOM 112 QUARTER FULL YEAR CURR SIZE 16 GPA FACTOR 0 00 NAF CGR ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS EFT CIT Danis Rebecca Fountaine Brenda Froelich Kimberl Goodman Ivy Hancock Ellen Hanson Philip ce Lesniak Jeremy Macdonald Joseph Mitchell Lindsay Morrill Nancy Schuettinger Joh Scribner Carrie Smart Caleb Sprague Devon ee TED With Previous Grades o I As this sample shows any previous grades MEER that students have will be printed on the manual gra
189. Report Cards Manual 7 19 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Specification Description SUBJECT LEV 1st 2nd 3rd 4th FINAL CROTS TEACHER EFFORT SP ELE 2 z an 8 75 no B E 5 a SP Algebra 5a 63 70 71 66 1 00 Walters J Cooperative Positive Attitude SPE Sd 74 75 75 77 75 1 00 Bolduc K Good Work Habits SPSocStu z g 88 71 Z a O arte S Not Working To Full Potential Soc 8 73 ur o5 7 a no a 5 ing To Full P gt AVERAGES 758 75 7 773 902 772 5 00 p CAREER CREDITS E 5 00 CAREER QUALITY PTS t 462 00 CAREER WEIGHT 6 00 CAREER GPA T 1 1 PRINT CREDIT COLUMN ONLY The same thing will happen as in choice 2 except that credits earned to date will NOT be printed at the bottom of report cards as in the following sample report card ECT LEY 1st 2nd od 4th FINAL CROTS TEACHER EFFORT E 2 z 2n a 7 a0 B E m gebra 5 63 70 71 B6 1 00 W alters J Cooperative Positive Attitude Sa 74 76 76 Fri 76 1 00 Bolduc K Good Work Habits E RE Br 05 7 A n C S ing To Full P g AVERAGES 75 8 75 7 773 902 772 6 00 CAREER QUALITY PTS 462 00 CAREER WEIGHT i 6 00 CAREER GPA f 77 17 PRINT BOTTOM TOTALS ONLY The same thing will happen as in choice 2 except that the column listing credits earned for each course will NOT be printed SUBJECT TEACHER EFFORT SE Fr Eng T2 Bosworth E High motivated to do quite wellt 8 SP Algebra Walters J Cooperative Positive Attitude SP E Sd JU Bolduc K Goo
190. Report Cards Plus automatically causes your printer to print the student number marks using the bold feature of your printer If you must use an old ribbon you may also tell Report Cards Plus to use enhanced print as well In other words the student number marks will be printed both in bold and enhanced Bold print cause a second pass of the printer to print a second dot slightly to the right of each original dot Enhanced print causes another pass which prints another dot slightly below the original dots The computer will fill in the bubbles in the STUDENT NUMBER box one line at a time After each line the printer will pause allowing you to align the forms so that the marks fall entirely inside the bubbles in the STUDENT NUMBER box You may then press G to print the next line After the form seems to be aligned do the spacing test one more time for the entire STUDENT NUMBER box After the forms have been aligned the following window will allow you to select for which students in your selected grade level forms will be printed Report Cards Manual A 5 Chapter A Print Schedule Scan Forms Printing Schedule Scan Forms Sorting by Your Chosen Fields Selecting this option displays a lookup window Choose a field to sort by and then click Select NOTE For the sake of this example let s assume you selected the Homeroom field A 6 Report Cards Manual The How to Sort window appears Administrator s Plus HOW TO
191. Report Writer includes all of the features of the Data Base Report Writer Reports and letters are designed similarly Users can print report cards containing attendance data and information from the student database and even perform searches based on report card criteria such as grade range In this chapter you will find all the information you need to print report cards transcripts and other reports in an attractive and easy to read format including instructions on how to custom design your own reports to meet your school s particular needs Report Cards Report Writer lets you Design and print numerous reports Print report cards with or without skills Print transcripts Print deficiency letters Print honor roll certificates and congratulatory letters Print honor roll certificates Report Cards Manual 7 3 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List Using the Task List Although the Report Cards Report Writer is extremely powerful and versatile the vast majority of the time you will use it to perform a handful of standard tasks including printing report cards transcripts and permanent labels ts Administrator s Plus a WIDE Report Card Print a NARROW Report Card Print a WIDE Transcript by year Print a WIDE Transcript by department Print a NARROW Transcript by year Print a NARROW Transcript by department Print a Permanent Label Print one separate report card per course Print an Honor Roll Certificat
192. S Prints his or her depending on entry in SEX field SEX Prints son or daughter depending on entry in SEX field SX2 Prints he or she depending on entry in SEX field YEAR Current School Year Name YOG Year of Graduation SF Search Field SC Search Category SFC Search field s and criteria ULINE X Y Underlines text starting at X ending at Y i e ULINE 3 5 D 24 Report Cards Manual New Box Codes Skills and Concepts New Box Codes The following is a list of new box codes available only in version 3 of Administrator s Plus or higher Box codes allow you to print report card components such as grades attendance and GPA value inside an attractive table Each box code includes a list specifications with which you can control the table s parameters including the size of rows and columns borders text alignment and fonts for body and header text Attendance Box This procedure creates a box for the number of absences tardies dismissals days present and days of school by marking period or it can print using date ranges Date ranges are set in the Report Card Report Writer specifications Marking periods are set in the Calendar program AttendanceBoxStart Print Y or N BoxWidth Auto RowHeader Width ColumnWidth Auto or LeftBorderWidth RightBorder Width TopBorder Width BottomBorder Width BoxHeight Auto or T
193. S CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS 0 50 CREDITS 0 33 CREDITS 0 67 CREDITS 2 00 CREDITS CREDIT ALWAYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C a E A code of 1 will cause a course to be skipped while a code of 2 will cause the previously awarded weight to be cut in half Quarter And Semester Courses In A Complete Updating If acomplete updating is being done for a school with one final grade column designated as a credit column and if that final grade column is blank the following will take place for quarter and semester courses 8 44 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated The computer will look for a grade in an earlier column designated as a semester column If it finds one it will look for any additional grades after it in columns other than exam columns If it does NOT find any additional grades it will permanently copy the earlier semester grade to the final grade column and use it in awarding credits quality points and weight This earlier semester grade will now appear on report cards as BOTH the semester grade and the final grade Note that a W or I after this semester grade will cause the semester grade NOT to be copied to the final grade column BRIEF EXAMPLE OF A COMPLETE UPDATING The following is a worksheet for a complete updating in a school using letter grades This school has the final grade column as its only column worth credit The following worksheet shows a student s fina
194. S AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number of credit columns 1 1 0000 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE amp grade of P is never included in an average RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 2 5000 ADI QP 65 0000 SIMPLE QP Z60 0000 WEIGHT 2 2500 PREV IGPA 0 0000 THIS GRADE 1 0000 90 0000 0 0000 0 0000 NE IGPA 0 0000 NEW 4 5000 65 0000 E 60 0000 3 2500 PREV ALPA 61 5385 NE AGRA 1 5385 This course does not count towards quality points and weight due to the grade of P for passing in both the midyear and final columns However credits are awarded because P is a passing grade Course 9 9 COURSE 700 01 Accting 1 Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 6 00 SEMESTER COURSE WR CreditfAverage Override Colwnn BLANK Full Credit Full Average FINAL GRADE 75 CREDITS AWARDED Qtr or Sem course Possible credits 1 0000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 75 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point 75 0000 WEIGHT Qtr or Sem course Possible wei ght 1 0000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 75 0000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 75 0000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 4 5000 ADI QP 265 0000 SIMPLE QP i60 0000 WEIGHT 3 2500 PREY SGPA 0 0000 THIS GRADE 1 0000 75 0000 75 0000 1 0000 NE
195. S sectione bus 9 Program 9 ARCHIVE 10 Program A PRINT SCHEDULE SCAN FORMS corio drtaiet 10 Program B SCAN SCHEDULES 10 Program C TRANSFER CREDITS Be OPA cmes dta pdiodsn to ticis 10 Report Cards Manual 1 Introduction Introduction Introduction 2 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Plus allows you to define each master course so that when the course is successful completed students will earn the appropriate credit weight and quality points You can schedule students into sections of master courses using either the Scheduling Plus module or by manually entering students into course rosters using the Enter Grades program In each marking period you can enter students grades manually import them from GradeQuick or use an NCS optical scanner to scan the grades into the program After entering students grades you can perform various calculations including Calculating semester and final averages using the specific terms and weights you specify Defining up to 5 honor rolls based on students term averages and or a minimum grade requirement Customizing the calculation of students cumulative GPA and class rank Producing grade distribution reports by teacher or by course and department The Report Cards Report Writer comes with numerous reports including attractive report cards and transcripts permanent record labels grade searches by student or teacher honor roll certifi
196. SORT GRADE 9 BY HOMEROOM Om All categories One category Change sort field Main menu D o The ALL CATEGORIES choice will cause entry forms to be printed for all homerooms In other words all of the entry forms for the students in your first homeroom will be printed alphabetically followed by all of the entry forms for the students in your next homeroom The ONE CATEGORY option will allow you to enter a specific homeroom and only entry forms for those students will be printed Note that the category must be entered EXACTLY as at has been entered for each student Watch the case of your letters If you print scanner forms sorted by a field that field will be printed on each form For example if you print them sorted by homeroom each form will contain the student s homeroom printed at the top Moreover all of the forms for the students in each homeroom will be printed together Scan Students Schedules Introduction Main Menu B 2 The Actual Scanning Of The Request Forms B 2 Scanner Error B 3 STUDENT NUMBER ERROR B 4 Resolving Errors B 4 Report Cards Manual B 1 Chapter B Scan Students Schedules Introduction Main Menu Introduction Main Menu This program may be used to scan course requests into the computer for SCHEDULING PLUS or to scan students schedules into the computer for those not using SCHEDULING PLUS This sections will expl
197. STUDENTS 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 6 Start Grade 7 End Grade Entry Forms Skills Grade Verification Form Description This specification allows you to choose for which sections you want the forms printed For example if it is the end of the 1st marking period choose Option 1 to print forms only for sections meeting during the 1st marking period This will include sections meeting during the 1st quarter 1st semester and all year courses Courses meeting during the 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter or 2nd semester will be excluded The next window includes the option to further limit forms to staff members whose ID s fall within a designated range This drop down list will display the 25 character names for each report card column that you have defined as a marking period in the Customize Report Card Columns window This specification determines ONLY what the top of the form will say The previous specification determines for which sections forms will be printed You can set this specification to No in order to print forms for only those sections that have students enrolled in them Forms may be printed for courses within a numeric range For example forms for courses from 200 to 299 will be printed if specification 4 is set to 200 and specification 5 is set to 299 If specification 4 is set to 1 and specification 5 to 999 all courses will be included
198. Scan Forms Introduction xo 62s de emeora taaws A 2 Printing Schedule Scan Forms A 2 Performing a Spacing Test A 5 Sorting by Your Chosen Fields A 6 Report Cards Manual A 1 Chapter A Print Schedule Scan Forms Introduction Introduction This program allows you to print scan forms so students can bubble in their schedules Students schedules may be entered into the computer using an NCS optical scanner This program will pre print students names onto the scanner forms The computer will also print students ID numbers in the STUDENT NUMBER box and it will print marks in the bubbles of this box so that the computer will later be able to identify to which student each form belongs The first two digits of the ID number is a code for a student s grade level 01 stands for the youngest grade in your school while 02 is your next youngest grade etc The last three digits is the student s ID number For example if your school contains grades 9 12 04010 is student 10 in grade 12 These same forms may also be printed by the COURSE REQUEST FORMS program in SCHEDULING PLUS By bubbling just course numbers these forms are COURSE REQUEST FORMS for Scheduling Plus By bubbling in both course and section numbers they may be used to enter students schedules into the computer for Report Cards Plus Consequently these forms are often called REQUEST forms when in fact they may also be used for scanning sche
199. Specification 9 PRINT DAILY ATTENDANCE set to Yes Code ZABSENCES ZTARDIES ZDISMISSALS ZU Description Prints the word TO Prints the Vertical Line Prints the word YEAR Prints the word ABSENCES Prints the word TARDIES Prints the word DISMISSALS Prints number of underline characters Universal Report Codes The following codes can be used in all report writers in Administrator s Plus Code BLANK Forces blank line s 7 16 Report Cards Manual Description The last line of a report is the last line containing code or text Consequently all empty lines after the last line are disregarded Insert BLANK codes to leave blank lines at the end of a report within a report simply leave an empty line to create space You can control the height of a blank line within a report by setting the font size of the BLANK code for example size 4 for a small blank line size 12 for a larger one on that line Code CNXN Centering Code HLINE XY Header line ULINE X Y Underline VLINE Y1 Y2 Vertical Line Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description The Centering Code helps center school information on report headers You can view and edit school information from the Customize Data Base program or by choosing File Customize School Information from the upper toolbar The after the c
200. TER SPECIFICATION amp TO CHANGE Description When adding a new section Report Cards Plus can save you a few keystrokes by printing as the defaults for the new section the same teacher room and meeting time that the previous section for that course has You may then accept or type over these defaults If you do not want default settings to appear when you add a new section set this specification to No To add a new section of a course you will need to choose F2 ADD If this specification is set to No you will need to press F2 ADD each time you want to add a new section to a course If this specification is set to Yes after you create a section another new section will automatically be added When you are finished press ESC to cause the last additional section to be erased and leave the add mode If you choose to include the 40 character course description on your master course printout the print will be condensed to allow it to fit properly on a page Specification 4 PRINT GPA SETTINGS ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT 5 PRINT PREVIEWER 6 FONT SIZE FOR MASTER COURSE AND SECTION LIST 7 PRINT ACTIVE INACTIVE COURSEs Enter Courses Inspect Change Specifications Description This option lets you display the settings for the Count in Honor Roll and Count in GPA options in the View Edit Courses and Sections window Choose Yes to add columns in your Master Course List printout to display these settings See
201. TS QUALITY POINTS SEARCH CATEGORY LOWER LIMIT SEARCH CATEGORY UPPER LIMIT MINIMUM WEIGHT lt 0 FOR NONE gt 8 70 Report Cards Manual Description There are two types of quality points so that you may maintain both an adjusted and simple career GPA for each student The adjusted GPA takes into account the fact that some advanced courses may offer more quality points for a grade than would be awarded for the same grade in a lower level course The simple GPA is calculated with the same number of quality points being offered for each grade regardless of the level of the course This specification determines which of these types of GPA will be used when you calculate class rank to either paper or the disk If your search category in SPECIFICATION 5 has been set to QUALITY POINTS or GPA this setting determines whether the simple or adjusted quality points will be used This setting determines whether the report will be based upon students career grade point averages credits or quality points In other words you can rank students by credits or quality points as well as by grade point average Specification 5 will allow you to enter as your search category either GPA CREDITS or WEIGHT If you enter GPA as your criterion the computer obtains the GPA for each student by dividing their career quality points by their career weight The value entered in this setting SEARCH CATEGORY LOWER LIMIT will keep students off of your
202. TS weight adjusted quality points 35 0000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADI QP 70 0000 SIMPLE QP 70 0000 WEIGHT 0 7500 PREY IGPA 93 3333 THIS GRADE 1 5000 35 0000 90 0000 1 0000 NE SGPA 91 4286 NEW 1 5000 165 0000 160 0000 1 7500 PREV AGPA 93 3333 NE ACPA 34 2 57 Therefore the student receives full credit for passing this course and full weight is used during the end of the year update Report Cards Manual 8 61 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Because this is an honors chemistry course the GPA factor has been entered as 5 00 Because there is a GPA factor of 5 for both the midyear and final grades 5 points are added to the simple quality points to get the adjusted quality points To obtain the simple and adjusted quality points for the grade the weight of 50 is multiplied by the simple and adjusted quality points For example 50 is multiplied by the simple quality points of 93 to obtain 46 50 simple quality points for the midyear grade 0 50 is then multiplied by the adjusted quality points of 98 to obtain 49 adjusted quality points for the midyear grade A similar calculation is performed to the final grade of 90 Adding 5 quality points produces an adjusted quality point total of 95 Multiplying this by the weight of 0 50 produces 47 50 adjusted quality points for the final grade compared with 45 simple quality poi
203. The OTHER column is NOT included in total percentages If all of the grades for a section fall into the OTHER column that section will not be printed In other words Report Cards Plus will assume that the section did not meet for that marking period The program will attempt to avoid splitting a course or teacher between two pages of the report In other words before starting a teacher or course it will determine if there is enough space left on the current page for all of the sections If there is not enough space left the program will skip to the top of the next page After selecting the distribution report type you will be asked to choose the report card column on which the report should be based Any column may be used except COMMENT and ABSENT columns or columns designated as type OTHER In other words Grade Distribution Reports may be based on any column of type PERIOD EXAM SEMESTER or FINAL If yours is a two semester school that gives credit at the end of each semester select ALL CREDIT COLUMNS This specification is used to set the number of columns needed on the report LETTER GRADES WITH require three columns for each letter grade such as A A A LETTER GRADE report created without using or will need only one column If you are using NUMBER GRADES you will have the option to set a range in the next window that appears YEAR If you have transferred GPAs credits so that previous grades show in View Change
204. UARTER UPDATE NO UNIVERSAL UPDATING SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM LETTER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR MINIMUM NUMBER GRADE FOR THE GP FACTOR REGENTS OPTION ADD OR MULTIPLY GPA FACTOR 090 Rediker Richard ALREADY UPDATED will be wn updated first CURRENT CREDITS 12 7500 ADI QP 11937 7500 SIMPLE QP 1135 2500 WEIGHT 12 5000 CURR IGPA 86 5370 LAST UPDATE 1 7500 A 130 2500 g 127 7500 1 5000 PREV IGPA 9552 PREVIOUS 1 0000 1067 5000 1067 5000 1i 0000 CURR ALPA 6 7222 PREY AGPA 6 9582 weeKKEE YEAR QO s t4t4 1 COURSE 050 01 Ad Eng Use Possible Credits 06 00 Possible Weight 0 25 GPA Factor 0 00 QUARTER COURSE OUR Credit Everage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average GRADE COPIED FROM SEMESTER GRADE COLUMN TO FINAL GRADE COLUMN FINAL GRADE 90 CREDITS AWARDED Qtr or Sem course Possible credits SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT Qtr or Sem course Possible wei ght COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADJ QP 0 0000 SIMPLE QP 9 60000 WEIGHT 0 0000 PREV IGPA 90 0000 THIS GRADE 90 0000 zz 5000 22 5000 90 2500 NE IGPA 30 0000 N 90 0000 22 5000 I 22 5000 0 2500 PREV AGPA 0 0000 NB AGPA 30 0000 COURSE 053 01
205. UNIVERSAL SPECIFICATIONS GRADE POINT AVERAGES 1 MINIMUM LETTER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR Po 2 MINIMUM NUMBER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR 60 E NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES 0 to 4 2 5 ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE SPECIFICATION 1 MINIMUM LETTER GRADE FOR GPA FACTOR SPECIFICATION 2 MINIMUM NUMBER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR The GPA factor is either added to or multiplied by the quality points of higher level courses Grades BELOW what you enter here will not be modified by the GPA factor For example if you are a letter grading school enter a D to not have the quality points of a grade of F raised by the GPA factor SPECIFICATION 3 NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES 0 TO 4 It is strongly recommended that you never use more than TWO decimal places This is because you may not have more significant figures in your average than the numbers used to calculate the average Because teachers do not usually use decimals when they give tests or submit their grades any digits after the second decimal tend to be meaningless SPECIFICATION 4 USE REGENT S COLUMN FOR CREDITS Schools in New York may use this option to cause the HIGHER of the grades in the final column and REGENT S column to be used in updating student s career credits and grade point averages To use this option the school must meet these criteria 1 A report card column must be designated as the final grade and it must be the only column designated as a CREDIT col um
206. UR CreditfAverage Override Column i HALF Credit HALF Average MIDYERR GRADE 45 OVE CREDITS ADJUSTMENT code of i or 4 or in the WR column means to use half the possible credits 0 5000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 45 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS GPA FACTOR NOT USED because the grade is less than the MINIMUM grade for the GPA factor 45 0000 OVR WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT code of i in the OR column means to use half the weight so that this grade counts 504 0 5000 WEIGHT Poll year course Possible weight Full year course X weight 50 H 0 2500 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 11 2500 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 11 2500 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 7500 ADI QP 113 0000 SIMPLE QP 116 5000 WEIGHT 1 2500 PREY SGPA 33 2000 THIS GRADE 9 0000 11 2500 11 2500 9 2500 NB IGPA 65 1667 HES f 0 7500 120 2500 n 127 7500 1 5000 PREY AGPA 95 2000 NH AGPA 66 6232 6 COURSE 550 01 Chorus Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 99 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Pull Credit Pull Average MIDYERR GRADE 96 CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits full course Y weight 50 0 5000 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE It has a GPA factor of 33 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 7500 ADJ QP 130 2500 SIMPLE QP 127 750
207. URSE the cursor will move to the next available OLD COURSE You may move around the window to edit any entry at any time by using the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to move up and down a column or by moving the TAB and Report Cards Manual 9 7 Chapter 9 Archive HOW TO CHANGE THE NUMBERS OF ARCHIVED COURSES SHIFT TAB keys to move between columns Pressing the Clear button at the bottom of the window will clear the table so that you can start over When the table is as you want it press the Next button at the bottom of the window After the table has been set you will be able to enter a STARTING and ENDING grade level for which the translation will take place You will then be able to enter a STARTING ARCHIVAL year and an ENDING ARCHIVAL year For example if you want to change course numbers for the past two archived years enter a 2 or 2 as your STARTING ARCHIVAL YEAR and a 1 or 1 as your ENDING ARCHIVAL YEAR The starting year must always be the year that contains the oldest data NOTE DO NOT change a course number if a course already exists with the new number For example suppose you wish to change COURSE 102 to COURSE 200 and COURSE 100 to COURSE 102 If you change COURSE 100 to 102 first and then change COURSE 102 to 200 then all of the original COURSE 100 s and COURSE 102 s will be changed to COURSE 200 Think carefully about which course numbers to change first 9 8 Report Cards Manual Print Schedule
208. WARDED Quarter Course Possible credits Qtr course weight 100 0 0000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 30 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point 30 0000 WEIGHT Quarter Course Possible weight Qtr course X weight 100 0 2500 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 22 5000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 4 amp 2 5000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADI QP 0 0000 SIMPLE QP 0 0000 WEIGHT 0 0000 PREY IGPA 0 0000 THIS GRADE E 0 0000 22 5000 22 5000 90 2500 NE SCP 30 0000 NEW 0 0000 22 5000 22 5000 A 0 2500 PREY ACPA 0 0000 NB ACP 30 0000 The first line for each course shows the course number the number of possible credits weight and GPA factor that has been entered for the course The course length quarter semester or full year is also listed on the first line This quarter length course is not worth any credits it has an entered weight of 25 and a GPA factor of 0 The second line displays the status of the OVR Credit Override column The OVR column for this course is blank so it will count fully towards credits and GPA The third line shows the student s actual midyear grade in the course 8 50 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated The next six lines show the total credits awarded the simp
209. Y Select columns you wish to print Default Auto Default 0 2 Default 2 25 Default 0 35 Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default Center Default Center Default Y Default N Default N Default Academic Record Default Y Default Y Default Y Default Y Default Y Default Y Default Auto Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default Left PrintBorder Y or N continued TitleBorder N or Y TitleAndFont Text String PrintBodyAndFont Y or N CommentCellEnd ConceptsCellStart Print Y or N CellHeight Auto or LeftBorderWidth RightBorder Width TopBorder Width BottomBorderWidth TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center PrintBorder Y or N TitleBorder N or Y TitleAndFont Text String PrintBodyAndFont Y or N ConceptsCellEnd NarrativeCellStart Print Y or N WidthIfRight CellHeight Auto or LeftBorder Width RightBorder Width TopBorder Width BottomBorderWidth TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center PrintBorder Y or N TitleBorder N or Y TitleAndFont Text String PrintBodyAndFont Y or N Skills and Concepts New Box Codes Default Y Default N Default Comments Default Y Default Y Default Auto Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default Left Default Y Default N Default Concepts Default Y Default Y Default 1 Default
210. Y POINTS COURSE QUALITY POINTS 22 2500 PRIOR WEIGHT 0 0000 PRIOR QUALITY POINTS 0 0000 COURSE WEIGHT 0 2500 COURSE QUALITY POINTS 22 2500 TOTAL WEIGHT 9 2500 TOTAL QUALITY POINTS 22 2500 RUNNING AVERAGE QP UT 89 0000 OTHER CHECKS NOT ON HONOR ROLL Grade of 9 in a MAJOR course is less than 90 8 20 Report Cards Manual NOTE How Honor Roll Averages Are Calculated Statistical Reports How Honor Roll Averages Are Calculated A student s honor roll average is the average of his her grades in the report card column you have selected in Print Honor Roll Specifications See Defining Honor Roll Reports on page 8 15 A blank grade or grades of I P WP W N or X will be skipped In the numeric grading system the letter grades of A B C or D will also be skipped Students with comment codes outside of your specified limits in a course containing one of these skipped grades will still be eliminated from the honor roll For example assume that you have set your comment code upper limit as 2 A student with a comment code of 3 in a course with a blank grade will still be eliminated from the honor roll Each grade is then given a certain number of quality points based on either the letter grade or number grade quality point tables These tables may be customized through the Customize RC progr
211. a grade less than an A you can have a B in an AP course count as an A and not omit those students See The Universal Honor Roll Specifications determine how all honor rolls as well as column averages will be calculated including how courses will be weighted and whether all or only certain courses will be counted toward the average on page 5 for more information Acomplete help explanation window automatically pops up for each specification A detailed report may now be printed showing just how honor roll GPA s are calculated e If a student doesn t make an honor roll you may now print an INDIVIDUAL STUDENT AUDIT report showing just how their GPA was calculated and stating in plain English why they didn t make the honor roll Grade Point Averages Administrator s Plus also keeps a running career grade point average that takes into account all of a student s grades since they enrolled in your school This portion of the program is used to update students career credits and grade point averages at the end of the semester and at the end of the year It is also used to produced various reports based on students career credits and grade point averages such as class rank reports Class rank reports are written to the disk so that they can be optionally printed on report cards permanent labels and transcripts The newest version of the program allows you to track simple and adjusted GPA separately and print them both o
212. able to help you Highlight the correct staff member s name and press ENTER and his or her ID number will automatically be inserted If you wish to designate a section as UNASSIGNED enter 000 This will allow a room number to appear on students schedules for each section It will also allow you to print a schedule for each room s usage in Scheduling Plus If you do not wish to enter a room simply press ENTER to leave it blank You have a limit of 4 characters either letters or numbers Enter the meeting time The Course Length CRS LEN field only applies to sections of quarter and semester master courses It enables you to specify when during the school year the section meets If the master course length has been entered as quarter you will have to indicate which quarter the section meets Enter a number from 1 to 4 If the master course length has been entered as semester you will have to indicate in which semester the course meets Enter either a 1 or a 2 If you are a trimester school you will treat your trimester length courses as quarter courses and indicate that they meet quarter one two or three If the master course length has been entered as ALL YEAR the length of the section will automatically be entered as ALL YEAR and you will not have to enter anything in the COURSE LENGTH column The information you enter into the COURSE LENGTH column for a section is crucial to the following functions of Scheduling Plu
213. ace With Attendance Cancel Direction Repl Match Case C Up Down Replace an Replace Find Next Shift F7 Repeats the last search Clicking the Find button on the window pictured above performs the same function Options Menu 4 Administrator s Plus File Edit Search Options Window Generate Report 1 Student Per Phone Fixed Length Fields Ascii Hs ALT X to select The Options window is used to generated a report while in the body It is also used to tell the program to print one report per student with the same phone number and to set a report as ascii Option Description Generate The Generate Report option allows you to edit and preview reports Report from the same window While editing the body of a report from the View Edit Letter Reports program Save the report e Click the Generate Report button shown above Select a grade level or All Grades from the first Report Writer Print Menu then select All Students Individual Students or perform a database field search on the next window If you click this option after making changes to a new report a window will appear reminding you that this report will be made the active report If you click Yes you will not need to return to Specifications to make the report active Note that you must save a report before you can preview it 7 36 Report Cards Manual Option 1 Student Per Phone Fixed Lengt
214. aces may be used Continue entering percentages until all weights have been set to calculate the column specified The program remembers the weights entered for each marking period each time you calculate the averages for a particular column Consequently the next time you calculate averages for the Semester 1 column you will see the weights you entered the last time you calculated an average for that column If you calculate averages for the Final column you will see the weights you entered the last time you performed that operation The percentages that you enter are COMPARATIVE In other words they are used in relation to each other as a ratio If you want to calculate a midyear average in which the Ist marking period 2nd marking period and Midyear Exam grades count equally simply enter the same number as the percentage for each column For example entering 10 as the percentage for each and every column would produce the same results as entering 33 33 as the percentage for each and every column Report Cards Manual 5 5 Chapter 5 Calculate Averages NOTE Specifications Calculate Averages In the following example each marking period counts twice that of the exam grade Each of the following sets of weights will produce the SAME desired results Example One Example Two 1st Marking 40 1st Marking Period 1 0 Period 2nd Marking 40 2nd Marking Period 1 0 Period 20 Midyear Exam 0 5 Midyear Exam If there is n
215. ad to send her to the Nurse s office on more than one occasion with a strained shoulder 7 6 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List Printing an Honor Roll Certificate Use this task to print a simple certificate listing the student and the honor roll he or she achieved Use the default report 9 see below or if you are using a pre printed form available from Rediker Software call for a sample use report 8 You can also design your own REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL CERTIFICATE OF ACHIEVEMENT Kathy Albrecht has achieved HIGHHONORS FOR FIRST MARKING PERIOD Peter James 07 02 2002 PRINCIPAL DATE NOTE Note that Specification 2 PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR in the INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS window is set by default to conduct an honor roll search for this task You may change it to search for a different honor roll but it must be set to sort on one or all honor rolls See PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR on page 7 14 Exporting the Honor Roll to an ASCII File Named HROLL ASC The file created by this task will be composed of the names of the students on an honor roll the name of the honor roll they made and the marking period for which they made the honor roll The default report is 10 You could use this list to design your own honor roll certificate using a graphics program As with Task 9 specification 2 PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR in the INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS is set by default t
216. age 7 27 For example if you are a K 12 school and want to print report cards for only grades 9 12 set these specifications to grade 9 and grade 12 respectively Since the Start Grade must be earlier than the End Grade it may be necessary to set the End Grade before you set the Start Grade Choose from the following DO NOT PRINT CREDITS There will not be a credit column on the report card displaying the current earned credits for each course Also career credits earned to date will not be printed at the bottom of the report card PRINT CREDIT COLUMN AND BOTTOM TOTALS There will be a credit column on the report card displaying the current earned credits for each course Credits will be earned by having a passing grade in any column s that have been designated as CREDIT columns when you customized your report card columns using the Customize RC program See Customize Report Card Columns on page 1 5 If you have one credit column all courses will be given full credit for a passing grade in that column If you have more than one credit column full year courses will earn a portion of their credit for a passing grade in each of the credit columns In other words if you have two semester grade columns that are each credit columns a full year course would earn half credit for a passing grade in each column Also career credits earned to date will be printed at the bottom of the report card as in the following sample report card
217. age 8 37 This will ensure that grades obtained in middle school courses are not averaged in with grades obtained in high school courses thus lowering students overall GPAs After resetting GPAs and credits to zero students cumulative credit totals and GPAs can be calculated using the high school grading system for only those grades obtained in high school courses Report Cards Manual 3 NOTE Introduction How to Archive Grades If you wish to use the Calculate Averages program to automatically calculate students midyear and or final averages you must use Specification 3 Calculate Letter or Number Grades to tell the program which grading system to use By default the Calculate Averages program uses the following quality point table to calculate letter grades A 4 33 B 3 33 C 2 33 D 1 33 F 0 00 A 4 00 B 3 00 C 2 00 D 1 00 F 0 00 A 3 67 B 2 67 C 1 67 D 0 67 F 0 00 If your school wishes to calculate letter grades using an alternate quality point table please contact Rediker Software Technical Support at 1 800 882 2994 for assistance When calculating averages on a numeric system the actual grade symbol is used and not the quality point value assigned in the grade table See Edit Grade Table on page 1 2 How to Archive Grades NOTE The Transfer Credits amp GPA feature of Report Cards Plus can archive grades in preparation for printing transcripts Yo
218. ain the scanning of schedules If you are scanning course requests see the sections explaining the ENTER REQUESTS program in the SCHEDULING PLUS manual In order to use this program to enter students schedules into the computer place a check in the box labeled Scan Sections All scanner forms must be properly filled out according to the following guidelines The top of the form is a work area where students may optionally enter each course name its number and section These course master numbers and sections must then be bubbled in at the bottom of the form The course class number and section should be entered at the top of a rectangle and the appropriate bubbles below it filled in Leading zeroes should be entered and filled in For example if a student is taking course 059 01 under class number for rectangle 1 059 should be entered and next to it 01 should be entered as the section Then for the course number the zero bubble under the 0 should be darkened the 5 bubble under the five should be darkened and the 9 bubble under the 9 should be darkened Similarly for the section the 0 bubble under the zero should be filled in and the 1 bubble under the one should be filled in If more than one bubble in a column is darkened or if any columns are left blank the computer will treat the entry as an error When the computer comes to the first completely blank rectangle it will stop reading the form Consequently do not accidentally l
219. am See Chapter 1 Edit Grade Table on page 1 2 The default quality points for number grades is the value of the grade itself In other words a grade of 95 will be awarded 95 quality points if you do not modify the Grade Table The default quality points for letter grades are A 433 B 3 33 C 2233 D 1 33 F 0 00 A 4 00 B 3 00 C 2 00 D 1 00 F 0 00 A 3 67 B 2 67 C 1 67 D 0 67 F 0 00 The following sample worksheet shows how the average might be calculated based on grades a student obtained during the 1st marking period in a school using letter grades SUBJECT GRADE QP GPAFACTOR ADJQPxWEIGHT TOTAL QP MATH A 400 0 4 00 x 1 00 4 00 ENGLISH F 0 00 0 0 00 x 1 00 0 00 AP HISTORY B 3 00 1 4 00 x 1 00 4 00 ART BLANK SPANISH P GYM C 2 00 0 2 00 x 0 50 1 00 GRAND TOTALS 3 50 9 00 GPA GRAND TOTALQP GRAND TOTAL WEIGHT GPA 9 00 3 50 2 57 Report Cards Manual 8 21 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Honor Roll Averages Are Calculated The QP column shows the awarded quality points based on the default letter grade quality point table ART is skipped because there is no first marking period grade and SPANISH is skipped due to the grade of P If your honor roll criteria says to use the GPA factor the awarded quality points will be adjusted by either multiplying the GPA factor times the awarded quality points or adding the GPA factor to the awarded quality points A setting in
220. and Concepts Initial Setup 4 To print the entire list of skills press or click F9 Print The following sample report lists each skill including the description code group heading and record number REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL 04 23 2002 SKILLS CODE LIST Alphabetically By Description DESCRIPTION CODE GROUP HEADING RECORD Applies standard conventions grammar spelling punctuation W3 Writing Communicates mathematical ideas with numbers words drawing M1 Demonstrates ability to count from 1 to 100 F2 French Demonstrates ability to locate files and programs coz Computing Evaluates and shows understanding of information in class di S51 6 Formulates and implements a variety of strategies to solve p M2 Presents ideas and gathers information in writing with clari 552 Progresses toward conducting an independent investigation Sca Progressing toward reading Z5 grade appropriate books Ri Reading Questions predicts and makes observations Shows evidence of planning drafting revising editing Writing Shows evidence of understanding his her reading in writing d Reading Uses data to support conclusions Uses proper pronunciation when reading and speaking French Uses the ilnternet to research an assigned topic Comput ing Writes a well organized piece using relevant facts and deta Writing 5 To enter your list of concepts click the Concepts tab at the top of the window View Edit Or Print Concepts b ini xi Concepts RECORD 17
221. and so on If you have defined your archival files to hold three year s worth of report cards information they will contain slots for YEAR 1 YEAR 2 and YEAR 3 At the end of each year after updating students career credits and grade point averages this option will be used to archive the current year s report cards data ARCHIVING means copying this year s data which is YEAR 0 into the archival file as YEAR 1 It will also move all of the current data in the archival file back one year The previous diagram shows what happens when the archival process is run Note that the archival process does not MOVE the current year s data from YEAR 0 to YEAR 1 but it COPIES it In other words after running the archival process the current year s data is in two places It still exists as YEAR 0 and it is also in YEAR 1 When the BEGINNING program is used the YEAR 0 data will be erased to make room for next year s current data In the archival file however MOVING does take place The data from YEAR 1 is moved to YEAR 2 and the data from YEAR 2 is moved to YEAR 3 Because this archival file has only been set up for three years any data in YEAR 3 will be lost After using option 1 you may make further changes to YEAR 0 data Use this option to copy the data from YEAR 0 to YEAR 1 without also moving the other years back another year Report Cards Manual 9 3 Chapter 9 Archive Archive Specification UNARCHIVE 9 4 R
222. and two after Report Cards Manual 7 63 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Codes That May Share a Line With Other Codes The spaces in the codes below are for illustration only Do NOT leave any spaces in the NOTE actual codes Code IGR YR CR CL3HHE IGR YR CR CL3HHE INM YR CR NUM IND YR CR NUM lLV YR CR NUM IST YR CR NUM ITI XX CL NUM 7 64 Report Cards Manual Description GRADES Number grades are right justified letter grades are padded to 2 if no plus or minus is used and then also right justified Letter grades will be allocated the number of spaces indicated by the length of the This grade will print only if the specification on Page 3 of Report Cards Report Writer is set to Yes For example GR999901 will print the column one grade CL 1 for the year in the specification setting YR 99 for the current course in the course loop CR 99 Three spaces will be allocated for the grade GRADES This code is similar to the one on the previous page but it prints the grade AFTER it has been adjusted by the GPA factor This code only works for number grades and was added to allow a school to juxtapose both adjusted and non adjusted grades See GPA Factor on page 2 8 COURSE NAME The course name will automatically print on the report card or transcript It can be found and modified in Enter
223. any time you are unable to solve a scanning problem call Rediker Technical Support at 1 800 882 2994 Report Cards Manual 4 17 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Scanning Grades Jam on feed bed Scanner not ready indicates the transport path needs to be cleared Clear the jam and then click on RESUME Any forms that were stuck in the scanner at the time of the error or that may have been scanned backwards will have to be re scanned with the next batch of forms Error 102 unable to find a component of SFW means the program cannot locate an essential file Resolve by copying the sfw file from the rs4 config sfw folder to the rs4 sfw folder Reset scanner configuration Error 202 sfw already loaded can usually be resolved by rebooting the computer Error 302 cannot find SFW application is similar to error 102 described above Error 40l error requesting a sheet from sfw indicates a scanner problem See NCS Users Manual Input hopper empty Scanner not ready means the scanner hopper is out of scan forms This message appears as follows Administrator s Plus Grade Reporting Scan Form Fscannin b i Scanner Error E Error s Input hopper empty Scanner not ready Last Document 004303 Expecting Sheet Start of document SO BR SHOE HRA SCHOOL Grade Reporting Scan Form Layout nd rc Us rc O Recovery Add sheets to input hopper L1 ble you to specify int
224. appear when you click on this specification Simply choose the desired column from the list Most of the report cards transcripts and permanent label reports are designed to print attendance data The obvious exceptions are the transcripts in which courses are organized by department rather than by year Use this specification to designate whether or not you wish to print this attendance data Attendance data will be read only for the interval between and including these dates Specification B INTERVAL ENDING DATE always defaults to the current date The bottom of a report card contains two columns of attendance data One is for the interval defined by SPECIFICATIONS A and B and the other is for the first day of school through this date Note that this date may not be BEFORE the interval ending date as defined by SPECIFICATION B You may enter a three line message that will appear at the top of each report card Each line may contain 35 characters If you need to enter a longer message you may type the text directly into the body of the report See View Edit Letters Reports on page 7 32 for information on how to edit reports Report Cards Manual 7 17 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications PAGE 2 More Specifications These specifications work in conjunction with the COURSES TO PRINT specifications on page 3 of Specifications For example if you choose to include courses 100 through 900 and exclude 400 t
225. ar Report Cards Manual 8 39 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits This option is almost never used unless for some reason you wish to update a student again for the current year without first un updating him Although you can perform this function for all students in a grade level it is very unlikely that you would need to do it for more than one student at a time NOTE After this option has been run you will no longer be able to automatically un update students or print their last update reports You may still manually un update students by using the View Change Add Drop program to enter their OLD credits quality points and weight Reset Credits GPAs Last Update Data To Zero Whereas the last option described resets only the four LAST UPDATE figures to zeroes this option resets ALL eight figures to zeroes As with Option 4 this option should almost NEVER be used except in situations such as the following Assume that a school with grades 7 12 maintains credits and GPAs for students starting in grade 7 However once students reach grade 9 they wish to start over Each year this school will use this option to reset the credits adjusted quality points simple quality points and weight for only their grade 9 students back to zeroes NOTE Whenever you update based on a year other than the current year Report Cards Plus automatically resets the values to zero before it recalculates You therefore
226. ar you will probably want to update their career grade point averages based on their midyear grades in order to calculate their up to date rank in class for college transcripts When you perform a temporary update you will have to set Specification 1 UPDATE BASED ON WHICH COLUMNS to the column on which the update will be based At midyear you will likely set the Midyear or Semester 1 grade as your selected column You will then be required to set the percentage of each course s total weight you wish to use for your FULL YEAR SEMESTER and QUARTER COURSES You may enter a different percentage for each type of course See 4 PERCENT TO WEIGHT FULL YEAR COURSES on page 8 34 for additional information on entering these weights Do not confuse the weights entered in Update Specifications with the total weight of the course entered in View Edit Courses amp Sections The number entered in Update Specifications represents a PERCENTAGE of the total weight set in View Edit Courses amp Sections See View Edit Courses amp Sections on page 2 3 When updating on the Semester grade if you enter 50 00 as the percentage for ALL YEAR courses students will receive 1 2 the credit amp GPA for the course at midyear General Rules For Calculating Credits Current credits are computed based on the grades in the credit columns See page 1 8 for information on how to designate a report card column as a CREDIT column Only passing grades that is grade
227. arch Header as a Universal Header Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description Word Wrap will be performed on all the lines of text between the WRAPON and WRAPOFF codes You may use the word wrap codes as many times as necessary in a report Word Wrap is generally used in letters Because the text in letters oftentimes contain variables that get replaced with entries from the data base Your son FN the length of a line containing the variable may get longer or shorter depending on the length of the data base entry replacing it Without the word wrap codes any line exceeding the margin settings will be truncated On the other hand if the line is very short it will print as is and look awkward Using the word wrap codes words that go beyond the right margin will scroll down to the next line with the rest of the lines below it being adjusted accordingly Similarly if the line does not fill the available space words from the line below will move up to fill the gap In order to maintain spacing between the first word in the line and the last word in the line above it there is one space at the beginning of every line inside the word wrap codes If the end of a line ends in the middle of a word do not leave a space so that both halves of the word will be joined For a sample of this feature go to View Edit Letters Reports in Data Base Plus and select report 42 the Samp
228. ard compatibility 7 74 Report Cards Manual Code ZBDT ZFDT ZYDT IMEMB ABS TAR DIS IMBYR NUM IABYR NUM TAYR NUM IDIYR NUM Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description The attendance beginning interval date as set by a specification An exclamation point is not needed The attendance ending interval date as set by a specification An exclamation point is not needed The attendance year to date final date as set by a specification Prints MEMB if the specification is set to print the attendance Prints ABS if the specification is set to print the attendance Prints TAR if the specification is set to print the attendance Prints DIS if the specification is set to print the attendance Prints MEMB if the year is in the transcript year interval set by specifications Prints ABS if the year is in the transcript year interval set by specifications Prints TAR if the year is in the transcript year interval set by specifications Prints DIS if the year is in the transcript year interval set by specifications Report Cards Manual 7 75 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Attendance Codes That Make Up the Daily Attendance Grid These codes make up the daily attendance grid on the bottom of report cards They print only if you have set
229. are set the way you want them to be PAGE 4 Transcript amp Optional Field Specifications Specifications Report Cards Report Writer NO SEARCH FIELD s Es 6 OPTIONAL FIELD FOR TRANS YR 2 NO SEARCH FIELD 7 OPTIONAL FIELD FOR TRANS YR 3 NO SEARCH FIELD 8 OPTIONAL FIELD FOR TRANS YR 4 NO SEARCH FIELD 9 USE NUMBER GRADE PRINT TABLE Yes No A TRANSCRIPT PRINTED AT END OF B YEAR GRADE LEVEL OFFSET C FIRST COURSE TO PRINT D LAST COURSE TO PRINT wo ae ae E PRINT PREVIEW F NARRATIVES FOR WHICH COLUMN S Select All Deselect All M COURSE 1st 2nd T MEX Jf MID E 3rd 4th EEX E M FNL ja Reset Default ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE H No S1 OPTIONAL FELD FOR TRANS R Za Z OPTIONAL FELD FOR TRANS YRS 15 OPTIONAL FELD FOR TRANS YR 4 19 USE NUMBER GRADE PRINT TABLE A TRANSCRIPT PRINTED AT END OF 18 YEAR GRADE LEVEL OFFSET C FIRST COURSE TO PROT JD LASTCOURSETOPRNTT JEYPRINT PREVIEW M NN a 7 24 Report Cards Manual Specification START YEAR FOR TRANSCRIPTS END YEAR FOR TRANSCRIPTS OPTIONAL FIELD 1 FOR RC TRANS OPTIONAL FIELD 2 FOR TRANS OPTIONAL FIELD FOR TRANS YR 1 OPTIONAL FIELD FOR TRANS YR 2 OPTIONAL FIELD FOR TRANS YR 3 OPTIONAL FIELD FOR TRANS YR 4 USE NUMBER GRADE PRINT TABLE TRANSCRIPT PRINTED AT END OF Report Cards Report Writer Speci
230. are set to print to the right of each course use this code to set the width in inches of the narrative box Specifies the Narrative cell height Auto will cause the cell height to AUTOCALC Controls width of border around narrative cell 0 thin border 3 thick border Determines the alignment left to right of the narrative header Specifies whether or not the narrative cell border prints Designates whether or not a border will print around the narrative title Determines the heading of the Narrative cell Text will adopt the specification line s font and size Determines whether or not narratives print in the cell If set to N the narrative cell will remain empty End of the codes that define what prints in the narrative cells of the advanced box End of the Skills table Specifications Code PrintAdvancedBox WhichCourses see below Left X Top Y Skills NonSkills All AllSkillFirst AllNonSkillsFirst HHH THER EHH HHH HHR HHH etc Attendance Box Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Description Determines the position on the page in which the Skills box prints The number after PrintAdvancedBox must match the number after AdvancedSpecStart The default entry after Which Courses is Skills but you can enter a course range or individual course numbers separated by commas The X and Y represent coordinates from the left margin and the top margin Th
231. ased on the grade earned in the course Because this course is not worth any credits the student obtained 0 credits for this grade The simple quality points is determined using the quality point value assigned in the grade table for the grade the student earned For this course the student obtained a grade of 90 which according to the grade table is worth 90 simple quality points These are the quality points before they have been adjusted due to the GPA factor or any other factor Because this course has a GPA factor of 0 the adjusted quality points equals the simple quality points Since this is a quarter course it is given its full weight of 25 100 was entered for how quarter courses should be weighted The course simple quality points for this grade are determined by multiplying the weight of 25 times the quality points of 90 which produces 22 50 course simple quality points for this grade Because the GPA factor is 0 the course adjusted quality points equals the course simple quality points The last three lines show the running total of credits quality points and weight for all of the student s courses for this updating It includes the previous added and new values for credit weight quality points as well as the simple and adjusted GPA Course 2 2 COURSE 056 01 Essay Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 00 GPA Factor 06 00 QUARTER COURSE CUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Av
232. ass Rank Report PRINT CLASS RANK REPORT PY TITLE oF THISREPORT O 1 TITLE OF THIS REPORT ICLASS RANK REPORT a 2 Aso PRINT To pisk oi El ALSO PRINT TO DISK MUST DO FOR TRAN DO FOR IMEEM SCRIPTS Gh 009 C E USE CAREER OR LAST UPDATE DATA USE CAREER DATA e CAREER DATA n USE SIMPLE OR ADJUSTED GPA S QUAL PTS USE ADJUSTED GPA DATA g SEARCH CATEGORY LOWER LIMIT 0 for none Ca SEARCH CATEGORY UPPER LIMIT 9999 for none 9999 00 ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Administrator s Plus will remember how you last defined this report If it is correct just click Done The next section explains the specifications in detail You will then see the following window lt 3 Administrator s Plus x PRINT CLASS RANK REPORT c GRADE NUMBER 4 K Next 8 66 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How to Obtain Class Rank Reports Select a grade level to begin generating the report If you have selected in the PRINT SPECIFICATIONS window to view the report on window you will see the following iewing Class Rank Report SORT BY AVERAGE REPORT TITLE CLASS RANK REPORT RANK NAME ID AVERAGE Bartlett Erin Poulin Sharon 65 Baldwin Missy 86 Southard Heather 6 Nappi Thaddeus 56 VanAvery Suzzane 83 Bullerwell Sherry 1 Carrigan Milli 58 Hagan Jaime 64 Bean Rachael 87 Biondi Zion 70 Ja
233. ated with each master course are exported to the shared directory designated to store skill files By default this is the GQWin SkillsFromAP folder administrator s Plus ENTER COURSES 1 View edit courses amp sections 2 Inspect change specifications 3 new Master amp section list files 4 new Section list file only 5 Rebuild section rosters 6 reBuild section list file 7 rebUild skills files 8 send skills to Grade quick 9 impOrt section list from samsa O e e e e e A End program x Next Preparing GradeQuick There are certain steps to take to prepare GradeQuick before skills work seamlessly with Administrator s Plus To Prepare GradeQuick 1 Log into GradeQuick as the AdminW and open your master grade book which is usually either School gbk or Master gbk 2 Click Options gt System Information D 12 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick The Edit System Information window appears Edit System Information I x Enter Information Pertaining To Your Computer System Morning Att Export Directo pAcGowinQAtAM Afternoon Att Export Direct pAGQWin GQAtPM Skill Export Directory PPlus Directory Phone Directory RAGQWiniGaPhone Home Directory m Skill Impart Directory RAGQWin SkillsFromAP E w ox Help Add New Field At End 3 Make sure that the Skill Import Directory indicates the correct path of the
234. atically entered for all students assigned a skill linked to the assessment scale If you do not wish to set a default value choose None Youcan optionally select the skill assessment value that equals mastery of a skill This setting is only for information purposes 3 Use the Scale Type radio buttons to either restrict the entry of skills grades to those that are defined in the assessment scale or to allow entries that are not in the assessment scale 4 Click OK 5 To associate an assessment scale with a skill select it from the drop down list Skills for Standard View Skills for Al Standards v Skill Name Standard Assessment Scale Date Instruction Completed General Scale 1 orks Well Independently General Works Wellin Cooperative Groups Works Well with Peers General Works Well with Adults General Works Independently General Scale 6 D 16 Report Cards Manual Gradebook Spreadsheet Z Skills Assessment Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick Date Completed To track which skills you have completed teaching select the date completed from the drop down calendar Assessment Scale Date Instruction Time Spent Completed Scale 1 v 9 21 2003 Scale 3 September 2003 s Mon Tue Wed Thu Scale 4 1 2 3 4 Scale 5 8 9 10 1 12 13 15 16 17 18 18 20 Scale 5 Hb 22 23 24 25 Time Spent Once you have c
235. bers will not match Instead you may use this option to specify a source grade level and ID number and a destination grade level and ID number When you choose this option you will see the following window Individual Student Override ini x SOURCE FOLDER 2001 02 ID 10100 AMEIKA ANN DESTINATION FOLDER 2002 03 fji 1100 AMEKA ANN Esc ri r2 rs ra ro re re ro F1 ABORT LOOKUP DEL ACCEPT To choose a student either type in his or her number or press F6 LOOKUP to pop up an alphabetical list of all of the students in your school The data will then be transferred regardless of what names occupy these ID numbers Consequently you must be careful to enter the proper information INSPECT CHANGE SPECIFICATIONS This option returns you to the previous window Skills and Concepts Introduction 23 8 rte EPERUEPS D 2 Initial Setup MEET MNT D 2 Entering Customized Lists of Skills and Concepts D 4 Link Skills and Concepts to GOUI SOS eret uei PITE D 6 Enter Skills Grades Manually D 9 Interfacing with GradeQuick D 10 Preparing Administrator s Plus D 10 Sending Skills to GradeQuick D 12 Preparing GradeQuick D 12 Setting up Skills D 13 Linking Skills to Standards D 14 Skills Assessment Scale D 15 Date Completed D 17 Time Spent 0 00 ee eee D 17 Descrip
236. bers that is the number that will print on the first page of the report PRINTPAGEHEADER This code causes the page header to print on the report The code is mandatory for the Page Header to print on the page It usually appears after the PGNUM X code in the report WRAPON WRAPOFF Word Wrap will be performed on all the lines of text between the WRAPON and WRAPOFF codes You may use the word wrap codes as many times as necessary in areport Word Wrap is generally used in letters Because the text in letters oftentimes contain variables that get replaced with entries from the data base Your son FN the length of a line containing the variable may get longer or shorter depending on the length of the data base entry replacing it Without the word wrap codes any line exceeding the margin settings will be truncated On the other hand if the line is very short it will print as is and look awkward Using the word wrap codes words that go beyond the right margin will scroll down to the next line D 22 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Universal Codes with the rest of the lines below it being adjusted accordingly Similarly if the line does not fill the available space words from the line below will move up to fill the gap In order to maintain spacing between the first word in the line and the last word in the line above it there is one space at the beginning of every line inside the word wrap codes If the
237. cal Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated However credits are awarded because of the passing grade of 96 Because it is a full year course 50 of the possible credits of 1 00 are awarded giving the student 50 credits for this grade Course 7 7 COURSE l21 02 Pre Calc Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE WR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average MIDYEAR GRADE TE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE OR CREDITS grade of I is never used Because the student s midyear grade in this course is an J for incomplete this course is skipped Course 8 COURSE 422 01 Latin Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 CPA Fac Ebr 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE WR Credit Average Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYEAR GRADE DP CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits full course 4 weight 50 0 5000 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE amp grade of P is never included in an average RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 1 2500 ADJ QP 130 2500 SIMPLE QP 127 7500 WEIGHT 1 5000 PREY IGPA 5 1667 THIS GRADE H 90 5000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 NE SGPA 5 1667 No 1 7500 130 2500 g 127 7500 1 5000 PREY ALPA 6 63233 HD ARPA 86 8332 This course does not count towards quality points and weight because the grade of P for passing has been assigned 0 quality points in the grade table
238. can receive after averages are calculated for number grades If you set 50 as the minimum numeric grade the lowest grade the student will receive is 50 regardless of the average the program calculates See the description of how Number Grades under NUMBER GRADES on page 5 9 NOTE NOTE Calculate Averages Specifications Calculate Averages Entering the Weight For Each Column When you have finished entering specifications you will see the following window Specifications Enter The Weight For Each Column ml x ENTER THE WEIGHT FOR EACH COLUMN Page Setup 000 00 000 00 000 00 000 00 000 00 pom Barr mo mo mo pasar Bass Bas so wo 000 00 000 00 000 00 000 00 000 00 THIS COLUM NG CALCULATED BE ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE The column into which you are calculating the average will have THIS COLUMN BEING CALCULATED next to it Beginning with the first column that will be used in calculating the average begin typing the weight you wish to assign that column For example to assign a weight of 20 to the First Marking Period type 20 When you press ENTER the weight will appear as a percentage in this case 020 00 You can enter any weight up to 999 Up to two decimal pl
239. can reflect either the current enrollment in that section or the enrollment as it was the day entry forms were printed The default is to use the CURRENT ROSTER If you have changed students schedules since your entry forms were printed but still want the Enter Grades Manually window to reflect their OLD schedules change this specification to read WHEN ENTRY FORMS PRINTED Report Cards Manual 4 3 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Entering Grades Manually Specification ERASE COMMENTS ENTER WHICH COLUMNS 4 4 Report Cards Manual Description Setting this specification to Yes causes any previous comments to be erased from the window the next time you bring up a course section in the Enter Grades Manually window Unless you enter new comment codes no comments will be printed on the report card If this specification is set to No old comments will be saved in the program and will appear on the window and on report cards if you do not replace them with new comments NOTE f you are retyping grades into a section or if you just wish to look at the grades in a section choose the option No so that you DO NOT ERASE OLD COMMENTS Otherwise your previously entered comments will be lost if you choose to save the section If no previous comment codes have been entered into your sections it does not matter which option you choose These specifications determine which columns you can edit They also determine if
240. canner or manual data entry forms If you are entering grades manually the names of the students in that section will appear on the window after entering the course and section number The only data you need to enter are the grades and one or two optional comment codes Also use this program to import students grades from GradeQuick Program 5 CALCULATE AVERAGES Calculate Averages This option calculates midyear or final average grades based on the marking period grades entered with the Enter Grades program The Calculate Averages program calculate averages for either letter or numeric grading systems See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information on calculating averages Blank Report Card Columns This option allows you to remove grades from a report card column for every student at once rather than deleting them one student at a time Many schools that need to update GPAs Credits on the third quarter for purposes of printing the class rank report and that do not have a midyear column on the report card use this option to blank the grades from the final column for all year courses after calculating an average into that column Program 6 VIEW CHANGE ADD DROP Transcript View The View Change Add Drop VCAD program can e View students transcripts and to make changes to those transcripts such as to fix incorrect grades that may have been entered with the Enter Grades program You can also use VCAD to view or change students gra
241. canning Grades Grades can be entered into the program quickly and accurately using an NCS optical scanner In order to use your NCS scanner you will need to calibrate and configure it according to the instructions in the NCS user s manual Owners of the OPSCAN 4 should use the window on the scanner to tell the scanner to emulate the 3000 and to use the default configuration Enter the baud rate at 9600 Before scanning grades each marking period the read head on the scanner should be cleaned with a lint free cloth as explained in the NCS user s manual In order to use the scanner select option 3 Scan Grades from the Enter Grades window If you select this option without first installing the scanner interface software the program will tell you that the scanner cannot be used until the software is installed The Scanner Interface software must be purchased separately from Rediker Software Once the Scanner Interface Software is installed when you click option 3 Scan Grades you should see the following window ig Administrator s Plus Grade Reporting Scan Form V Scannin b c s g Grade Reporting Plus Grade Report Form Numeric Alpha WORKSHOP HIGH SCHOOL Grade Reporting Scan Form Layout S Grades Into Period Grade c EEEN School Year 200203 fxam rade a c2 NENNEN ite IZ Ta Reset Scanner Adjust Sensitivity Setup Printer The purpose for this screen is to enable you to specify into
242. card and data base reports The next three sections in explaining how to create and edit report card reports will assume that you already know how to create and edit data base reports Both the Database and Report Cards Report Writer programs provide for 120 reports including pre formatted and customizable reports In the Data Base Plus module the definitions for the 120 reports are stored in small files in your data directory called WLABEL FDB where the sign is replaced by a number from 1 to 120 For example data base report 1 is stored as WLABEL1 FDB and data base report 60 is stored as WLABEL60 FDB In the report cards Plus module the last three letters of the report name end in FRC as opposed to FDB Consequently report card report 1 is stored as WLABEL1 FRC and report card report 60 is stored as WLABEL60 FRC In fact all data base reports will work in the report card module without change simply by renaming them so that the last three letters change from FDB to FRC As in Data Base Report Writer reports created in one school year can be made available in another school year by simply copying the wlabel file from one school year folder to the other provided that the report is available in the target year Briefly To Copy Reports Created in One School Year to Another School Year 1 Using Windows Explorer or My Computer navigate to the following path RS4 Data SchoolName SchoolYear 2 Copy t
243. card information from the 2004 05 directory to the 2005 06 directory Once this information has been transferred it will no longer be necessary to use the 2004 05 directory It can either be deleted from your hard drive to free up space or it can remain so that it can be used in the future for such purposes as printing the transcripts of graduating seniors who are not in the 2005 06 directory or looking up student s exact attendance records How to Archive Grades NOTE The The Transfer Credits amp GPA feature of Report Cards Plus can archive grades in preparation for printing transcripts You do not have to perform these steps immediately after installing Report Cards Plus however when you are ready to archive grades you should follow these instructions carefully Archive program should NOT be used to archive students grades The process of archiving grades is now performed using the Transfer Credits amp GPA program Using the Archive program in conjunction with the Transfer Credits amp GPA program will result in inaccurate transcripts Although the Archive program is still available it should only be used in special circumstances under the recommendation of Technical Support C 2 Report Cards Manual Students courses and grades are stored in the report cards files for the current year When creating a new school year the Beginning program creates an exact copy of the previous year until you run the Beginning program Running
244. cates congratulatory letters progress reports and warning letters All reports in the Report Card Report Writer may be customized to meet the specific needs of your school With the Report Writer you can determine what information prints on the report as well as customize font type size and color and design the overall layout of the report Up to 120 pre defined and or customized reports may be stored inside the Report Card Report Writer This manual assumes that you have already done the following Read and understood the Data Base Plus user s manual Used Data Base Plus to enter student and staff names Report Cards Plus consists of the twelve programs listed on the front of this manual These programs will generally be used in the order in which they are listed This manual describes each of the programs in its own chapter Please note that Administrator s Plus provides several methods of accessing a particular program including the navigation window click View Navigation Menu the shortcut bar click View Shortcut Bar and the toolbar at the top of the window If you ever have a question that is not answered in the manual please do not hesitate to call Rediker Software Technical Support at 1 800 882 2994 The next several pages provide information on two extremely important aspects of the Report Cards Plus program Using a Split Grading System on page 1 3 and How to Archive Grades on page 1 4 If you plan to print trans
245. cation to choose the grade level for which you want to print the report Report Cards Manual 3 31 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Enrollment Report By Teacher Enrollment Report By Teacher When you choose option 7 from the window on page 3 2 you will see the following specification window which is a modified version of the Grade Distribution Report specification window Specifications Teacher Enrollment Report SPECIFICATIONS TEACHER ENROLLMENT REPORT E INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN ALL SECTIONS X B OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN 5 E OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 999 Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE A sample of the teacher enrollment form is shown on page xxvii of the appendix For each teacher listed alphabetically it shows the number of students enrolled in each of their sections their total student enrollment and their average number of students per section The end of the report shows the average number of students per section for the entire school Again as in previous report windows you can select which sections you wish to include in your report by setting specification 1 After setting specifications for the report you will see the following window which allows you to select for which teachers you would like to print the report Administrator s Plus ENROLLMENT REPORT BY TEACHER PRINT WHICH TEACHERS 1 All teachers 2 Range of teachers 3 individual Teachers 4 New repor
246. cause an A to appear and pressing a 2 will cause a B to appear You may then enter an optional or after the grade Note that in this example pressing a 7 will insert C directly When in a COMMENT column or an ABSENT column number keys automatically revert back to numbers Using re defined number keys is a way for users who are more proficient at using the numeric keypad to enter grades quickly and easily NOTE 7 8 Enter Grades Entering Grades Or Skills Manually Click Next to display the Enter Grades And Skills window In the Enter CRS or CRS SC field enter the course or section The easiest way is to click the Browse button mn which displays the list of courses and sections from which you can choose You can also type your course section choices directly into the field The course section number must be entered with a forward slash separating the master course number and section number Leading zeroes are not necessary For example you can enter 54 1 or 054 01 You can also type in just the course number which will cause the first section of that course to appear Press the F7 REPEAT SEARCH key to call up the remaining sections of this course The course and section may be found at the top of each data entry form While in the Enter Grades Manually window you can access Specifications at any time by clicking on the Specifications button in the upper right corner of the window
247. causes all students to be looked at even if they were already marked as being on an honor roll last marking period or last year If a student is looked at and doesn t make the new honor roll then their honor roll status is cleared In other words the old honor roll status is erased from their report card file For all subsequent honor rolls make sure that this specification is set to No This means that students who already are on a higher honor roll will not be looked at when generating lower honor rolls Enter your average lower limit using up to 2 decimal places Students with GPAs LOWER THAN what you enter for this setting will be omitted from your honor roll For example if you enter 3 00 only those students with averages of 3 00 or greater will be included If you enter 0 no students will be excluded due to your lower limit Specification 5 AVERAGE UPPER LIMIT 999 FOR NO UPPER LIMIT 6 COMMENT CODE LOWER LIMIT 7 COMMENT CODE UPPER LIMIT Statistical Reports Defining Honor Roll Reports Description Enter your average upper limit using up to 2 decimal places Students with averages higher than what you enter for this setting will be omitted from your honor roll For example a high honors list for numerical grades might set settings 6 and 7 as follows e Specification 4 AVERAGE LOWER LIMIT 93 00 e Specification 5 AVERAGE UPPER LIMIT 999 00 The resulting honor roll list will only include student
248. ce and duplexing features Page Setup _ 2 xl Printer Name WREDSOFT2WHPEI 00 Properties Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 8000 Series PS Where REDSOFT2 HP8100_0 Comment Network OK Cancel Option Description Name Displays the name of the printer currently set to print the report Change printers by clicking on the drop down arrow I to the right of the printer name and selecting a new printer name from the list Status Indicates whether or not the printer is busy paused or is ready to print Type Displays the brand and model number of the currently selected printer Where Shows the line printer port or network path to the selected printer Properties Activates the selected printer s Properties window see Printer Properties below Report Cards Manual 7 43 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Page Setup Printer Properties The printer Properties window varies depending on the brand and model of your printer You can access a printer s Properties window from the Windows Printers folder or by clicking the Properties button in the Administrator s Plus Printer Setup window The default printer settings will reflect the most commonly used page layout paper source and paper type If you need to change a setting for a particular report in Administrator s Plus you should change it from the Administrator s Plus Printer Setup window 7 44 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Report
249. ce the marking period grade will become the midyear average Examples of Final Average Calculations The following examples are for a school calculating their final averages for the year using the following weights 1st marking period grade 2096 2nd marking period grade 2096 Midyear Exam grade 1096 Midyear grade 096 3rd marking period grade 2096 4th marking period grade 2096 Final Exam grade 1096 5 12 Report Cards Manual Calculate Averages Examples of Final Average Calculations With this weighting system the 1st marking period 2nd marking period and Midyear Exam grades will make up 50 of the final average As an alternative weighting system the midyear grade could have been weighted 50 with the columns above it weighted 0 The resulting final averages would be similar with either definition This assumes that the midyear average was initially calculated weighting the 1st marking period 2nd marking period and Midyear Exam 40 40 and 20 respectively They may differ due to any rounding that took place in calculating the midyear grade Rounding will affect letter grading systems much more than number grading systems See the note on page 5 10 EXAMPLE ONE 1st marking period grade 90 2nd marking period grade 95 Midyear Exam grade Blank 3rd marking period grade 4th marking period grade 85 Final Exam 75 FINAL AVERAGE EXPLANATION As soon as the program finds the T it becomes
250. class rank report if their search category value is below this value For example if credits is your search category students with below this number of credits will not be on your report If GPA is your search category students with GPA s below this GPA value will not be on your report Enter a 0 to not have any lower limit Students with a value in their search category greater than what you enter for this setting will be omitted from your class rank report For example to find all students with less than 20 credits choose CREDITS as the search category and enter 19 99 as your upper limit Enter a 9999 to not have any upper limit Any student with a career weight less than this number will be omitted from the class rank report This will enable you to omit students from the report who have not taken enough courses Archive Archive 0000 eee eee eee 9 2 HOW TO CHANGE THE NUMBERS OF ARCHIVED COURSES 9 7 Report Cards Manual 9 1 Chapter 9 Archive Archive Archive NOTE The end of year archiving function has been replaced by program C Transfer Credits amp GPA which now archives students report card information 9 2 Report Cards Manual Students courses and grades for the current year are stored in REPORT CARD files for each grade level At the end of each year when the BEGINNING program is run from DATA BASE PLUS the courses and grades in the REPORT CARD files are erased to make room for the n
251. computer There are two types of blank manual grade entry forms This type does not have the course name printed at the top Consequently one copy may be quickly printed and copied to be handed out to teachers who will fill in the information at the top CRSE SC 011 01 CREDITS QUARTER 1 00 FULL YEAR CURRSIZE 16 REPORT CARD GRADE ENTRY FORM FIRST MARKING PERIOD CRSENAME HFr Eng TEACHER TIME F12345 ROOM Blank Manual Grade Entry Form Section Info Printed At The Top In order for students names to appear on grade entry forms students schedules must have been entered into the computer either with SCHEDULING PLUS manually or with a scan A BLANK manual entry form is a form without students names that will help you in entering students schedules manu ally On these forms teachers will write in students names and ID numbers from where they can be entered into the com puter These forms may also be used to simultaneously enter stu dents first marking period grades into the computer There are two types of blank manual grade entry forms This type has the course name and other information about the course printed at the top If you use this type one form must be printed for each section which will take longer than print ing one copy of the previous sample and subsequently copy ing it for each section 07 05 2002 Dow Joe 112 GPA FACTOR 0 00 07 05 2002 REPORT CARD GR
252. cords are students total career credits adjusted quality points simple quality points and weight Each program has one chapter of this manual that explains in detail the purpose of each option and how to perform the functions available in that program Before performing a function in Report Cards Plus read the section that explains that option in detail We recommend paying careful attention to the tips provided throughout each chapter to help you get the most out of the Report Cards Plus module The following is an overview of how to use the programs in Report Cards Plus Introduction The Report Card Plus Programs Program 1 CUSTOMIZE RC Use this program to set up the grade table specify how GPAs should be calculated customize your report card columns enter your list of canned report card comments define the Number Grade Print Table enter department names and enter course skills and concepts See Chapter for further details on the items to be customized with this program Program 2 ENTER COURSES Enter Master Course List This program must first be used to build your Master Course List If you have scheduled your students with Scheduling Plus you have already built your Master Course List Building your Master Course List involves entering each course offered at your school along with information about each course such as the course length level department credits weight and so on For example the sample mast
253. course with a code entered into the OVR column Because the code was a 2 the second line displays that this course is worth HALF CREDIT amp HALF GPA Since the course is a full year course 50 of the possible weight of 1 00 is used This is then cut in half again because the OVR column code says to only count this grade half of what it normally will count towards the student s GPA Consequently the weight for this grade is 25 The weight of 25 times the quality points of 45 produces 11 25 simple and adjusted quality points for this grade If the grade was a passing grade like the weight the credits would have been cut in half and then half again Course 6 COURSE 550 01 Chorus Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 99 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average MIDYEAR GRADE 96 CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits full course weight 50 0 5000 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE It has a GPA factor of 33 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 7500 ADJ QP 141 5000 SIMPLE QP 133 0000 WEIGHT 1 7500 PREY IGPA 79 4286 THIS GRADE 90 5000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 NE IGPA 79 4266 NEW i 1 2500 141 5000 133 0000 1 7500 PREV AGPA 0 8571 NE ACPA 60 8571 Because of the GPA factor of 99 this course does not count towards quality points and weight Report Cards Manual 8 53 Chapter 8 Statisti
254. cripts using the program we recommend you read the section on How to Archive Grades carefully as it guides you step by step on how to set up the program to allow you to print grades from previous Introduction Using a Split Grading System years If your school uses a combination of number and letter grades for each student we advise you to read the section on Using a Split Grading System so that you can see how it works within the program Should you have any questions about anything explained in the manual please call Rediker Software Technical Support at 1 800 882 2994 Using a Split Grading System A Split Grading System is one in which the lower grade levels are on a different grading scale than the higher grade levels For example a school may use letter grades with quality point values ranging from 0 to 4 for elementary students and number grades with quality point values ranging from 0 to 100 for high school students In Administrator s Plus you can define the quality point values for each letter and number grade used by your school These values are stored inside the Grade Table located inside the Customize RC program See Chapter 1 The Default Grade Table on page 1 3 In the above example letter grades would be defined on a 4 point scale with F equal to 0 00 quality points and A equal to 4 00 quality points Numeric grades would be worth the number of quality points that corresponds to the actual grade
255. ctions Select this option to begin entering or editing your master courses and sections Each course you enter into the program will have a number from to 9 999 Later these courses will be divided into one or more sections according to when they meet and who teaches them Adding to amp Editing the Master Course List To create a new master course type an unused master course number and press ENTER The word UNUSED will appear in the Course Name field To Add or Edit the Master Course List 1 Inthe Edit Courses window click View Edit Courses and Sections The View Edit Courses and Sections window appears View Edit Courses And Sections T SINBGTIVE Course 000 Concepts Skills Se NN HEN Course Length lt Q S A gt GPA Factor C CEEA EAE l a If you have chosen to sort your lookup list numerically choosing F6 LOOKUP will allow you to instantly see which numbers are unused Use Specification 1 COURSE LOOKUP ALPHA OR NUMERIC ORDER on page of the Specifications to set how you want the lookup list to be sorted To enter information about your new course press F3 EDIT to activate Edit Mode Alternatively pressing the Up arrow key is a shortcut method of entering the Edit Mode As soon as you are in the Edit Mode the cursor will be in the Course Name field and the defaults that you have set in the specifications window will appear in the corresponding fields See Inspect Change Specifications on
256. ctions into the computer you may enter just letters or letters followed by numbers Your time code may not be longer than 24 characters If your time code is longer than 16 characters pressing F6 LONG will allow you to enter up to 24 characters If the program finds a letter without any numbers after it it assumes that the section meets each time that block meets In the above example you may enter either A or A12345 as the time for English Either notation tells the computer that this section meets Al A2 A3 A4 and A5 blocks For Gym enter D35 as the time This tells the program that Gym meets the third and fifth day that D block meets Do NOT enter D3D5 For chemistry in this example enter CD14 This section meets C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 D1 and D4 blocks for a total of 7 blocks a week Because C does not have any numbers after it itis assumed to meet each time that C block meets C12345D14 would mean the same thing Notice how this makes it easy to block off double lab blocks for your Science courses Report Cards Manual 2 15 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List ABCD would block off each time that A B C and D blocks meet Below is a sample rotating four day schedule used by a school with eight blocks They use A H Note that because only six blocks meet each day each block meets three times in the four day rotation Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Al B2 A3 B3 English C
257. d Work Habits CAREER CREDITS E e CAREER QUALITY PTS CAREER WEIGHT CAREER GP 7 20 Report Cards Manual Specification USE REGENT OPTION FOR CREDITS PRINT HONOR ROLL STATUS PRINT COLUMN AVERAGES Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Description This option is only needed by some schools in New York If you have one column which has been designated as a FINAL column worth credit and if you have another column that has a three character name of REG or RGT and if this option is set to Yes then the program will use the higher grade between the FINAL column and the REG column when it prints the earned credits When honor rolls are printed using the Statistical Reports program the program writes to the hard disk each student s name and the number of the honor roll they were on Either a 1 2 or 3 If you then set this specification to Yes any student who is on an honor roll will have that honor roll s name printed in the lower right hand corner of their report card The name of the honor roll may be changed by using the DEFINE HONOR ROLL option in the Statistical Reports program See Defining Honor Roll Reports on page 8 15 For example if a student is on an honor roll called High Honors the following would print on his report card HONOR ROLL STATUS High Honors If a student is not on any honor roll nothing will be printed The words HONOR ROLL STATUS will not even show
258. d if EveryPage N Denotes the end of the image specifications Determines the position on the page in which the image prints The number after Printlmage must match the number after ImageStart The X and Y represent coordinates from the left margin and the top of the page NOTE To print as background image for all pages do not use the PrintImage code Instead set the EveryPage parameter to Y Note that the following sections describe codes used in many of the default non skills based reports They are included here in the event that you need to modify an existing default report When creating new reports and when using skills based report cards however it is recommended that you use the newer box codes described in the previous section 7 58 Report Cards Manual Code Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description Codes That Must Be On a Line By Themselves CRSSTART1 Course Loop Start CRSSTART2 Course Loop Start CRSSTART3 Course Loop Start CRSSTART4 Course Loop Start CRSSTART5 XX Course Loop Start CRSEND Course Loop End NOPAD All lines between this code and the CRSEND code will be repeated for each course that a student has If a student has 11 courses the lines between these codes will be repeated 11 times once for each course There may be no more than
259. d pre define and enter comments You can also use it to set up the table that allows you to translate number grades into letter grades for printing report cards and to enter department names In addition schools that have purchased the skills based report card module will use this program to create customized lists of skills and concepts Finally you can set the number of available courses up to 9 999 ra Administrator s Plus CUSTOMIZE REPORT CARDS PLUS 2 Gpa factor 3 cuStomize report card columns 4 edit report card Comments 5 edit number grade pRint table 6 enter Department names 7 sKills and concepts 8 cOurse settings 9 Maintain grade change log A End program e 2 C L e K3 cC Ki DD Select an option and then click Next to display each option described in the following sections Edit Grade Table This option allows you to view and edit the grade table which stores the quality point values for each grade a student may receive Note that you must be logged in as Supervisor to view or edit the Grade Table In addition you can use the grade table to specify whether or not the grade is worth credit and if it should be considered in calculations of students averages In the grade table you will enter a symbol for each grade you wish to print on students report cards You can have up to 200 grade symbols in your grade table including 50 customized grades Symbols can be any numerical grade o
260. d text as many times as you wish Delete Totally deletes all highlighted text If no text is highlighted Delete will erase one character space to the right of the cursor Select All Highlights the entire body of a report for the purpose of copying and Ctrl A deleting text Time Date Inserts the time and date at the cursor s current position The time and date are in the following format 04 15 2003 10 25 30 AM 7 34 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports Option Description Bold Bolds all highlighted text and Report Writer codes e g FN John Note that the entire line of text will be bolded If you want only one word to be bolded it needs to be on a line by itself Italic Italicizes all highlighted text and Report Writer codes e g FN John Note that the entire line of text will be italicized If you want only one word to appear in italics it needs to be on a line by itself ri dt in italics it needs to b line by itself Underline Underlines all highlighted text and Report Writer codes e g FN John Note that the entire line of text will be underlined If you want only one word to be underlined it needs to be on a line by itself Search Menu Administrator s Plus File Edit Search Options Window Find F Find Next Shift F7 The search feature locates and highlights codes and text so that each occurrence of the text may be easily edited For example if you nee
261. de entry forms This sample form will be used by teachers to enter students second marking period grades as well as to verify the grades that they gave for the first marking period These forms are printed sorted by teacher which makes them easy to distribute They may also be printed for individual sections of your choice viii lt E FEED THIS DIRECTION REPORT CARDS PLUS REDIKER SOFTWARE PAGE NO COURSE NO COURSE NAME TEACHER Pic seh se MARKING PERIOD PERIOD GRADE 9 EXAM GRADE A FINAL GRADE 5 OOO DAO OOO DAG 000 QO GRADE QQG GRADE QAO GRADE 9 DAO 6000 QQG OOO QAG e SO GIO G OOOO PERIOD 9 GRADE 9 EXAM O GRADE 9 4 O QO O O GGegc OO 9G GG GeGO 9GOGO G6GO0 ooGGgGoGo ogGGo GoOGO oG Go GG G C USENO 2 PENCIL ONLY ff S FINAL oo GRADE OIA GRADE OWOOOO CANNER GRADE ENTRY FORM o EE m LETTER GRADES e clo E PO 10000 Different scanner forms are used for grade CIES entry depending upon whether your school BG lo 000 uses number or letter grades This is a sampe PO P 500 of a scanner entry form that will be used for DPO c 0000009 letter grades Bo 1 9000 DO c 9000 REPORT CARDS PLUS pre
262. de of zero bubble in only one of the zeroes Grades from 101 through 110 have to be entered manually f no digits are bubbled on either row then one of the four letter grades on the right may be bubbled If more than one letter grade is bubbled the first one that the program finds bubbled will become the grade The letter grades are looked at in this order P F I and X Letter grades not listed such as W WP WP N A B C and D will have to be entered manually The OPTIONAL column will be similarly filled in except that there are no letter grades on the right Letter grades for the optional column will have to be entered manually The part of the form containing the comment bubbles looks the same as the alpha scan form The same rules apply for scanning comments on the numeric grade scan form as on the alpha grade scan form See page The part of the form containing the comment bubbles looks like on page 3 21 3 22 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Grade Verification Forms Grade Verification Forms A Grade Verification Form is the same as a Manual Grade Entry Form except that the previously entered grades and comment codes will be printed The entry form on page viii of the appendix is a Grade Verification Form Grade Verification Forms are printed in the same manner as the Manual Grade Entry Forms except that the top of the form will always say GRADE VERIFICATION FORM To obtain
263. de so that it may be edited The same function can be performed by clicking Find on the Search window at the top of the window See Search Menu on page 7 35 Find E xi Find What FT Direction Ix tena I Match Case F7 Es ad Pressing F8 PAGE SETUP causes the Printer and Page Setup window to appear See Page Setup on page 7 42 You can also access these windows by right clicking on the Administrator s Plus desktop and choosing Print Page Setup Page Setup X m Paper Size Letter hd Source Upper Paper Tray r rientation Margins inches C Portrait Left o 5 Right jos Landscape Top o 25 Bottom 0 25 OK Cancel Printer PAGE SETUP Report Cards Manual 7 41 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Page Setup Page Setup Administrator s Plus print jobs may be sent to any local or networked printer installed on your computer Because different printers may be connected to different workstations each report has a Page Setup and Printer Setup window specific to each user Every time a user makes changes to the Page Setup and or Printer Setup settings within a particular report or program they are saved inside the individual s user folder Consequently the same report may be printed on different printers with alternate settings for each user Page Layout Menu Use the Page Layout window to select paper size source
264. ded to adjust all the Tab codes in a specific report you would enter T in the Find What field in the Find dialog box see below Clicking Find will cause the program to highlight the first occurrence of a Tab code You can then choose Find Next from the Search window or press Shift F7 to locate and highlight all succeeding tab codes Find F7 Activates the window seen below Type the text or code for which you are searching and click Find You may type entire words or code or just key letters The Match Case option allows you to choose whether the case of letters is considered in the search The Direction option allows you to search the body of a report from top down or bottom up Find x Find What TABLE1 Find r Direction Match Case sg Cancel Replace If you click the Replace button the above window will appear with an additional field titled Replace With Type the text with which you wish to replace the text in the Find field and then click Replace You will have the option to click Replace each time the text Report Cards Manual 7 35 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports is found If you wish to mass replace every instance of the found text click the button Replace All on this window Each instance of the text in the Find field will then be automatically replaced with the text in the Replace with field Replace x Find What Attendance Record Find Repl
265. derEveryCourse Y or N 7 46 Report Cards Manual Description Controls width of border around box 0 thin border 3 thick border Height of the entire course table Rows that will not fit in this height will be truncated Use Auto to have the box height calculate automatically based on the page width and number of courses in the student s course list Enter a number in inches If you choose to use the AUTOCALC option the program will ignore the numbers entered here and will calculate the optimal height based on the number of courses and the amount of text in each row Specifies whether to draw a border for the title Determines the alignment of text inside of all the cells in the course box Determines whether a vertical line will print separating each column Draws a horizontal line after specified number of courses 0 for no lines Determines which grade columns will be printed Any or all of the possible 13 columns may be set This setting overrides page 3 of the report writer specifications Defaults to No If set to Yes it will print table header above every course Code PrintCommentTextWhere Right1 Column Right2Column or Below PrintColumnAverageAndFont Y or N TitleAndFont lt TitleText gt PrintColumnHeaderAndFont Y or N PrintBodyAndFont Y or N PrintNarrativeAndFont Y or N CourseTableSpecEnd PrintCourseTable WhichCourses see b
266. des from previous years that are stored in the archival files e Manually change students total career credits quality points and weight Enter students past courses grades career credits and GPA data directly into students archival records which many schools do when they first purchase the program Note that if you enter grades from past years the Statistical Reports program should be used to calculate students career GPAs based on these past grades Introduction The Report Card Plus Programs Schedule View Pressing F10 while in the transcript view displays the Schedule view You will see the student s schedule with course and section numbers You can then add or drop students from course sections right from this window As students are added and dropped add drop forms can be automatically printed This option must be turned on in Specifications for Add Drop Forms to print Program 7 REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER Use this program to print modify and design numerous reports including report cards transcripts permanent labels progress reports deficiency letters and honor roll congratulatory letters You can also create customized reports containing virtually any information stored in the Report Cards Plus module Reports can be printed for the entire school an individual grade level or for individual students Attractive pre printed report cards are available from Rediker Software Your school s logo and any o
267. directory for the current year and you are scheduling for next year in the 2003 04 directory You must use New Files gt Specifications in both the 2002 03 and in the 2003 04 directories to specify the same number of archival years in each directory Step 2 Use Option 6 in the Customize RC program to enter your department names See Entering Department Names on page 1 11 This will enable the transcripts to group courses and credits by department that is subject as well as by year If you are currently working in two separate school years you must specify the department names in both years Step 3 If you want to manually enter students previous grades and courses taken before you installed Report Cards Plus use the View Change Add Drop program It is only necessary to do this in the current directory For example if it is currently the 2002 03 school year only enter archival information into the 2002 03 school year even if you are already scheduling for next year in the 2003 04 directory At the end of the year Report Cards Manual 5 Introduction The Report Card Plus Programs after updating students GPAs and printing final report cards in the 2002 03 directory the Transfer Credits and GPA program will transfer the archival data along with the updated credits and GPA data from the current year s directory to the next school year Step 4 To schedule students for next year while continuing to work in Admini
268. diting Grades Viewing and Editing Grades Selecting View Change Add Drop displays a blank Transcript View window There are two ways to bring up a student s transcript in VCAD The same rules apply when you bring up a student in the View Schedules mode Type the student s 5 digit ID number or name in the blank at the bottom of the window or if you have chosen to lookup By Grade select the grade level from the drop down list at the top of the window and type the student s 3 digit ID number in the blank Press F6 LOOKUP and select the student from the list If you have chosen to lookup By School in the Specifications you will see all students in the school listed alphabetically If you have chosen to look up By Grade you will see all students in the grade level you chose listed alphabetically See page 6 4 for more information on the Lookup options Once you call up a student you will see a window that looks like the following ra View Transcripts a E Specifications T i S00 G EE o00 D Eeo mE eer rere erate Tote KAUCCUAESUEU E KCI 2nd i ECU WT US Is CIT ovn 1 0012 02 ColFr Eng J87 86 Pa eee ee te te ee 3 0212 03 C Earth Sc 4 0309 02 C SocStA 5 0316 01 C SocStB 6 0709 01 Word Pros 7 0721 09 Wd Pro lab 8 0815004 PE 9 0930 04 Lunch Stdy a A 8 NM ON Bo Enter or modify the grade in the desired column and then press Enter to move to the next column Note that while editing the commen
269. dules into the computer Printing Schedule Scan Forms SC Scan Frm 1 A 2 Report Cards Manual Use the following procedure to print schedule scan forms To Print Schedule Scan Forms Click the Print Schedule Scan Forms icon The first Print Schedule Scan Forms print window appears Administrator s Plus PRINT SCHEDULE SCAN FORMS GRADE NUMBER All grades Inspect change specifications Spacing Test End program Print Schedule Scan Forms Printing Schedule Scan Forms 2 Click Inspect Change Specifications to display the specifications window Specifications Print Schedule Scan Forms SPECIFICATIONS PRINT SCHEDULE SCAN FORMS 1 START GRADE FOR ALL GRADES Grade 9 2 END GRADE FOR ALL GRADES Grade 12 3 INCLUDE BLANK SEARCH SORT CATS Include Do NOT Include 4 INCLUDE ACTIVE INACTIVE STUDENTS ACTIVE STUDENTS ONLY 5 OPTIONAL FIELD 1 INO SEARCH FIELD Ej 6 OPTIONAL FIELD 2 INO SEARCH FIELD E 7 OPTIONAL FIELD 3 No SEARCH FIELD E Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 3 Set the specifications as desired The specifications are described in the following table Specification 1 Start Grade for All Grades 2 End Grade for All Grades 3 Include Blank Search Sort Categories 4 Include Active Inactive Students 5 7 Option Fields 4 Click Done Description When you print the scan forms you have the option to print for all grade levels If yo
270. e How Are Averages Calculated on page 5 8 NOTE Enter an N in the average column for grades which have 0 quality points associated with them if you do not want them to count as zeroes when the average is calculated The Default Grade Table The default grade table includes the numeric grade symbols from 0 through 110 as well as letter grades from A to F By default number grades have quality points on a 100 point scale for example 99 99 QP and letter grades are on a 4 0 scale The quality point value for any of the default numeric grades can be changed iBixg SYMBOL QPTS CREDIT AVERAGE 98 981 98 Y y al 29 C 991 29 88 Y Y d EI mmm LO EET _ 161 1811 y y Put a Y in 162 1621 Y Y Average column if 183 11931 y y you want the 184 aay y y grade to be used j i when calculating 185 1051 Y Y B averages for GPA S 186 1861 v and honor rolls 167 1871 y Y 108 1881 Y Y 189 1891 Y v 118 1181 y y 111 A 1 y y NOTE The bracketed grade symbols in fields 1 to 150 are pre defined and cannot be changed The entries that contain brackets but no symbol are reserved by the program for future use When adding a symbol to the grade table choose a field that is completely blank The default grade table also includes W for withdrawn WF for withdrawn failing and WP for withdrawn passing These
271. e Export Honor Roll to an ASCII file called HROLL ASC LETTER Congratulations on making the honor roll SEARCH LETTER One for each course with a grade within search range PROGRESS REPORT For each course with a grade within search range EXACT SEARCH LIST List of students with your entered exact grade NOTE The task you select determines which specifications appear Using Tasks 1 7 to Print Report Cards and Transcripts Notice that there are two tasks for printing report cards and four tasks for printing transcripts Though you may use all of them you will most likely use one of each For example if your school prints a wide report card on a pre printed form then you should choose Task 1 Print a WIDE Report Card rather than Task 2 Print a Narrow Report Card The same holds for transcripts you will print either wide or narrow transcripts and you will print them either by department or by year The default report for the task you choose will appear in Specification 3 ACTIVE LETTER REPORT You can choose to accept the default report or choose another pre formatted or customized report The following section describes each task in the task list NOTE Although any of the reports included in Report Cards Report Writer will work with a dot matrix as well as a laser or inkjet printer some modifications to the report designed for use with a laser or inkjet printer may be needed to make them work properly with a dot matr
272. e 4 of the Report Cards Report Writer specifications OPTIONAL FIELD NAME Used to print data base fields on the transcript or report cards Six specifications let you designate six data base fields This code causes the name of these fields to be printed followed by a colon NUM designates the number of characters to use NOT counting the colon X will equal 1 6 to identify the optional field For example ON1 10 prints the name of the optional field 1 designated by a specification and allocates it 10 spaces Code OD X NUM ICNZN NUM AIYRXX TAB IGY YR NUM ISL YR CR NUM ISF YR CR NUM IMSGX NUM ATEND ISRCL GDST Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description OPTIONAL FIELD DATA Similar to the optional field name described by the previous code This code prints the data in those optional fields CENTER CODE Helps center your school name and address The NUM after the colon is the number of spaces in which to center the line Usually it is the same as the characters you are printing ona line In other words if you have a left margin of 5 and a characters per line setting of 75 you are actually printing 70 characters on a line Hence use 70 as your NUM Z can be e N Centers the name of your school e U Prints an underline under your centered school name S Centers your school s street address e C Centers the City Stat
273. e Within the Search Range on page 7 9 Code COMPARx DESCRIPTION XX Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description Allows comment paragraphs narratives to be printed directly on report cards or progress reports In addition you can now use the new code COMPARx where x is any report card column 1 11 to print the narrative comments for a specific grading column Teachers may enter these comment paragraphs either with GradeQuick electronic grade book or with their own word processing program The comment must be in a directory called RS4COWM which must be a folder on the root of the drive containing Administrator s Plus Each comment must be its own ASCII file If you are using GradeQuick comments may be entered by highlighting a student s name and pressing the F2 key When importing grades from GradeQuick these comment paragraphs are placed in the RS4COM directory If you do not have an RS4COM directory one is created for you If you are using a word processing program like Microsoft Word to create your comment paragraphs save each comment as an ASCII file with aname such as 1210112 005 The file must be named as follows The first 3 characters are the course number in this case 121 followed by a 2 digit section number in this case 01 The next 2 characters are the student s grade level in this case 12 then a period followed by the student s ID number
274. e and Zip of your school in a single line P Centers the phone number of your school For example ICNNN 70 would center the name of your school Prints the years e g 2001 02 that a student attended XX grade level This code is intended for use on transcripts This code produces a tab in the Report Writer for tab delimited exports GR YEAR If YR is outside of range nothing is printed STAFF LAST NAME Prints the formal last name of the staff member teaching the indicated course STAFF FIRST NAME Prints the formal first name of the staff member teaching the indicated course MESSAGE Three message lines may be set in the specification window Replace X with a 1 2 or 3 to indicate which message you want printed Prints data in AT END OF specification It is always padded to 9 Prints the 25 character name for current column for searches or honor rolls as set by a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer Search Grade start as set by a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer Report Cards Manual 7 67 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Code Description IGDEN Search Grade end as set by a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer IGDEX Exact Search Grade as set by a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer ICTXX 4 CAREER TOTALS Replace XX with a two digit code i e CODE 01 Career credits e CODE 02 Care
275. e as those displayed at the end of the Grade Distribution Report by teacher BY COURSE COMBINE SAME TEACHERs This report displays grade distribution information in the same way as the Grade Distribution Report by Course and Department except that if a teacher is assigned to two sections of the same course it will combine both sections in the distribution percentages BY COURSE COMBINE TEACHER TO DISK This option creates the file distribO frc which is stored in your school year folder and can then be used to print a transcript showing the grade distribution percentages See Chapter 7 for information on creating and modifying reports Specification 2 DISTRIBUTION REPORT TYPE lt continued gt 3 WHICH GRADES TO USE 4 GRADING SYSTEM Entry Forms Grade Distribution Report Description After selecting the distribution report type you will be asked to choose the report card column on which the report should be based Any column may be used except COMMENT and ABSENT columns or columns designated as type OTHER See Editing Report Card Comments on page 1 9 These columns will not be listed in the drop down list in Specification 3 WHICH GRADES TO USE In other words Grade Distribution Reports may be based on marking period exam semester or final grades The OTHER column in all Grade Distribution reports includes blank grades as well as any of the withdrawn grades such as W WP and WF
276. e can include any letter or number grade defined in your Administrator s Plus grade table up to 3 characters In addition you can include a check mark in the assessment scale to import into Administrator s Plus A i B s o C 7 Tocreate a new assessment scale click the Assessment Scales button on the toolbar Assessment Scales To add a new assessment scale 1 Click the Add Scale button To edit an existing scale highlight the desired scale and then click the Edit Selected Scale button Assessment Scales E x Default Scale NONE x Edit Selected scale Delete Scale Report Cards Manual D 15 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick 2 Tocreate an assessment scale enter a Scale Name and the grades included in the scale in order from highest to lowest 9 Edit Assessment Scale Dialog x Scale 1 Default Value NoNE Scale Name Scale 1 Enter scale from Highest to Lowest Value Highlight any value and press one of the arrows to change its NONE position wh Mastery Level Scale Type Delete Restrict entry of values New value to add s to what is entered in the assesment scale Allow entry of values that are not in the DK x Est assesment scale Youcan optionally set up a default assessment value This should be the most common assessment value as it will be autom
277. e column used to store the Regent s grade in New York should be defined as an OTHER type column A classification as an ABSENCE column will allow any number from 0 to 99 to be placed in the column This holds true even if you are using letter grades In the default table that uses four marking periods you might want to make column 11 an ABSENCE column If you are using the Period Attendance module you may have the absences in each class automatically print in this column If you have two columns available you may have an absent column and a tardy column Both would be set as column type ABSENT Columns 12 and 13 are automatically classified as COMMENT columns and their type cannot be changed NOTE The program will place a W in the right most FINAL or appropriate SEMESTER column if a student withdraws Chapter Customize RC Customize Report Card Columns Column Title CREDIT 1 8 Report Cards Manual NOTE Description Only SEMESTER and FINAL columns may be designated as credit columns The default report card column setup for a school with four marking periods shows that the FINAL column is the only credit column When printing report cards and updating GPAs the program will look for a passing grade in this column and award full credit to those courses You may not have both SEMESTER and FINAL columns simultaneously designated as credit columns The report card column table for schools with six marking periods show
278. e course section information filled in for each section you choose 6 New Report This option allows you to return to the previous window to begin the process of creating a new report If you are manually entering grades into the program read the following section for information on how to fill out the manual entry forms If you are using a scanner to enter grades into the program see page Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms on page 3 19 for information on how to fill out the Scanner Grade Entry Forms Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms 3 8 Report Cards Manual Itis recommended that this section and the sample entry forms in the appendix be copied and given to teachers The following examples are for a school with four marking periods that has designated the FINAL grade column as the only column worth credit Notice that this school has a column defined as an ABSENCE column If the school has the Period Attendance module the number of absences that each student had in each of their classes would automatically be printed in this column on the report card once you run the Report Card Interface in View Period Attendance See the Period Attendance manual for more information Otherwise teachers may enter the number of absences on this entry form SITUATION 1 e Summer or sometime before the end of the 1st Marking Period Quarter Semester or All Year course No students have been entered into the section Either the blank
279. e default is center SkillHeaderFont Advanced Specifications Course To change the font and size of the Skills Header set the word SkillHeaderFont to the desired font and size required for the report If this specification is omitted from the code the default is black Arial 8 pitch and bold StartBoxDef Draw Box EndBoxDef Several boxes can be defined on any one report card The boxes are numbered to match the PrintBox specification and the EndPrintBox It clearly identifies which set of parameters are associated with the box to print Stretch Image Set the Stretch parameter to Y if you wish to stretch the image without maintaining the aspect ratio Subject Width Course Table Sets the width of the subject column in inches Default is 75 TableGapAcross Advanced Specifications Gener MORE space between course boxes Parameter is in inches The default is 0 aD up NNI Advanced Specifications Gener a Vertical space between course boxes Parameter is in inches Default is 0 TeacherFont Advanced Specifications Course To change the font and size of the Teacher set the word TeacherFont to the desired font and size If this specification is omitted from the code the default is black Arial 8 pitch and bold Teacher Width Sets the width of the Teacher Name column in inches The default is 75 Course Ta ble D 40 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitio
280. e double the size etc Zoom ignores the Stretch parameter value This should be a valid image file only the file name in the folder RS4 PPlmages Report Cards Manual 7 57 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Code BoxWidth BoxHeight Stretch Y or N EveryPage ImageLeft Image Top lmageEnd Printlmage Left X Top Y Description Width of the image provided Stretch parameter is set as Y If not to be stretched then the image s aspect ratio will be maintained and the size will be adjusted to best fit in the given Width and Height Setting of BoxWidth amp BoxHeight ignores Zoom parameter Height of the image provided Stretch is set as Y If not to be stretched then the image s aspect ratio will be maintained and the size will be adjusted to best fit in the given Width and Height Setting of BoxWidth amp BoxHeight ignores Zoom parameter Y stretches the image without maintaining the aspect ratio If Y this image will be printed on every page as a background image with Left and Top positions as specified in ImageLeft and ImageTop parameters respectively In this case a Print Image code is unnecessary and the presence of the code will make the picture print again for each execution of the code in the loop Left position of the image if EveryPage Y This parameter is ignored if EveryPage N Top position of the image if EveryPage Y This parameter is ignore
281. e maintained and the size will be adjusted to best fit in the given Width and Height Setting of BoxWidth amp Box Height causes the Zoom parameter to be ignored Box Width or Auto Draw Box Attendance Course Table Advanced Specification General GPA Honor Roll Indicates the width of the cell In the Advanced Specification box it also defines glo bally the width of all the different cells course comment concept and narrative Col umns that will not fit in this width will be truncated Boxwidth is defined in inches Default is Auto CellHeight or Auto Draw Box Advanced Specifications Course Comment Concepts Narrative The maximum height of a course cell or in the case of an advanced specification table the height of the course section comment section or narrative section Do not confuse the height of each course row with the course section Rows that will not fit in this height will be truncated Cell Height is set in inches CellGapAcross Advanced Specifications General This parameter determines the vertical spacing in inches between cells The default is 0 CellGapDown Advanced Specifications General The horizontal spacing between cells Parameter type is in inches Default is 0 CharPerColumn 3 or 5 Advanced Specifications Courses Set the command to 3 if the desired column header for the marking period is three char acters Set the command to 5 if you prefer the 5 character colu
282. e midyear averages and that you are going to update career credits and GPAs using the midyear grade Therefore the final grade has been entered into both the midyear and final columns As in Situation 4 See page SITUATION 4 on page 3 10 if you only enter the final grade for this SEMESTER 1 course into the midyear grade column the program will automatically copy this grade to the final grade column when it updates students career credits and GPAs at the end of the year It will copy this grade only if it does not find any grades after the midyear grade and only if you are doing a complete update with the final grade column being the only column worth credit For more information see Updating and Resetting GPAs amp Credits on page 8 37 SITUATION 7 The End of the 2nd Marking Period Quarter 2 Course e Students Have Been Entered Into the Section Follow the same instructions as situation 4 in which there was a Quarter course that only met the 1st marking period The only difference obviously is that the quarter grade will go in the column marked 2nd SITUATION 7 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 A B A A 2 1 2 NOTE This sample entry assumes that the program is NOT going to calculate midyear averages and that you are going to update career credits and GPAs using the midyear grade Therefore
283. e of 100 For this grade the student is awarded another 1 0 credits and 1 0 weight The weight of 1 0 multiplied by the grade of 100 produces 100 quality points for this grade Note that the student s running totals are updated for each grade for this course Course 6 6 COURSE 550 01 Chorus Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 99 00 ALL YEAR COURSE WR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE CREDITS AWARDED Full year course Possible credits Number of credit columns 1 1 0000 COURSE NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE It has a GPA factor of 33 FUNNINC TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 1 5000 ADI QP 165 0000 SIMPLE QP l60 0000 WEIGHT 2 2500 PREV IGPA 71 1111 THIS GRADE 1 0000 0 0000 90 0000 0 0000 NE IGPA 71 1111 NEW 2 5000 165 0000 160 0000 2 2500 PREY ALPA 73 3333 HD AGPS 73 3332 This course does not count towards quality points and weight However credits are awarded for each passing grade Because it is a full year course 50 of the possible credits of 1 00 are awarded for each semester s passing grade Report Cards Manual 8 63 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Course 8 COURSE 422 01 Latin Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE DP CREDIT
284. e teacher of lunch a fake teacher who has ID 1 and tell the program to print entry forms starting with teacher 2 This fake teacher could also be at the end of your file of teachers Note that each form only contains room for up to eight students Consequently a section with 26 students would require 4 forms In this example the first form for this section would say 1 OF 4 and the second form would say 2 OF 4 and so on The order in which the forms are later scanned does not matter NOTE Be aware that when the forms are printed the program keeps track of the names of the students on each form This information is stored in a file called HCSCAN FRC When the form is later scanned the page number information is used to match up the form with the name of the section as well as with which students are in that section If a student is added to or dropped from a section after its form has been printed the printed form will still be successfully scanned because the HCSCAN FRC file is not affected by adding or dropping students The HCSCAN FRC file will not change until a new scanner form is printed for a section Entry Forms Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms Specification Description SPACING TEST It is extremely important that your forms are aligned properly because the program is going to pre print identifying information in the PAGE NO box which is in the upper right hand corner of the scanner forms This info
285. e text s font and size A T D P DOS MEM will print absences tardies dismissals presents days of school and membership respectively Specifies the headers that print to the left of each row and their font and size such as ABSENCES TARDIES and DISMISSALS Denotes the end of the attendance box specifications Determines the position on the page in which the Attendance Box prints The number after PrintAttendanceBox must match the number after AttendanceBoxStart The X and Y represent coordinates from the left margin and the top of the margin GPA Box Code GPABoxStart BoxHeight inches BoxWidth inches BoxGap inches BorderWidth 0 3 PrintBorder Y or N TitleBorder Y or N TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center TitleAndFont1 lt Text gt TitleAndFont2 lt Text gt TitleAndFont3 lt Text gt TitleAndFont4 lt Text gt BodyFont GPABoxEnd PrintGPABox Left X Top Y Honor Roll Box Code Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Description Denotes the start of the GPA box specifications Height of the GPA box Width of the GPA box Horizontal space between individual boxes Controls width of border around GPA box 0 thin border 3 thick border Specifies whether or not a box prints around the GPA table Specifies whether to draw a border for the title Determines the alignment left to right of the GPA header s Specified text i
286. e that looks like this Enter Department Names DER 10 Character Name Print In Master Schedule English Science Social St Language Fine Arts Pract Arts Vocational PE Health Other o O Cn A o N z lt z z lt z lt lt lt DDESG SECI TO DETIIDN TO MAIN MENII esce rz ors pepe Customize RC Skills and Concepts Skills and Concepts NOTE If you have purchased the optional Skills module you can use this option to create the skills and concepts that you will print on the report card Skills are linked to individual courses and concepts are linked to individual sections of a course through the View Edit Courses amp Sections program See Chapter 2 Skills are those abilities which a student is expected to acquire through a course An example of a skill that might be linked to a Math course is Counts 1 5 An English course might have a skill called spelling linked to it Concepts can be defined as the material or areas of information covered in a particular section of a course An example of a concept that might be linked to a section of an Algebra course is Long Division A Social Studies section might have a concept called 20th century presidents linked to it Skills are graded while concepts are not graded Course Settings NOTE You can have up to 9 999 course numbers This allows you to have 4 digit course numbers Setting your course number to the max
287. e title line and Honor Roll status line MinGradingColumn Width Course Table Advanced Specifica tions Course Sets the width of the grading columns After all the calculations extra space is equally distributed among the grading columns It will never be less than 0 3 The default is 35 D 36 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions NarrativeCellStart Advanced Specifications Narratives NarrativeCellEnd Indicates the start and end of the parameters for the narratives NarrativeHeight or Auto Course Table If a narrative is to be printed this command would set the height of this row If Auto is specified it takes the total text height without truncating any information NumBoxAcross Advanced Specifications Gener al This setting determines the number of columns to place across the page for the course cells in the Advanced Specifications box If a high value is set the program fits the maximum number of boxes possible depending on page width The default is 2 Print Y or N Advanced Specifications Course Concept Comment Narrative If you choose not to print a course section concept or narrative section of the Ad vanced Specification box or the Attendance box you can prevent it from printing by setting this parameter to N for No Default is set to Y PrintAdvancedBox WhichCourses Z Left X Top Y Advance Determines the distance the Advance Box will print from the le
288. e weighted If your school has archival years you will see the choices in the drop down list when you click on this specification The number of archival years is set in Database Plus New Files Specifications See the Introduction page l 13 for information on how to set the number of archival years This setting will determine how many archival years appear in the list above Normally you will update GPAs and credits each year based on the grades in year 0 which contains the current year s grades In a YEAR 0 update totals calculated on the current year s grades are added to the career totals as of the end of the previous school year Assume you have just purchased Administrator s Plus and have entered students past grades into their archival files Negative years are archival years For a senior year 4 would be their grade 8 grades year 3 their grade 9 grades etc If you want to calculate students career totals from scratch based on their past grades first choose to update based on archival years 3 to 1 We are omitting the grade 8 grades in year 4 When updating is done on archival years all career GPA data that may currently exist for students is automatically first set to zeroes After updating based on archival years you may then update based on YEAR 0 to add this year s grades to the totals calculated with the archival grades The same procedure must be used whenever you change a student s grade in an archiva
289. e width of the comment columns in inches If the comments are printed in two separate columns then both the columns are of equal width The default is 1 5 ConceptsCellStart Advanced Specifications Concepts ConceptsCellEnd The start and end of the comment cell parameters The parameter lets you determine what order you want the comment concept and narrative box to print D 34 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions CourseCellStart 1 Advanced Specifications Course CourseCellEnd The start and end of the course cell parameters If printed this will be the first cell in the course box and the parameter is always 1 CourseNameFont Advanced Specifications Course This parameter is defined in the Advanced Specification Box When you change the font and size for the word CourseNameFont it also changes it for the level course sec tion number and credit if these options are set to print in the Report Card Report Writer specifications CourseNameHorizontalAlign Left Right Center Course Table Sets the alignment for the course name or description to left right or center The default is Left CourseNumber Width Course Table Sets the width of the course number column in inches Default is 4 CourseTableSpecStart Course Table CourseTableEnd Indicates the start and end of the Course Table box The is the table number and will default to 1 if not specified More than one table can be
290. eBoxStart 1 Print Y BoxWidth 2 5 RowHeaderWidth 8 ColumnWidth Auto LeftBorderWidth 0 RightBorder Width 0 TopBorderWidth 0 BottomBorder Width 0 BoxHeight 1 TitleHeight 0 2 ColumnHeaderHeight 0 4 RowHeight 0 2 PrintBorder Y TitleBorder N TitleHorizontalAlign Center ColumnContents RCSpecRange YTD TitleAndFont Attendance ColumnHeadersAndFont DateRCSpecRange DateYTD RowContentsAndFont A T D RowHeadersAndFont Absences Tardies Dismissals AttendanceBoxEnd PrintAttendanceBox 1 Left 7 5 Top 4 AdvancedSpecStart 1 GeneralSpecStart REM INSERT REM BEFORE AutoCalcAll TO ENABLE INDIVIDUAL SPECS D 42 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Sample Skill based Report Card Template REM AutoCalcAll NumBoxAcross 2 MaxBoxDown Auto CellGapDown 0 CellGapAcross 0 TableGapDown 0 1 TableGapAcross 0 2 BoxWidth Auto GeneralSpecEnd CourseCellStart 1 Print Y PrintDescription N CharPerColumn 3 IncludeSkills Y REM PrintWhichColumns 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CellHeight Auto TitleHeight 0 2 Description Width 3 MinGradingColumn Width 0 35 LeftBorder Width 0 RightBorder Width 0 TopBorder Width 0 BottomBorder Width 0 TitleHorizontalAlign Center SkillHeaderAlignment Left PrintBorder Y TitleBorder N BlankLineBeforeHeader N TitleAndFont PrintCourseNameAndFont Y PrintTeacherAndFont Y PrintSkillHeaderAndFont Y PrintSkillsAndFont
291. eave a blank rectangle between two rectangles containing requests A number two pencil must be used and stray marks should be avoided The upper left hand corner of the scanner entry window displays the scanner port Some computers have two serial ports One is called PORT 1 and the other is called PORT 2 If you have a serial printer plugged into port 1 you will have to use port 2 for your scanner Simply select Option 2 and press RETURN to toggle the scanner port from 1 to 2 The computer will remember this setting next time this program is used Note that most printers are PARALLEL printers and do not use the serial port The Actual Scanning Of The Request Forms B 2 Report Cards Manual Before choosing Option 1 from the main window CONTINUE your scanner must be on and the first stack of 50 scan forms should be in the automatic feeder The scan forms MUST be inserted so that the bubbles are facing up and the black lines on the side of the forms are closest to the front of the scanner The order in which the forms are scanned does not matter Grade levels may be mixed Scan Students Schedules The Actual Scanning Of The Request Forms If a student has at least one request with a section in their transcript a form may not be scanned for that student In other words to re scan a form for a student that student must be unscheduled or dropped from all of their courses using the View Change Add Drop program The printout obtained durin
292. ecause your 2nd semester grade is designated as a Final grade the minimum of two semesters will be used In other words calculating an honor roll based on your semester column will cause the weights of full year courses to be divided by two The weights for semester and quarter courses will not be affected Why Pro Rate Weights If your weight is based solely on how many quarters a course meets pro rating your weight will give you the exact same results as not using the weight For example assume that you have four marking periods and are calculating the honor roll based on a PERIOD column grade A student has the following three courses COURSE QTR PERIODS WEEK WT PRO RATED WEIGHT 100 1st 5 2b 25 200 1 amp 2 5 50 50 300 ALL 5 1 00 25 By using your weight pro rated course 100 being a quarter course will not have its weight changed Its pro rated weight will still be 25 Course 200 being a semester course will have its weight divided by half the number of marking periods or two Its pro rated weight will be 25 Statistical Reports Honor Rolls Course 300 being a full year course will have its weight divided by the number of marking periods or four Its pro rated weight will be 25 In other words all of these courses will be weighted the same just as if you did not use weight which would have given each course a weight of 1 The question naturally arises as to why a pro rated weight should ever be used T
293. edSpecStart Advanced Box AdvancedSpecEnd Indicates the start and end of the AdvancedSpecBox specification Since more than one Advance Box can be defined in one report is the specification number for the table This number will default to 1 if not specified Align L R or C Draw Box X determines if the information between the PrintBox and EndPrintBox com mands will be left or right justified or centered AttendanceBoxStart Attendance Box AtendanceBoxEnd Indicates the start and end of the Attendance Box specifications Since more than one Advance Box can be defined in one report is the number for the table This number will default to 1 if not specified Auto or AutoCalc or AutoCalcAIl Course Table Advanced Specifications General If this Keyword is present in the procedure code the program ignores all the heights and widths of all the boxes specified Dimensions of the all the boxes are determined by the program based on the page height and page width The default is to include it in the pro cedure Adding REM before the statement means the program will ignore this line BlankLineBeforeHeader Y or N AdvancedSpecifications Course To print a blank line before the skills heading set this to Y for Yes The default is N for No BodyFont Attendance Course Table Advanced Specifications Course Comment Concepts Narrative GPA amp Honor Roll To change the font and size of
294. efault report for this task is report 59 you can also use reports 41 42 45 or 46 Use 41 or 42 to print your transcripts on plain paper Use 45 or 46 to print your transcripts on pre printed forms available from Rediker Software Use 41 or 45 if you only offer credit based on the final grade Use report 42 or 46 if you are a semester school offering credit for passing each semester Printing a Wide Transcript By Year By Department Use this task to print a student s courses for all years in their record arranged by department See Entering Department Names on page 1 11 for an explanation of how to set up Departments in Report Cards Plus Choose from reports 43 44 47 or 48 Use 43 or 44 to print your transcripts on plain paper Use 47 or 48 to print your transcripts on pre printed forms available from Rediker Software Use 43 or 47 if you only offer credit based on the final grade Use report 44 or 48 if you are a semester school offering credit for passing each semester Printing a Narrow Transcript By Year The default report for this task is 57 but you can also use reports 50 53 There are no forms for narrow transcripts Use 50 or 51 to print your narrow transcripts using one column You can fit more on a line but it may take more than one piece of paper Use 52 or 53 to print your narrow transcripts using two columns Because the columns are so narrow you may have room for only a midyear and final
295. elow Left X Top Y Skills NonSkills All AllSkillFirst AllNonSkillsFirst HHH HHH HHR HHH THER IHEBEHHBE etc Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Description Prints comment text using values in Report Card columns 12 and 13 Right1Column will print both comments in one column separated by a semi colon Right2Column will print both comments in a separate column width set by CommentWidth Text will word wrap to fit in defined width Below will print comments in an additional row below the course details height set by CommentHeight Determines if column averages print if so adopts the font style and size of the specification text The text entered in this specification will print on the top center of the course table and will adopt the font style and size of the specification text These 3 specs determine whether the Column Header Course List or Narratives print in the table If set to Y will adopt the font style and size of the specification text End of the course table specifications Determines the position on the page in which the course table prints The number after PrintCourseTable must match the number after CourseTableSpecStart The default entry after Which Courses is All but you can enter a course range or individual course numbers separated by commas The X and Y represent coordinates in inches from the left margin and the top of the page Report
296. en you click Honor Rolls you will see the following window E Administrator s Pluss STATISTICAL REPORTS HONOR ROLLS 1 print honor roll 1 2 print honor roll 2 3 print honor roll 3 4 print honor roll 4 5 print honor roll 5 6 inspect change Universal HR specifications 7 inspect change HR Print specifications 8 Grade point averages menu 9 End program e e o D D D Print honor roll 1 5 These options define the specifications for each honor roll including marking period average lower and upper limits and conditions for omission from the honor roll list See Defining Honor Roll Reports on page 8 15 for a detailed explanation of how to define honor rolls NOTE You must update career GPA s before you can print class rank reports See How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated on page 8 24 8 4 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports Honor Rolls Inspect Change Universal HR Specifications The Universal Honor Roll Specifications determine how all honor rolls as well as column averages will be calculated including how courses will be weighted and whether all or only certain courses will be counted toward the average ini x UNIVERSAL SPECIFICATIONS HONOR ROLLS 1 HOW TO WEIGHT COURSES USE WEIGHT PRO RATED RECOMMENDED M 3 INCLUDE CRSES WITH GPA FACTOR OF 99 N LONGERUSED NN 4 MINIMUM LETTER GRADE FOR THE GPAFACTOR B 5 MINIMUM NUMBE
297. enables you to compare the grades given by different teachers of the same course At the end of each course are the totals for that course and at the end of courses numbered in the same hundreds are the totals for that department In this example the ENGLISH department is the 100 s department At the end of the entire report are the GRAND TOTALS for the entire school XXV EHROLLMENT REPORT BY TEACHER 07 22 2002 ALL SECTIONS TEACHER CRS SC COURSE NAHE TIHE ROOH ENROLLHENT Bachel der May 020 01 Eng Rewi ew Blt 45 10 4 strot Dw English GLE 45 224 i see sol Dv Read 1 D12345 123 1 321 07 AIDS Group r2 ul 4 333 01 Bas US Hst Eli 45 ttt 4 024 01 Dev 30 Eng HLi2 45 224 i TOTAL ENROLLMENT 17 NUMBER OF SECTIONS 6 AVERAGE STUDENTS PER SECTION 2 83 Bola i Kat amp gt 0 0 5 27 ne et aic E Rt i1b 01 SP E Sci C123 45 i03 216 02 SPE Sci DL 45 i03 5 216 02 SPE Sci r12345 i03 5 l rot SPE Sci GLE 45 i03 222 01 Biology lt 45 i20 ii TOTAL ENROLLMENT 27 NUMBER OF SECTIONS 5 AVERAGE STUDENTS PER SECTION 7 40 Bosworth Elize O TU T S 01b 01 SP Fr Eng Clt 45 10 5 016 02 SP Fr Eng D12345 10 5 016 03 SP Fr Eng F12345 10 016 04 SP Fr Eng GLE 45 10 720 01 Notet aking Al2345 i06 1 721 05 Ud Pro lab lt 45 i06 li TOTAL ENROLLMENT 28 NUMBER OF SECTIONS 6 AVERAGE STUDENTS PER SECTION 6 33 Brom Dale 121 02 H Chemist D12345012245 tto 221 01 H Chemist Hl23456012245 i20 il i22 02 C Chemist Blt 4
298. end the skills file for all courses or only those for which the linked skills information has changed 3 amp 4 You may limit the courses for which skills files will export by selecting START a start and end course number Only the skills for those courses within COURSE TO the specified range of course numbers will be exported SEND END COURSE TO SEND 2 24 Report Cards Manual Enter Courses New Master amp Section List Files New Master amp Section List Files Use this option to completely erase both your course master and section list files You will use this option only under extremely rare circumstances most schools use the same Master Course List from year to year It is easy to modify your existing Master Course List by adding new courses If you want to create a brand new Section List in preparation for scheduling in the new year use the next option NOTE Do not delete courses that are no longer offered if they are still in students transcripts New Section List File Only Use this option to completely erase only your course section file At the beginning of each subsequent school year it is advisable to use this option to totally delete your old course section file and create a new one Unlike the Master Course List which generally remains the same from year to year the Section List changes each school year to the extent that it s usually not worthwhile to edit the existing section list Instead just make a new one
299. enerating a Form Letter Congratulations on Making the Honor Roll 00 7 8 Print a Letter for Each Course Within the Search Range 7 9 Producing a Progress Report for Each Course with Grade 7 9 Search for List of Students with Exact Course Grade 7 10 Printing a List of Students with Grades Within Grade Limits 7 10 User Defined Tasks 1 411 7 11 Printing Rosters reor ens 7 11 Printing One Report Card Per Course Sorted by Teacher 7 11 Printing Mailing Labels for a Course 7 12 Specifications 7 13 PAGE 1 Initial Specifications 7 13 CURRENT TASK eoe dan eas 7 13 PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR 7 14 PAGE 2 More Specifications 7 18 Page 3 Code Override Specifications 7 23 PAGE 4 Transcript amp Optional Field Specifications 7 24 Print Mentis o steacte art thats and aces 7 27 PRINT WHICH STUDENTS 7 27 PRINT WHICH SECTIONS 7 29 Comparisons Between Data Base amp Report Card Reports 7 31 View Edit Letters Reports 7 32 Viewing and Editing Report Cards Reports Letters Window 7 32 Using the View Edit Letters Reports TOOIDBF 2 aciei An Er echt Assad en 7 32 PROWESS stone ETIAM RE 7 33 EOIENIGIU e 24 deir hr pes 7 34 Search Meri re LebbRR ee 7 35 Options Menu 7 36 Window Menu 7 38 Function Keys ous o br
300. ents names have not been entered into their sections with Scheduling Plus you can print blank manual entry forms and use them to schedule students into sections You can then use these forms to input the information into the Enter Grades program See Entering Grades Manually on page 4 3 Print Grade Verification Forms Teachers can use these manual data entry forms to confirm that all of their grades were properly entered into the program These forms contain students entered grades and comment codes Report Cards Manual 7 Introduction The Report Card Plus Programs Print Grade Distribution Reports A useful tool for statistical analysis the Grade Distribution Report shows the number and percentage of students who received a grade within a user defined range You can choose to show the distribution of grades either by teacher or by course and department Program 4 ENTER GRADES Enter Students Schedules This program displays section rosters and allows you to manually add students to them This is the quickest way to manually schedule students into a section if a previously created list needs entering NOTE As an alternative to entering schedules manually you can scan students schedules into Administrator s Plus using the Scan Schedules program see Chapter B 8 Report Cards Manual Enter Students Grades At the end of each marking period use this program to enter students grades into the program from either s
301. eport Cards Manual Description This option reverses Option 1 For example it would copy YEAR 4 to YEAR 3 YEAR 3 to YEAR 2 and YEAR 2 to YEAR 1 It does not copy YEAR 1 to YEAR 0 because the data in YEAR 0 remained there during the original archiving with Option 1 If there was a power failure during the original archiving process this option may NOT be used in lieu of restoring a backup because the original archiving was interrupted in the middle of the process NOTE When students courses are archived only the master course numbers are moved to the archival files and not the section numbers When transcripts are printed course names credits quality points and course lengths are found by using these master course numbers in the archival files and matching them up with what is currently in the master course list Consequently it is important that you do not change these items in your master course list unless you also want them changed for all of the students who may have those courses in their archival files Only the report card columns that have been identified as ARCHIVAL columns will be archived Option 2 in the Customize RC program is used to define which of your report card columns will be archived Note that any codes in the CR column are automatically archived The CR column is used to designate that a student has taken a course for half or no credit as well as if the course should count half or none
302. eport Name Roster 1 per course Sect 1 per course II Sect LABEL No Table LABEL No Table Trans Plain RT Year Trans Plain SM Year Trans Plain RT Dept Trans Plain SM Dept Trans Forms RT Year Trans Forms SM Year Trans Forms RT Dept 7 88 Report Cards Manual Description Prints class rosters similar to those printed with the Data Entry Forms program Because this rooster is a report it can be modified to suit your needs Same as report 6 See RC 1 per course on page 7 85 except that it sorts report cards by section and so must be run by SECTION Same as report 7 See RC 1 per course on page 7 85 except that it sorts report cards by section and so must be run by SECTION These reports are similar to Reports 21 and 23 respectively except these reports do not employ the pre defined Tables As a result these reports lend themselves to user modifications If you decide to modify them you should first copy the report to another number This report creates a wide two column transcript capable of holding four years on a single piece of paper This report is recommended for schools with one credit column This column and the credit earned will print on the right Because the report is wide you can print more report card columns on this report than you can on the narrow two column report Report 52 This report is similar to Report 41 except that it is intended f
303. er QP PARA CODE 03 Career WT e CODE 04 Career GPA e CODE 05 Rank 34 of 82 e CODE 06 Previous Credits e CODE 07 Previous QP e CODE 08 Previous WT e CODE 09 Previous GPA e CODE 10 Last Credits e CODE 11 Last QP e CODE 12 Last WT If you have just updated career totals are the new totals previous totals are before the updating was done and the last totals are the numbers added to the previous totals to get the career totals 7 68 Report Cards Manual Code IFSXX NUM ICNFL NUM PR PRU Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description FOUND SECTION If printing by section these codes can be used to print information about the current section such as at the top of a roster Replace XX with a two digit code e CODE 01 Course Name e CODE 02 Course Number e CODE 03 Course Section e CODE 04 Teacher First Name e CODE 05 Teacher Last Name e CODE 06 Future Use e CODE 07 Homeroom e CODE 08 Credits e CODE 09 Optimum size e CODE 10 Current Size e CODE 11 Weight e CODE 12 GPA Factor e CODE 13 Time CODE 14 Quarter CENTERS THE STUDENT NAME The NUM after the colon is the number of spaces in which the name is to be centered Usually it is the same as the characters you are printing on a line This code is useful centering student s names on certificates Prints the words SCHOLARSHIP REPORT PROGRESS
304. er course list in the appendix lists Reading as course 001 and General Math as course 111 This sample Master Course List also shows the other information that will be entered for each master course It is recommended that courses be grouped into departments by entering them into record numbers in the same hundreds For example all of your Science courses might use numbers in the one hundreds while all of your math courses will use numbers in the two hundreds This numbering system would be used to associate all departments with courses See Entering Department Names on page 1 11 for more information on how to set up departments NOTE The Master Course list carries over from the previous year to give you a starting list Enter Course Section List After completing the Master Course List you can use either the Build Master Schedule program in Scheduling Plus to automatically create your section list or manually create sections in the Enter Courses program Building your Course Section List means simply dividing each master course into one or more sections Each section can also have a different teacher room number and meeting time Program 3 DATA ENTRY FORMS Print Grade Entry Forms After completing your master course list and course section list use this program to print either manual or scanner grade entry forms for each section in your school which teachers can use to record students grades each marking period If stud
305. erage FINAL GRADE i NOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE OR CREDITS grade of BLANK is newer used This is a quarter course Because the computer found a blank grade in the MIDYEAR grade column it looked for a grade in the FINAL grade column When that grade was also blank the course was skipped 8 60 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Course 3 3 COURSE 070 01 Mod Am Hun Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 50 GPA Factor 0 00 SEMESTER COURSE WR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average FINAL GRADE 95 CREDITS AWARDED Qtr or Sem course Possible credits H 0 0000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 95 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point 95 0000 WEIGHT Qtr or Sem course Possible wei ght 0 5000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 47 5000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 47 5000 BUMNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADJ QP 22 5000 SIMPLE QP i2 5000 WEIGHT 0 2500 PREV IGPA 30 0000 THIS GRADE 0 0000 47 5000 d 47 5000 0 5000 NE IGPA 93 3333 NEW 0 0000 70 0000 70 0000 E 0 7500 PRE ACPA 30 0000 NE ACPA 93 3333 Because this is a semester course once a grade is found in a credit column no further credit columns are looked at Even if the grade of 95 had been also entered into the
306. erages row to either print at the top bottom or center The default is the center Width or Blank for Auto Attendance Sets the width of the Attendance box If left blank Auto the box width is determined by the number of columns to print If the available space is insufficient to print all the attendance then columns from the right will be truncated Zoom 100 Image Determines the zoom percentage of an image If Zoom 100 the image will be printed as its actual size Zoom 200 prints the image with double the size Setting a value for the Zoom parameter causes the Stretch parameter value to be ignored Report Cards Manual D 41 Ch apter D Skills and Concepts Sample Skill based Report Card Template Sample Skill based Report Card Template The following is the report body of the sample skills based report car shown on the front cover of this manual The report prints the sample landscape report shown on last page of this document It includes the Advance and and Attendance box codes REM SKRC WIDE PLAIN 2COL LASER V3 REM MARGINS L 0 25 R 0 25 T 0 25 B 0 25 ORIENTATION LAND SCAPE PGSTART T0 25 FN LN T2 5 ID T4 5 GRADE GR T6 7 HR 7 T9 5 DATE ADVANCE 0 5 T0 25 PARENT GUARDIAN NAME amp ADDRESS T4 5 MESSAGE T0 25 1 T4 MSG1 35 T0 25 2 T4 MSG2 35 T0 25 3 4 5 T4 MSG3 35 CNNN 10 5 CNUN 10 5 PGEND ENDPAGE PGNUM 1 PRINTPAGEHEADER Attendanc
307. erence is that this is only a QUARTER course Fill out the form in the same manner as in situation 3 except that a final grade must be placed into the final grade column unless you are going to use the CALCULATE AVERAGES program to calculate your midyear and final averages See Chapter 5 for more information If you intend to update credits and GPA information based on your midyear grades make sure that this final grade is also in the midyear grade column especially for seniors since you might want to update their GPA data half way through their senior year If there were a final exam in this course that grade would be placed in either the midyear exam or final exam column If the program is going to calculate your midyear averages place any exam grade in the midyear exam column SITUATION 4 SAMPLE ENTRY Bold entries are newly entered NAME GR Ist 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS Cl C2 Doe Jon 12 43 A B A A 2 1 NOTE This sample entry assumes that the program is NOT going to calculate midyear averages and that you are going to update career credits and GPAs using the midyear grade Therefore the final grade has been entered into both the midyear and final columns If you only put the final grade for this quarter course into the midyear grade column the program will automatically copy this grade
308. eroegejogeogereeoeogo MA BRNSSNSMSSSSSS 900019 9999919 99019099 99900 eoooo G9 G9 9 moln aja avon o oaro azao o 9 9 C 9 SCANNER GRADE ENTRY FORM i OJO NUMERIC GRADES 4 lara OTO 000 Different scanner forms are used for grade entry depend ing upon whether your school uses number or letter grades This is a sample of a numeric scanner entry form REPORT CARDS PLUS pre prints the names of the stu f dents on the forms and fills in the PAGE NO bubbles in the upper right hand corner Each form contains space for up to six different marks to be entered per student When the forms are scanned you will tell the computer into which report card column each mark should be placed For example you will tell the computer whether the exam grade should be placed into the midyear exam column or into the final exam column It could even be placed into both columns simultaneously The C1 and C2 columns are used for bubbling in the two comment codes while the OPT column may be used to bubble in the grade for any of your customized l USE NO 2 PENCIL ONLY p SSG SNSENINS GIGIGIGIGIGIHIGIGEG 9 D eo earogo Q Q D D o D D Q 2 2 2 2 2 0000 GIO QO Goo GO 0000 OJO amp amp amp 9 GO SO Co C C 9X9
309. es cee ek ens 7 38 Page Setup tss te dice 7 42 Page Layout Menu 7 42 Printer Setup Menu 7 43 Printer Properties 7 44 Report Cards Manual 7 1 Report Card Codes 7 45 Table Codes For Skills and Non Skills Based Report Cards 7 45 Course Table Box 7 45 Advanced Specification Box for skills based report cards 7 48 Attendance Box 7 53 GPA BOX dracone oy ue d 7 55 Honor Roll Box 7 55 General Box Specifications 7 56 Inserting a Graphic into a Report 7 57 Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer 7 59 Code Preliminaries 7 62 Codes That May Share a Line With Other Codes 7 64 Header Codes 7 70 Special Course Line Code 7 71 Special Register Code Two 7 74 OTHER ATTENDANCE CODES 7 74 Attendance Codes That Make Up the Daily Attendance Grid 7 76 Universal Report Codes 7 76 Codes 4 or Fewer Characters In Length That May Share a Line With Other COS E m 7 82 Codes That Must Be On a Line By Themselves 2 7 83 The Pre defined Reports 7 84 Report Cards Manual 7 2 Introduction Report Cards Report Writer Introduction This program is used to produce many different reports including report cards transcripts permanent labels and letters Report Cards
310. etters Reports be up to 45 characters in length but only 27 of the characters will show up on the Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Viewing and Editing Report Cards Letters window The report name may be made up of letters numbers or a combination of the two Viewing and Editing Report Cards Reports Letters 1 RC Narrow Plain 21 LABEL FNL GRD RIGHT 41 Trans Plain RT Year 2 RC Wide Plain 22 LABEL FNL GRD LEFT 42 Trans Plain SM Year 3 RC Blank Forms 23 LABEL SEMESTER 43 Trans Plain RT Dept 4 RC Pre printed Form 24 UNUSED 44 Trans Plain SM Dept 5 RC Multi commenti pg 25 RC Form Long Commnt 45 Trans Forms RT Year 6 RC 1 per course 28 RC Plain Lng Commnt 46 Trans Forms SM Year 7 RC 1 per course Il 27 RC Form Lng Com LAS 47 Trans Forms RT Dept 8 HR Cert FORMS 28 RC Plain Lng Cm LAS 48 Trans Forms SM Dept 9 H Roll Certificate 29 UNUSED 49 Trans Forms RT Yr 22 10 H Roll Export 30 ASCII Export 50 Tran Nar 1Col RT YR 11 Letter Honor Roll 31 UNUSED 51 Tran Nar 1Col SM YR 12 Letter Search 32 GO V4 Export 52 Tran Nar 2Col RT YR 13 Letter Search Com 33 Label Parents 53 Tran Nar 2Col SM YR 14 Search List Exact 34 GO Export 54 Tran Nar 2Col RT DP 15 Search List Range 35 Roster 5
311. ewise if you print absences on the report card you can blank the ABSENCE column afterwards so that the next time you print report cards the old attendance information will not print 5 16 Report Cards Manual View Change Add Drop IPOOUCH OMNIS 24 24 9220 26 erbe 6 2 Viewing and Editing Grades 6 3 Specifications 6 4 Withdrawing Student from Course Section 6 5 Editing the OVR Column 6 5 Printing the Transcript View F9 PRINT msn etae ER es 6 5 Manually Editing GPA Quality Points Weight amp Credits 6 6 Entering and Editing Information for Previous Minus Years 6 7 Entering and Editing Grades in the Minus Years 6 7 Editing the Teacher TCH Column in the Minus Years 6 8 Editing Daily Attendance Information in the Minus Years 6 8 Scheduling View F10 SCHED 6 8 Hot Key Enabled 6 8 Report Cards Manual 6 1 Chapter 6 View Change Add Drop Introduction Introduction This program simplifies the task of entering or changing students grades When you click on View Change Add Drop also called View Change or VCAD in Report Cards Plus you will be in Transcript Mode unlike when you enter VCAD from Scheduling Plus which puts you in the View Schedules mode From this window you can Enter or edit each student s grades one course section at a time View and edit courses and grades for a
312. ext year s courses and grades However the current year s courses and grades may be copied into ARCHIVAL files in which they will be preserved These files are then transferred to the new year s directory where they may be viewed changed or printed on transcripts The process of copying students current report cards information from the REPORT CARD files into the ARCHIVAL files is called the ARCHIVING process This chapter will describe the archiving process while the next chapter will explain how you can change course numbers after they have been archived This will be helpful if in the future your change your master course list Archive Archive The first window that you will see when you choose Option 9 ARCHIVE from the Report Cards Plus master window will be Specification ARCHIVE STUDENTS REPORT CARDS DATA COPY YEAR 0 to YEAR 1 ONLY Description The ARCHIVAL files have enough room to hold a specified number of years worth of report cards information Before you set up your ARCHIVAL files you used the CUSTOMIZE RC program to set how many years of report cards information you wanted your archival files to be able to hold PARAGRAPH BREAK The current year s report cards information which is stored in the report card files is defined as YEAR 0 Last year s report cards information which is stored in the ARCHIVAL files is defined as YEAR 1 The information for the year before is defined as YEAR 2
313. ey 65 1st 243 01 Physics Manchestr D 12005 Wilbur Lambertson Danni 60 1st 127 01 Bas Alg 2 Walters D 12051 Worthley Richard 65 1st 141 04 Computer 1 Christnsn P REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL EXACT GRADE SEARCH ID NAME GRADE SEARCH REPORTS eRe REPORT CARDS PLUS makes it easy to search for 12004 Bardsley Saul students who received any specific grade or range of Edwards B 12017 Milose Khristine prades tor ame repor card gulim Edwards B 12067 Smith Kevin The top report on this page is a grade RANGE Edwards B search It prints in alphabetical order those students Mclnnis l Brown Dale Rhum Broom James 043 01 041 01 Brown James Nun 60 MEDIAN 30 25 MEDIAN 6 Once grades have been entered into the computer many reports are available that would take days to put together by hand This report shows the distribution of grades given by each teacher for the report card column of your choice Teachers are listed in alphabetical order Under teachers GRADE DISTRIBUTION REPORT BY TEACHER 07 22 2002 FIRST MARKING PERIOD 80 89 e 60 69 0 59 F P N x I OTHER Bolduc Kathy m pecu ee a C 216 01 SPE Sri 1 2 1 i 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 505 27 504 12 504 5 005 12 505 0 00s o 004 0 005 0 005 005 0 005 il6 0i SPE Sri 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 005 60 004 0 005 0 005 0 004 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 004 os 0 005 il6 02 SPE Sri 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 i0 005 60 004 0 005 o oo 0
314. f a grade already exists in the column for which averages are being calculated the program will not replace it In other words it will not calculate an average for the course If you change this option to Yes any existing grade in that column will be replaced when you calculate the average This specification tells the program what type of grades you will be calculating In calculating averages the quality point table is not used For number grades the value used is equal to the number For letter grades the value for each letter is taken from a hard coded table To see the table and read a detailed description of how number and letter grades are calculated see NUMBER GRADES on page 5 9 Report Cards Manual 5 3 Ch ap ter 5 Calculate Averages Specifications Calculate Averages Specification USE MINUS IF LETTER GRADES USE PLUS IF LETTER GRADES INCLUDE WHICH SECTIONS MINIMUM NUMERIC GRADE 5 4 Report Cards Manual Description The default for specifications 3 and 4 is Yes Change them to No if you do not want the average calculated to contain a plus or minus Use this specification to limit the sections for which averages will be calculated For example if you choose SEMESTER 1 SECTIONS ONLY Not all year averages will be calculated for only those sections that meet in the first semester SEMESTER 2 and ALL YEAR sections will be ignored This specification determines the lowest possible grade a student
315. f any column in the table For each column you will have to enter the following information Column Title Description 25 This column name will be used in windows in the software which CHARACTER specify which column s to use for a particular task Entering a zero 0 NAME indicates to the program that the column will not be used 5 CHARACTER This column name will be used to construct the heading line on the NAME wide report card If you use less than the five characters it is suggested that you center the characters you do use for appearance sake For example if you enter 1st as your five character name enter it as 1st that is center the 3 characters within the five character box 3 CHARACTER This column name will be used to construct the heading line on the NAME narrow report card permanent label and transcript 1 6 Report Cards Manual Chapter Customize RC Customize Report Card Columns Column Title TYPE 1 7 Report Cards Manual Description A drop down list will appear allowing you to select what type of column you are using A column should only be called a FINAL type column if it will contain a grade that will be the average for the entire course Many schools will have a first semester grade column and a second semester grade column without any final grade column The OTHER classification should be used for a column for which the grades should be excluded from average and GPA calculations NOTE Th
316. f credit columns 1 1 0000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Poirt table 100 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point 100 0000 WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Number of credit column 1 1 0000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 100 0000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points LOO 0000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 2 5000 ADJ QP 165 0000 SIMPLE QP 160 0000 WEIGHT 2 2500 PREY IGPA 71 1111 THIS GRADE 1 0000 100 0000 100 0000 1 0000 NE SGPA 0 0000 NEW 2 5000 E i55 0000 i60 0000 2 2500 PRE AGPA 73 3333 NE ACPA 1 52 5 When the temporary updating was done at the midyear the student had an a midyear grade of I for incomplete This grade has since been changed to a 90 Because the temporary updating has been undone it is perfectly OK to change grades before the final complete updating is performed Because this is a full year course the student receives half of the possible credit for passing each semester and half of the possible weight for each semester The student receives HALF because the possible credits and weight are divided by the number of credit columns which in this case is two If the school had three semester columns each worth credit each of these columns would be worth one third of the total possible credits and weight The computer then looks at the final grad
317. f up to 3 digits or any letter grade up to 3 characters including plus and minus grades or customized symbols such as y v and v NOTE Note that although it is possible to change a customized grade in the grade table you should not change a grade or its quality points if you need to print the original grade on students transcripts 1 2 Report Cards Manual Customize RC Edit Grade Table You can assign both letter and number grades to the same student If you choose to use a combination of letter and number grades it is recommended that you use the same scale for both In other words if you assign 4 0 quality points for a grade of A you should also assign 4 0 quality points for a grade of 95 Conversely if you assign 95 quality points for a grade of 95 you should assign 95 quality points for a grade of A In addition to entering the number of quality points assigned to each grade you will also need to enter a Y or an N in the credit and average columns If you enter a Y credit will be awarded if the student receives the corresponding grade An N means that no credit will be awarded A Y in the average column denotes that the grade will be used when calculating averages for GPAs and honor rolls Use an N if you do not wish the grade to be counted toward the average Note that wildcard grades like N X and P are not counted when using the Calculate Averages program Se
318. f you are using SCHEDULING PLUS to schedule your Int Comput H Earth 3q C Earth 3q Environ St MASTER COURSE LIST 0 50 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 0 50 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 Freshman English DEV English Review l Honors Sophomore English HON Honors Junior Engl ish COL M di English Pp dd 1 00 1 00 aa 1 00 1 00 Baw oo General Math applied Math IU MOSS Course List students your course master list has already been entered Otherwise it must be built by assigning each course a unique number from 001 to 999 It is generally recom mended to group courses from the same department in the same hundreds In this sample all of the ENGLISH courses are numbers 001 through 099 For each course you will also enter its name level credits weight GPA factor optimum size length code and priority of importance for scheduling The GPA FACTOR and WEIGHT are used to calculate stu dents grade point averages for honor rolls and career class rank The GPA FACTOR is used to give more quality points to higher level courses than to average courses The length of a master course is whether all of the sec tions of the course will meet for the entire year a semester or a quarter The code is used to group courses together when printing a four year transcript with students courses
319. fication 5 is set to 299 If specification 4 is set to 1 and specification 5 to 999 all courses will be included If you would like to limit printing to a range of grade levels choose the lowest grade in that range for the start grade and the highest grade in that range for the end grade Report Cards Manual 3 5 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Manual Grade Entry Forms Specification 8 9 3 6 Report Cards Manual LINE SPACING PRINT PREVIEW Description This specification determines whether the Manual Grade Entry Forms will be single spaced double spaced or use a combination of the two When you click on this specification a drop down list appears that contains the following 3 options Single Spacing This setting allows up to 50 names to be printed on a single sheet of paper With this option a blank form will contain 39 blank spaces Double Spacing This is the recommended setting It allows the forms to be double spaced which makes them easier to read If more than one page is needed the course name and other information will be printed at the top of each page If you print a blank form with this option 19 blank double spaces will be printed The sample manual entry forms in the appendix have all been printed using this setting Fit To Page This setting adjusts line spacing depending on the number of students in the course section The program will fit up to 48 students on one page before adding a second page
320. fication page 2 Sections will also be limited by Specifications 2 FIRST COURSE NOT TO PRINT and Specification 4 LAST COURSE NOT TO PRINT on page 2 and Specifications C FIRST COURSE TO PRINT and D LAST COURSE TO PRINT on page 4 Report Cards Manual 7 29 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Print Menus Specifications Description Range of Teachers Individual Teachers Individual Sections 7 30 Report Cards Manual You will be able to enter starting and ending staff ID numbers and only sections assigned to teachers within that range will be processed You may enter a list of ID numbers and only sections assigned to those teachers will be processed You have the option of using an F6 Lookup window to select teachers You may enter a list of ID numbers and only sections assigned to those teachers will be processed You have the option of using an F6 Lookup window to select sections Report Cards Report Writer Comparisons Between Data Base amp Report Card Reports Comparisons Between Data Base amp Report Card Reports Report Card reports are designed and stored in much the same way that data base reports are designed and stored in the Report Writer program in Data Base Plus Hence this manual assumes that you have already read and understood sections 5C 5D and 5E in the Data Base Plus manual which explain how to design and write data base reports This section will highlight the major differences between report
321. fications Description The Start Year refers to the first year s data that will print on the transcript To change the start year press 1 and use the arrow keys to select the earliest year you want to print The End Year refers to the last year you want to print on the transcript If you are printing a transcript for your current seniors you would probably set SPECIFICATION 1 to YEAR 3 3 years less than the current year and set SPECIFICATION 2 to YEAR 0 the current year If you are printing transcripts for juniors you will want to set the START YEAR FOR TRANSCRIPTS to 2 and the END YEAR FOR TRANSCRIPTS to 0 This option allows you to specify a Data Base field to be printed on the top of wide report cards and transcripts On wide report cards it prints on the top line of the report whereas on transcripts it prints across from the parents name This option allows you to specify a second Data Base field to print on transcripts It will print below any entry in SPECIFICATION 3 These specifications allow you to print a Data Base field at the bottom of a transcript organized by years rather than organized by department This field will print below each year s data and to the right of any attendance data This option permits you to use or not use the number grade print table you set up with the Customize RC program See Edit Number Grade Print Table on page 1 11 If you are using number grades you
322. final career credits and GPA s In the 2004 05 directory print students final report cards Also use the 2004 05 directory to print honor roll reports transcripts grade distribution reports etc In the 2004 05 directory use the ARCHIVE program to copy this year s report cards data into the archival file as YEAR 1 and to move all of the other data in the archival file back one year This program also takes the daily attendance data for the current year and stores it in the archival files so that it may later be optionally printed on transcripts Sometime towards the end of the summer run the TRANSFER CREDITS program in REPORT CARDS PLUS to transfer students updated career credits and GPA s as well as their archival files from the 2004 05 directory to the 2005 06 directory NOTE f in the future you want to be able to print transcripts for graduating seniors in the 2004 05 directory and you have chosen to archive one less year of school than the number of grades in your school i e you have chosen to archive three years in a four year school you will need to take some precautions before performing the above steps After you archive year 1 data becomes the same as year 0 data and the oldest year s data gets erased If you have set up ADMINISTRATOR S PLUS to keep enough archival years you will have no problem You can tell the transcript program to print years 1 to 4 instead of years 0 to 3 If you have not specified enoug
323. following situation Assume that you have special courses for which you want to use a different weighting system Special courses could be quarter and semester courses with exams that need to use a different weighting system than full year courses with exams You may define your weights and then choose to calculate averages for only these individual sections You may then change your weights and do another group of special courses Once averages have been calculated for your special courses set your standard weights and choose to do all sections When averages are being calculated for all courses any averages previously calculated for individual sections will NOT be changed if specification 2 REPLACE EXISTING GRADES is set to No Report Cards Manual 5 7 Chapter 5 Calculate Averages How Are Averages Calculated Specification Description VIEW LOG This option should be used after calculating averages in order to see whether the process was successful for all students and if not why averages did not calculate for some students Note that each time you calculate averages a new log will generate overwriting the old one The Calculate Averages log is a helpful tool for diagnosing problems that prevent averages from being calculated for particular students See the sample log on page Reading the Log on page 5 15 NOTE The View Log window contains a FIND option that can be used to quickly locate information on a particular stude
324. font of this keyword N supresses printing The de fault font is black Arial 8 point Advanced Specifications Course PrintCourseTable WhichCourses Z Left X Top Y This command determines where the Course Table box will print on the page X defines where the box will be printed from the left hand margin in inches Y defines how far down from the top margin the box will print The Z can indicate All Course numbers separated by commas Example 121 221 50 60 Range of Courses Example 400 900Course numbers and range can be used together Example 121 400 500 600 PrintDescription Y or N Course Table Advanced Specifications Courses If you wish to print the Description of the course name set this command to Y for Yes It ignores whatever is set in the Report Writer Specifications If this command is omit ted from the WLABEL report the specification will be honored PrintGPA Box Left X Top Y GPA This command determines where the GPA Box will print on the page X defines where the box will be printed from the left hand margin in inches Y defines how far down from the top margin the box will print PrintHonorRollBox Left X Top Y Honor Roll This command determines where the Honor Roll Box will print on the page X defines where the box will be printed from the left hand margin in inches Y defines how far down from the top margin the box will print D 38 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Box Code
325. for each course in which the student received the selected grade For example you could send a separate letter for each course in which a student has a grade of I Use Specification 5 to set the grade and Specification 8 to set the marking period on which to search If you choose this option when printing An Exact Search List you will see listed on the report only the first course in which the student received the selected grade If you print a Search Letter using this option only one letter will be printed for a student who received the selected grade even if they have that grade in multiple courses If you choose to search on I for Incomplete only one letter will be printed per student even if they have incompletes in five courses See the note on page 7 9 for information on modifying the report so that all courses in which the student received the selected grade appear on the letter Use Specification 5 to set the grade and Specification 8 to set the marking period on which to search This is the same as EXACT GRADE SEARCH 1 per course listed above except that you can search on a RANGE of grades instead of one particular grade Specifications 6 and 7 will be used to set the grade range for which to search Specification 8 sets the report card column to search This is the same as EXACT GRADE SEARCH 1 per student listed above except that you can search on a RANGE of grades instead of one particular grade Specifications
326. ft and top margins re spectively Since multiple Advance Boxes can be defined in a single report indi cates the Advance Box number X is replaced by the number of inches the Advance Box will print from left margin Y is replaced by the number of inches the Advance Box will print from the top margin Z can equal Skills Nonskills ALL ALLSkillsFirst ALLNonSkillsFirst Course numbers separated by commas 121 221 50 60 or Range of Courses 400 900 200 300 Course numbers and range to gether 121 400 500 600 PrintAttendanceBox 1 Left X Top Y Attendance Determines the distance the Attendance Box will print from the left and top margins re spectively Since multiple Attendance Boxes can be defined in a single report in dicates the Advance Box number X determines the distance in inches the attendance box will print from the left hand margin Y determines the distance down the page in inches PrintBorder Y or N Attendance Honor Roll GPA Draw Course Table Advance course comment concepts narrative Set this parameter to Y to print the borders around each box PrintBox Left X Top Y Determines where the Draw Box defined as with the corresponding specification num ber will print X is replaced by the distance in inches from the left margin Y is replaced by the distance in inches from the top margin PrintColumnAveragesAndFont Y or N Course Table To change the font a
327. g 5 15 Blank Report Card Columns 5 16 Report Cards Manual 5 1 Chapter 5 Calculate Averages Introduction Introduction Subject ist Administrator s Plus x CALCULATE AVERAGES C 1 Calculate averages C 2 Blank report card column s C 3 End program The Calculate Averages program calculates semester midyear and final averages based on quarter and semester grades It is also used to erase all grades or entries in any report card column including ATTENDANCE or COMMENT columns Report Cards Plus follows certain guidelines in calculating averages It is recommended that you read and understand all of the information that follows BEFORE proceeding to use the program to calculate averages so that you are certain that the program will do what you expect it to As an extra check calculate a random sampling of averages manually and compare them to the program s calculations For example assume that a school has defined their report card columns so that their report card heading line reads as follows 2nd SEM1 3rd 4th SEM2 FINEX FINAL CRDTS TEACHER 5 2 Report Cards Manual This school could calculate a semester 1 average based on the grades in the 1st and 2nd marking period columns for semester courses The final average could be calculated based on the 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th marking periods and the Final Exam grade for AII Year courses The rest of this chapter explains in detail how to use th
328. g figures stored in his report card record following his sophomore year of high school QP Quality Points CAREER CREDITS 8 50 LAST CREDITS 0 00 CAREER A DJ USTED QP 700 00 LAST ADJUSTED QP UPDATE 0 00 CAREER WEIGHT 10 00 LAST WEIGHT UPDATE 0 00 CAREER SIMPLE QP 680 00 LAST SIMPLE QP UPDATE 0 00 This student s career adjusted GPA is currently 700 10 or 70 00 This student s career simple GPA is currently 680 10 or 68 00 At the end of the student s junior year an update is performed During this update the program calculates the following for this student s junior year grades JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT CREDITS 4 00 JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT ADJUSTED QP 400 00 JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT WEIGHT 5 00 e JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT SIMPLE QP 390 00 The current credits of 4 00 are added to the previous career credits of 8 50 to give a new career credits total of 12 50 The current adjusted quality points of 400 are added to the previous career quality points of 700 to give a new career quality points total of 1100 The current simple quality points of 390 are added to the previous career quality points of 680 to give a new career quality points total of 1070 Finally the current weight of 5 00 is added to the previous career weight of 10 to give a new career weight total of 15 This student s career adjusted GPA is now 1100 15 or 73 33 and his simple GPA is now 1070 15 or 71 33 After this update the student s repo
329. g the current year s data or the data from any past year in the archival files For example choose year 0 to print a report card using the current year s data Choose YEAR 1 to print a report card using the data from the previous year Enter into this specification the grade you want the program to search for when doing an exact grade search If you want to find all students with a 75 then set Specification 2 to one of the exact grade options and enter 75 for Specification 5 You can also use this to search for incompletes enter I or for blank grades leave this specification blank Use these two specifications to specify the limits of a range of grades for which you want the program to search For example if you are a school using numerical grades and you want to find all students who have an A in at least one of their classes you can set Specification 6 to 90 and Specification 7 to 100 assuming that 90 100 A in you school and Specification 2 to GRADE RANGE SEARCH 1 per student COLUMN FOR GRADE SEARCHES PRINT DAILY ATTENDANCE ATTENDANCE INTERVAL START DATE ATTENDANCE INTERVAL END DATE ATTENDANCE YEAR TO DATE THRU REPORT CARD MESSAGE LINE 1 REPORT CARD MESSAGE LINE 2 REPORT CARD MESSAGE LINE 3 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications When doing an exact grade or grade range search use this specification to designate which report card column you wish to search A drop down list will
330. g the scanning process will inform you if a form has not been scanned for a student After selecting Option 1 CONTINUE the following message will appear on the window IF THE READY LIGHT ON THE SCANNER IS OFF PRESS THE START BUTTON PRESS ESC TO ABORT SCANNING AT ANYTIME If nothing is happening it is probably because the READY light on the scanner is off Simply press the START button on the scanner to turn it on and start the forms through the scanner At anytime pressing the ESCAPE key on the computer will halt the scanner and return you to the main window from where you may later choose to CONTINUE and resume scanning exactly where you left off If you halt the scanner by pressing the ESCAPE key you may have to re scan the last form that passed through the scanner You may also temporarily halt the scanner by pressing the START button on the scanner which will turn the READY light off if it is already on When the automatic feeder is empty the ready light on the scanner will go off and the computer will pause as it waits for more data from the scanner Place the next stack of 50 forms in the scanner and press the START button on the scanner to resume the scanning process There is no need to touch anything on the computer during the process of refilling the automatic feeder If the automatic feeder is empty and you do not have any more forms to scan press the ESC key to return to the main window from where the program may
331. grade regardless of the GPA factor of the course When you calculate class rank you will have the option to use either the adjusted or simple GPA Similarly when you print report cards transcripts or permanent labels you will have the option to print either the adjusted or simple GPA or both When a student is first entered into Administrator s Plus these four slots all contain zeroes At the end of each semester or year the Statistical Reports program will be used to update these figures based on students grades for the current year in the report card columns that you have designated as CREDIT columns The Customize RC program is used to designate report card columns as credit columns See Chapter 1 page CREDIT on page 1 8 Students career adjusted grade point averages are calculated by dividing their career adjusted quality points by their career weight Students career simple grade point averages are calculated by dividing their career simple quality points by their career weight Once numbers exist in these slots Class Rank Reports may be obtained listing and or sorting students by career grade point averages career credits career adjusted quality points or career simple quality points At any time during a school year students career credits and grade point averages may be temporarily updated based on the grades in any report card column For example you may want to temporarily update your seniors career GPA s half way through
332. h Fields ASCII Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports Description The 1 Student Per Phone setting used primarily for letters and labels causes the report to print for only one sibling per family The Fixed Length Fields setting is designed for reports that print data base fields in columns From the Data Base Plus Address program you may set the maximum number of characters that will print for each of the 160 possible data base fields With Fixed Length Fields turned on columnar reports will have enough room to accommodate this maximum character length Therefore the columns will line up evenly Data that is longer than the fixed length will be truncated Data that is shorter than the fixed length will be padded with spaces In other words the data inserted into a report from a particular data base field will take up the same amount of pre defined space for every student no matter how long or short the entry With the fixed length setting off you may line up columns using the Tab Report Writer codes for example T4 25 Checking ASCII displays the following the window The path and filename must be entered in the format shown You can either type in or browse to the folder to which you want to export the file If you select Overwrite and if a file with the same name exists in the destination folder the existing file will be replaced with the new one If you select Append if a file with the same name exists in
333. h most schols will print their report card AVERAGES 96 3 f Dp 6 50 using our great looking forms it is possible to print them on either norrow or wide plain white paper This is a sample narrow report card printed after the first marking period with comments CAREER CREI You have ocmplete control over virtually everything 2202 50 that prints on the report card For example yo nius choose whether or not to print the averages at the bottom of each column which columns to print 09 01 2000 whether or not the attendance should be printed at HONOR ROLL STATUS SEE the bottom and whether or not students career cred 1GH HONORS TARDIES DISMISSALS its and GPA should be printed If you want stu dents rank in class may even be printed on thei report card Mary Keefe PARENT GUARDIAN NAME amp ADDRESS 001 GRADE 12 HR 108 Page 1 Mr amp Mrs Ernest Keefe RR 2 Box 1441 Springfield MA 01036 SUBJECT AP Sr Eng Calculus C Physics Sociology French 4 Band Economics FE ABSENCES TARDIES DISMISSALS AVERAGES LEV CRS 1st AP 041 90 AP 135 99 COL 242 98 336 84 COL 442 89 552 719 815 02 01 20 MESSAGE 07 14 2002 Tuition payment 5 of 10 is due January 15 2003 Have a great Vacation REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL SCHOLARSHIP REPORT 2nd MEX MID 3rd 4th FEX FNL ABS CRDT TEACHER Narrow Report Card Although most schols will print their report cards using our g
334. h s land air and water Processes that shape the earth evalution of the earth 2nd Earth in the solar system Motion of objects in the solar system skills and concepts Default Skills based report card templates can be downloaded from the report template page on our web site http www administrators plus org Reports Reports htm If you wish to design your own custom Skills based reports refer to the supplement Codes to Create Skill and Nonskill based Report Cards D 20 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Codes to Create Skill and Nonskill based Report Cards Codes to Create Skill and Nonskill based Report Cards Universal Codes CNXN This code centers school information on report headers You may view and edit school information from the Customize Data Base program or by choosing File Customize School Information from the upper toolbar The after the colon is the number of inches in which to center the entry On a normal 8 34 x 11 inch piece of paper with 34 inch margins on either side would be replaced with 7 5 The X may be replaced with an N U S C or P N Centers Name of school U Underlines the school name S Centers school s Street address C Centers City State amp Zip of school on a single line P Centers the Phone of school For example CNNN 7 5 would center your school name on a standard piece of paper HLINE XY This header line report writer code prints a
335. h years you must use the NEW FILES program in DATA BASE PLUS to increase the number of years you archive Report Cards Manual 9 5 Chapter 9 Archive Archive Specification UNARCHIVE continued 9 6 Report Cards Manual Description In order to save a lot of disk space information about each course such as its name and how many credits it is worth is only stored in one place the MASTER COURSE LIST Students report cards and archival files contain the course numbers of the courses they are taking or have taken When it needs to the computer matches up the course numbers with the Master Course List in order to find out the names and other information about the courses in students files It is important to understand that there is only ONE master course list and that it is used for both students current courses in their report cards files as well as for their previous courses in their archival files If you change something in the master course list for a course number that change will be carried through to every student that has that course in their archival files For example if you change the name of COURSE 123 from English to Math students transcripts will show course 123 as Math instead of as the English they took The same thing will happen of you change the number of credits for a course Consequently it is recommended that you do not remove or change master course list entries Instead just make a new cou
336. have the option to have them print as something other than the grade you have entered for example letter grades The number grade print table translates the grades you have entered into the grades you want to be printed the original number grade is what the program stores The default setting for this specification is No This specification determines what will print in the AT END OF box at the bottom of the transcript If you are printing senior transcripts at the end of the first semester you could enter SEMESTER into this specification Report Cards Manual 7 25 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Specification YEAR GRADE LEVEL OFFSET FIRST COURSE TO PRINT LAST COURSE TO PRINT NARRATIVES FOR WHICH COLUMNS 7 26 Report Cards Manual Description This specification permits you to print transcripts from directories in which you have already archived In such a directory you should set this specification to 1 and Specifications 1 and 2 to one year less than you would in the current year For example a high school that normally prints transcripts from the current year with Specifications 1 and 2 set to YEAR 3 and Year 0 respectively will leave this specification at O However if they print a transcript from last year s directory after they have archived then they should set Specifications 1 and 2 to Year 4 and Year 1 respectively and they should set Specification E
337. he View Change Add Drop or Enter Grades Manually screen Simply click in the appropriate grading column and click the Narratives button To Enter or Edit Grades Manually 1 Click the Enter Grades icon to display the Enter Grades window ra Administrator s Plus ENTER GRADES 1 enter grades Manually 2 enter grades and sKills manually 3 Scan grades 4 receive from Grade quick 5 End program 2 Click Enter Grades Manually The specification window appears 3 Define the specifications as desired and then click Done See Specification Window 1 on page 4 3 for definitions of each specification NOTE Make sure that you use the specifications to select which marking periods you want to edit 4 6 Report Cards Manual NOTE Enter Grades Entering Grades Manually The Enter Grades Manually window appears Enter Grades Manually ROSTER CURRENT SECTION NAME TEACHER SIZE F USE RE DEFINED NUMBER KEYS EEN R E A GEN A E RUN UL EERS es RR KCS EA CE EA RN EA EEN LS E SES 4 Inthe Enter CRS or CRS SC field enter the course or section The easiest way is to click the Browse button B which displays the list of courses and sections from which you can choose You can also type your course section choices directly into the field The course section number must be entered with a forward slash separating the master course number and section number Leading zeroes are not necessary For example
338. he Task List on page 7 4 describes which reports are linked to each task in detail You can accept the default which appears in Specification 3 ACTIVE LETTER REPORT See ACTIVE LETTER REPORT on page 7 16 or click on that field and choose another report from the list This section briefly describes each of the reports that may be selected from the following window Viewing and Editing Report Cards Reports Letters X 1 RC Narrow Plain 21 LABEL FNL GRD RIGHT 41 Trans Plain RT Year 2 RC Wide Plain 3 RC Blank Forms 22 LABEL FNL GRD LEFT 23 LABEL SEMESTER 42 Trans Plain SM Year 43 Trans Plain RT Dept 4 RC Pre printed Form 24 UNUSED 44 Trans Plain SM Dept 5 RC Multi commentipg 25 RC Form Long Commnt 45 Trans Forms RT Year 6 RC 1 per course 26 RC Plain Lng Commnt 46 Trans Forms SM Year 7 RC 1 per course Il 8 HR Cert FORMS 27 RC Form Lng Com LAS 28 RC Plain Lng Cm LAS 47 Trans Forms RT Dept 48 Trans Forms SM Dept 12 Letter Search 32 GO V4 Export 9 H Roll Certificate 29 UNUSED 49 Trans Forms RT Yr 22 10 H Roll Export 30 ASCII Export 50 Tran Nar 1Col RT YR 11 Letter Honor Roll 31 UNUSED 51 Tran Nar 1Col SM YR 52 Tran Nar 2Col RT YR 13 Letter Search Com 33 Label Parents 53 Tran Nar 2Col SM YR 14 Search List Exact 34 GG Export 54 Tran
339. he WLABEL FRC files where are the numbers for the report 3 Paste the file into the directory for the previous school year The Report Cards Report Writer includes many codes not included in the Data Base Report Writer These codes allow you to use report card data in your Report Cards Plus reports On the other hand almost all of the codes that are valid in Data Base Plus reports are also valid in Report Cards Plus reports Report Cards Manual 7 31 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports View Edit Letters Reports To access the body of a report you wish to edit click Done in the Report Cards Report Writer Specifications and choose View Edit Letters Reports from the Print Menu See Print Menus on page 7 27 This feature accessible from the Print Menu allows you to either modify any pre existing report or create a new one Reports can include any of the Report Writer codes available in the Data Base Report Writer as well those specific to the Report Cards Plus module In View Edit Letters Reports you can view the body of any Report Cards Report Writer report and make any necessary changes to codes text or layout This manual assumes basic knowledge of report writing in Administrator s Plus For a more detailed explanation of how to use create and customize reports refer to Chapter 5 of the Data Base Plus manual Viewing and Editing Report Cards Reports Letters Window When you select View Edit
340. he grade book NOTE This section is limited the skill components of the Administrator s Plus GradeQuick Interface For complete instructions on setting up the interface refer to the Administrator s Plus GradeQuick Deluxe Interface Guide Preparing Administrator s Plus There are certain steps to take to prepare Administrator s Plus before skills work seamlessly with GradeQuick To Prepare Administrator s Plus 1 Loginto Administrator s Plus as the Supervisor and click File gt Customizec S O S Interface Options The S O S Interface Options window appears 2 Click the Specifications button under the heading GradeQuick Grade Book Software D 10 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick The Specifications GradeQuick Options window appears t Specifications Grade Quick Options SPECIFICATIONS GRADE QUICK OPTIONS B Send PERIOD to GQ ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 3 Make sure that Specification 3 Location of the Skills to GQ folder is set to the correct path of the shared directory designated to store skill files By default this is the GQWin SkillsFromAP folder 4 Make sure that Specification B Send Skill File Names GQ V7 amp Later Only is set to YES Report Cards Manual D 11 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick Sending Skills to GradeQuick From the Enter Courses menu select Send Skills to GradeQuick The skills associ
341. hem English Chem Cl DI C2 D3 Chem B1 A2 D2 C3 Chem English El F2 E3 F3 Chem Music Gl HI G2 H3 Gym Gym Fl E2 H2 G3 Gym For this school the time for English would be A or A123 Note however that English meets first period on days 1 and 3 and third period on day 2 It does not meet on day 4 The time for Chem would be BE1D3 This means that Chem meets each time that B block meets which is third period on day one first period on day 2 and first period on day 4 In order to give Chemistry two double labs it also meets on E1 block on day 1 and D3 block on day 4 Chem does not meet on day 3 The time for music would be E3 since it just meets one block per four day rotation The time for gym would be G because it meets each time that G block meets Note that in this school s schedule blocks A D always meet in the morning while blocks E H always meet in the afternoon Consequently their entire morning can be blocked off for vocational courses by entering ABCD as the time while the afternoon could be blocked off by entering EFGH as the time 2 16 Report Cards Manual Field Name ID Room Meeting Time Course Length SC Enter Courses Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List Description Enter the ID number of the staff member teaching the section The teacher s name will appear after you enter the number If you do not know the ID number of a staff member the F6 LOOKUP is avail
342. hese forms it is not printed by this report 7 84 Report Cards Manual Report Name RC Multi Comment pg RC 1 per course RC 1 per Course II HR Cert Forms H Roll Certificate H Roll Export Letter Honor Roll Report Cards Report Writer The Pre defined Reports Description This narrow report card contains narrative comments which can be imported from GradeQuick or entered manually in View Change Add Drop See Chapter 6 This report prints one report card per course per student including narrative comments It leaves a space for the teacher to hand write a personal comment Like the previous report this report prints one report card per course per student However it puts the grades in a different format By editing this report you can change the headings that print next to each grade and what grade appears next to each label As in report 6 narrative comments are included and there is room for personal comments Use this report to print an honor roll certificate on our great looking forms Call 1 800 882 2994 for a sample This report prints a simple certificate listing the student and the honor roll he or she achieved To print the certificate make Report 9 the active report and set Specification 2 PRINT LETTER REPORT FOR on the INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS window to ON ANY HONOR ROLL SEARCH You could make the certificate more attractive by adding a graphic See Inserting a Graphic into
343. hese forms may be used to enter names into course sections as well as to enter grades and comment codes into the program Entry forms will always include any prior grades that have been entered for students in the section However they will not include prior comment codes The reason for this is that the new comment codes will have to be entered into the comment code boxes To see prior comment codes print a Grade Verification Form See Grade Verification Forms on page 3 23 Report Cards Manual 3 3 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Manual Grade Entry Forms Manual Grade Entry Forms To print Manual Grade Entry Forms choose Option 1 from the window on page 3 2 The following specification window appears F l Specifications Manual Grade Entry Forms SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL GRADE ENTRY FORMS 1 INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN ALL SECTIONS 2 PRINT WHICH MARKING PERIOD AT TOP FIRST MARKING PERIOD 3 PRINT FORMS WITHOUT ANY STUDENTS C Yes No 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN 1 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN ooo E 6 START GRADE Grade 9 7 END GRADE Grade 12 8 LINE SPACING ll Fit To Page 9 PRINT PREVIEW Y N Yes C No Specification 1 2 3 4 Report Cards Manual Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Description INCLUDE This specification allows you to choose for which sections you want the SECTIONS forms printed For example if it is the end of the 1st marking period
344. hrough 500 then you will only obtain courses 100 through 399 and 501 through 900 Because the last course number must be greater than the first course number you must change Specification 3 before you change Specification 2 Specifications Report Cards Report Writer MORE SPECIFICATIONS REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER Pages Pages 1 INCLUDE COURSES MEETING WHEN _ _ TV ert 3 LASTCOURSENOTTOPRINT Maeda oh Active students only X 5 INCLUDE BLANK SORT CATEGORIES e Incl de C Do NOT Include 6 START GRADEFORALL GRADES EGER END GRADE FORALL GRADES Grace 12 8 PRINT CREDITS CREDIT COLUMN AND BOTTOM TOTALS EIE LO not use REGEN 15 column A PRINT HONOR ROLL STATUS vc C Mo E COUNT CRS WITH GPA FACTOR OF 99 NOLONGERUSED 3 REPORT CARD TITI F SCHOL ARSHIF Reset Default 1 ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Specification INCLUDE COURSES MEETING WHEN FIRST COURSE NOT TO PRINT LAST COURSE NOT TO PRINT 7 18 Report Cards Manual Description You may limit the courses printed on reports or used in searches to only those meeting during a specific marking period If you set this specification to FIRST MARKING PERIOD only those courses that met during the first marking period will be included This includes ALL YEAR courses as well as FIRST SEMESTER and FIRST QUARTER courses When printing by SECTIONS only those sections included by this specification
345. if spec is set to print column averages Prints HANK for perm labels if spec is set to print rank in class Prints CR for perm labels if spec is set to print credits Prints WT for perm labels if spec is set to print GPA data Prints QP for perm labels if spec is set to print GPA data Prints QPA for perm labels if spec is set to print GPA data Prints HONOR ROLL STATUS if a student is on the honor Roll and the specification is set to print the honor roll status Underlines the words HONOR ROLL STATUS if a student is on an Honor Roll and the specification is set to print the honor roll status Prints the name of any honor roll the student is on if the specification is setto print the honor roll status Honor rolls must first be calculated with the STATISTICAL REPORT program Prints the name of any honor roll a student is on regardless of how the specification is set to print the honor roll status Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Special Course Line Code Code ICLYRCRXY N UM ICLYR99RX ICLYR99RY Description This code builds a line for labels or transcripts without you having to build it one column at a time While sacrificing some flexibility it is easy to use If you need more flexibility you may use other codes to build your course lines Course lines may be built with the final grade on the right or left or in a special semester f
346. imple quality points and simple GPA Because no updates have been performed for the current year the values listed reflect what the student earned during previous years The detailed update report for an update performed on the midyear column appears on the next three pages The View Change Add Drop window showing credit weight and GPA information as it appears after the temporary update appears on page 8 55 Report Cards Manual 8 47 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Midyear Update Report Page 1 UPDATING WILL BE BASED CN CNE COLUMN MIDYEAR GRADE PERCENT OF ENTERED WEIGHTS USED FULL YEAR COURSES 50 005 SEMESTER 1 COURSES 100 005 SEMESTER 2 COURSES 100 004 QUARTER COURSES 100 00 UPDATE BASED ON WHICH YEARS CURRENT YEAR YEAR O THIRD QUARTER UPDATE NO UNIVERSAL UPDATING SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM LETTER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR D MINIMUM NUMBER GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR 60 REGENTS OPTION NO ADD OR MULTIPLY GPA FACTOR ADD 090 Rediker Richard eaeeeee YEAR D setaeee 1 COURSE 050 01 Ad Eng Use Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 25 GPA Factor 0 00 OUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYEAR GRADE 90 CREDITS AWARDED Quarter Course Possible credits Qtr course weight 100 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT
347. imum of 9 999 may slow certain operations for scheduling and report cards A lower maximum such as 2 000 should not significantly slow these operations Also note that expanding your course numbers beyond 999 means your data will not be backwards compatible to releases prior to version 4 To Change Course Settings 1 Inthe Customize Report Cards Plus window select Course Settings and then click Next A warning window appears Administrator s Plus At Odyssey now supports more than 1000 courses in Report Cards and Scheduling By increasing the maximum number of courses above 999 you will be able to create courses with 4 digit course numbers Please note that setting your course list to the new maximum of 9999 may slow certain operations in scheduling and report cards By setting a lower maximum such as 2000 you can have twice as many courses but not have a noticeable effect on the speed of scheduling and report card operations Important Note Once you expand your course list beyond 999 courses your data will no longer be backward compatible with older versions of Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual 1 13 Chapter 1 Customize RC Maintain Grade Change Log 2 Read the warning and then click Done The Specifications Course Settings window appears Specifications Course Settings 1 MAXIMUM COURSE NUMBER ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 3 Inthe Maximum Course Number field enter your maximum cou
348. in 65 94 45 5 647 2652 F 9 James Leasure 77 93 55 5 627 4633 M 10 Michael Chute 72 93 33 6 655 7327 M 11 Sherry Bullerwell 10 93 23 6 647 5337 F 12 Ken Mains 34 92 61 6 647 8059 M The two optional fields are the SEX and PHONE NUMBER If these students had any incompletes the number would be listed under the INC column If they had any F s they would be listed under the F column 8 10 Report Cards Manual NOTE Statistical Reports Honor Rolls The CRS column is the number of courses used in calculating the average For example the number one student Cary Claver had only one grade used in calculating his 100 00 average When defining honor rolls a specification allows you to exclude students with less than a minimum number of courses being used to calculate their averages See Defining Honor Roll Reports on page 8 15 ALPHA BY NAME OR AVERAGE If you set Specification 8 to Yes to view the honor roll on the window before printing this determines how the honor roll is initially displayed on the window While viewing the list the F10 SORT key may be used to toggle between alphabetical order by name or numerically by average If you print it without first viewing it on the window this determines the list s order PRINT RANK Set this specification to Yes if you want to print the student s rank in class on the honor roll report PRINT NAME You have three choices NO DO NOT PRINT NAME YES
349. in columns other than EXAM columns If it does NOT find any additional grades it will permanently copy the earlier semester grade to the final grade column and use it in awarding credits quality points and weight This earlier semester grade will now appear on report cards as BOTH the semester grade and the final grade Note that the presence of a W or l after this semester grade will prevent the semester grade from being copied to the final grade column This feature saves you from having to enter the final grade for a semester one course into both the semester and final grade columns Updating Based On One Designated Report Card Column ALL YEAR schools will use this option to temporarily update seniors credits and GPAs based on their semester grades or on their 3rd quarter average ALL YEAR schools are schools that award credits and update students career grade point average based only on the final grade column In other words they have only one designated credit column Report Cards Manual 8 31 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits Specification Continued 1 UPDATE BASED ON WHICH COLUMN S 2 WHICH YEARS 8 32 Report Cards Manual Description To update students averages based on the semester grades choose to update based on the SEMESTER column e Because updating is being done based on one column specifications 4 7 must be used to designated how different courses should b
350. ines demarcating the different quadrants of the transcript Prints course information separated by year on a wide 11 x 8 5 pre printed form that does not have school name and address information pre printed on it Because this transcript is only one column wide you can print as many report card columns as you want however depending on how many courses your students take this transcript may require more than one sheet of paper Use this report if your school has one column for credit the final grade column This column and the credit earned will print on the right between the vertical lines This report is similar to Report 50 except that it is designed for a semester school with two credit columns As with the other semester reports the only columns that print are the two semester columns along with the credits earned each semester and the total credits Same as report 50 except that it prints two columns instead of one Due to spacing restrictions this report is recommended for schools who do not need to print many grading columns Same as report 51 except that it prints two columns instead of one Due to spacing restrictions this report is recommended for schools who do not need to print many grading columns Prints courses in two columns organized by department with Final grade on right followed by Credit column Prints courses in two columns organized by department This report is designed for a semester school
351. ing It allows the forms to be double spaced which makes them easier to read If more than one page is needed the course name and other information will be printed at the top of each page If you print a blank form with this option 19 blank double spaces will be printed The sample manual entry forms in the appendix have all been printed using this setting Fit To Page This setting adjusts line spacing depending on the number of students in the course section The program will fit up to 48 students on one page before adding a second page If two pages are needed names will be spaced evenly on both pages Fit To Page is the recommended setting for blank Manual Grade Entry Forms NOTE Unless you are printing forms for individual sections forms are always printed by staff member alphabetically making them easy to distribute If you would like to print forms for only certain staff members choose the option Individual Teachers on the following window If you would like to print forms for several teachers you can choose the option Range of Teachers provided that the teachers for whom you wish to print forms have ID numbers within a numeric range Note that Specification A is followed by specifications 1 thru 9 With Specification A set to Yes when entering grades manually pressing the number keys 1 thru 9 will enter the values you enter for specifications 1 thru 9 The above example shows that pressing a 1 will
352. inguish multiple boxes in a report Determines whether the course description will print in place of the course name If this code is set to Y courses that do not have a long description will print the standard course name Width of the entire course table Columns that will not fit in this width will be truncated Use Auto to have the box width calculate automatically based on the width of the page and the columns printed Other Width codes Subject Course Level Section Credit Teacher Comment MinGradingColumnWidth Enter a number in inches If you choose to use the AUTOCALC option the settings here will be ignored and the program will calculate an optimal width based on how many columns are needed and how much text is entered in each column Minimum width of columns containing grades Column width will increase if needed to accommodate grades but it will not be lower than this number Report Cards Manual 7 45 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Code BorderWidth 4 Left Right Top Bottom BoxHeight Auto or Other Height codes Title Row Comment Narrative TitleBorder Y or N TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center CourseNameHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center VerticalBodyAlign Top Bottom Center PrintVerticalLines Y or N PrintLineAfterXCourses PrintWhichColumns 1 13 PrintColumnHea
353. int at the top of the Scanner entry CIRCLE form CIRCLE EXAM GRADE MIDYEAR FINAL CIRCLE FINAL EXAM FINAL GRADE MIDYEAR FINAL This prompts the teacher to designate HEADING whether this is the exam for the midyear term or the exam for the end of the year It also prompts the teacher to do the same with the final grade 9 SCAN FORM Choose Regular Alpha Numeric Form if you are not using Skills or TYPE Special Skills Form if you are scanning skills grades If you select Special Skills Form you can click on the Special Skills Form tab at the top of the window to access the following specification page F l Specifications Scanner Grade Entry Forms SPECIFICATIONS SCANNER GRADE ENTRY FORMS Special Skills Form 5 WHICH COURSE NUMBER TO PRINT REGULAR COURSE NUMBER 6 WHICH TERM TO PRINT TERM 1 7 REPORT PERIOD NoT SELECTED Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Specification Description Specifications These specifications determine what marking period headings will print 1 through 4 on the Scanner Grade Entry Forms Choose the marking period from your list of report card columns in the drop down list 5 WHICH You can choose REGULAR COURSE NUMBER or ALIAS FIELD COURSE The latter option allows you to print the course alias defined in the NUMBER TO View Edit Courses amp Sections window See Course Number Alias on PRINT page 2 10 Report Cards Manual 3 15 Chapter 3 Entr
354. integer EndBoxDef PrintBox 1 Left 0 Top 0 D 26 Report Cards Manual Course Table Box Skills and Concepts New Box Codes This box is used to print courses in a table and replaces the old course loop codes used in Version and Version 2 Note This table is designed to print all courses but not the skills associated with those courses It can combine non skill courses in one box and use the Advanced Specifications Box codes on Page 6 to produce a course box with skills More than one Course Table Box can be used within a report CourseTableSpecStart PrintDescription Y or N Year 0 Optional BoxWidth Auto or Subject Width CourseNumber Width Level Width SectionWidth MinGradingColumn Width CreditWidth Teacher Width CommentWidth LeftBorder Width RightBorder Width TopBorder Width BottomBorder Width BoxHeight Auto or TitleHeight RowHeight CommentHeight NarrativeHeight PrintBorder Y or N TitleBorder N or N TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center CourseNameHorizontalAlign Left Right Center VerticalBodyAlign Left Right Center PrintVerticalLines Y or N PrintLineAfterX Courses Default 1 Default N Default Auto Default 0 9 Default 0 45 Default 0 4 Default 0 3 Default 0 35 Default 0 5 Default 1 Default 2 Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default
355. intouts are customizable Each of the following may be printed or omitted from the printouts rank name ID number average of incompletes of courses of F s of courses used to calculate the honor roll and two optional data base fields For example you could choose to print only rank and social security number which would be an optional data base field so that you could post students averages and only they would know which average was theirs Honor rolls may also be based on having no grades lower than a specific grade Different limits may be entered for MAJOR and MINOR courses For example you could specify that students must have all A s in major courses but are allowed one B in a minor course See Priority on page 2 7 for an explanation of the differences between major and minor courses Statistical Reports Introduction amp Main Menu e You can define Universal honor roll specifications to use with all honor rolls and Report Cards Report Writer to ensure that column averages on report cards will be identical to honor roll averages These specifications include selecting between 0 and 4 decimal places and setting a minimum grade to which the GPA factor should be applied For example you could specify that only grades in an AP course higher than a C should be awarded AP bonus points The GPA factor may be used or not used in checking for minimum grades For example if students are omitted for having
356. ion In order to print Scanner Grade Entry Forms students names must have been previously entered into course sections For further information on how to enter students names into course sections see Adding Students To Courses Sections on page 4 8 To print Scanner Grade Entry Forms from the Entry Forms window on page 3 2 choose Option 2 The following specification window appears Specifications Scanner Grade Entry Forms SPECIFICATIONS SCANNER GRADE ENTRY FORMS Regular Alpha Numeric Form 3 PRINT FORMS WITHOUT ANY STUDENTS No 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN 1 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 999 6 START GRADE Grade 9 7 END GRADE Grade 12 8 PRINT CIRCLE EXAM FINAL HEADING r Yes No 9 SCAN FORM TYPE Special Skills Form A PRINT PREVIEW Y N Yes C No a Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION amp TO CHANGE Specification Description Specifications These specifications perform the same functions as Specifications for 1 through 7 Manual Grade Entry Forms See Manual Grade Entry Forms on 3 14 Report Cards Manual page 3 4 NOTE After printing a new form for a section the old form MUST be destroyed If the old form is scanned the list of students that is on the disk for the new form will be used which will cause grades to be entered for the wrong students Entry Forms Scanner Grade Entry Forms Specification Description 8 PRINT This specification allows you to pr
357. is box can be set to print the number of absences tardies dismissals days present and days of school by marking period or quarter set in the Calendar program in Attendance Plus See the Attendance Plus manual or date ranges set in Report Cards Report Writer Specifications See PRINT DAILY ATTENDANCE on page 7 17 Code AttendanceBoxStart Print Y or N BoxWidth inches or Auto RowHeaderWidth inches ColumnWidth inches or Auto BorderWidth 0 3 Left Right Top Bottom BoxHeight or Auto Description Denotes the start of the attendance box specifications is the table number used to distinguish multiple attendance boxes in a report Determines whether or not the Attendance box will print Width of the entire attendance table Columns that will not fit in this width will be truncated Use Auto to have the box width calculate automatically based on the number of columns printed Determines width of cells containing row headers such as Absence Tardy and so on Determines the width of each attendance column Set to Auto to Auto Calc the column width Controls width of border around attendance box 0 thin border 3 thick border Height of the entire attendance table Rows that will not fit in this height will be truncated Use Auto to have the box height calculate automatically Report Cards Manual 7 53 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report W
358. is program to 1 calculate averages and 2 blank report card columns There is also an explanation of how averages are calculated beginning under How Are Averages Calculated on page 5 8 and examples of average calculations under Examples of Midyear Average Calculations on page 5 11 Calculate Averages Specifications Calculate Averages Specifications Calculate Averages Selecting Calculate Averages from the Calculate Averages window displays the following specifications window Specifications Calculate Averages iol x 1 CALCULATE WHICH COLUMN FIRST MARKING PERIOD ER 2 REPLACE EXISTING GRADES gs No 3 CALCULATE LETTER OR NUMBER GRADES C Letter Number 4 USE MINUS IF LETTER GRADES Yes No 5 USE PLUS IF LETTER GRADES Yes C No 6 INCLUDE WHICH SECTIONS ALL SECTIONS 7 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN f 4 8 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 999 4 9 START GRADE Grade 9 A END GRADE Grede 12 o 4 B MINIMUM NUMERIC GRADE Specification CALCULATE WHICH COLUMN REPLACE EXISTING GRADES CALCULATE LETTER OR NUMBER GRADES ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE SPECIFICATIONS CALCULATE AVERAGES Page Setup Description Choosing specification number 1 brings up a window listing your report card columns From this list choose the column into which you wish to calculate an average The default status of this specification is No This means that i
359. is specification is set to ALL WHEN SECTIONS 2 amp 3START END Only master courses numbers within this range will be included COURSE FOR when printing Master Course Lists or Section Lists Use these PRINTOUTS specifications to include only those courses for a specific department or range of departments To include all courses set your range from 0 to 9999 Report Cards Manual 3 33 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Master Course And Section Lists Specification 4 USE TEXTS COSTS amp FEES 5 PRINT DESCRIPTION ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT 6 PRINT GPA SETTINGS ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT 7 FONT SIZE 8 PRINT ACTIVE INACTIVE COURSEs Description Use this specification to indicate that you wish to enter a text book name its cost and any other fees for each master course If you use Scheduling Plus this information can be printed on students schedules along with the total amount that they owe the school Only the default reports 21 22 and 23 in Schedule Report Writer will include this information You may turn this setting on and off without losing any entered texts costs and fees With the setting off the following will happen You will not be asked to enter texts costs and fees for new master courses that you enter nor will old entries appear on the window Texts costs and fees will not be printed on the master course printout Texts costs and fees will not be printed on students sched
360. is the recommended setting for blank Manual Grade Entry Forms NOTE Unless you are printing forms for individual sections forms are always printed by staff member alphabetically making them easy to distribute If you would like to print forms for only certain staff members choose the option Individual Teachers on the following window If you would like to print forms for several teachers you can choose the option Range of Teachers provided that the teachers for whom you wish to print forms have ID numbers within a numeric range Use the drop down list to decide your font size small medium or large Choose Yes to view reports generated from the Enter Courses program in a Print Preview window Choose No to bypass Print Preview and send the report directly to the printer Decide whether or not to print the actual text of the skill on the form Decide whether to print a skill verification form or a skill entry form 3 Click the page 2 tab 3 38 Report Cards Manual NOTE Entry Forms Skills Grade Verification Form Page two of the Specifications Skills Grade Verification Forms window appears F l Specifications Skills Grade Verification Forms Page2 FIRST MARKING PERIOD SECOND MARKING PERIOD MIDYEAR EXAM MIDYEAR GRADE THIRD MARKING PERIOD FOURTH MARKING PERIOD FINAL EXAM lt FINAL GRADE 2 PRINT WHICH SKILLS 4 v 4 ET Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 4 From the Print Which Ma
361. isfactory 29 Lack Of Interest 30 Effort Excellent 31 Effort Good 32 Effort Fair 33 Effort Poor 34 Conduct Excellent 35 Conduct Good 36 Conduct Fair 37 Conduct Poor 38 39 40 a REPORT CARD COMMENTS 43 44 Up to 99 comments may be entered into REPORT a CARDS PLUS 47 48 For each marking period teachers may choose two E comments for each student 51 52 The entire text of each of these two comments may be 53 directly printed on the report cards 54 55 The comments printed here are the defualt comments 56 that come with Report Cards Plus The left column 57 ws 58 contains positive comments while the right column 59 conatins negative ones You may easily delete them 60 all edit them or add your own REPORT CARD GRADE ENTRY FORM FIRST MARKING PERIOD COURSE SECTION COURSE NAME TEACHER NAME Blank Manual Grade Entry Form No Section Info Printed On The Top In order for students names to appear on grade entry forms students schedules must have been entered into the computer either with SCHEDULING PLUS manu ally or with a scanner A BLANK manual entry form is a form without stu dents names that will help you in entering students schedules manually On these forms teachers will write in students names and ID numbers from where they can be entered into the computer These forms may also be used to simultaneously enter students first marking period grades into the
362. iting Grades Manually Editing GPA Quality Points Weight amp Credits The Statistical Reports program is used to update a student s career credits and GPA at the semester and at the end of the year The top of the YEAR 0 current year view shows these numbers as of the last time they were updated Choosing F2 GPA allows you to manually edit these numbers Note that this function key is used to edit the GPA information while viewing a transcript for the current year and to edit attendance information while viewing a transcript for a previous or minus year When you first purchase REPORT CARDS PLUS if you do not want to enter past courses into the program this option may be used to manually enter a students prior cumulative career credits and GPA s While editing these numbers pressing or clicking ESC aborts the edit losing any changes you have already made To accept and save your changes choose F10 ACCEPT To manually edit a student s credits simply type in that field at the top of the window Press F10 ACCEPT to save and exit the window or press TAB or ENTER to move to the Adjusted GPA AGPA field where you can change the number of quality points with GPA factor included that the student receives Pressing TAB or ENTER again will move the cursor to the Weight WT field When you modify the adjusted quality points and the weight the Adjusted GPA AGPA will automatically be updated Similarly when you modify the Simple
363. itleHeight ColumnHeaderHeight RowHeight PrintBorder Y or N TitleBorder N or Y TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center Default 1 Default Y Default 1 Default Auto Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 Default Auto Default 0 2 Default 0 4 Default 0 2 Default Y Default N Default Center ColumnContents Qtr1 Qtr2 Qtr3 Qtr4 Qtr5 Qtr6 RCSpecRange YTD Total TitleAndFont Blank or Text Default Attendance Record ColumnHeadersAndFont DateQtr1 DateQtr2 DateQtr3 DateQtr4 DateQtr5 DateQtr6 RowContentsAndFont A T D P DOS MEM DateRCSpecRange DateYTD Total RowHeadersAndFont A T D P DOS MEM fill in your own row headers i e Absenc es AttendanceBoxEnd PrintAttendanceBox 1 Left 0 Top 0 5 Report Cards Manual D 25 Chapter D Skills and Concepts New Box Codes Draw Box The parameters below define how the draw box will appear on the report card The draw box is used to place text or blank boxes such as checkoff boxes on the report card If borderwidth is set to 0 the text is printed without a box StartBoxDef Default 1 BoxWidth Default 1 BoxHeight Default 0 25 Align L R C Default L Border Width Default 0 01 PrintBorder Y or N Default Y ContentAndFont1 Line 1 Text String REM more content statements could be added if needed ContentAndFontN lt String gt where N is
364. ity point table the student will be awarded 50 quality points To calculate the adjusted quality points the awarded quality points will be adjusted by either multiplying the GPA FACTOR times the awarded quality points or adding the GPA FACTOR to the awarded quality points A setting in the Customize RC program determines whether multiplication or addition takes place If a negative GPA factor brings the quality point total below 0 the adjusted quality points for the course will be raised to 0 In other words a student will never receive a negative amount of quality points for a course Any grade with zero quality points from the quality point table will NOT use the GPA factor In other words assume that a student receives an F in an honors course The course has a GPA factor of 1 and the quality point table shows that this F is worth zero quality points Because the GPA factor is not used the student will still end up with zero quality points for this course In the numeric grading system without the minimum grade the F will similarly always be worth zero quality points Once the weight is calculated the awarded adjusted and simple quality points will be multiplied by the weight These products will then be added to the student s career total simple and adjusted quality points Weight will be awarded following similar rules as to the awarding of credits In a complete updating if you only have one credit column the student will be a
365. ix printer For information on editing reports see View Edit Letters Reports on page 7 32 7 4 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List Printing a Wide Report Card After selecting this task use specification 3 ACTIVE LETTER REPORT to choose from reports 2 3 4 or 20 or design your own The default report is 20 which will print wide report cards on plain paper optimally this report should be used with a laser or inkjet printer Report 18 RC Pre printed Form also designed especially for use with a laser or inkjet printer prints a wide report card on a pre printed form that has had your school name and other information pre printed on the top If you are using a dot matrix continuous feed printer choose report 2 to print on plain paper report 3 to print on a form that does NOT have the school name or other information pre printed on it or report 4 to print on a form pre printed with the school name and other information All of these forms are available from Rediker Software Printing a Narrow Report Card The default report for this task is 19 RC Nar Plain LASER Use it or define your own If you are using a dot matrix printer choose Report 1 RC Narrow Plain Printing a Wide Transcript By Year This task allows you to print a transcript showing courses and grades for each year of the student s record in a different corner quadrant of the transcript Although the d
366. key combinations are displayed to the right of each action You can also perform these functions by clicking on the corresponding icon under the toolbar pictured to the left of each toolbar function below Option New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O 20 Save Ctrl S Lal Save As Description Allows you to create a new report from scratch After choosing New the Viewing and Editing Scheduling Reports Letters window will appear from which you may choose an UNUSED number After choosing a number you will be asked to type in a name for the report Pressing Enter will bring you into the editing window Allows you to select a pre existing report to open in the current View Edit Letters Reports window Exits the body of the report and brings you back to Report Writer Menu 2 where you may choose to print the report Saves the current report without exiting the View Edit Letters Reports window Use this option as an alternative to F10 Accept or if you wish to preview the report see Preview below This option should be used if you wish to leave the original report unchanged and save the modified report under a different report number and name Save As is similar to the Copy function found on the bottom of the Viewing amp Editing Report Cards Reports Letters window Generates a print out of the body of the report Report Cards Manual 7 33 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports Option Descri
367. l You may use the UNIVERSAL HONOR ROLL specifications to omit major and or minor courses from OTHER CHECKS including the comment code range check Report Cards Manual 8 17 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Defining Honor Roll Reports Specification 8 OMIT IF 1 MAJOR GRADE LESS THAN 9 OMIT IF 2 MAJOR GRADES LESS THAN A OMIT IF 1 MINOR GRADE LESS THAN B OMIT IF 2 MINOR GRADE LESS THAN 8 18 Report Cards Manual Description Use the UNIVERSAL HONOR ROLL specifications as described in sections 8B to define major and minor courses A student receiving one grade lower than what you enter for this specification in a major course will be omitted from the honor roll For example in a letter grading system you may enter a C for this setting Any student with a grade of D F or WF will be omitted from the honor roll In a numerical grading system a grade of 70 could be entered Any student with a grade less than 70 an F or WF will be omitted from the honor roll A blank grade or grades of WP P I X N or W will not be checked against this grade Leaving it blank will cause no students to be omitted due to this specification NOTE f you are using a SPLIT grading system you will only be able to enter a valid numeric grade A split grading system is one in which your younger grade levels use letter grades while your older grade levels use numeric grades If you set a minimum numeric grade do NOT use that hono
368. l grades and how they are used to calculate the adjusted quality points and adjusted GPA SUBJECT GRADE QUAL GPA ADJ x WEIGHT ADJ Fact QUAL QUAL Math A 400 0 4 00 x 1 00 4 00 English F 000 0 0 00 X 1 00 0 00 AP History B 3 00 1 4 00 x 1 00 4 00 Art Blank Spanish P GYM C 200 0 2 00 x 0 50 1 00 Grand Totals 3 50 9 00 The OVR column was blank for each course so it did not affect the above table Because there is only one credit column this student will be awarded the full entered credit for the four courses with passing grades These courses are MATH AP HISTORY SPANISH and GYM The QUAL column shows the awarded quality points based on the default letter grade quality point table ART is skipped because there is no final grade and SPANISH is skipped due to the grade of P In the example the school uses the option to ADD the GPA factor to the number of awarded quality points Only one course AP HISTORY has a GPA factor other than 0 For this course the GPA factor of 1 is added to the awarded quality points of 3 00 to produce and Adjusted Quality Point total of 4 00 For the other courses the adjusted quality points equal the awarded quality points NOTE Normally GPA factors are used in accelerated courses so that students are not penalized for taking harder courses in which their grades are likely to be lower In the above example the student s B in AP History earned him as many adjusted q
369. l year For example if you manually change a student s grade in year 1 first update his GPAs based on the archival data The top of page 0 in the View Change Add Drop program will then show that student s GPA for the archival data only If you have already updated the student s GPA and credits based on data in year 0 you must then re update based on year 0 to bring that student s GPA information up to date WARNING Do NOT update GPAs and credits on archival years if you Specification 3 REPORT DETAIL Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits Description WARNING Do NOT update GPAs and credits on archival years if you e Changed any course information in the master course file such as weight credits and GPA factors since that student s GPA and credits were originally calculated Manually adjusted the student s GPA information in View Change Add Drop in one of the archival years being updated Made any changes to the grade table in a previous year that would affect the student s GPA and or credits If any of these situations apply it is recommended that you do NOT update based on archival data because the newly calculated GPA may not match the old one Instead you should update the student s GPA and credits in the previous year and use the Transfer Credits amp GPA program to transfer the archival data to the current year Then update in the current year to bring the GPA and credits up to date You
370. lculations 5 12 Reading the Log 5 15 Blank Report Card Columns 5 16 View Change Add Drop 6 ntEOGH CIO iios obo oe Siok SEDES 6 2 Viewing and Editing Grades 6 3 Specifications 2254 4 repre Re 6 4 Withdrawing Student from Course Section6 5 Editing the OVR Column 6 5 Printing the Transcript View F9 PRINT 6 5 Manually Editing GPA Quality Points Weight amp Credits llus 6 6 Entering and Editing Information for Previous Minus Years iex RE 6 7 Entering and Editing Grades in the Minus Years rose n ex seen SESS 6 7 Editing the Teacher TCH Column in the Minus Years 6 8 Editing Daily Attendance Information in the Minus Years 6 8 Scheduling View F10 SCHED 6 8 Hot Key Enabled 6 8 Report Cards Report Writer 7 PAGE 4 Transcript amp Optional Field Introduction ceecceee 7 3 Specifications 2l VERE TRE 7 24 Using the Task List 7 4 Print MenuS ts dec 2 ste IER 7 27 Using Tasks 1 7 to Print Report Cards PRINT WHICH STUDENTS 7 27 and Transcripts use oon S D noe 7 4 PRINT WHICH SECTIONS 7 29 Printing a Wide Report Card 7 5 Comparisons Between Data Base amp Printing a Narrow Report Card 7 5 Report Card Reports 22 re 7 31 Printing a Wide Transcript By Year 7 5 View Edit Letters Reports 7 32 Printing a
371. ld Name Course Link Course Number Alias Count in Honor Rolls Count in Simple GPA Count in Adjusted GPA Texts 2 10 Report Cards Manual Description When you link two courses students who sign up for both courses will be scheduled into the same section of each course through Scheduling Plus If the student can t be scheduled into both sections of a linked pair then it is considered by the Perform Scheduling program as a conflict situation Course Links allow you to keep students with the same teacher for the entire year if you use semester courses These linked courses do not need to meet during different semesters If you link two courses meeting the same semester for example a Physics course and a physics lab then the student will be scheduled into the same section for both courses Enter the link for only one of the two courses For example if course 101 is being linked to 102 enter 102 in the link field for course 101 and leave the link field for course 102 empty NOTE You cannot link 3 courses together by linking the first to the second and then the second to the third You may enter a ten character alphanumeric course number alias if the standard three digit number is not sufficient For example you could enter Chem122A as the course number alias for course 122 This ten character number may be printed on report cards and transcripts by changing a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer See Chapter 7
372. le Letter Note that the heading and signature line are outside the word wrap codes When using the word wrap codes leave a blank line between paragraphs Also Tab codes should never be used inside of word wrap codes A UNIVERS Search Header acts as a grand header when a search and sort is not being performed This code enables reports with Search Headers SHSTART SHEND to be used both when searching on a category and when printing reports for ALL STUDENTS ALPHABETICALLY or INDIVIDUAL STUDENTS The UNIVERS code must be the first code in the Search Header Report Cards Manual 7 81 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Codes 4 or Fewer Characters In Length That May Share a Line With Other Codes Code Description 1 thru 160 Data Base fields 1 through 160 N1 thru Names of Data Base fields 1 through 160 N160 TH Tab inches to the right of the left margin L1 thru School Information fields 1 through 17 L17 FN Student s First Name MN Student s Middle Name LN Student s Last Name GR Student s Grade Level 2 digits ID Student s Record Number 3 digits UNID Student s Unique ID number DATE Current Date DOB1 Date of birth in the format MM DD YYYY DOB6 Date of birth in the format MMDDYY spas Prints the current page number REM Ignores all code and text appearing after it HIS Prints his or her depending on entry in G
373. le quality points the adjusted quality points the weight the course simple quality points and the course adjusted quality points These values are based on the grade earned in the course Because this course is not worth any credits the student obtained 0 credits for this grade The simple quality points is determined using the quality point value assigned in the grade table for the grade the student earned For this course the student obtained a grade of 90 which according to the grade table is worth 90 simple quality points These are the quality points before they have been adjusted due to the GPA factor or any other factor Because this course has a GPA factor of 0 the adjusted quality points equals the simple quality points Since this is a quarter course it is given its full weight of 25 100 was entered for how quarter courses should be weighted The course simple quality points for this grade are determined by multiplying the weight of 25 times the quality points of 90 which produces 22 50 course simple quality points for this grade Because the GPA factor is 0 the course adjusted quality points equals the course simple quality points The last three lines show the running total of credits quality points and weight for all of the student s courses for this updating It includes the previous added and new values for credit weight quality points as well as the simple and adjusted GPA Since this is the first course counted for thi
374. llowing 2 2 Report Cards Manual Build change Master Course List Build change Course Section List Link skills to courses Link concepts to course sections Make printouts of the above lists View section rosters on the window Rebuild Section Rosters and the Section List file Send skills to GradeQuick Batch enter rooms View and edit sections Before entering grades or printing report cards you must first use this program to build both your Master Course List and your Course Section List Both Report Cards Plus and Scheduling Plus read the Master Course List and Section List from the same file so if they have already been built with Scheduling Plus you do not need to recreate them Building your Master Course List involves entering into the program all of the courses taught in your school Building your Course Section List involves entering sections for each of these courses according to meeting time and teacher T Administrator s Plus ENTER COURSES 1 View edit courses amp sections 2 Inspect change specifications 3 new Master amp section list files 4 new Section list file only 5 Rebuild section rosters 6 rebuild section List file 7 rebUild skills files 8 send skills to Grade quick 9 impOrt section list from samsa A baTch enter rooms B view eDit sections C End program E E c C E E E E Cc Cc Cc Enter Courses View Edit Courses amp Sections View Edit Courses amp Se
375. lls based report cards 7 48 Within Grade Limlts sehe 7 10 Attendance Box 00 ee eee 7 53 User Defined Tasks 1 11 7 11 GBAOCU ues IM ME LEE 7 55 Printing Rosters core temen 7 1 Honor Roll Box sss 7 55 Printing One Report Card Per Course General Box Specifications 7 56 Sorted by Teacher esser zh es 7 11 Inserting a Graphic into a Report 7 57 Printing Mailing Labels for a Course 7 12 Standard Codes for Reports in Specifications 4 Eme dne Je eevee S D ee 7 13 Report Card Report Writer 7 59 PAGE 1 Initial Specifications 7 18 Code Preliminaries 05 7 62 CURRENT TASK EXC E he eae ES 7 13 Codes That May Share a Line With PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR 7 14 Other Codes is nseto anna pu npe 7 64 PAGE 2 More Specifications 7 18 Header Codes usin sis Sank ra eee 7 70 Page 3 Code Override Specifications 7 23 Special Course Line Code 7 71 OTHER ATTENDANCE CODES 7 74 Attendance Codes That Make Up the Daily Attendance Grid 7 76 Universal Report Codes 7 76 Codes 4 or Fewer Characters In Length That May Share a Line With Other Codes 7 82 Codes That Must Be On a Line By Themselves 7 83 The Pre defined Reports 7 84 Statistical Reports 8 Introduction amp Main Menu 8 2 Using Honor Rolls 8 2 Grade Point
376. lls information for course 110 is named 110 skf See the GradeQuick Administrator s Plus Interface Guide for more information Import Section List from SAMSA This option will erase your course section files and replace it with one created in the third party SAMSA software To Import a Section List from SAMSA Selecting this option displays a message warning you that you will erase and replace your current course section file 2 Click Done to display the Importing from SAMSA window Administrator s Plus At This option will read the course section data that was entered into the SAMSA interactive schedule builder software program and build the ADMINISTRATOR S PLUS course section file C SAMSAHOSTMSCD 000 ff Enter the IMPORT FILE Path 3 Browse to and select the location of the SAMSA course section data file and then click Done Batch Enter Rooms By default you have to manually enter the room numbers for each individual section This option lets you tell the program which staff database field to use as the homeroom number and whether or not to overwrite any existing room field entries during the batch entry To Batch Enter Rooms 1 Inthe Enter Courses window click Batch Enter Rooms The Batch Enter Rooms window appears Specifications Batch Enter Rooms SPECIFICATIONS BATCH ENTER ROOMS 1 GET ROOM FROM WHICH STAFF FIELD HOMEROOM E 2 REPLACE EXISTING ROOM YEs ENTER SPECIFICATION
377. lows you to return to the previous window to begin the process of creating a new report 3 26 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Grade Distribution Report Grade Distribution Report To obtain a Grade Distribution Report select option 5 from the window on page 3 2 The following specification window then appears Specifications Grade Distribution Reports SPECIFICATIONS GRADE DISTRIBUTION REPORTS 1 INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN ALL SECTIONS 2 DISTRIBUTION REPORT TYPE By Teacher 3 WHICH GRADES TO USE FIRST MARKING PERIOD 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN E 5 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 999 6 START GRADE Grade 9 z 7 END GRADE Grade 12 B INCLUDE ACTIVE INACTIVE STUDENTS J Active Students Ony Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Specification Description 1 INCLUDE This specification allows you to choose for which sections you want the SECTIONS forms printed For example if it is the end of the 1st marking period MEETING choose Option 1 to print forms only for sections meeting during the 1st WHEN marking period This will include sections meeting during the 1st quarter 1st semester and all year courses Courses meeting during the 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter or 2nd semester will be excluded The next window includes the option to further limit forms to staff members whose ID s fall within a designated range Report Cards Manual 3 27 Chapter
378. lumn Prints a report card including narrative comments on a pre printed form available from Rediker Software Designed to print a report card with narrative comments on plain 11 x 8 5 paper Same as report 25 but designed especially for a laser printer Same as report 26 but designed especially for a laser printer Generates a comma delimited ASCII file containing an entry for each report card column which can be imported into a spreadsheet program like Excel The file contains an empty entry in case you do not want to print a particular column see OVERRIDE SPECIFICATIONS Previously used to export rosters to GradeQuick across a network using GradeQuick Deluxe This process is now performed exclusively through the Tools gt GradeQuick window Same as report 1 in Database Report Writer See the Data Base Plus manual prints 1 column labels containing parent name and address This is the default report for Task 29 Print mailing labels by course See Printing Mailing Labels for a Course on page 7 12 Although the report is designed for use with a dot matrix printer it can be modified to print 2 or 3 column labels using a laser printer Previously used to export rosters to GradeQuick by users who do not have the networked version of GradeQuick This process is now performed exclusively through the Tools gt GradeQuick window Report Cards Manual 7 87 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer The Pre defined Reports R
379. ly 2 Resume alphabetical printing 3 Individual students 4 Sorted students 5 Main menu 6 End program A 4 Report Cards Manual NOTE Print Schedule Scan Forms Printing Schedule Scan Forms 7 Select an option which are described in the following table Option Description 1 All Students Prints All students in alphabetical order Alphabetically 2 Resume If printing has been paused you can resume printing Alphabetical beginning with the next student alphabetically Printing 3 Individual Students Opens a second window from which you can select individual students to appear on the report 4 Sorted Students Presents you with a list of all of fields for which you are storing information about your students You will then select the field by which you want your entry forms to be sorted See Sorting by Your Chosen Fields on page A 6 8 Select an option and then click Next The list appears in print preview mode Performing a Spacing Test It is extremely important that your course request scanner forms are aligned properly in the printer because the scanner MUST be able to read the student number that is going to be printed on the forms If the scanner cannot correctly read these identifying marks the forms will not be able to be scanned Consequently it is highly recommended that a new ribbon be used to print these forms If the student number marks are not dark enough scanning will be unsuccessful
380. ly entering grades In order to speed up data entry you want to prevent the cursor from stopping in columns in which you will not be entering grades 4 Fromthe Marking Period for Skills drop down box select the marking period whose skills you want to edit For example selecting First Marking Period allows you to see the corresponding skill graders for the First Marking Period Report Cards Manual 4 11 Chapter 4 Enter Grades Entering Grades Or Skills Manually 5 Click Page 2 to display the next page of specifications 4 Specification Enter Grades And Skills SPECIFICATIONS ENTER GRADES AND SKILLS Pagel peene M E le D USE RE DEFINED NUMBER KEYS 5 B ASSIGN TO KEY 6 c ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 6 Setthe specifications as desired 412 Report Cards Manual Enter Grades Entering Grades Or Skills Manually See the following table for a description of each specification Specification Use Which Roster Erase Comments Description The Enter Grades or Skills Manually window contains a roster of students in a section This roster can reflect either the current enrollment in that section or the enrollment as it was the day entry forms were printed The default is to use the CURRENT ROSTER If you have changed students schedules since your entry forms were printed but still want the Enter Grades Manually window to reflect their OLD schedules change this specification to read WHEN ENTRY FOR
381. mes Shawn 66 Sargent Myron 44 Hall Jaime 23 GRADE 12 COUNT 91 HELP You may highlight amp DELETE students from this report Then press lt F9 gt to print it In this example there are 91 students on the class rank report To easily find a student use the F6 SEARCH key to find any student in the list The F8 DEL key may be used to delete any student from the list The F10 SORT key may be used to toggle the list between sorting by name or by average The upper left corner of the window identifies that this list is currently sorted by name When you are ready use the F9 PRINT key to print the list How the list is printed is defined by the PRINT SPECIFICATIONS As the list is printed it will be written to the disk if specification 2 ALSO PRINT TO DISK has been set to YES The next sections describes this and other specifications on the report definition window Report Cards Manual 8 67 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Defining Class Rank Reports Defining Class Rank Reports After selecting either the CLASS RANK report or the ELIGIBILITY report from the GPA S CREDITS main window you will see the following window allowing you to define the report you have selected E Print Class Rank Report n USE SIMPLE OR ADJUSTED GPA SIQUAL PTS USE ADJUSTED GPA DATA B SEARCH CATEGORY LOWER LIMIT 0 for none 000 7 SEARCH CATEGORY UPPER LIMIT RY UPPER LIMIT
382. mester two 3 15 Algebra 1l S 2 30 16 Algebra 1 14 Algebra l am 30 10 ta A flexible time system allows for the easy entry of double and 1 sol 12 triple periods as well as sections meeting only some days of f1 a 30 13 the week A meeting time of A135 means that the section f t gt 21 meets first period on Monday Wednesday and Friday Afi i 30 12 meeting time of A135B1 means that this same course meets f1 i 30 11 for a double period on Monday Geometry Geometry Geometry Geometry Geometr El IS INEST E CLER G REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL REPORT CARD COMMENTS 1 GREAT WORE 2 Outstanding Student 3 Good Work Habits 4 Very Neat And Accurate Work 5 Highly motivated to do quite well 6 Contributes Intelligently To Class 7 Pleasure To Have In Class 8 Good Class Participation 9 Grade Reflects Extra Effort 10 Has Shown Improvement 11 Assignments Completed On Time 12 Cooperative Positive Attitude 13 Exhibits Responsibility 14 Good Pronunciation In Foreign Lang 15 Working To Capacity 16 Frequently Tardy To Class 17 Meets Only Minimum Requirerents 18 Good Oral Participation In For Lang 19 Progress Impaired By Absences 20 Lack Of Self Discipline 21 Not Working To Full Potential 22 Uneven Level Of Performance 23 Assignments Often Missing Or Late 24 Poor Attitude 25 Poor Work Habits 26 Difficulty Grasping Skills 27 Lack Of Serious Approach To Studies 28 Class Participation Unsat
383. mn header for the mark ing period The 3 and 5 column headers are defined in the Customized RC Customize Report Card Columns program ColumnContents Qtr1 Qtr2 Qtr3 Qtr4 Qtr5 Qtr6 RCSpec Range YTD Total Attendance Any or all of these parameters may be printed in any order separated by commas Qtr1 6 prints the attendance for the specified quarter based on the quarter ending dates in the Calendar program RCSpecRange prints the attendance between and including the dates specified in the Report Card Report Writer Specs A amp B YTD Year to Date prints the attendance through the date listed in the RCRW Spec C Total prints the at tendance for the year Report Cards Manual D 33 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions ColumnHeaderHeight Attendance Indicates the height in inches of the column row The default is 4 ColumnHeader AndFont Attendance Course Table Advanced Specifications Course To change the font and size of the Column Header set the word iColumnHeaderFonti to the desired font and size required for the report If this specification is omitted from the code the default is black Arial 8 pitch and bold ColumnHeadersAndFont DateQtr1 DateQtr2 DateQtr3 DateQtr4 DateQtr5 DateQtr6 DateRCSpe cRange DateY TD Total Attendance Any or all of these parameters in any order separated by comments may be set DateQtr1 prints the first day in the calendar to the last day of Qtr1 as entered in
384. mn limits for numeric grades 3 30 course grade numbers 1 13 Skills Customized lists of skills D 4 Entering Customized Lists of Skills and Concepts D 4 Skills amp Concepts enter custom D 4 Skills Assessment Scale p 15 Skills Grades entering 4 10 Skills based Report Cards p 20 Specifications calculate averages 5 3 for the Master Course And Section Lists 3 33 Split Grading System using 1 3 Statistical Reports description 1 9 Statistical Reports Print Class Rank Report description 1 10 Statistical Reports Update Career GPAs description 1 9 T Task List using 7 4 Third Quarter Update how to 8 35 Toolbar in View Edit Letters Reports 7 38 Transfer Credits amp GPA description 1 10 Troubleshooting Index 5 scanning grades 4 17 U Universal GPA Specifications inspect change 8 28 un update 8 37 Un Update GPAs amp Credits 8 37 Using Honor Rolls 8 2 V View Change Schedule View description 1 9 View Change Add Drop description 1 8 View Change Add Drop Transcript View description 1 8 View Edit Letters Reports Toolbar Menus 7 38 View edit Course Section options described 2 4 Viewi Grades 6 3 Viewing Letters amp Reports 7 32 W Wide Report Cards printing 7 5 Wide Transcript by Year printing 7 5 Wide Transcript by Year by Department printing 7 5 Window Menu in View Edit Letters Reports 7 38 Withdrawing Student from Course Section 6 5 Appendix REDIKER HIGH S
385. more quality points for a grade than would be awarded for the same grade in a lower level course For more information on calculating GPAs see Update Un update GPA s amp Credits on page 8 27 When you calculate class rank you will have the option to use either the adjusted or simple GPA Similarly when you print report cards transcripts or permanent labels you will have the option to print either the adjusted or simple GPA Report Cards Manual 9 Introduction The Report Card Plus Programs 10 Report Cards Manual Print Class Rank Report The class rank report can be used to rank students by career or last update GPA credits or quality points After you run the class rank report you can choose to print the class rank on the report card or transcript Program 9 ARCHIVE Archive Data This program is no longer used to archive grades Students courses and grades taken during previous school years are now archived by the Transfer Credits and GPAs program see Chapter C On rare occasions the Archive program is used to change the numbers of archived courses but under no circumstances should you attempt to do this without assistance from Rediker Technical Support If you believe you may need to use this option call Technical Support at 1 800 882 2994 Program A PRINT SCHEDULE SCAN FORMS If you have a scanner and have not used Scheduling Plus to enter students names into their course sections use this program to print fo
386. mp 26 prweoiq Hd p Pur rp z 0 20 T0 TT vT E3 LISD mal Gn AOIL ATT usano aa D Liga S6PE S9S ELP Suoug SO6L EL 60 HOO dJ XadS 96010 dZ WW ALVLS gEDIO VW uapdueH SA u 40019 BEF 8E TOOHOS H9IH 3I038H LOOZL Taal H2 99 26 23 26 06 2 s Tn gez agsz ogzazzlares Il l Lu 1d no d9 Il onol TWO L a yb ya 2 AsuaATq T FUIT TxXwtid a H TIFT d Aauaryy I staat gf poo HO VSL INIAN DEH2 HA Apag qaum q3TT3 Tw 103 3 puar THATI 353 103 4borperg 103 Arqauoa 103 Sug os T ATI S302 EIA 0 CAL a Coa e STATIA a H Apa fqaun q uotz 3 HIII 02 T uai di aqbng To g apog d q o j Tog 7 28398 X anpreg Tol 3s yurg diusua tiq To T TIET STITT Tol Sug xi o HEHDWHL ATI asnon 584 658 pjauBuuds Lerl xog EH Hy ajaay 158uJ3 SJA R A fuel feyeoy XX ggz Il oo a WLOL Il Jeu I wr gag a qerur ag a qerurag q uo tz gi Fano Ty 3 Aaust qm quo tz X F TI ap Wi irTlL d qaromsoq WVAHOVdl l gz ogi WiEsH 3d Euong o TO00H23S ooo ooo ooo oo h oor o0 66 ooo oso os 06 oo T o 6g l oso os 6 l oso os 6 l oso os 6 Ta IOLT Iii Teer SGBrE 395 EL rp suO4d 9010 VW uepduieH SAu 49018 BEF BE TOOHOS H9IH H3 I038 oofqns qoeo ur poured juopnis IY SPIO ou s JOM se ponad porjioods e JO puo ay W sse o ur xue1 sjuopnis sjurid 3durosue 9y JO uroj0q au
387. mple quality points are 8 00 DETAILED EXAMPLE OF A MIDYEAR UPDATING When an updating is done a detailed report may optionally be printed This detailed report shows grade by grade how the computer updated a student s career credits quality points and weight This section will analyze and explain the detailed report produced for the updating of a student based on his MIDYEAR grades This updating is being done half way through this student s senior year 8 46 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated The student s transcript prior to the midyear update as viewed in the View Change Add Drop program is eater Renee on EN Specincatione E Tm LE LEGO DING EE een sGPA 88 96 d 6 8 9 0 d i R RS NA 1st 2nd D EZIE AB CIT OVR 1 050 01 AdEngUse 90 80 2 2 058 01 Essay 2 3 07001 Mod mHum 83 87 35 4 13102 Pre Calc a3 f3 fee 5 23102 HChemist 93 83 93 8 330 02 APAmHst 60 30 45 2 7 43301 Latin 3 88 Be P 8 55001 Chorus 36 86 35 ENTER ID OR NAME ID OR NAME Y B Standards F11 Narratives Alt C Year Year ESC 7 EE RAE B oro d rv M ro M ro B ro EXIT EDIT PREV NEXT LOOKUP WTH PRINT SCHED The top portion of the window lists the student s current credits adjusted quality points weight adjusted GPA s
388. n 2 There must be another column that has a three character name of RGT or REG This column would be the column for your REGENT S GRADE 8 28 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits Choose from among the following options NO Regent s column will not be used in updating GPAs and Credits even if it exists as one of the report card columns YES Regent s column will be used for updating GPAs and Credits YES BUT FOR CREDITS Regent s column will be used in updating credits but not for ONLY updating the GPA YES MUST PASS BOTH Credit will be awarded only if the student has a passing FOR CREDIT grade in BOTH the Final and the Regent s columns A passing grade is any grade that has a Y in the Credit column in the Grade Table The higher of the two grades will still prevail in updating the GPA If you set this specification to YES or YES BUT Dx FOR CREDITS ONLY if one of the two columns is blank the grade in the other column will be used in updating SPECIFICATION 5 USE SEPARATE WEIGHTS FOR SIMPLE AND ADJUSTED GPA S The newest version of Administrator s Plus allows you to use different weights for the simple GPA than you use for the adjusted GPA By using separate weights you will be able to have some courses count in one GPA simple or adjusted and not in the other Use Enter Courses View Edit Courses amp Sections to specify which courses count for which
389. n Forms 3 23 Section Rosters 000 3 24 Grade Distribution Report 3 27 Comment Distribution Report 3 31 Enrollment Report By Teacher 3 32 Master Course And Section Lists 3 33 Specifications for the Master Course And Section Lists 000 cee eee 3 33 Using the Master Course and Section Lists Print Window 3 35 Skills Grade Verification Form 3 36 Teacher Grade Search Report 3 40 Enter Grades 4 Introduction and Main Menu 4 2 Entering Grades Manually 4 3 Specification Window 1 4 3 Specification Window 2 4 5 Entering Or Editing Grades Manually 4 6 Adding Students To Courses Sections 4 8 Removing Students From Courses Sections 4 9 Entering Or Editing Skills Grades 4 9 Entering Grades Or Skills Manually 4 10 Scanning Grades 4 16 Troubleshooting Problems with Scanning Grades c aea det oec e dire 4 17 Import From GradeQuick 4 20 Calculate Averages 5 Introduction uo aco a ae eR Rn 5 2 Specifications Calculate Averages 5 3 Entering the Weight For Each Column 5 5 Calculating Averages For Which Columns 5 7 How Are Averages Calculated 5 8 NUMBER GRADES 5 9 LETTER GRADES re REIR 5 9 Examples of Midyear Average Galculatlolis o xe xps 5 11 Examples of Final Average Ca
390. n above has both the Semester One and the Semester Two columns defined as credit columns Although there is a final grade column it is not a credit column When printing report cards and updating GPAs the program will look at both of these credit columns and award credit to passing grades as follows Full Year Courses Will be awarded half of their total entered credit for each semester In a trimester school full year courses would be awarded one third of their total credit for a passing grade in each semester Semester and Quarter Courses Will be awarded their full total credit for a passing grade in either semester column When you move a grade column the grade remains in the same location Consequently it is very important that you do NOT change your report card columns during the year if you print transcripts in order to prevent grades from printing in the wrong columns on transcripts Customize RC Editing Report Card Comments Column Title Description TXPE A drop down list appears allowing you to select what type of column you are using A column should only be called a FINAL type column if it will contain a grade that will be the average for the entire course Many schools will have a first semester grade column and a second semester grade column without any final grade column The OTHER classification should be used for a column for which the grades should be excluded from average and GPA calculations The column used to
391. n individual student in the current year View and edit courses and grades in the previous minus years View and edit attendance data in the previous minus years Enter and edit GPA and credit information Enter narrative comments Enter skills grades Modify a student s total credits and total weight as well as simple and adjusted quality points and simple and adjusted GPA Print a student s courses and grades Enter or view a student s grades from previous years by pressing the Minus key or clicking the Year button at the bottom of the window View the daily attendance summary for a previous year while in the Minus year view Enter courses by typing an A before the course section number Add and remove courses from students transcripts NOTE Pressing a single function key F10 toggles the view between schedules and transcripts When you switch to Scheduling View you will be in the same window as when you enter VCAD from Scheduling Plus All the same rules of usage will apply See the Scheduling Plus manual for detailed information on how to schedule students through View Change Add Drop Note that Study Halls appear only in the Schedule View For more information on the Scheduling View and its functions see the end of this chapter or the SCHEDULING PLUS Manual The rest of this chapter explains how to use this program to perform each of these functions 6 2 Report Cards Manual View Change Add Drop Viewing and E
392. n reports so that you can see the difference in a student s GPA between courses that use GPA factor and those that don t Separate weights can be used for simple and adjusted GPAs as well see Chapter 2 Furthermore Two different GPA reports may be defined One for class rank and one for eligibility Either report can be viewed on the window and students deleted from the list for any reason before it is printed When updating GPAs the report will appear on the window You can choose not to print it or to print it in summary or detailed form The detailed report provides much more information and is easier to read than in previous versions Un updating is not necessary If you are re updating un updating will automatically be done first When updating past years GPAs and credits will automatically be set to 0 prior to beginning Report Cards Manual 8 3 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Honor Rolls Honor Rolls When updating based on a non credit column separate weights may be entered for semester one courses and semester two courses This is helpful for schools that would like to update at the end of the third marking period as 1st semester courses can be weighted 100 and 2nd semester courses 50 From the main window you can access either the Honor Roll or Grade Point Averages sections of the program The first part of this section describes honor rolls while the remaining sections describe grade point averages Wh
393. nd 10 being your credit columns CC990105 will print the credits earned for the first semester grade while 1CC990110 4 4 will print the second semester credits If you indicate a non credit column then a 0 will be printed If the column is empty no grade then a blank will be printed for the credits If this code is used in a report a specification in the Report Cards Report Writer will determine if the column credits will will not print on a report CREDIT COLUMN BOTTOM Prints the sum of the credits earned in a credit column Designed to be printed at the bottom of the column represented by the previous code This would be the total credits earned for the first semester or for the second semester depending upon the value of CL This will give you the total projected credits fro a student Report Cards Manual 7 65 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Code lAV YR CL 3HHETHE ITG YR CR NUM ITY YR CR NUM IDPX NUM IRN IOF HEBES IDC X ION X NUM 7 66 Report Cards Manual Description COLUMN AVERAGE Prints the average grade for a column Specifications in the Report Writer determine how the average is calculated Specifications allow you to determine if weights or GPA factors are to be used and if the averages are to be truncated or rounded TRANSCRIPT GRADE LEVEL Prints the grade level as of year YR plus colon 107
394. nd size of the Average row set the word PrintColumnAverage sAndFont to the desired font and size required for the report The default is black Arial 8 pitch and bold Report Cards Manual D 37 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions PrintColumnHeaderAndFont Y or N Advanced Specifications Course The Marking period headers are printed with the font of this Keyword iNi suppresses printing Default is black Arial 8 pitch and Bold PrintColumnHeaderEveryCourse Y or N Course Table In our course box to print the column headers after each course set this specification to Y for Yes The default is N for No PrintCommentTextWhere Right1 Column Right2Column or Below Course Table Prints the comment description using values in Report Card Columns 12 and 13 If this is set to Rightl Column comments are printed in one column separated by a semi colon The header reads Comment 1 name Comment 2 name If this command is set to Right2Column comments are printed in two separate columns This command uses commentwidth to set the width of the columns The text will word wrap to fit within the specified row height If Below is chosen comments will print in an additional row un der the course details separated by semi colon with the height set by CommentHeight PrintCourseNameAndFont Y or N Course Table Course name level course section number and credit if flagged to print in Report Card Specifications are printed in the
395. nors and advanced courses Enter report card columns Enter Department Names Enter comments for report cards Define skills and concepts Enter Courses The Enter Course module allows you to Enter Master Course List information Enter Course Section List information Maintain Course Master and Section List files Send course skills to GradeQuick Entry Forms The Entry Forms Chapter shows you how to Print manual or scanner data entry forms upon which teachers will enter students grades Print grade verification forms Print course section rosters Print grade distribution reports Print teacher enrollment reports Print your school s Master Course List and Section List Report Cards Manual ii iv Report Cards Manual Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual Included in this Guide Chapter Description 4 Enter Grades This chapter describes how to Enter students names into course sections Enter students grades into the computer using either a scanner or the keyboard Import students grades from the Grade Quick Calculate Averages This chapter describes how to Calculate midterm and final averages Erase report card columns View Change Add Drop This chapter describes how to View students transcripts Change any grades in the transcripts Enter narrative comments Add or drop courses sections from students schedules Enter s
396. not be re scanned Any changes must either be made manually or the student may be quickly unscheduled with the View Change Add Drop program and then their form may be re scanned Report Cards Manual B 5 Chapter B Scan Students Schedules The Actual Scanning Of The Request Forms B 6 Report Cards Manual Transfer Credits amp GPA Introduction ses fa beer ixi C 2 How to Archive Grades C 2 Specifications sisse exp aes C 4 GPA WARNING C 5 Main Menu 0 000008 C 5 BEGIN TRANSFER C 6 INDIVIDUAL STUDENT OVERRIDE C 6 Report Cards Manual C 1 Chapter C Transfer Credits amp GPA Introduction Introduction Transfer credits and GPA information from the current school year to the next school year NOTE This process should be used every year by every school It is only necessary to use this program if you are using Report Cards Plus AND you started the scheduling process before the end of the previous school year AND the previous school year has ended For example assume that it is the end of June and the 2004 05 school year has just ended A few months ago you created a 2005 06 directory and have been using it to schedule for the 2005 06 school year However you have done the following in the 2004 05 directory Updated students career credits and GPA information Archived students grades into their archival files This program will be used to transfer these report
397. ns TitleAndFont lt TitleText gt Attendance Course Table GPA Honor Roll Advanced Specifica tions Course Comment Concept Narratives To print text at the top of the box type the text string after the equal sign The font and size of the text string determines how it will appear on the report Use CR as part of the text to insert a line break For example Course CR Information will print as Course Information Course CR CR Information is printed as Course Information TitleBorder Y or N Course Table Advanced Specifi cations Course Comment Con cepts Narratives Attendance To draw a border around the title set this specification to Y for Yes The default is N for No TitleHeight Course Table Advanced specifi cations Course Attendance A title may be placed at the top of the course box in a cell of its own The height of this cell is set in inches Course Table default is 5 Advanced Specifications Course de fault is 3 Attendance default is 2 TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center Attendance Course Table Ad vance GPA Honor Roll Advance comment concept course narra tive The title can be set to print from left aligned right aligned or centered The default is centered Top Draw Box In the Draw Box top indicates distance from the top margin in inches VerticalBodyAlign Top Bottom Center Course Table Sets the positioning of the text in the subject and av
398. nt After choosing how you would like to calculate averages you will be asked if you have backed up Remember that although it s not required by the program it is advisable to backup your data before calculating averages Should you calculate averages incorrectly you can Restore from backup or Set Specification 2 REPLACE EXISTING GRADES to Yes and recalculate averages How Are Averages Calculated 5 8 Report Cards Manual The following rules are followed in calculating averages Any non weighted column will not even be looked at A non weighted column is one for which you have assigned a weight of 096 Unless you have changed the REPLACE EXISTING GRADE option in the main window to Yes any grade already in the column for which the average is being calculated will not be overwritten and the course will be skipped If any grade is in the Final column and the Final Average is not the average being calculated the course will be skipped For example if the student has been withdrawn a W will be in the Final column and a midyear average will not be calculated As another example assume that a final grade had been given for a quarter course meeting during the 1st quarter Because there is a grade in the Final Grade column the average will not be calculated The Final column is considered to be the right most column on your report card that has been defined as a SEMESTER or FINAL column See Customize Report Ca
399. nter grades Manually 2 enter grades and sKills manually 3 Scan grades 4 receive from Grade quick 5 End program Dp 4 10 Report Cards Manual NOTE Enter Grades Entering Grades Or Skills Manually Page one of the Specifications Enter Grades and Skills window appears Specification Enter Grades And Skills DER SELECT COLUMNS TO DISPLAY Check those to be editable Pagel 1 DISPLAY WHICH MARKING PERIOD MIDYEAR GRADE MIDYEAR EXAM THIRD MARKING PERIOD PIFIRST MARKING PERIOD FOURTH MARKING PERIOD gt SECOND MARKING PERIOD FINAL EXAM FINAL GRADE ABSENCES lt EFFORT CITIZENSHIP 2 DISPLAY WHICH SKILLS v SKILLOT SKILLO2 3 MARKING PERIOD FOR SKILLS FIRST MARKING PERIOD x Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE 2 From the Display Which Marking Period list select the period whose skills and grades you want to view For example selecting midyear exam and final grade will display the corresponding grades for these marking periods 3 From the Display Which Skills list select the skills you want to view The Display Which Skills list lets you select the individual skills that are associated with the selected marking period To make the selected grading periods and skills editable make sure to select the check box next to each of your selections These checkboxes determine which columns you can edit They also determine if the cursor will stop in the column when manual
400. nts Course 5 5 COURSE 220 02 AP Am Hst Possible Credits 1 00 Possible Weight 1 00 GPA Factor 0 00 ALL YEAR COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Column 2 HALF Credit HALF Average FINAL GRADE LGE OVE CREDITS ADJUSTMENT code of i or 4 or in the WR column means to use half the possible credits 90 5000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 9 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS GPA FACTOR NOT USED because the grade is less than the MINIMUM grade for the GPA factor 0 0000 OVE WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT code of 2 in the MR column means to use half the weight so that this grade counts 504 90 5000 WEIGHT Full year course Possible weight Number of credit column 1 i 0 5000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 9 0000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 9 0000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 1 5000 ADJ QP 165 0000 SIMPLE QP 160 0000 WEIGHT 1 7500 PREY IGPA 91 4286 THIS GRADE 90 0000 0 0000 A 0 0000 A 0 5000 NE IGPA 71 1111 NEW H 1 5000 165 0000 160 0000 2 2500 PREV AGPA 94 2657 ND AGP 72 2222 As with the previous two courses because this is a full year course the student receives half the possible credit for passing each semester and half of the possible weight for each semester Therefore the student receives full credit for passing this course and full weight is used during the end of the year update
401. nts courses and grades from the report card files of the previous year to the archival files of the new year from where they may be viewed on the window or printed 4 Report Cards Manual Introduction How to Archive Grades on college transcripts If you do not use the Transfer Credits and GPA program at the end of each year previous courses and grades taken by your students will be stored only in previous school years The following example demonstrates the archival process for a new 11th grade student When using the Transfer Credits amp GPAs program his or her report card record for grade 10 stored in the previous year is copied into Archival year 1 of the current year The courses and grades for this student s 9th grade year stored in archival year 1 of the previous year are copied to year 2 of the new school year 2002 03 School Year Year 1 Year 0 Grade 9 Courses Grade 10 Courses Archival File Report Card File 2003 04 School Year Year 2 Year 1 Year 0 Grade 9 Courses Grade 10 Courses Grade 11 Courses Step 1 Go to Data Base Plus and click New Files Specifications to indicate the number of archival years you wish to maintain See Specification 8 Number of Archival Years If you are currently scheduling in next year s directory you must indicate the exact same number of archival years in both directories For example assume that you are using the 2002 03
402. ny other fees for each master course If you use Scheduling Plus this information can be printed on students schedules along with the total amount that they owe the school Only the default reports 21 22 and 23 in Schedule Report Writer will include this information You may turn this setting on and off without losing any entered texts costs and fees With the setting off the following will happen You will not be asked to enter texts costs and fees for new master courses that you enter nor will old entries appear on the window Texts costs and fees will not be printed on the master course printout Texts costs and fees will not be printed on students schedules Turning this option on will cause the opposite to take place This option should be used only if you are using Scheduling Plus and if you wish to limit certain sections of master courses to specific grade levels For example assume that you will have three sections of master course 12 and that you want two of the sections open to any grade level but that you do not want your grade 9 students to have it last block Using this option you may limit the section meeting last block to grades 10 through 12 This means that the Perform Scheduling program will have to schedule grade 9 students into one of the other two sections Setting this option to Yes when you create a section you will have to enter a beginning and ending grade level for that section Section
403. o conduct an honor roll search for this task See the note above Report Cards Manual 7 7 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List Missy Baldwin HIGH HONORS FIRST MARKING PERIOD Erin Bartlett HIGH HONORS FIRST MARKING PERIOD Russ Berube HIGH HONORS FIRST MARKING PERIOD Mary Keefe HIGH HONORS FIRST MARKING PERIOD Thaddeus Nappi HIGH HONORS FIRST MARKING PERIOD Heather Southard HIGH HONORS FIRST MARKING PERIOD Generating a Form Letter Congratulations on Making the Honor Roll This task searches on the honor roll you select in Specification 2 and generates a letter of congratulations to all students on that honor roll list Use the default report 11 or design your own Like the honor roll certificate the honor roll letter must be set to search on one or all honor rolls REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL Hampden MA 01036 413 566 3495 Peter James Principal Arthur Kilborn Assistant Principal Francis Miller Guidance Director Peter Dawson Assistant Principal 07 02 2002 Mr amp Mrs Julian Albrecht Box 828 Los Angeles MA 01040 RE Kathy Albrecht It is with great pleasure that am able to inform you that your daughter Kathy achieved HIGH HONORS for the FIRST MARKING PERIOD This is truly an accomplishment in which she can take great pride Sincerely Peter James Principal 7 8 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List
404. o grade in a weighted column the program will ignore that column when calculating the average For example if you give the Final Exam column a weight of 20 if a student has no grade in that column the average will be calculated based on the weighted columns that do have grades The Final Exam column will be ignored 5 6 Report Cards Manual Calculate Averages Calculating Averages For Which Columns Calculating Averages For Which Columns Specification 6 INCLUDE WHICH SECTIONS helps determine the sections to calculate the average See Specifications Calculate Averages on page 5 3 When you finish entering weights the Final Grade print window appears further defines the sections to calculate the average Administrator s Plus xj FINAL GRADE CALCULATE AVERAGES FOR WHICH SECTIONS e C C C Cc C Cc Cc Specification 1to4 2 Range of teachers 3 individual Teachers 4 Individual sections 5 Change specifications 6 View log 7 Main menu 8 End program Description If you choose option 1 averages will be calculated for the course range set in specification 6 INCLUDE WHICH SECTIONS See page Specifications Calculate Averages on page 5 3 The Individual Sections option allows you to enter the master course and section numbers of those courses for which you want the program to calculate an average You can type them in manually or select them from the F6 LOOKUP This can be very useful in the
405. o remain unchanged Similarly in a numerical grading system a GPA factor of 10 could be added to a grade of 85 to make it count as a 95 However some schools may choose to have their quality points multiplied by the GPA factor In this case a GPA factor of 1 1 could be entered for an accelerated course so that an 85 would count as a 93 5 when the GPA is calculated These schools would have to enter a 1 for their average courses so that their quality points would remain unchanged NOTE This option in the Customize RC program allows you to choose between adding or multiplying your GPA factor If you do not intend to use the GPA factor choose the adding option so that the default GPA factor of zero does not affect the quality points associated with the course 1 4 Report Cards Manual Customize Report Card Columns Customize RC Columns Customize RC Customize Report Card Columns VIEW MODE Column 25 Character Name 1 FIRST MARKING PERIOD 1st 1st PERIOD N ii se a N Ir 3 MIDYEAR EXAM MIDEX MEX EXAM N 4 MIDYEAR GRADE MIDGR MID SEMESTER N 5 0 UNUSED N 6 THIRD MARKING PERIOD 3rd 3rd PERIOD N 7 FOURTH MARKING PERIOD 4th 4th PERIOD N 8 FINAL EXAM FINEX FEX EXAM N 8 0 UNUSED N 10 FINAL GRADE FINAL FNL FINAL Y 11 0 UNUSED N 12 COMMENT ONE COM 1 C1 COMMENT N 13 COMMENT TWO COM2 C2 COMMENT N There are 11 columns on
406. o the above example add course 400 which is also a full year course However because this course is a vocational course meeting three periods each day it is given a weight of 3 00 COURSE QTR PERIODS WEEK WT PRO RATED WEIGHT 100 1st 5 120 25 200 182 5 50 25 300 AL 5 1 00 25 400 ALL 15 3 00 75 Its pro weighted weight would be 3 divided by 4 marking periods which is 75 Consequently this course would be given three times the weight of the other three courses which each had a pro rated weight of 25 This would be the fairest way to count the courses In other words by pro rating weights the course that meets three times each day is weighted three times more than courses meeting only once each day If you enter an N for setting 3 and choose to use the weight NOT pro rated the actual weights will be used In other words in this example even though the full year course 300 met the same number of times per week as the quarter course 100 during the marking period its grade would count four times the grade of the quarter course Course 300 is weighted 1 while course 100 is weighted 25 If you are printing an honor roll for the FINAL GRADE column on the report card pro rating will automatically be turned off Pro rating is done only for grades in PERIOD and SEMESTER columns This is because the entered weights indicate the relative number of times that each course has met over the entire year HOW TO USE THE GPA FACT
407. o which Report Card columns you want the fies an Doe Stop First click on one of the Scan Form boxes above A list of Report Card columns will be displayed Click on the Check Box next to the Report Card column that you want the data associated with this Scan Form box sent to Scan Form Page Ho 004303 Course 002 Section 01 English 9 Watt James Report Card Columns 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1st 2nd S1EX S1GRD 3rd 4th S2ExX JOB s2cmp ABS coM1 com2 Either add sheets to the hopper and click RESUME or press ESC if you are finished scanning NOTE It is recommended that you disable any virus scan program you have on the workstation to which the scanner is connected and that you do not have any other programs running when scanning grades in Report Cards Plus If the scanner error cannot be corrected call NCS using their 800 number When you are finished scanning grades a window will appear asking if you would like to view a log 4 18 Report Cards Manual Enter Grades Scanning Grades mw Administrator s Plus Grade Reporting Scan Form Kg f A nnin Grade Reporting Plus Grade Report Form Numeric Alpha WORKSHOP HIGH SCHOOL Grade Reporting Scan Form Layout s Brailes Into Period Grade C 2nd 4 Ic ha School Year EE QD Would you like to view the results of this scanning session fT Tf you would like to look at the results later you can view them with
408. odes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Code PGNUM X Page Number Reset PRINTPAGEHE ADER Causes the page header to print on the report 7 80 Report Cards Manual Description The page number code PG is placed in the header or footer of a report and prints the page number of each page starting with 1 The Page Number Reset code allows you to start numbering pages at a number other than 1 Replace X with the number from which you will start counting the page numbers that is the number that will print on the first page of the report The code is mandatory for the Page Header to print on the page It usually appears after the PGNUM X code in the report e SHSTART Start of Search Header printed at the start of search category e SHEND End of Search Header printed at the end of search category All the lines between the SHSTART and SHEND codes make up the Search Header The Search Header prints at the beginning of every new search category For instance if you run a report searching on HOMEROOM and sorted by GENDER a Search Header will be printed for each new Homeroom If the Search Header contains an ENDPAGE code a new page will be printed for every found search category If the body of a report contains a Search Header and no search is performed when running the report the Search Header will not be printed Code WRAPON Word Wrap On WRAPOFF Word Wrap Off UNIVERS Identifies a Se
409. oduce the Grand Total Weight The Grand Total Quality Points divided by the Grand Total Weight produces the student s honor roll average In the example the student s honor roll average for the first marking period is 2 57 Grade Point Averages Menu Use this option to access the GPAs Credits window which includes Print Class Rank Report Print Eligibility Report and Update Un update GPAs Credits this is the same window you will see when you select Grade Point Averages from the window Report Cards Manual 8 23 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated The top portion of each student s report card record as viewed in the View Change Add Drop program displays the student s Career Adjusted Quality Points Career Adjusted Weight Career Adjusted GPA Career Credits Career Simple Quality Points Career Simple Weight and Career Simple GPA view Transcripts Buckman Jesse Edward 122 Grade 2 z WPT Ad mule Specifications AQP AWT AGPA CR SQP SWT SGPA There are two types of quality points so that you may maintain both an adjusted and simple career GPA for each student The adjusted GPA takes into account the fact that some advanced courses may offer more quality points for a grade than would be awarded for the same grade in a lower level course The simple GPA is calculated with the same number of quality points being offered for each
410. olon is the number of inches in which to center the entry On a normal 8 2 x 11 inch piece of paper with 1 2 inch margins on either side would be replaced with 7 5 The X may be replaced with an N U S C or P N centers Name of school U underlines the school name S centers school s Street address e C centers City State amp Zip of school on a single line e P centers the Phone of school For example CNNN 7 5 would center your school name on a standard piece of paper This header line Report Writer code prints a solid line from margin to margin The X variable indicates the width of the line with 1 thin 2 medium and 3 thick The Y variable indicates the position of the line with 1 top 2 middle and 3 bottom For example to underline the heading of a report with a bold line running from one side of the paper to another place a HLINE 31 code on the line directly below the heading This code prints an underline starting at point X and ending at point Y on a line of a report X and Y number of inches from the left margin This code is meant to be used on a report writer line with other text and codes including other ULINE codes i e you may want to underline more than one item on a line Prints a Vertical Line starting from the Y1 coordinate and ending at the Y2 coordinate Y being the number of inches from the top margin Use a tab code in conjunction with the vertical line code to position the X coo
411. om row will not even be looked at if there are one or more bubbles on the top TOW fthere is an error an error message will be sent to the printer as the form is scanned and no grade will be entered into the affected students transcript for that category Any prior grade in the transcript for the category will remain An error in one category such as the PERIOD GRADE will not affect the other categories if they are properly bubbled Giving the student any of the withdrawn grades will only put that grade in their transcript the student will not be withdrawn from the course section To officially withdraw a student from a section and remove them from the section roster the View Change Add Drop program must be used See Withdrawing Student from Course Section on page 6 5 The part of the form containing the comment bubbles looks like c 00000 0 00 Qi 1 0 0 9 9 9 9 O 9 9 c o 00000000 QG 2 000 0 9 00 GJ Fillinone bubble in the top row and one bubble in the bottom row Having more than one bubble marked in a row will result in an error Do not bubble in a zero in each row for comment 00 since it does not exist If you do the comment number will be read as 100 Although comment 4 should be entered as 04 if the program finds one row blank the comment will become the value bubbled in the other row For example if the top row has the 4 bubbled and the bottom row is blank the comment will be
412. omatically be in effect each time you print the report 3 30 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Comment Distribution Report The six columns with asterisks over them may be customized with this option The other columns may not be changed For each column the high grade must be equal to or higher than the low grade If any of your columns overlap grades will only be tallied to the first applicable column For example if you set column one to be all grades from 90 100 and column two to be all grades from 85 95 a grade of 93 would only be counted in the total for column one Comment Distribution Report This report is similar to the Grade Distribution Report except that it displays the distribution of comments assigned to students To print the Comment Distribution Report choose option 6 from the window on page 3 2 The following specification window will appear Specif ications Comment Distribution Report SPECIFICATIONS COMMENT DISTRIBUTION REPORT E SORT DISTRIBUTION REPORT BY COMMENT NUMBER Y peme ooo Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Option Description 1 SORT You will have the option to sort the report by comment number DISTRIBUTIO alphabetically by description or by the number of times the comment N REPORT was used in ascending order For a sample of the report sorted each BY way see the Appendix 2 GRADE The Comment Distribution Report is printed one grade level at a time Use this specifi
413. ompleted teaching a skill you can track how much time was spent Click the time spent cell to enter the number of hours minutes Date Instruction Time Spent View Description and Completed Notes 09 21 03 E hous mn wie E Descriptions Notes You can record additional information about the skill by creating descriptions and or notes Click the View Descriptions Notes cell to enter a description or notes about the skill This completes the skills setup in GradeQuick To exit the Edit Skills Information window click the Gradebook Spreadsheet button on the toolbar Entering Skills Grades To enter grades for skills from the Grade Book Spreadsheet click the Skills Assessment button on the upper toolbar The appearance of the Skills Assessment window can be changed using the drop down lists To enter skills grades for a particular term Select By Term from the drop down list in the center of the toolbar and then select the appropriate term from the drop down list on the right Report Cards Manual D 17 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick amp Skills Assessment ee E 2 Gradebook Skills Lesson SupportLink Spreadsheet Edit Skills Reports Planner Online Help Tutorial Pesis s Student Name Works Well in Coope Works Well Indepenc Works Well witt Albrecht Kathy Bardsley Saul Bartlett Erin Diamond Milton DiGirolamo Linda Egan
414. omputer would store that there were 250 students in the last class rank report calculated to the disk for grade 12 This is will enable the computer to print that Karen Amato s rank as 23 of 250 Consequently only print reports to the disk that contain all of the students in a grade level and their rank You will almost always use the CAREER choice However to print athletic eligibility list based on the credits earned last marking period use the LAST UPDATE choice Being able to use the LAST UPDATE data will enable you to produce reports using students credits and GPA s for just one marking period semester or year For example to produce a report of those students receiving less than 2 5 credits for a marking period do the following 1 Perform a temporary updating of students credits and GPA s based on the marking period of your choice The computer will record the credits awarded for your chosen marking period as the LAST UPDATED CREDITS 2 Set specification 5 to use credits as the search category In specifications 6 and 7 enter O and 2 49 as your search category limits The resulting report will contain students who received under 2 5 credits for your chosen marking period 3 You may then undo the updating performed in step 1 with the UN UPDATE option Report Cards Manual 8 69 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Defining Class Rank Reports Specification USE SIMPLE OR ADJUSTED GPA S QUAL POINTS SEARCH BY GPA CREDI
415. or a semester school with two credit columns These columns along with the credit earned after each semester and the total credits earned are the only grade columns that print This transcript is organized by department rather than by year Consequently it does not include yearly attendance data This report is similar two Report 43 except that it is intended for a semester school with two credit columns These columns along with the credit earned after each semester as well as the total credits earned are the only grade columns that print Transcript printed on special 11 x 8 5 forms available from Rediker Software with final grade on right and organized by year Transcript printed on special 11 x 8 5 forms for school with 2 semester columns organized by year Transcript printed on special 11 x 8 5 forms with final grade on right and organized by department Report Name Trans Forms SM Dept Trans Forms RT Yr 22 Trans Nar 1Col RT YR Trans Nar 1Col SM YR Tran Nar 2 Col RT YR Tran Nar 2 Col SM YR Tran Nar 2 Col RT DP Tran Nar 2 Col SM DP TR Plain RTYR LASER TR Narw RTYR LASER Report Cards Report Writer The Pre defined Reports Description These reports are similar to Reports 41 44 respectively except they are intended to be printed on two color hard stock paper As such these reports do not print the header labels e g STUDENT etc nor do they print the dashed l
416. ormat which prints only those columns worth credit followed by the number of credits earned in those columns Replace the variable X with an L R or S to indicate respectively final grade on RIGHT final grade on LEFT or SEMESTER Because they have more room with fewer columns being printed semester lines use the 5 character name for column headings and 6 spaces for column averages while LEFT and RIGHT labels use the 3 character name for column headings and 3 spaces for averages Y indicates the type of line to construct Replace the variable Y with an H to build the header Headers contain the names of the columns Use a U to underline the header on a permanent label The length of the line will be the length of the last header printed Use a V to underline the header on a transcript The length of the line will be the length of the last header printed plus 10 to account for underlining GR YEAR which prints above the column containing the year and grade level of the courses that were taken Use a B to build the BODY If CR is 99 and in a course loop the body will be repeated for each course Use an A to build a line containing column averages NUM indicates the length of the line If doing a HEADER or AVERAGE the CR is irrelevant Put anything as the CR It is there for consistency If you are forcing all 16 courses to print with CRSSTART2 this code prints the averages directly below the last course printed when the
417. ormation in the current master course list to determine the course name level length credits and so on Consequently any change in the Master Course List will affect all of those students that took the course in previous years This also means that you should NOT delete a master course as long as it exists in any current student s archived courses Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window The following fields appear in the View Edit window Field Name Description Inactive This checkbox determines whether or not a course is considered active or inactive Course Number Master course number from 1 to 9999 Later these courses will be broken down into one or more sections Most schools have courses from the same department listed in the same hundreds For example all English courses could be assigned numbers in the 500 s all science courses the 400 s etc Grouping courses by department allows you to use the program to produce Grade Distribution Reports as well as print credit totals by department on students transcripts See Chapter 7 NOTE When setting up master course numbers note that courses are printed on transcripts and report cards in numerical order Consequently English math science and social studies courses should be given the lowest numbers if they are to be printed first 2 4 Report Cards Manual Field Name Course Name Course Description Level Department lt 0
418. otograph Gl owe s P l 0 00 12 02 03 041 AP Sr Eng P Brown 34 92 1 00 IIl 12 02 03 815 P E Zion D l d 33 1 00 HI Math IIl Other 09 99 00 119 Algebra l COL Christnsn P g 1 1 00 1 09 99 00 930 Lunch St dy Uc Hagh B l 0 00 10 00 01 123 Geometry COL Walters D 23 4 1 00 10 00 01 9230 Lunch St dy Mc Hagh B l 0 00 11 01 02 12 Algebra 2 COL Ualter D 2 76 1 00 I 11 01 02 930 Lunch Stdy McMann D l 0 00 12 02 03 135 Calculus P O Brian G 3 96 1 00 11 01 02 931 AIDS Group l 90 00 HH Science E 03 33 00 212 C Earth 3c COL Bolduc K 3 1 00 HH 10 00 01 222 C Biology COL Whitney E 36 90 1 50 Li 11 01 02 222 C Chemist COL Brown D 33 91 1 50 EE 12 02 03 242 C Physics COL Manchestr D 37 3 1 50 IBI HI Sorial 3t III 09 99 00 209 C SocSt COL Coombs R 88 90 50 Li 03 33 00 316 C SocSt B COL Hughe P 92 0 50 Il 10 00 01 2322 West Civil LaF leck D 32 1 00 Li 11 01 02 331 C US Hst COL Raymond 36 96 1 00 Il 11 01 0 225 Intl 3t Raymond J 95 0 50 Li 12 02 03 236 Sociology Haghes P 36 95 9 50 Fi HI Language NE 09 99 00 412 French 1 COL LaFleck D 31 1 00 BE 10 00 01 422 French COL Frank L 4 1 00 BE 11 01 0 432 French COL McMarn D 7 30 1 00 LI 12 02 023 442 French 4 COL Frank L 3 98 1 00 Lil HH Fine Arts Li 10 00 01 Sl Art l Stearns L 32 32 0 50 Lll 12 02 03 552 Band Crockett R l l 0 00 BE NE Vorational BE ll 01 02 703 Word Pro Bosworth
419. ou want to use the current course counter in the loop A loop will be gone through one time for each course The code of 99 will become a 01 the first time through the loop and a 02 the second time through the loop until all the courses are printed If printing by sections the course number of 99 indicates to use the current section A course number of 98 indicates to use the course found in a search For example if you are doing an exact grade search for grades of I for incomplete then a course number of 98 indicates to use the course that was found to have a grade of I COLUMN Enter a two digit number from 01 to 13 to indicate the report card column to print Note that columns 12 and 13 are the comment columns The special column code of 98 designates to use the column indicated by specification 8 which designates the search column NUMBER Indicates the number of spaces to allocate for codes that are not numbers For example entering 12 for the NUM part of the code that prints course names means to allocate 12 characters for the course name Names longer than 12 will be truncated and shorter than 12 will be padded with spaces If NUM 0 then the field is trimmed of leading and trailing spaces for COURSE NAME LEVEL STAFF NAME and COLUMN NAMES This is useful when imbedding this information in letters Indicates the format that a number will take For example HEHEHE means to print three digits before the decimal
420. ourse Possible weight COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 4 5000 i SIMPLE QP PREY IGPA THIS GRADE 1 0000 H H NE IGPA No H 5 5000 g i PREY AGPA NE ARPA STUDENT GRAND TOTALS PREVIOUS CREDITS i SIMPLE QP z 12 0000 PREY IGPA THIS UPDATE P 4 2500 NE SGPA NEW E 16 2500 PREV ACPA NE ACPA The top of this report shows that the updating is being done based on the two credit columns MIDYEAR and FINAL grades Course 1 1 COURSE 050 01 Ad Eng Use Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 25 GPA Factor 0 00 QUARTER COURSE OUR Credit fAverage Override Colwnn BLANK Full Credit Tull Average GRADE COPIED FROU SEMESTER GRADE COLUMN TO FINAL GRADE COLUMN FINAL GRADE 90 CREDITS AWARDED Qtr or Sem course Possible credits SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point WEIGHT Qtr or Sem course Possible weight COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADJ QP 9 0000 SIMPLE QP 0 60000 WEIGHT PREV IGPA 0 0000 THIS GRADE H 90 0000 22 5000 zz 5000 i NE IGPA 30 0000 NESJ g 0 0000 zz
421. ovided you with background information on students career credits quality points and weight They explained in detail how to update them and then gave details on the mathematics of the updating process Once students career credits quality points and weight have been updated CLASS RANK REPORTS may be obtained based on them A CLASS RANK REPORT simply reads these three numbers from students records and produces the report of your choice An ELIGIBILITY REPORT may also be produced An ELIGIBILITY REPORT is just a CLASS RANK REPORT that has been defined differently The main window of the GPA S CREDITS portion of the Statistical Reports program looks like STATISTICAL REPORTS GPA S CREDITS a 2 print eLigibility report 3 inspect change report Print specifications 4 Update un update gpa s credits 5 View most recent log 6 Honor roll menu 7 End program D First choose Option 3 and inspect your PRINT SPECIFICATIONS which determine how your report will look The print specifications for class rank reports operate in virtually the same way as the print specifications for honor roll reports Report Cards Manual 8 65 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How to Obtain Class Rank Reports Choose either Option 1 PRINT CLASS RANK REPORT or Option 2 PRINT ELIGIBILITY REPORT to print reports based on students career GPA s and credits You will then see the following window allowing you to define your report Print Cl
422. ow See View Edit Courses amp Sections on page 2 3 Because there is only room for a limited number of decimal places depending upon your report this option determines if column averages are rounded or truncated In other words an average of 84 67 will be rounded to an 85 or truncated to an 84 If an 85 is the cutoff for your honor roll you should truncate so that parents do not complain when they see a grade of 85 on the report card and their child was not on the honor roll This specification determines whether the heading SCHOLARSHIP REPORT or PROGRESS REPORT will print on a report card Report Cards Report Writer Specifications Page 3 Code Override Specifications Specifications Report Cards Report Writer CODE OVERRIDE SPECIFICATIONS REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER 1 PRINT GPA INFORMATION CURRENT GPA DATA adjusted i MENS Last Name First Initial S PRINT COURSE NAME So C Yes No 6 PRINT SECTION NUMBER 8 PRINT FIRST MARKING PERIOD S PRINT SECOND MARKING PERIOD A PRINTMIDYEAREXAM DLL NEN PRNTO RN D PRINT THIRD MARKING PERIOD E PRINT FOURTH MARKING PERIOD F PRINT FINAL EXAM O OoOo ano oo H PRINT FINAL GRADE DPRINT ABSENCES PRINT EFFORT K PRINT CITIZENSHIP Reset Default ENTER SPECIFICATION 3 TO CHANGE Specification Description PRINT GPA This option allows you to designate if you want GPA information I
423. ox To print a box on the report card that contains the Honor Roll information use the code below The box will only print if the Report Card Report Writer Specification A Print Honor Roll Status on page 2 is set to Yes HonorRollBoxStart BoxHeight Default 0 5 Box Width Default 2 Border Width Default 0 TopGap Default 0 1 MiddleGap Default 0 2 PrintBorder Y or N Default Y TitleBorder Y or N Default Y TitleHorizontalAlign Default Center TitleAndFont HONOR ROLL STATUS BodyFont HonorRollBoxEnd PrintHonorRollBox Left X Top Y Default Left 0 Top 0 5 D 30 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts New Box Codes Print Image This code allows you to print an image such as a school logo or a background image on the report card To insert this code into a report click the Insert Image button at the top of the View Edit Letters Reports Window Note For background images remove the PrintImage command set the zoom to 0 Everypage to Y and Stretch to Y ImageStart Default 1 Zoom Default 100 FileName Image File Name Box Width BoxHeight Stretch Y or N Default Y EveryPage Y or N Default N ImageLeft Default 0 ImageTop Default 0 ImageEnd PrintImage 1 Left 0 Top 0 Report Cards Manual D 31 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions Box Code Definitions Advanc
424. page REM Ignores all the code and text in a line The REM code must be the FIRST code in the line LPI X The Lines per Inch code determines the number of lines per vertical inch This code was added to the report writer so that certain portions of a report could have a fixed Lines Per Inch setting regardless of the font height As a result users have a wider range of font options to choose from when generating reports on pre printed forms Essentially the Lines Per Inch code causes large print to cram together and smaller print to expand in order to adhere to the lines per inch setting X represents the lines per inch in character spaces It may be replaced with a 1 through 10 with 10 being the most crammed When there is no Lines Per Inch code present or when the code reads LPI 0 the lines per inch is determined by the size of the font PGSTART PGEND All lines between the PGSTART and PGEND codes make up a Page Header The Page Header prints at the top of every page of a report Page Headers are used on lists that DO NOT require a search Often times Page Headers contain page numbers PGNUM X Resets the page number The page number code PG is placed in the header or foot er of a report and prints the page number of each page starting with 1 The Page Number Reset code allows you to start numbering pages at a number other than 1 Re place X with the number from which you will start counting the page num
425. pears Specifications Teacher Grade Search Report Page 1 1 SEARCH TYPE 2 SELECT GRADE TO SEARCH 3 INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN 4 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED LOWER THAN 5 OMIT COURSES NUMBERED GREATER THAN 999 6 START GRADE ZE 7 END GRADE Gade v 8 PRINT PREVIEW Yes f No Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE These specifications set your search criteria for report card grades courses and sections You can also confine your search to specific grade levels For example you could find all students in the 9th and 10th grades who have a B A later window allows you to set your range on teachers 2 Set the specifications as desired The specifications are described in the following table Specification Description 1 Search Type Select whether to search for a marking grade that exactly matches your search or a range of grades 3 40 Report Cards Manual Specification 2 Select Grade to Search 3 Include Sections Meeting When 4 Omit Courses Numbered Lower Than 5 Omit Courses Numbered Greater Than 6 Start Grade 7 End Grade 9 Print Preview Entry Forms Teacher Grade Search Report Description This specification allows you to choose for which sections you want the forms printed For example if it is the end of the 1st marking period choose Option 1 to print forms only for sections meeting during the 1st marking period This will include sections meeting
426. period Subsequently this temporary update may be un updated followed by another temporary update or a complete update at the end of the year If a student s grades change after he has been updated that student may be un updated individually and then updated again using the new grades When the Beginning program is run at the end of the year the Last Update figures will be reset to zero so that further updating can take place in the new year When you first purchase Report Cards Plus students prior career credits career adjusted quality points career simple quality points and career adjusted and simple weight may be entered into the computer using the View change add drop program The View change add drop program may be used at anytime to view or change these numbers The next sections will explain in detail how to update students career credits and grade point averages 8 26 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports Update Un update GPA s amp Credits Update Un update GPA s amp Credits After selecting Grade Point Averages from the main window of the Statistical Reports program see Introduction amp Main Menu on page 8 2 the GPA S CREDITS window appears 1 Administrator s Plus STATISTICAL REPORTS GPA S CREDITS s 2 print eLigibility report 3 inspect change report Print specifications 4 Update un update gpa s credits 5 View most recent log 6 Honor roll menu 7 End program D D Before
427. pes podor qorqa Agoods nok ssury 1oqo yssuowe spio 1ogjo u o q 7uiojsno 1esn e301 st 1dujosueg oy skeMye sy jUeIpeNnb 34 Joddn oy ur sr p1ooo1 6 opei8 sjuopms y o dures si ud o durexo 104 wok ouo 10J puooo1 sjuopus e Sururejuoo jupipenb yoeo ym sjueipenb moj surejuoo dosue sIU 05 3 136 46 a mor rb oe Joded ayy ure d uo se JOM se woy JO OD OM YOO S prey oso Is s x rm elo puud oq Lew d Joy yalqns Aq paos sosgnoo ae i wo qne Saps e ym ouo smoys o dures yxou oy eoK q ponos 080 IS amp 36 assago ggkInoo sjuopnis e YM 3drrosue o duues e sr SYL S LUM juo 0s T le amp 46 d xasaqaurg TWI gt ot lsg De6 arengo 34 BID OM ur poonpouJd oq Aew 3duiosued OY STY se ooru se o0T Iz6 6 prunoig sri n K iua uw io ep siduosuez soonpoid S Td SVO DHOd T3H ATO AVAA Ad AALAOS LdIMHIOSNV3LL 9 SII T HVL T 5989 ZAT SW 0074 log T6 DES VGuAv ooo l dnoia SIV T 6 30 T0 TT o o l l q rrgag pagfqxueT 06 20 TO TT 0070 4 qt sanoTy qdriboaoqg s g 20 T0 TT 00 3 lee 0s 0 l 6 W IrL 2 Old PIOM ETL 20 TO TT 000 l 0s 0 lb6 6 d qaromiog fold PIOM GOL 20 TO TT 90 T I5 00 T log eg arya TI g Targ 226 20 TO TT 0 T 122 os 0 lse p puoweq 3E TAYI Scit 20 TO TT oso 126 oo T 136 36 prpuouAeqg WI SSH EA 3 T 20 TO TT 0S0 I2 oS T Ite 6 qiueorq Tod srWaq 3 262 z0 TO0 TT 0T I6 o0 T 134 3 q staat TI Z Faqabry 931 20 T0 TT 00 T IT 90 T IT a
428. port Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Description CHARACTER 7 A number from 0 to 4 Use a 0 for an individual student total which would normally be in the body of the register Use a 1 for the totals of the current sort category which would normally be printed in a sort footer Use a 2 for the totals of the current search category which would normally be printed in a search footer Use a 3 for the grand totals which would normally be printed in a grand footer For example if you are printing the register sorted by sex use the number 2 in the search footer to print the totals for each sex CHARACTER 8 Must be a colon followed by a formatting template such as This template means to print three digits to the left of the decimal and two to the right All numbers in a column will be neatly lined up Report Cards Manual 7 73 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Special Register Code Two The following code allows you to print totals for individual attendance codes including individual entry and withdrawal codes Code Description Z 001 CHARACTER 1 A Z which identifies this as an attendance 250 Y 0 1 2 3 4 variable THE BE CHARACTER 2 A sign which identifies this as an attendance code total CHARACTERS 3 5 3 digit number identifying which attendance Code from 001 to 250 CHARACTER
429. port from GradeQuick specifications to select the import path and the appropriate marking periods to import After selecting the desired specifications click Done 6 Using the Import from GradeQuick menu shown below choose to import grades for All Sections Individual Sections or a range of grade levels Administrator s Plus xi IMPORT FROM GRADE QUICK START GRADE Grade 69 END GRADE Grade 12 1 Begin import of all sections 2 iMport individual sections 3 Start grade 4 eNd grade 5 Inspect Change Specifications 6 End program D Next The skills grades imported from GradeQuick can be viewed through either the Enter Grades Manual Entry window or View Change Add Drop See D 8 for a description of the View Skills window Report Cards Manual D 19 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Skills based Report Cards Skills based Report Cards The Report Card Report Writer can produce Skills based report cards that include conventional grades skills grades and course concepts As with any report writer report Skills based report cards can be customized to meet the specific needs of your school Only reports that include skills report writer codes will show information for course Mary Keefe 001 GRADE PK HR 108 09 192 Attendance PARENT GUARDIAN NAME amp ADDRESS 28 26 2202 YEAR Mr amp Mrs Ernest Keefe To TO RR 2 Box 1441 07 15 2003 07 15 2003 Springfield MA 01036 Absences
430. pt cell height Auto will cause the cell height to AUTOCALC Controls width of border around concept cell 0 thin border 3 thick border Determines the alignment left to right of the concept header Specifies whether or not the concept cell border prints Designates whether or not a border will print around the concept title Determines the heading of the Concepts cell Text will adopt the specification line s font and size Determines whether or not concepts print in the concept cell If set to N the concept cell will remain empty Report Cards Manual 7 51 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Code ConceptCellEnd NarrativeCellStart or Right Print Y or N WidthlfRight CellHeight inches or Auto BorderWidth 0 3 Left Right Top Bottom TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center Print Border Y or N TitleBorder Y or N TitleAndFont lt TitleText gt PrintBodyAndFont Y or N NarrativeCellEnd AdvancedSpecEnd 7 52 Report Cards Manual Description End of the codes that define what prints in the concept cells of the advanced box Start of the codes that define what prints in the Narrative cell determines the Narrative cell s print position after below the initial Course cell If Right narrative cell is printed on the right side of the course box Determines whether or not the Narrative cell will print If narratives
431. ption Delete Report Erases the current report The report name will be replaced by the name UNUSED in the Viewing and Editing Scheduling Reports Letters window Note that you can delete a report only if it is NOT set as the active report in Specifications See Specifications on page 7 13 NOTE You can also delete or copy a report using the buttons on the bottom right of the View Edit Letters Reports window Edit Menu administrator s Plus File Edit Search Options Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Delete Del Window Report Key Words ALT X to select Select All Ctrl A Time Date From the Edit menu you have access to many of the tools available for editing the body of a report Note that the Windows shortcut key combinations are listed to the right of each option You can also perform these functions by clicking on the corresponding icon under the toolbar pictured to the left of each toolbar function below Option Description Cut Ctrl X Deletes all highlighted text and saves it to the Windows clipboard so that it may be pasted in a different location Copy Ctrl C Copies all highlighted text to the Windows clipboard so that it may be pasted in a different location in the body of a report Paste Ctrl V After cutting or copying text and placing it onto the Windows clipboard click the paste icon to insert the saved text at the position of the cursor A You may paste the selecte
432. r sections or for a range of teachers and all sections When you select a range of teachers the program prompts you to enter the starting teacher s name and then it prompts you for the ending teacher s name If you choose to print forms for individual teachers or sections you will need to type in each teacher s ID number or each section number or select them from the F6 LOOKUP The Range of Teachers option also enables you to avoid printing forms for sections that do not have grades associated with them such as lunch You could for example simply enter as the teacher of lunch a fake teacher who has ID 1 and enter the name of the teacher who has ID 2 as your STARTING STAFF MEMBER This fake teacher could also be at the end of your file of teachers You would then enter the name of the teacher who has the ID number before the fake teacher as your ENDING STAFF MEMBER Section Rosters Course Section Rosters contain the names grades and ID numbers of the students in each section An example of a course section roster is on page xi of the appendix Essentially a course section roster is the same as a manual grade entry form without all of the lines and without students previous grades 3 24 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Section Rosters To print course Section Rosters choose option 4 from the Entry Forms window Specification INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN PRINT SEX COUNT AT ROSTER
433. r days from the number of days in session If a student has a code of N in their record and a day is worth some other value than 1 member day the student is considered to be a non member for that value For example a student who is a non member for a date with membership value of 5 will only be credited with a 5 non member day Code 27 The number of days present This is calculated by subtracting the number of absences register code 1 from the number of member days Code 28 The Average Daily Attendance which is calculated by dividing the number of days present by the number of days in session Code 29 The Average Daily Membership which is calculated by dividing the number of membership days by the number of days in session Code 30 The percent attendance which is calculated by dividing the number of days present by the number of membership days CHARACTER 5 Either the letter I for an interval total or the letter Y for the year to date total CHARACTER 6 Either the letter E for excused U for unexcused P for pending A for all or S for special code The letter S must be used with special codes 26 30 If you are printing the totals for register code 1 absences and A in this character will print all absences while an E will only print excused absences Pending absences are those that are neither excused nor unexcused Code Report Cards Re
434. r directory Unlike your Master Course List which you will keep from year to year and modify as needed your Section List will usually require too many changes to bother modifying the list each year so it is preferable to create a new one In an extremely small school that does not require many changes you may use the same section file from one year to the next To begin a brand new section file selection option 4 New section list file only from the Enter Courses window See page New Section List File Only on page 2 25 See the chapter on entering skills and concepts for more information on these buttons Report Cards Manual 2 11 Chapter 2 E nter Courses Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List 2 12 Report Cards Manual To Enter or Edit Sections Call up the appropriate master course by entering a few letters of its name its number or by using the F6 LOOKUP option The window below shows you course 221 Biology which does not yet have any sections 4 View Edit Courses And Sections M INACTIVE ourse 221 Concepts Skills Cease 5 Yes 0 No E i LCNHENEEEN 6 Course Length lt Q S A gt A MII GPA Factor o Cost jo iori Hi il i 0 ZLLIIIELI A ENTER MASTER COURSE NUMBER OR NAME 9 a Besef Fa r2 fo rs ra r5 re Fe re i ERE EXIT SECT EDIT The bottom half of the window will display any sections that have already been entered
435. r roll report for your grade levels using letter grades Instead make another honor roll report dedicated to your grade levels using letter grades If you wish to set a minimum letter grade for that honor roll report do the following 1 Use an option in the Customize RC program and select that you are using LETTER GRADES 2 Return to this program and enter the minimum letter grade for your honor roll report that will be used for your grade level using letter grades 3 Use the option in the Customize RC program to once again select that you are using a split grading system Putting an entry of A in this specification and a B in specification 8 would allow a student to make the honor roll with exactly one B in a major course and no grades lower than a B In other words students make the honor roll with all A s and one B They would not make it with all A s and two B s or with all A s and one C The same as specification 8 but for minor courses If specification 8 has an A and this specification a B students make the honor roll with all A s in major courses but are allowed B s in minor courses The same as Specification 9 but for minor courses Statistical Reports Defining Honor Roll Reports Specification Description C OMIT FROM If you answer YES for this setting any student with at least one HONOR ROLLIF ncomplete will be omitted from your honor roll If you choose to 1 OR MORE include these students the course will no
436. r your all year courses Then change the defaults to those values needed by semester courses and proceed to enter your semester courses The next section explains each of these fields in detail and gives suggestions as to what values they should contain Only master courses numbers within this range will be included when printing Master Course Lists or Section Lists Use these specifications to include only those courses for a specific department or range of departments To include all courses set your range from 0 to 999 Only sections taught by staff members whose ID numbers fall within this range will be included when printing course section lists Use these specifications to include only those sections taught by one staff member START amp END STAFF FOR SECTION PRINTOUTS will be the same number or a few staff members When you click this specification the Lookup window displays staff members alphabetically Click the top of the ID column to display staff by ID number This specification allows you limit your Section List printout to only those sections meeting during a designated quarter or semester To print all sections make sure that this specification is set to ALL SECTIONS Specification E USE TEXTS COSTS amp FEES F LIMIT SECTIONS TO SPECIFIC GRADE LEVELS Enter Courses Inspect Change Specifications Description Use this specification to indicate that you wish to enter a text book name its cost and a
437. rade in VCAD in the minus year you must update GPAs Credits on archival years in order to update the student s career GPA based on the new grade See Chapter 8 Igi x Rame var one MN ECHN VIEW MODE ATTENDANCE MEMB 1 2 ABS SUSP R Dis REN CS 7 3s 9 ES 1 12 13 14 Writing MARINE BIO Alg HON Calc AB AP GERMAN II Spanish IV Choir N No co w N v w Report Cards Manual 6 7 Chapter 6 View Change Add Drop Viewing and Editing Grades 6 8 Report Cards Manual Editing the Teacher TCH Column in the Minus Years The TCH column appears in years other than year 0 It contains the ID number of the teacher who taught that course enabling the printing of teacher names on transcripts for archived courses You can manually edit this ID number in the same manner as you would edit a grade While in this column the F6 LOOKUP option will display a list of teachers and their ID numbers As in other F6 LOOKUP windows in the program you can click on the top of the CODE column to sort by ID Number or click on the DESCRIPTION column to sort by name Editing Daily Attendance Information in the Minus Years Whereas the top of the YEAR 0 Transcript View contains career credits and GPA information the top of the Transcript View for a minus year contains daily attendance summary information for that year The top of
438. rade is weighted 40 and the exam grade is weighted 20 the 1st marking period grade counts twice as much in calculating the midyear average This results in an average of 93 which was calculated as follows 1st marking period grade 90 times 40 3600 2nd marking period grade Midyear Exam grade 100 times 2096 2000 TOTALS 60 5600 Dividing 5600 by 60 produces an average of 93 33 which rounds off to 93 If this is not a quarter course it is important not to leave the grade for the 2nd marking period blank If there is no grade enter an I for incomplete or a W for withdrawn etc Note that withdrawing the student through the View Change Add Drop program will automatically enter a W as the Final Grade which will cause the midyear average NOT to be calculated With the 40 40 20 weighting system you only intend the exam to count for 2096 or 1 5th of the midyear grade However for a quarter course it will in effect be counting 33 33 or 1 3 of the midyear grade This is because the 1st marking period with a weight of 40 will count twice that of the exam grade with a weight of 20 If you have a quarter course with an exam you should either enter the midyear grade by hand or define a different set of weights for these courses and calculate their midyear averages by using the Individual Sections option BEFORE doing the rest of your courses Of course for a quarter course without an exam grade it does not matter sin
439. rades entering manually 4 3 entering or editing 4 6 how to archive 1 4 C 2 letter 5 9 number 5 9 viewing amp editing 6 3 H Honor Roll Print Specifications inspect change 8 10 Honor Rolls 8 4 using 8 2 HROLL ASC 7 7 Interfacing with GradeQuick p 10 preparing Administrator s Plus D 10 preparing GradeQuick p 12 L Letter Grades 5 9 Letters viewing amp editing 7 32 Linking Skills to Standards p 14 Log calculate averages 5 15 Index 3 Mailing Labels printing 7 12 Manual Grade Entry Forms 3 4 filling them out 3 8 Master Course And Section Lists specifictions 3 33 Master Course and Section Lists 3 33 Master Course and Section Lists Print Window using 3 35 Master Course Fields editing 2 4 Master Course Lists 3 33 Midyear Average Calculations examples 5 11 N Narrow Report Cards printing 7 5 Narrow Transcript by Department printing 7 6 Narrow Transcript by Year printing 7 5 Number Grades 5 9 scanning 3 22 0 Options Menu in View Edit Letters Reports 7 36 to 7 37 OVR Column editing 6 5 P Page Setup in the Report Writer 7 41 Permanent Lables printing 7 6 Pre defined reports 7 84 Prerequisites 1 2 Preview Generate Report 7 36 Print Menu report cards report writer 7 27 Print Schedule Scan Forms description 1 10 Printing honor roll certificates 7 7 list of Students within grade limits 7 10 mailing labels for a course 7 12 narro
440. rative Positive Attitude Exhibits Responsibility Good Pronunciation In Foreign Lang NS ojoj Bp oj IS co M esc r r2 rs fora Jj ro rc rz re 9 ro f rio 5 Double click in an empty field to create a new comment code or double click in an existing field to edit it The number represents the actual code 6 Click F10 Accept to save the codes and exit this window 1 10 Report Cards Manual Customize RC Edit Number Grade Print Table Edit Number Grade Print Table The Number Grade Print Table allows you to translate enter or import numeric grades and print letter grades on the report card The default table contains all the number grades that exist in the Grade Table with the same number next to it In other words each numeric grade is set to print as itself However you may enter an alternate grade to be printed for each number grade which would allow schools entering numeric grades into Report Cards Plus or into GradeQuick to print letter grades on report cards When printing any report with the Report Cards Report Writer you have the option to print the original numeric grades as they were entered or to print the corresponding grades found in the number grade print table See PAGE 4 Transcript amp Optional Field Specifications on page 7 24 iojxi EDIT MODE Enter Edit Number Grade Print Table At I 4 co cc Entering Department Names This option le
441. rd user defined grade is found in a weighted column other than the exam column an average will NOT be calculated for the course This is because the program does not know how to count these grades Ifa blank is found in any weighted column that column will be skipped and the remaining columns will be weighted against each other in a similar manner as described above NUMBER GRADES The Calculate Averages program does NOT use the quality point table For number grades the value used is equal to the number Averages will be calculated to six decimal places and then rounded off to the closest grade Fives will always be rounded up For example a grade of 89 50 will become a 90 while a grade of 89 49 or 89 499999 will become an 89 Note that number grades below the minimum numeric grade will be raised to the minimum grade in calculating averages For example if you set 50 as your minimum numeric grade in the Specifications window and the student s average calculates as 35 the grade will appear as 50 See MINIMUM NUMERIC GRADE on page 5 4 for more information LETTER GRADES Letter grades will first be converted to a certain number of quality points according to the following table A 4 33 B 3 33 C 2 33 D 1 33 F 0 00 4 00 B 3 00 C 2 00 D 1 00 F 0 00 A 3 67 B 2 67 C 1 67 D 0 67 F 0 00 Report Cards Manual 5 9 Chapter 5 Calculate Averages
442. rd Columns on page 1 5 If a grade of I W WP or WF appears in any of your weighted columns that grade will become the average A weighted column is one that was not given a weight of 096 For example when calculating the midyear average based on grades in the 1st and 2nd marking periods if a student has an I as the 1st marking period grade and an A as the 2nd marking period grade the I will become the midyear average As another example assume that you are calculating a midyear average based on the Ist and 2nd Calculate Averages How Are Averages Calculated marking period and Midyear Exam grades A student who has Ist and 2nd marking period grades but has an T as the exam grade will receive an I for the midyear average If any wildcard user defined grade is in a column that has been designated as an EXAM column the exam grade will not be used in calculating the average Instead the remaining columns will be weighted against each other in calculating the average This applies to any grade that is not in brackets in the grade table including N X or P or any customized grade For example assume that you have assigned 40 40 and 20 as the weights of the 1st marking period 2nd marking period and Midyear Exam grades respectively If the exam grade is a wildcard grade the two marking periods will count equally in calculating the midyear average since they both have the same weight of 40 If any wildca
443. rdinate X being the number of inches from the left margin For example T5 0 VLINE 1 04 0 will print a three inch vertical line starting one inch from the top margin beginning five inches from the left margin Report Cards Manual 7 77 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Code EMPTY Skips the next line if it is blank TSHHHH Tab for fixed length exports TAB Tabs text MOVEY Alters the vertical print position REM Ignores all the code and text in a line ENDPAGE Starts a new page 7 78 Report Cards Manual Description If the Report Writer code on the line below an EMPTY code does not contain an entry for a student the line will be skipped This code is used to skip blank lines in mailing labels Tabs over the designated number of character spaces to the right being an integer For example consider the line of code FN TS23 LN The last name will print in the 24th position If the first name is less than 23 characters trailing spaces will be added If the first name exceeds 23 characters the name will be truncated Produces a tab in the Report Writer for tab delimited exports Use this code to move all the code and text below it up or down the designated number of inches in decimals on the report For example MOVEY 0 33 will move the print position a third of an inch MOCVEY 0 25 will move the print position up
444. reat looking forms it is possible to print them on either norrow or wide plain white paper This is a sample narrow report card printed after the first marking period without comments You have ocmplete control over virtually everything that prints on the report card For example you choose whether or not to print the averages at the bottom of each column which columns to print whether or not the attendance should be printed at the bottom and whether or not students career cred its and GPA should be printed If you want stu dents rank in class may even be printed on their report card XVI 1 1 00 Brown 0 1 00 O Brian G 1 1 50 Manchestr D 0 0 50 Hughes P 1 1 00 Frank L 0 00 Crockett R n 0 50 Mclnnis K 2 1 00 Zion D HONOR ROLL STATUS HIGH HONORS 07 15 2002 HONOR ROLL 1 HIGH HONORS FOR GRADE 12 6 students FIRST MARKING PERIOD RAHK HAME ID AVERAGE CRS IHC F 1 Missy Baldwin 86 97 46 6 2 Thaddeus Nappi 56 96 55 6 3 Erin Bartlett 8 96 38 6 4 Mary Keefe 1 96 27 7 5 Russ Berube 58 95 22 7 6 Heather Southard 6 95 00 6 07 15 2002 HOHOR ROLL 1 HIGH HONORS FOR GRADE 12 6 students FIRST MARKING PERIOD RAHK HAME ID AVERAGE CRS IHC F 1 Missy Baldwin 86 97 46 6 3 Erin Bartlett 8 96 38 6 J Russ Berube 58 25 24 7 4 Mary Keefe 1 96 27 7 2 Thaddeus Nappi 56 96 55 6 6 Heather Southard 6 95 00 6 HONOR ROLL REPORT This page contains two sample honor roll reports Both are HIG
445. ribution Report 3 31 Enrollment Report By Teacher 3 32 Master Course And Section Lists 3 33 Specifications for the Master Course And Section Lists 3 33 Using the Master Course and Section Lists Print Window 3 35 Skills Grade Verification Form 3 36 Teacher Grade Search Report 3 40 Report Cards Manual 3 1 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Introduction amp Main Menu Introduction amp Main Menu This section provides a brief introduction to printing grade entry forms the remainder of this chapter explains how to obtain all of the available reports including how to Print Manual Grade Entry Forms See Manual Grade Entry Forms on page 3 4 Fill out Manual Grade Entry Forms See Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms on page 3 8 Print Scanner Grade Entry Forms See Scanner Grade Entry Forms on page 3 13 Fill out Scanner Grade Entry Forms See Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms on page 3 19 Print Grade Verification Forms See Grade Verification Forms on page 3 23 Print course Section Rosters See Section Rosters on page 3 24 Print Grade Distribution Reports See Grade Distribution Report on page 3 27 Print Enrollment Reports See Enrollment Report By Teacher on page 3 32 The Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More Window 3 2 Report Cards Manual When you click Entry Forms the Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More window appears
446. riter Report Card Codes Code Height Title ColumnHeader R ow Print Border Y or N TitleBorder Y or N TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center ColumnContents QRT RCSpecRange YTD TitleAndFont lt TitleText gt ColumnHeadersAndFont lt Column Header Text gt RowContentsAndFont A T D P DOS MEM RowHeadersAndFont lt text gt lt text gt AttendanceBoxEnd PrintAttendanceBox LeftzX Top Y 7 54 Report Cards Manual Description Enter a number in inches Determines the height of Title Column Header and Attendance rows Specifies whether or not the attendance box border prints Specifies whether or not a border will print around the title of the box e g Attendance or Attendance Record Determines the alignment left to right of the attendance header Determines what data will print in each column QRT designates quarters RCSpecRange prints the interval total set in specifications YTD prints Year to Date total Attendance box title is printed with the font of this keyword Enter title here and select font Determines the headings of the attendance box columns and their font and size Quarter date ranges QRT are set in the Calendar program DateRCSpecRange will cause the date range set in Specifications to print DateYTD will cause the Year to Date set in Specifications to print Determines the data that prints in each row as well as th
447. rking Period list select the period whose skills grades you want to view For example selecting midyear exam and final grade will display the corresponding skills list for these marking periods The Print Which Skills list lets you select the individual skills that are associated with the selected marking period 5 From the Print Which Skills list select the skills you want to view These individual skills are define in the Customize RC program Appendix D has all skills and standards information in one location To learn how create skills start withe the section entitled Initial Setup on page D 2 6 Click Done The print menu appears See The Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More Window on page 3 2 for more information on the print menu Report Cards Manual 3 39 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Teacher Grade Search Report Teacher Grade Search Report This option allows you to search for an exact grade or grade range by teacher This report is similar to the student grade searches except that the report is sorted by teacher and course Use this report to search for teachers who have awarded specific grades during one or more marking periods You can print the actual grade to the right of each student s name To Search for an Exact Grade or Grade Range by Teacher 1 Inthe Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More window select Teacher Grade Search Report and then click Next Page one of the Teacher Grade Search Report window ap
448. rman 19 21 50 6 107 F 15 Jaime Hall 23 91 50 6 107 F 13 Amy Hodenberg 22 92 60 4 107 F 6 Mary Keefe 95 94 08 6 108 F 7 Julie Leasure 71 93 55 5 108 F 12 Allen Lowell 32 92 64 4 108 M 11 Kathy Mains 34 92 67 6 108 F 21 Khristine Milose 17 91 00 6 110 F 1 Thaddeus Nappi 56 96 22 5 110 F 26 Ashton Noble 39 90 00 4 110 F 22 Jackson Palmer 80 90 31 4 110 M 4 Sharon Poulin 65 94 45 5 110 F You can escape from this window or press F9 PRINT to print the list to paper How the list is printed is defined by the PRINT SPECIFICATIONS as described under Inspect Change Honor Roll Print Specifications on page 8 10 Note that the list is written to the disk whether or not it is printed The report card report writer uses these lists to print on the bottom of report cards which honor rolls students were on It also uses them to print honor roll certificates 8 14 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports Defining Honor Roll Reports Defining Honor Roll Reports After selecting the honor roll you are going to generate the specification window for that honor roll will appear The window will be the same as the last time you defined that honor roll You can accept these specifications or change them as desired X4 Print Honor Roll 1 x COMMENT CODE LOWER LIMIT 0 for no limit 7 COMMENT CODE UPPER LIMIT 999 for no limit 9 4 8 OMIT IF 1 MAJOR GRADE LESS THAN st po 9 OMIT IF 2 MAJOR GRADES LESS THAN A OMIT
449. rmation will later be read by the scanner so that the program will know which form is being scanned If you are using a dot matrix continuous feed printer after selecting the sections for which you want forms printed you must make sure that the scanner forms are aligned properly in the printer You should keep selecting Option 5 until the spacing is correct After choosing Option 5 the computer will fill in the bubbles in the PAGE NO box one line at a time After each line the printer will pause allowing you to align the forms so that the marks fall entirely inside the bubbles in the PAGE NO box You may then press G to print the next line After the form seems to be aligned do the spacing test one more time for the entire PAGE NO box NOTE f the scanner cannot correctly read the marks in the bubbles the forms will not be properly scanned Consequently if you are using a dot matrix continuous feed printer it is highly recommended that you make sure entries on the scan form are dark enough before scanning If you are using a laser printer you will need to keep printing sample forms until the bubbles on the form are aligned properly NEW REPORT This option allows you to return to the previous window to begin the process of creating a new report Filling Out Scanner Grade Entry Forms If you are using a scanner to enter grades into the computer this section will explain how to fill out the Scanner
450. rms on which you can bubble in students course and section numbers for use with an NCS scanner Program B SCAN SCHEDULES If you have a scanner and have not used SCHEDULING PLUS to enter students names into their course sections this program may be used to scan students schedules into the computer Program C TRANSFER CREDITS amp GPA This program allows you to transfer students archival data as well as career GPAs and credits to the new school year so that you can print transcripts containing courses and grades from each year the student attended the school Customize RC Introduction amp Main Menu 1 2 Edit Grade Table 1 2 The Default Grade Table 1 3 GPA Factor Liu m bm ne eas 8 1 4 Customize Report Card Columns 1 5 Editing Report Card Comments 1 9 Changing Generic Comment Codes 1 10 Edit Number Grade Print Table 1 11 Entering Department Names 1 11 Skills and Concepts 1 13 Course SEHINGS xc mes hi ERG 1 13 Maintain Grade Change Log 1 14 Report Cards Manual 1 1 Chapter Customize RC Introduction amp Main Menu Introduction amp Main Menu The Customize RC program allows you to customize most of the universal settings in Report Cards Plus You will use this program to set the value of each grade a student can receive for a course select how you wish to apply the GPA factor define your report card columns an
451. rs the program prompts you to enter the starting teacher s name and then prompts you for the ending teacher s name You can select the teachers by ID number or name from the lookup list Forms then print alphabetically by teacher If you choose to print forms for individual teachers or sections you can either type in each ID or section number or use the F6 LOOKUP option to select the teacher s or section s To select multiple teachers or sections hold down the Control CTRL key and click on each ID number or section number in the Lookup window Then click Select or press Enter Press F10 ACCEPT to complete the process Report Cards Manual 3 7 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Filling Out Manual Grade Entry Forms Option Description 5 Blank Form To make the task of entering students into courses sections easier you can distribute a blank manual grade entry form to teachers who would use it to hand enter the names of students in their sections They ll also have to fill in the course section information at the top of the form The completed form can then be used as a reference when manually entering students into the appropriate sections in Enter Grades Manually See Entering Grades Manually on page 4 3 Note that Fit To Page is the recommended line spacing setting for the blank Manual Grade Entry Form NOTE f you print a standard Manual Grade Entry Form for a course section that has no students entered you will get a blank form With th
452. rs may be printed 00cT Jo xoq Jod pp 1 uo oae pojuud oud oureu s ooqos e moya suo o z S INSSI owes ou eS1euo Sunuud oy 107 19p10 sod c6 snyd QOZI 0 S Sal SYONOH H51 JO xoq sod g ATUO ose pojurud oud oureu s Jooos e YIM 0 L S32N SALVIS T108 YONO suuog ped oon oui Z Surpnqour oum sty jo sy sox p 59 OL 6661 10 60 odd Sur oo ooru o1e e Sursn soumeu 119g jurid IM 193nd W02 IY ASIMIDYIQ es1eqo euonrppe eurs e Aquo 10 do s 06 oyj uo pojurid o1d soSo pue soweu soy Suravy jo uondo Cocoon 3 og IALY STOOYIS SWOJ Jed oou sso uoq e9 Oe SIO ou ae rea wees e eop INOA 10 AUVMLAOS ATAIATA Woy ouo 1sonboi oseo d joppooq siu YIM pepngour u q jou sey woz pred podar peurguo ue j 9yo goeo woy mo puegs suon 99S JUIIIJIP SY oxeui yey SSuIpeys punor3yoeq njq og oos ued NOA osneooq swoz IY oj oonsnf op jou s op doo SUL SATd SQ3VO LAOdTA q poesn soy se ooru se ro me os SIM Dawuan sw wens YOO JY SUL Sosn oSeoed o1e 3jos spied odar 19g10 ON Y Y a v Oy furo ON Vu v y Duy wa UA 3 15 o tid MID P000 ULIO4 pied wodoy pojurid ouq s w tu wo Od ONIO sm oL Aqued t 16 i6 40j rmm v Mus UC DOO Sumuulmy diea o0 8 is s 96 ve dug usog s omy qnod s guedoo GAPAN 01 ce re we on oo LJ 000 V5 01 Beppo mOMVOMpoD Ow o 1 v os t te a c5 dy uS Dopormuno OHO 1v 390 meun Ot 5 6 e 9 i6 w 8 tA V dv Nani 180443 H34OY31 Siyo ANSSY YN xmas or pat MOON xan p
453. rse number 4 Click Done A confirmation window appears Administrator s Plus New maximum size of course list 9999 Is this correct 5 Click yes to confirm your course number and return to the Customize Report Cards Plus window Maintain Grade Change Log The grade change log tracks student grade changes made through View Change Add Drop Enter Grades Calculate Averages GradeQuick Imports and even student schedule changes that affect grades Y You can export the log to Excel then quickly sort and or filter the log to show only the information you need You can also print the log for a specific date range a specific Administrator s Plus user or all users Included in the grade change log are the student name the year current or archival course section number teacher grading column previous grade new grade date time and name of the user making the grade change The log is automatically enabled as soon as you install version 4 Only the Supervisor can view print and delete the grade change log by choosing Setup Grade Change Log from the Administrator s Plus toolbar To Enable the Grade Change Log 1 Inthe Customize Heport Cards Plus window select Maintain Grade Change Log and then click Next 1 14 Report Cards Manual Customize RC Maintain Grade Change Log The Maintain Grade Change Log Specifications window appears Specifications Maintain Grade Change Log SPECIFICATIONS MAINTAIN GRADE CHANGE L
454. rse number if the number of credits or the name of a course changes However if you must re organize your master course list this chapter will explain an option that allows you to change the course numbers in students archival files In the above example assume that you have made a new number for the old English course that was COURSE 123 Assume that COURSE 923 is now English You can use this option to change all of the 123 s in students archival files to 923 s Transcripts will then correctly show that they took English instead of Math which you made into the new COURSE 123 When using this option you will be able to specify for which grade levels and for which archival years this change should take place In the printing of transcripts if a course number is in a student s archival file and NOT in the master course list the computer will not know the name of the course how many credits it is worth and how it should be weighted Consequently it will print the course number as the course name and it will not award any credits for the course nor will it count the course towards any GPA s If you see any courses like this on a transcript you should add the course to the master course list and re print the transcript Archive HOW TO CHANGE THE NUMBERS OF ARCHIVED COURSES HOW TO CHANGE THE NUMBERS OF ARCHIVED COURSES The first window that you will see when you choose ARCHIVE form the Report Cards Plus master window
455. rse s department will initially default to the first digit in the course number For example course 099 will have a default department code of 0 while course 722 will have a default code of 7 When you print transcripts you will be able to indicate the number of credits earned in the courses for each department code For example a school might enter a code of 1 for all of their Math courses and a code of 2 for all of their English courses If you print a transcript by department it will group the courses according to department code At the bottom of the transcript by year you can also show the total math credits the total English credits and so on Report Cards Manual 2 5 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window Field Name Optimum Section Size Course Length lt Q S A gt 2 6 Report Cards Manual Description After setting up your Master Course List you will divide each course into sections according to meeting time and teacher If you use SCHEDULING PLUS the Perform Scheduling program will attempt to limit each section s enrollment to no more than the entered optimum size NOTE There is a limit of 250 students per section However if you need to have more than 250 students in a particular section you may divide the section into two separate sections For both of these sections enter the exact same data For example 221 01 and 221 02 could both
456. rt card record will now contain these figures CAREER CREDITS 12 50 LAST CREDITS UPDATE 4 00 CAREER ADJUSTED QP 1100 00 LAST ADJUSTED QP UPDATE 400 00 CAREER WEIGHT 15 00 LAST WEIGHT UPDATE 5 00 CAREER SIMPLE QP 1070 00 LAST SIMPLE QP UPDATE 390 00 Report Cards Manual 8 25 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated If the LAST updated figures are not all zeroes before an update is done for the second time in the same year an UN UPDATE automatically takes place Un updating may also be done manually at any time although it s usually not necessary Un updating will reverse everything to the way it was before the update CAREER CREDITS 8 50 LAST CREDITS UPDATE 0 00 CAREER ADJUSTED QP 700 00 LAST ADJUSTED QP UPDATE 0 00 CAREER WEIGHT 10 00 LAST WEIGHT UPDATE 0 00 CAREER SIMPLE QP 680 00 LAST SIMPLE QP UPDATE 0 00 NOTE Un updating involves subtracting the Last Credits Update of 4 00 from the Career Credits of 12 50 to get the old credits of 8 50 The Old Credits of 8 50 are then stored in the CAREER Credits column and the Last Credits Update column is set to zero Similar calculations un update the quality points and weight Once everything has been un updated this student s GPA and Credits may be updated again This is why the last update data is stored It enables a temporary updating to take place based on the grades in any marking
457. s Entry forms can be printed for only sections that meet during a particular marking period n some circumstances in calculating GPAs the program will use half credit and weight for full year courses but ALL YEAR and weight for QUARTER and SEMESTER courses Scheduling Plus uses this information when scheduling students into courses sections and printing schedules This is the section number Report Cards Manual 2 17 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Inspect Change Specifications Field Name Description SG This is the section s start grade EG This is the section s end grade SIZE This is the number of students in the section REC This is the section s record number Print Reports The F9 PRINT option allows you to print your Master Course List or Section List in a variety of formats Choose from the following options F l Administrator s Plus PRINT WHICH REPORT 1 Master course list by course number 2 master course list by course Name 3 Section list by course section number 4 section list by staFf 5 section list by Time 6 section list by Course name 7 section list by Room 8 course list with sKills 9 Do not print a report Zp Regardless of which option you choose the report will print to the window as long as you have specification 4 on page 2 of the Specifications window set to Yes See page 5 PRINT PREVIEWER on page 2 23 e C C C C C C C C From the Pre
458. s Assuming that you have chosen to Add you will use a GPA factor of 0 for most courses However if you enter a 1 all of the values will be increased by 1 In other words if an A is usually worth 4 quality points it will now be worth 5 quality points NOTE The GPA factor will not be added to 0 quality points In other words an F will never be awarded more than zero quality points You can also enter a negative number as your GPA factor A GPA factor of 1 will make a 100 worth 99 points and a B typically worth 3 quality points only worth 2 points However in no case will the total quality points be allowed to be less than 0 A student who gets an F or 0 in a course with a GPA factor of 1 will still have 0 quality points for that course Whether you use letter or number grades the GPA factor will be used in the same way Some schools want the number of quality points to be multiplied by the GPA factor In this case use the Customize RC program to specify that you want the GPA factor to multiply the quality points If you choose to multiply you should enter a 1 as the GPA factor for standard courses This will leave the quality points for those courses unchanged For accelerated courses use a GPA factor such as 1 1 or 1 2 For lower level courses use a GPA factor less than 1 such as 0 9 Report Cards Manual 2 9 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window Fie
459. s description 1 8 Enter Grades Enter Students Grades description 1 8 Enter Grades Enter Students Schedules description 1 8 Enter Skills Grades Manually p e Entering grades 4 6 grades manually 4 3 weight for each column 5 5 Entering and Editing Grades in the Minus Years 6 7 Entering Grades Or Skills Manually 4 10 Entering Skills Grades 4 10 Entering Skills Grades in GradeQuick p 17 Index 2 Entry Forms manual grade 3 4 scanner 3 13 Example end of year updating 8 55 Examples final average calculations 5 12 midyear average calculations 5 11 Exporting the honor roll to ASCII 7 7 F File Menu in View Edit Letters Reports 7 33 to 7 34 Final Average Calculations examples 5 12 Fixed Length Fields 7 37 Fonts Color 7 39 in the Report Writer 7 38 to 7 40 Size 7 39 Forms grade verification 3 23 Function Keys in View Edit Letters Reports 7 38 G Generating a Form Letter 7 8 Generic Comments Codes changing 1 10 GPAs amp Credits 8 37 calculating 8 41 general updating rules 8 41 updating amp resetting 8 37 Grade scanning 4 16 Grade Change Log enable disable 1 14 Grade Distribution Report 3 27 Grade Point Averages 8 3 Grade Verification Forms 3 23 GradeQuick entering skills grades D 17 interfacing with Admin Plus p 10 preparing Admin Plus to use with GQ D 10 preparing GradeQuick to use with Admin Plus p 12 GradeQuickSending skills to GQ p 12 G
460. s associated with Art courses are given the skills codes ARI AR2 AR3 etc they can be grouped together in the skills lookup menus Group headings Report Cards Manual D 3 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Initial Setup D 4 Report Cards Manual create headings for each category of skills on the printed report card They can also be used to sort the skills list in lookup windows The skills description is the text that actually prints on the report card see below ART 1st 2nd Teacher Naone C 98 100 EFFORT wq Behawesin Class 3 3 Follows Directions 2 3 PERSONAL DEVELO PMENT Demonstrates Self Control 1 2 Works Well with Peers 3 3 Listens Attentively 2 2 Art 1st Control over drawing figures 2nd Teach cortrol to stay within the lines Comm erts Consciertious student Puts forth effort Entering Customized Lists of Skills and Concepts To Enter Customized Lists of Skills and Concepts To enter a new skill press or click F2 ADD The next unused record number appears Enter a code group heading optional and description up to 256 characters Press or click F10 Accept to save View Edit Or Print Skills Skills Concepts RECORD 1 CODE Por GROUP HEADING PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT DESCRIPTION Exhibits Self Confidence z ENTER RECORD CODE OR DESCRIPTION PO M _Esc EA Eee d ne ros qc r95s1 ABORT ADD EDIT PREV NEXT LOOKUP DEL PRINT Skills
461. s in this column for an ALL YEAR course will count as 50 percent or 25 percent of their total GPA respectively The 50 percent entry will cause half of a course s entered weight to be used in calculating the grade point average NOTE Note that 50 00 here means 50 percent of the TOTAL weight entered for that course in Enter Courses gt View Edit Courses amp Sections If a course is worth 1 credit and you set this specification to 50 00 the student will receive 5 credits for the course after the update For a midyear update schools will always enter a 100 percent for their semester and quarter courses This is because for these courses the midyear grade represents the final grade and should be given whole weight However for a temporary update based on a third quarter average you should weight semester one courses 100 percent but semester two courses only 50 percent because they are only half finished Quarter courses would still be weighted 100 percent because any quarter course with a grade has been completed See How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated on page 41 for additional information on how the program uses weights when performing an update This specification is always set to No unless you are performing a TEMPORARY update based on third quarter grades The procedures for performing both a permanent and a temporary third quarter update are explained in the next section After verifying that the
462. s printed at the top of the corresponding sections of the GPA box with the font and size of the keyword Content of the GPA box will print with the font and size of this keyword Denotes the end of the GPA box specifications Determines the position on the page in which the GPA Box prints The X and Y represent coordinates from the left margin and the top of the page Description HonorRollBoxStart Denotes the start of the honor roll box specifications BoxHeight inches BoxWidth inches Height of the honor roll box Width of the honor roll box Report Cards Manual 7 55 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Code BorderWidth 0 3 TopGap inches MiddleGap inches PrintBorder Y or N TitleBorder Y or N TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center TitleAndFont text BodyFont HonorRollBoxEnd PrintHonorRollBox Left X Top Y Description Controls width of border around GPA box 0 thin border 3 thick border Space in inches between honor roll header and top of box Space between honor roll status and honor roll header Specifies whether or not a box prints around the HR table Specifies whether to draw a border for the HR title Determines the alignment left to right of the HR header Title of the honor roll box will print with the font and size of this keyword Contents of the honor roll box will print with
463. s set in Report Cards Report Writer Specifications not to print See Specifications on page 7 13 the column will NOT be padded In other words for permanent labels if this is on NOT printing columns will allow your data to be printed on narrower labels You usually do not want this code when printing report cards because you want extra space left for unprinted columns Report Cards Manual 7 59 Ch ap ter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Standard Codes for Reports in Report Card Report Writer Code SECTION MAJOR MINOR TMARG X X TABLE1 TABLE3XY TABLE5 7 60 Report Cards Manual Description Use as the first line in a report if printing one report card per student per course sorted by teacher If the student does not have the current section in their transcript the student will be skipped To convert a report designed to print one report card per student per course sorted by STUDENT to one sorted by TEACHER remove the CRSSTART and CRSEND codes and make the section code the first line of the report Then print the report using the section option from the main window When this code is placed on the line directly after the CRSSTART code it causes the course loop to print ONLY Major courses Major and Minor courses are defined using the Priority setting in the Enter Courses program See Priority on page 2 7 When this code is placed on the line directly after the CRSSTART code it causes
464. s that have a Y in the credit column in the Grade Table are awarded credits By default letter grades of D or above and number grades of 65 or above are awarded credit A grade of P is also awarded credits by default but the grades X N WP WE F F F W and I are not awarded credits However the Customize RC Edit Grade Table program can be used to change a grade to credit or non credit See Edit Grade Table on page 1 2 Report Cards Manual 8 41 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated In a complete update in a school with only one credit column a student will be awarded full credit for each course in which he has a passing grade In a complete update if there is more than one credit column the following will take place for each passing grade All Year Courses The total credit entered in View Edit Courses amp Sections will be divided by the number of credit columns For example if there are two credit columns and an ALL YEAR course is worth one credit a passing grade in a credit column will be worth 50 credits If you are updating based on the Semester 1 column the student will receive 50 credit for the course When all grades are in at the end of the year passing grades in both credit columns will amount to full credit See View Edit Courses amp Sections on page 2 3 Semester amp Quarter Courses These courses will be awarded full credit for a passing grade in any credit col
465. s to en bubbled in Scan Form data to go into hich Report Card columns you want the First click on one of the Scan Form boues uwere a noe or ee port Card columns will be displayed Click on the Check Box next to the Report Card column that you want the data associated with this Scan Form box sent to Report Card Columns 1 3 4 5 5 y 8 8 10 11 12 13 1st 1 EX S1GRD 3rd 4th S2bX JOB S2GRD ABS COM1 COM2 Click the list box or its caption to cause the list box to drop down You will then be able to click on the appropriate marking period column When you click on the marking period box a check will appear in that box and the button at the bottom containing the corresponding report card column will be highlighted Click FINISHED to begin scanning grades For more in depth information on the scanning process refer to the manual that comes with the Scanning Interface software or the Scheduling Plus manual Troubleshooting Problems with Scanning Grades Although the process of scanning grades is usually worry free occasional problems do occur Below is an explanation of messages errors that may appear on your computer while attempting to scan grades and how best to resolve the problem While we hope this information will be helpful this is by no means intended to be a comprehensive guide to resolving problems with scanning grades For an explanation of common errors that appear on the scanner see your NCS User Guide If at
466. s update the new values listed on last line are equal to the added values on the line above it Course 2 2 COURSE 05 01 Essay i Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 00 GPA Factor 0 00 QUARTER 1 COURSE OUR CreditfAverage Override Column BLANK Full Credit Pull Average MIDYEAR GRADE BLANK HOT USED FOR THE AVERAGE OR CREDITS amp grade of BLANK is never used Because the midyear grade is a blank this course is skipped Course 3 3 COURSE 070 01 Mod Am Hum Possible Credits 0 00 Possible Weight 0 50 GPA Factor 0 00 SEMESTER 1 COURSE OR CreditfAverage Override Colwnn BLANK Full Credit Full Average MIDYEAR GRADE 95 CREDITS AWARDED Sem l course Possible credits Sem l course X weight 100 0 0000 SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS from the Quality Point table 835 0000 ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS ADD the GPA FACTOR to the quality point 35 0000 WEIGHT Sem l course Possible weight Sem l course X weight 100 z 0 5000 COURSE SIMPLE QUALITY POINTS weight simple quality points 47 5000 COURSE ADJUSTED QUALITY POINTS weight adjusted quality points 47 5000 RUNNING TOTAL FOR THIS UPDATING PREVIOUS CREDITS 0 0000 ADI QP 22 5000 SIMPLE QP 22 5000 WEIGHT 0 2500 PREY SGPA 90 0000 THIS GRADE 90 0000 47 5000 47 5000 0 5000 NE SGPS 93 3333 NEW d 0 0000 70 0000 70 0000 0 7500 PREY AGPS 30 0000 NE ACPA 93 3333 Report Cards Manual 8 51 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports
467. s with averages of 93 00 and above A second honors list might have specification 4 and 5 as follows e Specification 4 AVERAGE LOWER LIMIT 86 00 Specification 5 AVERAGE UPPER LIMIT 999 The resulting honor roll list will include students with averages equal to and above 86 00 and not on the high honors list The same upper limit is used as for honor roll 1 Specification 3 ensures that students already on honor roll 1 will not also be on honor roll 2 NOTE It is generally advisable to keep the average upper limit set to 999 This specification and specification 7 will allow you to omit students with comment codes outside of your specified range A blank comment code will not cause a student to be omitted Any student with a comment code less than what you enter for this setting will be omitted from your honor roll Enter a 0 to not omit anyone Any student with a comment code greater than what you enter for this setting will be omitted from your honor roll Enter a 999 to not omit anyone For example assume that your school uses the comment codes for conduct and effort with 1 being the best and 6 being the worst If you do not want anybody on the honor roll with a conduct or effort code greater than a 2 enter 2 as your upper limit NOTE Al courses will be checked for comment codes within your range even if there is no grade in your specified column or if the grade is not used for the average such as with a W WP P or
468. schedule students into courses with higher priority codes over courses with lower priority codes A priority code of 0 is considered the highest priority and is the default for all courses A priority code of 5 is the lowest priority Normally core courses such as English and Math would be considered highest priority while elective courses would have lowest priority Report Cards Plus can use the priority code to help determine which students are included in honor rolls The honor roll specifications will allow you to exclude students from honor rolls based on grades received in Major and Minor courses For example you could set up your highest honor roll to exclude students receiving a B or below in a Major course and a B or below in a Minor course See Defining Honor Roll Reports on page 8 15 Credit values may be entered using up to 5 digits including the decimal point For example 1 75 3 50 and 10 50 are valid entries but 10 675 is not It has six digits including the decimal You may enter 0 or 0 0 for no credit Students will be awarded credits for passing grades found in any columns on their report card defined as credit columns If there is only one credit column students will be awarded full credit for each passing grade However if there is more than one credit column they will be awarded partial credit for all year courses and full credit for semester or quarter courses For example assume that you are a seme
469. shared directory designated to store skill files Setting up Skills When teachers open a new or existing grade book for a course with linked skills They a appears message stating that the new skill fields have imported To view the skills linked to the master course in Administrator s Plus click the Edit Skills button on the GradeQuick toolbar Edit Skills Information ES A 9 ae n i M Ep 2 UH Gradebook Assessment Skills Skills Lesson SupportLink Spreadsheet Standards Scales Assessment Reports Planner Import Online Help Tutorial Skills for Standard View Skills for All Standards Skill Name Standard Assessment Scale Date Instruction Time Spent View Description and Completed Notes 1 Works Well in Cooperative Groups General Scale 2 view E 2 Works Well Independently General Scale 3 view E 3 Works Well with Peers General Scale 4 view E 4 Works Well with Adults General Scale 5 view E 5 Works Independently General Scale 6 View E Report Cards Manual D 13 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick Linking Skills to Standards Use the following procedure to both create new standards and link skills to standards Skills can be categorized by associating them with a Standard By default all skills are associated with the General standard If you do not want to associate skills with a standard leave it linked to the General standard
470. signated as a Report Cards Manual 8 5 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Honor Rolls 8 6 Report Cards Manual PERIOD or SEMESTER column For all other columns regardless of this setting weights will be used but will not be pro rated The following describes how pro rating works If your honor roll is based on a PERIOD column grade pro rating your weight will do the following The weight for full year courses will be divided by the number of marking periods In other words if you have four marking periods the weight of a full year course will be divided by four The weight for semester courses will be divided by half of the number of marking periods In other words if you have four marking periods the weight of a semester course will be divided by two assuming that there are two marking periods per semester If you have six marking periods the weight of a semester course will be divided by three assuming that there are three marking periods per semester If these assumptions are not correct pro rating will not work for you The weight for quarter courses will not be affected If your honor roll is for a SEMESTER column pro rating your weight will do the following The weight for full year courses will be divided by the number of semesters with two for a minimum For example if you have two semesters the weight of a full year course will be divided by two If you have only one column designated as a SEMESTER column b
471. specification displays the following Search list Administrator s Plus ALL SELECTED STUDENTS GRADE SEARCH 1 per course GRADE SEARCH 1 per student RANGE SEARCH 1 per course RANGE SEARCH 1 per student ROLL 1 SEARCH HONOR ROLL 2 SEARCH HONOR ROLL 3 SEARCH HONOR ROLL 4 SEARCH HONOR ROLL 5 SEARCH ON ANY HONOR ROLL SEARCH NOT ON HONOR ROLL SEARCH As part of your primary filter you may choose to print reports for only those students meeting specified search and sort criteria such as only those students in a certain homeroom This specification which is a secondary filter will further narrow down those students that passed your primary filter For printing most reports such as report cards transcripts and permanent labels use the ALL SELECTED STUDENTS option 7 14 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer Specifications The following table describes each option and how it is used PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR ALL SELECTED STUDENTS EXACT GRADE SEARCH 1 per course EXACT GRADE SEARCH 1 per student GRADE RANGE SEARCH 1 per course GRADE RANGE SEARCH 1 per student DESCRIPTION The report or letter will be printed for every student that passed the primary filter If you choose this option when printing An Exact Search List you will see listed on the report every course in which the student received the selected grade If you print a Search Letter using this option you will receive one letter
472. ss the corresponding function key on your keyboard F2 FONT opens the font drop down window from which you may choose any font in your Windows Fonts folder When changing the font the selected lines of text will change to the new font v2 v E Black GulimChe Abadi MT Condensed ADP Agency FB Algerian ld Names ALT Z to select Arial Black Arial CE v 7 38 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports F3 FONT SIZE opens the font size drop down window from which you may change the size of the highlighted text When changing the font size the selected lines of text will change to the new font size Arial Z mm Black a FONT SIZE Pressing F4 FONT COLOR activates the font color drop down window From this window you may change the color of the fonts in your report if you use a color printer When the font color is changed the entire line of text will change to the new font color ae el Naw FONT COLOR Purple F5 RENAME allows you to rename a report from within the View Edit Letters Reports window The report name is displayed next to the report s corresponding number at the Report Writer s Viewing and Editing Report Cards Reports Letters window To change a report s name open the body of the report and press FS RENAME The window pictured below will appear Type a report name and press Enter The report name may Report Cards Manual 7 39 View Edit L
473. ster school and that your first semester grade and second semester grade are the two grades that bear credit For example assume that Math is an all year course worth 5 credits and Journalism is a semester 1 half year course worth 2 5 credits Passing grades for each of these courses in the first semester column will be awarded 2 5 credits Report Cards Manual 2 7 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window Field Name Weight GPA Factor 2 8 Report Cards Manual Description Most schools will enter a weight value that is equal to the number of credits for a course For these schools weight is really credits attempted However weights are used by Administrator s Plus as comparative values They tell the program how a grade in one course should compare to a grade in another course in GPA and honor roll calculations For example the course Driver s Ed may meet every other day for the entire year while Algebra meets each day for the entire year The weight for Driver s Ed would usually be 1 2 of the weight for Algebra Because the weight is a comparative value weighing one course 150 and another 75 yields the same result as using weights of 1 00 and 0 50 Any value may be entered for a course s weight However as with credits you are limited to five characters including a decimal point If you do not want a course to count in calculating GPAs do not enter a weigh
474. strator s Plus in the current year use the following outline to guide you through your end of the year tasks For the following examples assume that you are using the 2002 03 directory for the current year and you are scheduling for next year in the 2003 04 directory Create the new school year directory Change into the new school year directory and promote students using the Beginning program You can now create schedules in the new year Remember to change back to the current directory to continue working in that year See the Data Base Plus manual for more information At the end of the 2002 03 school year update students final career credits and GPAs in that directory Run the Transfer Credits and GPA program to transfer students updated career credits and GPAs as well as their archival files from the 2002 03 directory to the 2003 04 directory For further details on the archival feature refer to Chapter C Transfer Credits and GPA NOTE At the end of the 2002 03 school year you will print students final report cards from that directory Also use the 2002 03 directory to print honor roll reports transcripts grade distribution reports etc The Report Card Plus Programs 6 Report Cards Manual Report Cards Plus allows you to record students courses for the current year along with the grades earned in each course The program will store up to 80 courses per student each year Also stored in students report card re
475. student information from the database These fields are printed on the report by adding three additional columns Report Cards Manual 3 25 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Section Rosters Administrator s Plus x COURSE SECTION ROSTERS PRINT WHICH SECTIONS 2 1 All sections 2 Range of teachers 3 individual Teachers 4 Individual sections 5 New report 6 Change specifications for this report 7 End program D amp e e e e e e Specification Description Specifications These options allow you to print Section Rosters for individual teachers 1 through 4 or sections or for a range of teachers and all sections When you select a range of teachers the computer prompts you to enter the starting teacher s name and then it prompts you for the ending teacher s name Individual teachers or sections require you to manually enter each teacher or section into a list prior to printing The Range of Teachers option also enables you to avoid printing forms for sections that do not have grades associated with them such as lunch You could for example simply enter as the teacher of lunch a fake teacher who has ID 1 and enter the name of the teacher who has ID 2 as your STARTING STAFF MEMBER This fake teacher could also be at the end of your file of teachers You would then enter the name of the teacher who has the ID number before the fake teacher as your ENDING STAFF MEMBER NEW REPORT This option al
476. t 5 Change specifications for this report 6 End program D D You can print the Teacher Enrollment Report for all teachers a range of teachers or individual teachers See 3 7 for more information on the print window 3 32 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Master Course And Section Lists Master Course And Section Lists The option lets you print your Master Course List or Section List in a variety of formats Selecting this option first display the specifications window You can then select the list format to generate a print preview of your report Specifications for the Master Course And Section Lists Choosing the Master Course List and Section List option from the Print Entry Forms Rosters amp More window displays the Specifications Master Course and Section List window T Specifications Master Course and Section Lists n s PES oo 4 USE TEXTS COST amp FEES Yes e No 5 PRINT DESCRIPTION ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT e Yes C No 6 PRINT GPA SETTINGS ON MASTER COURSE PRINTOUT SHORES No 7 FONT SIZE Small 8 PRINT ACTIVE INACTIVE COURSES Active courses only E Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE These specifications are described in the following table Specification Description 1 PRINT This specification allows you limit your Section List printout to only SECTIONS those sections meeting during a designated quarter or semester MEETING To print all sections make sure that th
477. t concept and narrative components GeneralSpecStart REM INSERT REM BEFORE AutoCalcAll TO ENABLE INDIVIDUAL SPECS AutoCalcAll NumBox lt Across ft MaxBoxDown Auto or CellGapDown CellGapA cross TableGapDown TableGapAcross BoxWidth Auto or Default 2 Default A uto Default 0 Default 0 Default 0 1 Default 0 2 Default Auto GeneralSpecEnd Determines the parameters of the course section of the advanced box CourseCellStart 1 Print Y or N PrintDescription N or Y CharPerColumn 3 or 5 IncludeSkills Y or N PrintWhichColumns 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CellHeight Auto or TitleHeight Description Width MinGradingColumn Width LeftBorder Width RightBorder Width TopBorder Width BottomBorderWidth TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center SkillHeaderAlignment Left Right Center PrintBorder Y or N TitleBorder N or Y BlankLineBeforeHeader N or Y TitleAndFont Text String PrintCourseNameAndFont Y or N PrintTeacherAndFont Y or N PrintSkillHeaderAndFont Y or N PrintSkillsAndFont Y or N PrintColumnHeaderAndFont Y or N CourseCellEnd CourseCellEnd CommentCellStart Print Y or N CellHeight Auto or LeftBorderWidth RightBorder Width TopBorderwidth BottomBorderWidth TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right Center D 28 Report Cards Manual Default Y Default N Default 3 Default
478. t Y or N PrintColumnHeaderAndFont Y or N CourseCellEnd CommentCellStart Print Y or N CellHeight inches or Auto BorderWidth 0 3 Left Right Top Bottom 7 50 Report Cards Manual Description Determines the alignment left to right of the Skill header text Specifies whether or not course cell border prints Designates whether or not a border will print around the course title Specifies whether or not a blank line will print before the course header text Course titles are printed with the font of this keyword Determines whether or not course name will print If set to Y course names will print with the font of this keyword Determines whether or not teacher name will print If set to Y teacher names will print with the font of this keyword Specifies whether or not the skill headers will print If Y skills will print with the font of this keyword Determines whether or not skills will print If set to Y skills will print with the font of this keyword Specifies whether or not column headers will print If set to Y column headers will print with the font of this keyword End of the codes that define what prints in the course section of the advanced box Start of the codes that define what prints in the Comment cell determines the Comment cell s print position after below the initial Course cell Determines whether or not the Comment cell
479. t Letters Reports 7 33 to 7 35 C Calculate Averages description 1 8 reading the Log 5 15 specifications 5 3 Calculating Averages for which columns 5 7 Calculating Credits general rules 8 41 Changing generic or default comment codes 1 10 Index 1 Class Rank Reports defining 8 68 obtaining 8 65 Column Limits for Numeric Grades setting 3 30 Comment Codes Changing 1 10 Comment Distribution Report 3 31 Course withdrawing student from 6 5 Course Settings setting amount 1 13 Courses adding students 4 8 removing students 4 9 Creating new Skill Standards p 14 Customize RC description 1 7 D Data Entry Forms description 1 7 Data Entry Forms Print Grade Distribution Reports description 1 8 Data Entry Forms Print Grade Entry Forms description 1 7 Data Entry Forms Print Grade Verification Forms description 1 7 Default Comments Codes changing 1 10 Deleting Reports 7 34 E Edit Menu in View Edit Letters Reports 7 34 Editing Daily Attendance Information in the Minus Years 6 8 grades 4 6 Master Course Fields 2 4 OVR column 6 5 Teacher TCH Column in the Minus Years 6 8 Editing GPA Quality Points Weight amp Credits 6 6 Editing Grades 6 3 Editing Letters amp Reports 7 32 Enrollment Report by teacher 3 32 Enter Courses description 1 7 Enter Courses Enter Course Section List description 1 7 Enter Courses Enter Master Course List description 1 7 Enter Grade
480. t count towards calculating INCOMPLETES the GPA D MINIMUM OF This setting will keep students off of the honor roll that do not have GRADES USED this number of grades used in calculating their honor roll average In FOR THE other words if you set this number to 2 and a student has five AVERAGE incompletes and one A he will not be on your honor roll Individual Student Audit Instead of entering a grade level in the previous window you may choose the option to print an audit report for an individual student If the student made the honor roll the report will explicitly show in a step by step format exactly how the students honor roll average was calculated If a student did not make the honor roll this report will show why If it was due to the average not being high enough it will show how the average was calculated If it was because the student failed some other checks it will list which checks were failed A sample audit report on Kathy Albrecht shows why she didn t make the high honor roll Report Cards Manual 8 19 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Defining Honor Roll Reports This report shows that Mary did not make the honor roll because she had an 89 in a major course As you can see specifications were set to OMIT IF 1 MAJOR GRADE LESS THAN 90 HONOR ROLL AUDIT REPORT REDIKER HIGH SCHOOL Albrecht Kathy 12002 07 26 2002 UNIVERSAL HONOR ROLL SPECIFICATIONS HOW TO USE WEIGHT HOW TO USE THE GPA
481. t grades a lookup window is available displaying all of your comments Select the comment you wish to add from the list Press F10 ACCEPT to save your work or press ESC to abort without saving Report Cards Manual 6 3 Chapter 6 View Change Add Drop Viewing and Editing Grades Specifications The specifications that are available for the View Change Add Drop program are explained in detail in the SCHEDULING PLUS Manual NOTE You can access Specifications at any time through the Transcript View as well as through the Schedule View by clicking on the Specifications button in the upper right corner of the VCAD window All Specifications pertain to the Scheduling Views except for the following Page 1 B LOOKUP SEARCH BY SCHOOL OR GRADE If you set this specification to search By School when you type Smith to call up a student the first Smith alphabetically will appear no matter what grade level they are in If you want a different Smith press the F7 REPEAT SEARCH key to call up the next Smith regardless of grade level If you press the F6 LOOKUP key your entire school will appear in alphabetical order Choose the student whose transcript you wish to view If you choose to search By Grade when you type Smith only a Smith in the current grade will be accessed Moreover only the students in the current grade will appear in the LOOKUP list Note that you can always switch from one grade to another by typing a five character
482. t include courses with a GPA factor of 99 However beginning with Version 3 this feature is no longer used Instead the option of whether or not to count a course toward honor rolls and or GPAs is set in Enter Courses View Edit Courses amp Sections MINIMUM GRADE FOR THE GPA FACTOR The GPA factor is either added to or multiplied by the quality points of advanced level courses Grades BELOW what you enter here will not be affected by the GPA factor For example if you are a letter grading school enter a D to not have grades of F raised by the GPA factor MAJOR COURSES HAVE PRIORITIES 0 to Administrator s Plus allows you to split all courses into MAJOR and MINOR courses You may then use the next two specifications to determine which courses will be used in average calculations as well as in minimum grade checks For example you could specify that only major courses will be used in the average calculation but that both MAJOR amp MINOR courses will be used in minimum grade checks With the Enter Courses program a PRIORITY code from 0 to 5 may be entered for each course 0 is highest priority while a 5 is lowest priority These priorities were originally used by the scheduling module when conflicts occur The course with the lower priority is dropped Consequently major courses usually have a high priority 0 or 1 or 2 and minor courses usually have a low priority 3 or 4 or 5 This specification allows you to define
483. t of 0 Instead set the Count in GPA radio button to No The GPA factor is used to calculate students adjusted GPA and may optionally be used in calculating honor rolls It is also used to specify which courses should not be used at all in calculating GPAs If you do not use the GPA factor your adjusted GPAs will always be equal to your simple GPAs The adjusted GPA takes into account the fact that some advanced courses may offer more quality points for a grade than would be awarded for the same grade in a lower level course The simple GPA is calculated with the same number of quality points being offered for each grade regardless of the level of the course When you calculate class rank you will have the option to use either the adjusted or simple GPA Similarly when you print report cards transcripts or permanent labels you will have the option to print either the adjusted or simple GPA Field Name Adding Multiplying the GPA Factor Enter Courses Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window Description The GPA factor will either be added to or multiplied by the values you assign for quality points The Customize RC program is used to choose between adding and multiplying the GPA factor Using the Edit Grade Table option in Customize RC you can also assign values for quality points and choose whether or not particular letter or number grades will count in the GPA and honor roll calculation
484. t to return to the original specifications for a task you can click the Reset Default button Asinother parts of REPORT CARDS PLUS you can access any additional pages of the specification windows by pressing the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys or clicking the appropriate Page tab PAGE 1 Initial Specifications x INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER 1 CURRENT TASK Print a WIDE Report Card E 2 PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR I selected students El 3 ACTIVE LETTER REPORT Good Blank 20 Rep 020 El 4 YEAR R CARDS LABELS SRCHES YEAR a El 5 GRADES FOR EXACT GRADE SEARCH F E 6 LOW GRADE FOR RANGE SEARCH E 7 HIGH GRADE FOR RANGE SEARCH B 8 COLUMN FOR GRADE SEARCHES FIRST MARKING PERIOD E D REPORT CARD MESSAGE LINE 1 E REPORT CARD MESSAGE LINE 2 F REPORT CARD MESSAGE LINE 3 Reset Default ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE CURRENT TASK The list of possible tasks is described in detail in the previous section Use this specification to choose a different task To return all specifications for the current task to their defaults click the Reset Default button Report Cards Manual 7 13 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Specifications PRINT LETTERS REPORTS FOR Along with the options on the print window that appears when you exit the Specifications window this specification determines which students will be printed on a report Clicking this
485. t you never use more than TWO decimal places This is because you may not have more significant figures in your average than the numbers used to calculate the average Because teachers do not usually use decimals when they give tests or submit their grades any digits after the second decimal tend to be meaningless Report Cards Manual 8 9 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports Honor Rolls Inspect Change Honor Roll Print Specifications When you choose this option from the window on page 8 4 the following window appears ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE The print specifications determine what your honor roll report will look like You may print your report sorted by name or average Moreover you may or may not print each of the following items rank name ID number average the number of courses used in calculating the average the number of incompletes the number of F s and any two data base fields An honor roll report including everything would look like 07 24 2002 HONOR ROLL 1 HIGH HONORS FOR GRADE 12 28 students FIRST MARKING PERIOD CRS Number of courses used in calculating the average RANK HAME ID AVERAGE CRS IHC F PHONE SEX 1 Missy Baldwin 86 97 46 6 627 4310 F 2 Thaddeus Nappi 56 96 55 6 693 3393 M 3 Erin Bartlett 8 96 38 6 655 7433 F 4 Mary Keefe 1 95 85 6 655 7350 F 5 Russ Berube 58 95 22 7 655 5011 M 6 Heather Southard 6 95 00 6 627 4918 F 7 Cathrine Baird 30 94 67 4 627 4043 F 8 Sharon Poul
486. the SFEND codes make up a Search Footer The Search Footer prints at the end of each sort category Search Footers are often used to generate a count of all the students included in a search category For Example the line of code inside a search footer will typically include text followed by a search category code and a search count code Total SC SCT Searching on HOMEROOM and sorting on SEX the line of code would print something like Total Mrs Jones 18 indicating 18 students in Mrs Jones homeroom the search category All the lines between the TFSTART and the TFEND codes make up a Sort Footer The Sort Footer prints at the end of each sort category Sort Footers are often used to generate a count of all the students included in a sort category For Example the line of code inside a sort footer will typically include text followed by a sort category code and a sort count code Total TC TCT Searching on HOMEROOM and sorting on GENDER the line of code would print something like Total F 7 indicating 7 female students in the current homeroom the sort category The following is an annotated list of codes used by the Report Cards Report Writer As with data base codes these codes must be between a pair of tildes Report Cards Manual 7 83 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer The Pre defined Reports The Pre defined Reports Each task in the task list has a default report linked to it Using t
487. the destination folder the new information will be added to the end of the existing file To save the report to a floppy disk enter a on this line ASCII x ENTER ASCII FILE NAME CMY DOCUMENTSSHSREPORTCARD m ASCII FILE OVERWRITE APPEND OK Cancel Report Cards Manual 7 37 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer View Edit Letters Reports Window Menu File Edit Search Options Window C ta alr X Ba f amp amp Cascade Tile Arrange Icons v Report Cards RC Wide Plain LASER Rep 020 2 Address Current Screen Standard The Window window provides access to different modules by allowing multiple open windows to be arranged according to your preferences Option Description Cascade Overlaps all open windows diagonally with each window s title displayed in the upper left hand corner The title of the open window is also listed on the bottom portion of the Window drop down window below Arrange Icons See previous page Tile Stacks open windows one on top of another Current Report Each of the currently open Administrator s Plus Administrator s Plus windows are listed on the bottom portion of the Window toolbar window The window that is active will appear with a check mark next to it Function Keys In addition to the Report Writer Toolbar you can use function keys to edit reports You can either click on the function key buttons at the bottom of the editing window or pre
488. the Body set the word BodyFont to the desired font and size required for the report If this specification is omitted from the code the default is black Arial 8 pitch and bold BorderWidth Draw Box GPA amp Honor Roll Defines the width of the border using a range of 0 3 0 is the thinnest and 3 is the thick est LeftBorderWidth Attendance Course Table Advanced Specifications Draw BoxRightBorder Width course comments concepts and narratives TopBorder Width BottomBorderWidth These four parameters set the width of the box border The setting range is from 0 to 3 0 being the thinnest and 3 the thickest Each side of the box can be set separately D 32 Report Cards Manual Skills and Concepts Box Code Definitions BoxGap GPA This parameter defines in inches the horizontal spacing between individual cells The default is 0 1 inch BoxHeight or Auto Draw Box Atten dance Course Table GPA Honor Roll The maximum height of a course table or in the case of an advanced specification ta ble the height of the course section comment section or narrative section Do not con fuse the height of each course row with the course section Rows that will not fit in this height will be truncated Box Height is set in inches BoxHeight Image Defines the width of the image provided the Stretch parameter is set as Y If the im age should not be stretched then the image s aspect ratio will b
489. the CAREER totals to determine what the CAREER totals were before they were last updated As an example in a school using number grades assume that a student has the following six figures stored in his report card record following his SOPHOMORE year of high school CAREER CREDITS 8 50 LAST CREDITS UPDATE 0 00 CAREER ADJUSTED QP 700 00 LAST ADJUSTED QP UPDATE 0 00 CAREER WEIGHT 10 00 LAST WEIGHT UPDATE 0 00 CAREER SIMPLE QP 680 00 LAST SIMPLE QP UPDATE 0 00 This student s career adjusted GPA is currently 700 10 or 70 00 and his career simple GPA is 680 10 or 68 00 At the end of the student s junior year the Update GPAs amp Credits program is used which calculates the following based on the student s junior year grades JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT CREDITS 4 00 JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT ADJUSTED QP 400 00 JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT WEIGHT 5 00 JUNIOR YEAR CURRENT SIMPLEQP 390 00 The current credits of 4 00 are added to the previous career credits of 8 50 to give a new career credits total of 12 50 The current adjusted quality points of 400 are added to the previous career adjusted quality points of 700 to give a new career adjusted quality points total of 1100 The current simple quality points of 390 are added to the previous simple quality points of 680 to give a new career simple quality points total of 1070 Report Cards Manual 8 37 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports NOTE
490. the specification to AUTOCALC the of boxes in a row Vertical space between course boxes Horizontal space between course boxes Vertical space between course boxes Horizontal space between course boxes Common width of all cells course concepts comments and narrative cells in a course box If the narrative cell is printed on the right side of the course box BoxWidth which includes the narrative cell width must be specified In addition the width of the narrative cell must be specified using WidthlfRight line in the Narrative specs End of general specifications Code CourseCellStart 1 Print Y or N PrintDescription Y or N CharPerColumn 3 or 5 IncludeSkills Y or N PrintWhichColumns 1 13 CellHeight or Auto TitleHeight in inches DescriptionWidth MinGradingColumnWidth BorderWidth 0 3 Left Right Top Bottom TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Description Start of the codes that define what prints in the course section of the advanced box Determines whether the Courses section of the skills table will print Determines whether or not to use the course description If set to N the standard course name will print If set to Y the course description will print Courses with no description will print the standard course name Designates whether the 3 character
491. the window The selected student s name appears in the upper left corner To scroll to the next or previous student use the F4 Prev or F5 Next function keys The course and section information along Report Cards Manual D 9 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Interfacing with GradeQuick with each linked skill are listed in the left hand columns To view all skills for courses in a students schedule access the View Skills window from the View Change Add Drop program and press F7 All You may print all of the information shown in the View Skills window by pressing F9 Print To enter skills grades highlight the desired skill and then press F3 Edit Use the Tab or Enter keys to select the appropriate marking period Type any grade defined in the grade table and then press F10 Accept To edit a skills grade highlight the desired skill and then press F3 Edit Use the Tab or Enter keys to highlight the grade to change Type a new grade and then press F10 Accept to save and exit Interfacing with GradeQuick The Skills based Report Cards module interfaces with GradeQuick s Skills feature so teachers can send both skills grades and conventional grades to Administrator s Plus The skills linked to each course are first exported to GradeQuick so that teachers can record grades for the skills set up in Administrator s Plus The grades teachers enter for skills are exported along with the conventional grades and comments stored in t
492. the year so that you can obtain an up to date class rank report At the end of the year this temporary updating will be automatically un done before the final updating takes place At the end of the year when the Beginning program is run to move students to the next grade students career credits simple quality points adjusted quality points and weight are kept in their report card files even though all of their courses and grades for the current year are either erased or archived for use on college transcripts Report Cards Plus also keeps track of the values obtained during the most recent update of GPAs credits including Last Credit Update Last Adjusted Quality Points Update Last Weight Update Last Simple Quality Points Update When student s career credits adjusted quality points simple quality points and weight are updated the current credits current simple quality points current adjusted quality points and current weight are calculated and placed into these four slots These current figures are then added to the 8 24 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports How Adjusted amp Simple GPA s Are Calculated old figures in the Career Credits Career Adjusted Quality Points Career Simple Quality Points and Career Weight slots to give new figures for Career Credits Career Adjusted Quality Points Career Simple Quality Points and Career Weight As an example in a school using number grades assume that a student has the followin
493. ther information of your choice may be pre printed on these report cards It is also possible to print either wide or narrow report cards on plain white paper Complete transcripts may be printed containing all of the courses students have taken in their school career Moreover these transcripts may be printed with students courses sorted by the year taken or they may be printed with students courses sorted by department See Chapter 7 for complete information on creating and printing reports in Report Cards Report Writer PROGRAM 8 STATISTICAL REPORTS Update Career GPAs Use this program to permanently update students career credits and GPAs at the end of each school year as well as to temporarily update students career credits and GPAs during the school year Any temporary updating will be automatically undone before the final permanent updating is performed These updated totals will stay in students report card files as they are promoted to the next grade level by the Beginning program If you have entered grades for previous years through View Change Add Drop this program may also be used to calculate their career GPAs based on archival grades Transcripts printed in the new year can then be set to display the student s career GPA The Statistical Reports program will calculate both an adjusted and simple career GPA for each student The adjusted GPA takes into account the fact that some advanced courses may offer
494. tion Number column blinking over section number 02 If you do not wish to add an additional section press or click ESC If you have set the option on page 2 of Specifications PRINT DEFAULTS FOR A NEW SECTION to Yes See 1 PRINT DEFAULTS FOR A NEW SECTION on page 2 22 subsequently entered sections will automatically contain the following information A section number one greater than the section number of the previously entered section The same teacher time and room as the previous section If you wish to edit the teacher room or time you can move the cursor by pressing the TAB or ENTER keys Choose F10 ACCEPT to save this new section Press SHIFT TAB to move back to a previous field When editing existing sections note that F6 ROSTER brings up a window containing the names of the students in the section F8 DELETE can be used to remove the highlighted section as long as there are no students currently in the section F10 SORT will allow you to sort the list of sections by section number time or staff Press F3 EDIT or the ENTER key to edit the current section F2 ADD allows you to enter a new section Report Cards Manual 2 13 Ch apter 2 Enter Courses Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List Section List Fields When you press F2 SECT in the View Edit Courses amp Sections window your cursor will move to the section list If the course already has sections it will look similar
495. tion Students are not assessed on concepts However concepts can be printed on report cards to show parents the topics covered during each marking period of a course Concepts are associated with course sections because the concepts for a particular master course may vary from teacher to teacher For example the course Reading could be linked to the concepts Re telling for 1st quarter and Connecting text to prior knowledge for 2nd quarter In Administrator s Plus your school can create customized lists of skills and concepts These skills and concepts will be linked to the appropriate master courses and sections respectively Grades for course skills can be entered manually using the Enter Grades or View Change Add Drop programs The Skills based Report Card module also interfaces with GradeQuick s Skills feature so skills grades can be imported at the same time as conventional grades New box codes in the Report Card Report Writer make it easy to produce attractive Skills based report cards showing skills grades and course concepts As with all reports you can customize your skills based report card to meet the particular needs and preferences of your school Before you begin setting up skills and concepts for your school you must verify that your maximum skills per student setting is sufficient to accommodate all skills in a student s record This setting is found in Data Base Plus gt New Filesc Specifications Page 2 If your s
496. tions Notes D 17 Entering Skills Grades D 17 Send Skills Grades to Administrator s Plus D 18 Skills based Report Cards D 20 Codes to Create Skill and Nonskill based Report Cards D 21 Universal Codes D 21 New Box Codes 00 D 25 Attendance Box D 25 Draw Box 0000 cee eae D 26 Course Table Box D 27 Advanced Specification Box D 28 GPA BOX ru ud uper D 30 Honor Roll Box D 30 Print Image s a oct eee eReR D 31 Box Code Definitions D 32 Sample Skill based Report Card Template Report Cards Manual D 1 Chapter D Skills and Concepts Introduction Introduction Initial Setup D 2 Report Cards Manual Administrator s Plus s Skills based Report Card module allows you to assess students on curriculum Skills and Concepts Skills also referred to as Standards are defined as learning objectives needed to meet the curriculum requirements for a particular course For example skills for Reading 100 could include Progressing toward reading 25 grade appropriate books and Shows evidence of understanding his her reading in writing discussion Students can be assessed on each skill using letter or number grades or any symbol defined in your Administrator s Plus grade table located inside the Customize RC program Concepts are defined as the specific topics covered in a course sec
497. tions window the F6 LOOKUP window is available to help you find and select a master course This specification determines how master courses are sorted in this lookup window Having them sorted numerically makes it easy for you to see which master course numbers have been used and which are available which is helpful when adding new courses Sorting them alphabetically allows you to type just the first few letters of a course name and jump immediately to the first course in the list starting with the letters you entered Help messages appear when entering information about master courses These messages explain the purpose of each field If you no longer want these help messages to appear set specification 2 to No Report Cards Manual 2 19 Chapter 2 Enter Courses Inspect Change Specifications Specification 3 thru 8 DEFAULTS 9 amp A START END COURSE FOR PRINTOUTS B amp C START END STAFF FOR SECTION PRINTOUTS D PRINT SECTIONS MEETING WHEN 2 20 Report Cards Manual Description Use these specifications to set the default values you wish to appear when entering new master courses If they are correct it will only be necessary to enter the course name and press or click F10 ACCEPT to save the new course Of course you may edit any of the default entries if they are not correct for the current master course It is suggested that you first set the defaults to the values needed by all year courses and then ente
498. to meet your needs In order to print section rosters you must choose the option to print by SECTIONS from the window that appears when you finish entering specifications for the task You may then choose to print rosters for ALL SECTIONS a RANGE OF TEACHERS INDIVIDUAL TEACHERS or INDIVIDUAL SECTIONS Except when printing rosters for individual sections they will always be printed sorted by teacher In other words all of the rosters for one teacher will be printed followed by all of the rosters for the next teacher If you choose to print by grade level you will get a general roster showing students and their grade levels and ID numbers Printing One Report Card Per Course Sorted by Teacher This task will enable you to print one report card per course per student SORTED by teacher The default report is 37 which is the same as the progress report produced by task 13 See task 13 for a sample of what this report looks like The advantage of this Report Cards Manual 7 11 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer Using the Task List task is that the progress reports will be printed sorted by teacher as opposed to by student From the print window which has GRADE NUMBER as the first choice you must choose the option to print by SECTIONS You may then choose to print for ALL SECTIONS a RANGE OF TEACHERS or INDIVIDUAL TEACHERS or INDIVIDUAL SECTIONS Except when printing for individual sections they will always be printed sorted
499. to 1 NOTE You can also open a previous year s directory to print transcripts Only courses in the range set by these specifications will be printed on reports When printing by sections only sections in this range will be included For example if you want to print mailing labels for only course 50 BAND set both specifications to course 50 and then choose to print labels by sections These specifications work in conjunction with the COURSES NOT TO PRINT specifications For example if you choose to include courses 100 through 900 and exclude 400 through 500 you will only see courses 100 through 399 and 501 through 900 on reports The ComparX code where x is any report card column 1 11 prints the narrative comments for a specific grading column You can use this specification to determine which column s comments to print Print Menus Report Cards Report Writer Print Menus After you accept your specifications the following print window appears Administrator s Plus xi REPORT CARDS REPORT WRITER CURRENT TASK RANGE SEARCH LIST GRADE NUMBER All grades Inspect change specifications View edit letters reports Sections End program D S Enter a grade number to print a report for students in a particular grade To print a report for students in a particular grade range set Specification 6 START GRADE FOR ALL GRADES and 7 END GRADE FOR ALL GRADES to the desired grade range and choose A
500. to 9 Enter Courses Master Course Fields Fields found on the View Edit Courses and Sections Window Description Course names are limited to 10 characters in length If you choose to print the level after the course name you can print an additional three characters It is advisable to use names with upper and lower case letters as shown in the sample Master Course List in the appendix Course Descriptions can be up to 40 characters in length On reports printed from Report Cards Report Writer any portion of this description can be printed instead of the 10 character course name by changing the code NM9999 11 to IND9999 25 in the body of the report See Chapter 7 If a course doesn t have a description entered in the Master Course List the course name will print instead The same is true of reports printed in Schedule Report Writer Enter any three character alpha numeric code in this field or leave it blank On transcripts permanent labels report cards and line schedules you will have the option to print this code A space will be inserted just before the three character level giving you a fourteen character course name For example you could enter I for your level one courses and III for your level three courses For advanced placement courses use AP as the level An advanced level Chemistry course with the level printed would read as Chemistry AP on the report card Enter a single digit code from 0 through 9 A cou
501. to the following View Edit Courses And Sections INACTIVE Count in Honor e es o o Count in GPA Yes C No Course Length lt Q S A gt EE Priority lt 0 to 5 gt 0 0 01 5 Whitney ESC or 9 ors HE EXIT ADD EDIT ROSTER DEL Understanding Meeting Times The time must be entered in a certain manner in order to be used by Scheduling Plus The program will display a warning message if you enter the time incorrectly You can have up to 24 blocks periods per day and up to an eight day rotation with each block meeting no more than seven times within the rotation The blocks periods are lettered A to X Because each block may meet up to 7 times in your rotation you could have A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 and A7 blocks running through X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 and X7 blocks It does not matter when these blocks actually meet On some days you can have H block first and A block last and so on Here is a sample standard schedule for a school using a five day rotation with seven blocks meeting in the same order each day 2 14 Report Cards Manual Enter Courses Adding to amp Editing the Course Section List Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5 Al A2 A3 A4 A5 English English English English English Bl B2 B3 B4 B5 Cl C2 C3 C4 C5 Chem Chem Chem Chem Chem DI D2 D3 D4 D5 Chem Gym Chem Gym El E2 E3 E4 E5 Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 Gl G2 G3 G4 G5 When entering the times for se
502. tomatically be saved to disk when generated and you will be able to print the updated honor roll status on the report card even if you do not choose to press F9 Print to print it to paper When you are finished entering all specifications for Options 6 and 7 click Done to return to the Honor Roll window Honor rolls should be run in order by grade level Choose Option 1 to run Honor Roll 1 the highest honor roll first For example print honor roll 1 for grade 12 followed by honor roll 2 for grade 12 and then honor roll 3 for grade 12 and so on Then do the same thing for your other grade levels After selecting honor roll 1 the specification window for that honor roll will appear Administrator s Plus will remember how you last defined honor roll 1 You can accept these specifications or make changes as needed The following sections will explain these specifications in detail After accepting the specifications you will see the following window Administrator s Plus gd PRINT HONOR ROLL 1 HIGH HONORS FIRST MARKING PERIOD e C individual student Audit C Inspect change specifications for this report C Honor roll main menu C End program Em D z 8 12 Report Cards Manual Statistical Reports Honor Rolls Select a grade level to begin calculating the honor roll for that grade If you select to have the honor roll appear on the window first the following window appears viewing Honor Roll
503. ts amp GPA This chapter describes how to Transfer credit and GPA records from the previous school year Archive current year s data so that it may later be printed on transcripts Contact Information vi Report Cards Manual D Skills Based Report Cards This chapter describes how to assess students on curriculum Skills and Concepts Technical Support Please do not hestitate to call us toll free at 1 800 882 2994 Monday Thursday7 30 a m 6 30 p m EST Friday7 30 a m 5 00 p m EST You can also e mail us at tech rediker com When emailing technical support questions please include your school s name phone number and zip code We respond to e mail from schools in the continental United States by phone Technical support information can also be found on the Rediker Web site at http www rediker com support html Training For information on current training available see the Rediker Web site at http www rediker com training html Follow the links to obtain information about scheduled classes training at customer sites and class registration Documentation Feedback Your comments on the documentation help us to understand and meet your needs You can send e mail to doc rediker com Table of Contents Introduction Introduction Lv sbavae eh oe eterna 2 Using a Split Grading System 3 How to Archive Grades 4 SIG Tweedie Ces dea wa tones Gaerne a do 5 SIBB 2i sso xo tap tae a Mar
504. ts you enter a ten character name for each department Department 0 will usually be courses numbered 1 to 99 Department 1 will normally be courses 100 to 199 and so on Use this option to specify that department 1 is ENGLISH and department 2 is HISTORY and so on Note that when entering master courses a default department code appears in the department field You can keep the default codes or change the number that appears in this field For example the default department code for course number 121 is 1 because it is in the one hundreds You may change the code to 9 so that it appears with the department 9 courses even though the course s number is 121 When you enter Report Cards Manual 1 11 Chapter 1 Customize RC Entering Department Names 12 Report Cards Manual department names students earned credit in each department may be printed on transcripts You can even print transcripts in which courses are organized by department and whether they are included in lists of master schedules To Enter Department Names Double click a filed to make it active Enter the desired name Press Tab to move to the Print in Master Schedule column The Print in Master Schedule column lets you determine if the course will be included in the Scheduling Report Writer s Master Schedule formats Use the drop down box to select Yes or No After your departments have been named you might have a tabl
505. tudents courses and grades for previous school years Enter students past GPA and credits information Overide credit for a course Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual Included in this Guide Chapter Description 7 Report Cards Report Writer This chapter describes how to Design amp print various reports Print report cards Print transcripts Print permanent labels Print deficiency letters Print congratulatory letters for students on the honor roll Search for students who have earned an particular grade Search for students who have earned any grade within a user specified range Statistical Reports This chapter describes how to Print students class rank by career GPA Print eligibility reports Print honor rolls for a particular marking period Update students career credits and grade point averages Archive This chapter describes how to change Course numbers of archived courses NOTE The archiving feature is now integrated with program C Transfer Credits amp GPA see program C Print Schedule Scan Forms This chapter describes how to print forms that will be used to scan students schedules into the computer Scan Students Schedules This chapter describes how to enter students schedules into the computer with a scanner Report Cards Manual v Administrator s Plus Report Cards Manual Contact Information Chapter Description C Transfer Credi
506. tudents may have more than the default of 100 skills per student then this value must be increased You will use the Customize RC program in Report Cards Plus to enter and store your customized lists of skills and concepts The skills and concepts you define will later be linked to specific courses and sections so that they can appear in students transcript records 1 Skills and Concepts Initial Setup In the Report Cards Plus module select Customize RC T Administrator s Plus E xi N CUSTOMIZE REPORT CARDS PLUS 1 edit grade Table 2 Gpa factor 3 cuStomize report card columns 4 edit report card Comments 5 edit number grade pRint table 6 enter Department names 7 Skills and concepts 8 End program DD From the Customize RC menu select Skills and Concepts c c c c C Cc c cy The View Edit or Print Skills window appears View Edit Or Print Skills Skills Concepts RECORD 1 CODE Por GROUP HEADING PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT DESCRIPTION Exhibits Self Confidence ENTER RECORD CODE OR DESCRIPTION oo E _Esc F2 P r3 d r4 rs fre es km ABORT ADD EDIT PREV NEXT LOOKUP DEL PRINT Click the Skills tab to enter view print or edit your list of skills Each skill consists of a skills code a group heading and a skills description The skill code up to 4 characters is an abbreviated name used to sort the list of skills in lookup windows For example if all skill
507. u do not have to perform these steps immediately after installing Report Cards Plus however when you are ready to archive grades you should follow these instructions carefully The Archive program should NOT be used to archive students grades The process of archiving grades is now performed using the Transfer Credits amp GPA program Using the Archive program in conjunction with the Transfer Credits amp GPA program will result in inaccurate transcripts Although the Archive program is still available it should only be used in special circumstances under the recommendation of Technical Support Students courses and grades are stored in the report cards files for the current year When creating a new school year the Beginning program creates an exact copy of the previous year until you run the Beginning program Running the Beginning program promotes students up one grade level and deletes the courses and grades from the previous year See the Data Base Plus manual for more information on the Beginning program The Beginning program can erase students current courses and grades from the report card files but it does not erase their total career credits quality points and weight In other words these totals will be updated at the end of each year and will stay in students report card files as they are promoted to the next grade level After promoting students in the new year use the Transfer Credits and GPA program to copy stude
508. u would like to limit printing to a range of grades choose the lowest grade in that range for the start grade and the highest grade in that range for the end grade This specification only applies when searching and or sorting based on a database field Selecting Yes causes the program to print a separate category called No Entry for all students who do not have an entry in the search field Choose whether to include or omit inactive students Click the browse button to display a Lookup window and then select a data base field to sort by See Sorting by Your Chosen Fields on page A 6 for more information Report Cards Manual A 3 Chapter A Print Schedule Scan Forms Printing Schedule Scan Forms The first Print Schedule Scan Forms print window re appears Administrator s Plus GRADE NUMBER M All grades Inspect change specifications Spacing Test End program 5 Select an option which are explained in the following table Option Description Grade Number To print forms for only one grade level type the desired grade level here All Grades Select All Grades to print forms for all grade levels in your school Inspect Change Opens the specifications window Specifications Spacing Test See Performing a Spacing Test on page A 5 6 Clicking Grade Number or All Grades deploys the following window Administrator s Plus PRINT SCHEDULE SCAN FORMS PRINT WHICH STUDENTS IN GRADE 9 1 All students alphabetical
509. uality points as the A in math Report Cards Manual 8 45 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Once the adjusted quality points have been calculated weight will be applied to the course depending upon how your criteria says courses should be weighted This weight will be pro rated if you have selected to do so In this example weights are used but they are NOT pro rated The adjusted quality points for each course is then multiplied by the weight of the course to give the total quality points for each course The total adjusted quality points for each course will be added together to produce the Grand Total Adjusted Quality Points The weights for each course will be added together to produce the Grand Total Weight These totals will then be added to students old career adjusted quality points and weight to produce their new updated career adjusted quality points and weight The simple quality points and simple GPA is simultaneously calculated It is done the exact same way as the adjusted quality points and adjusted GPA are calculated except that the step adding the GPA factor to the awarded quality points is omitted SUBJECT GRADE QUAL x WEIGHT SIMPLE QUAL Math A 400 x 1 00 4 00 English F 0 00 x 1 00 0 00 AP History B 3 00 x 1 00 3 00 Art Blank Spanish P GYM C 200 x 0 50 1 00 Grand Totals 3 50 8 00 Note that the adjusted quality points were 9 00 while the si
510. ules If you choose to include the 40 character course description on your master course printout the print will be condensed to allow it to fit properly on a page This option lets you display the settings for the Count in Honor Roll and Count in GPA options in the View Edit Courses and Sections window Choose Yes to add columns in your Master Course List printout to display these settings See View Edit Courses amp Sections on page 2 3 for more information on these settings Use the drop down list to decide your font size small medium or large The Inactive checkbox in the View Edit Courses and Sections determines whether or not a course is considered active or inactive This option lets you print only active inactive or both active and inactive courses After setting your specifications click Done This displays the Master Course and Section Lists print window See Using the Master Course and Section Lists Print Window on page 3 35 3 34 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Master Course And Section Lists Using the Master Course and Section Lists Print Window After selecting the selecting the specifications for the Master Course and Section Lists option click Done to display the Master Course and Section Lists print window ra Administrator s Plus MASTER COURSE AND SECTION LISTS 1 Master course list by course number C 2 master course list by course Name 3 Section list by course section number
511. umn There shouldn t be a grade in more than one credit column for these courses Once credit has been awarded no further credit columns will even be looked at In a temporary update based upon one column the credits will be multiplied by the percentage that you have entered for each type of course For example if you are doing a temporary update using the MIDYEAR grade column and you have entered 50 00 as the PERCENT TO WEIGHT FULL YEAR COURSES an ALL YEAR course worth 5 credits will be awarded only 50 percent of those 5 credits or 2 5 credits See 3 REPORT DETAIL on page 8 33 After credits have been awarded according to the above criteria the OVR column in the student s transcript is examined for each course See Chapter 6 page Editing the OVR Column on page 6 5 for an explanation of the function of the OVR column in View Change Add Drop If the REGENT S option is being used for a complete update credits will be awarded for a passing REGENT S grade even if the FINAL grade is a failing grade or any other grade A REGENT S grade will not take the place of a blank final grade General Rules For Calculating Quality Points amp Weight Current quality points and weight are computed based on the grades in the appropriate report card columns By default grades of P W WP I X N or a blank space will be ignored in calculating the weight and quality points A course will also be skipped if it is set not to count in the GPA in View
512. update specifications are correct the next window will allow you to select a grade level on which to perform the update You will then be able to select the entire grade level or individual students Statistical Reports How To Perform a Third Quarter Update How To Perform a Third Quarter Update NOTE The third quarter update is typically performed by schools seeking to determine eligibility such as for National Honor Society based on the cumulative GPA as of the third quarter There are two methods of performing a third quarter update The method you choose depends on whether you need to permanently store the third quarter update data or are simply seeking to temporarily update GPA s and credits for purposes of gathering data as described above The Permanent Third Quarter Update If you wish to permanently store the data acquired from the third quarter update use the Calculate Averages program to calculate the average of the first 3 quarters into the final grade column Remember to set Calculate Averages Specification 1 REPLACE EXISTING GRADES to No so that you do not overwrite any grades that may already exist in the final grade column Then perform an update with specifications set as follows UPDATE BASED ON WHICH COLUMNS FINAL GRADE WHICH YEARS CURRENT YEAR YEAR 0 REPORT DETAIL SUMMARY REPORT PERCENT TO WEIGHT FULL YEAR COURSES 75 PERCENT TO WEIGHT SEM 1 COURSES 100 PERCENT TO WE
513. ur wi spoouos pure saztajpo jo uonermossy says APPIA oui q PPY 4gn 4 i UPA oN ume 190 d Muay o 2g COE LIFE EG PE NOs ui SPOON 049 ades OSET PEP E6 PEI PI mseg go 8 asia JOQ umds euopourg 1080 007 424 V O0 Y TATEARI 6 ua 1 Pony pum nona ISG Turpis Joouos euorjeuo u uique g ut 0986 12 008 liPD 9 0L0 VW PIeu JVMLJOS NH33IQO3M Woy 19p40 kv xog isp1e9 140doy Bunjoo7 48019 9j09y 15043 SIN 39VSS3N Sssaudaav ONV 3AVN NVIGYVNDS LN Fso 401 10 W gt YOSIAQY 801 HH ck 30vH9 L00 0500 xli poyepdn uooq savy s yq pue sipoJo 109162 sjuop ms MOY MOYS 0 uosoqo sey oouos sty ped prodas oY JO woyoq 94 UO oq Jo puo oy 1 pojurid Joeded ure d uo peo podar opi o dures e si sm o STY E SYONOH HOIH pred uodosr opi g SNIYIS TIOW WONOH T6 J0 T XNYN O0 SZ HLN NIN OS ZOZZ Ld nO MIN O0 SZ SLa D NIN OTI 88 YdO NIN Os 9 LA wand OOTAS Ld nO wand 0S9 SLAD Nino 61 88 YdO Amid OS BT iA AXNd OS TE9T Ld INO Aud OS ST SLlQI2 A3Hd ogg s 96 Spb 696 3 96 696 O 196 96 S300 wepras BuIpuesing quor oot z 66 66 6 96 oot 66 86 66 18 pexEAnou ANDH Hiqisuodss SUIS SIU oy ogo 6 16 6 66 6 6 t p6 Ble wine gu ToS Sod agea doog awy UD Pee duro sjusun DESY WHEY ool L 86 6 66 26 86 66 66 66 zr 10 Mf Py ESN JUS 1093 E13 SPsyey Spells d s 340TH ogo 0 6 26 66 zB 96 86 6 t gee MEd sser poog SsE U VEH OL sunsesgx Gs syouRy Ost L 86 66 86 66 26 26 26
514. view window you can press F9 PRINT to print the report to paper If you would prefer to print the report immediately without generating the preview change this specification to No Inspect Change Specifications Select this option to look at or change the specifications associated with the Enter Courses program including the default settings for the View Edit Courses amp Sections window and the location of your skills folder used to send course skills to Grade Quick There are three specification windows for this program The first one is called the Initial Specifications window A description of the second page of specifications begins on page 1 PRINT DEFAULTS FOR A NEW SECTION on page 2 22 See the explanation of the skills specifications under Skills Specifications on page 2 24 2 18 Report Cards Manual Enter Courses Inspect Change Specifications Page 1 Initial Specifications Specifications Enter Courses INITIAL SPECIFICATIONS ENTER COURSES 1 COURSE LOOKUP ALPHA OR NUMERIC ORDER Numeric Alphabetic 2 PRINT HELP MESSAGES ENTERING COURSES C Yes C No S DEFAULT OPTIMUM SUE ES 9 START COURSE FOR PRINTOUTS A END COURSE FOR PRINTOUTS I ll be Le e 89 INN Page Setup ENTER SPECIFICATION TO CHANGE Specification 1 COURSE LOOKUP ALPHA OR NUMERIC ORDER 2 PRINT HELP MESSAGES WHEN ENTERING COURSES Description Inside the View Edit Courses amp Sec
515. w report cards 7 5 narrow transcript by department 7 6 narrow transcript by year 7 5 one report card per course sorted by teacher 7 11 one separate report card per course 7 6 permanent lables 7 6 progress report 7 9 rosters 7 11 transcript view 6 5 wide report cards 7 5 wide transcript by year 7 5 wide transcript by year by department 7 5 Pro Rate Weights why 8 6 Pro Rating defined 8 5 R Rank Reports obtaining 8 65 Removing Students to Courses amp Sections 4 9 Rename Reports 7 39 Report comment distribution 3 31 enrollment by teacher 3 32 grade distribution 3 27 Report Card Columns blank 5 16 Index 4 Report Cards skills based D 20 Report Cards Report Writer description 1 9 Print Menu 7 27 Reports iewing amp editing 7 32 pre defined 7 84 Reset Credits GPAs Last Update Data To Zero 8 40 Reset Last Update Data Only to Zero 8 39 Rosters printing 7 11 section 3 24 S Scan Schedules description 1 10 Scanner entry forms 3 13 Scanner Grade Entry forms filling them out 3 19 Scanning number grades 3 22 Scanning Grades 4 16 troubleshooting 4 17 Scanning LEtter Grades how to 3 21 Search in the Report Writer 7 41 Search Menu in View Edit Letters Reports 7 35 to 7 36 Section withdrawing student from 6 5 Section Lists and Master Course 3 33 Section Rosters 3 24 Sections adding students 4 8 removing students 4 9 Sending Skills to GradeQuick p 12 Setting colu
516. warded full weight for a passing grade in that column for each course In a complete updating if there is more than one credit column the following will take place for each course Report Cards Manual 8 43 Chapter 8 Statistical Reports How Career GPAs amp Credits Are Calculated Full Year Course The entered weight will be divided by the number of credit columns For example if there are two credit columns a full year course with a weight of 1 will only be awarded a weight of 50 Semester amp Quarter Courses These courses will be awarded their full entered weight for a grade in any credit column There shouldn t be a grade in more than one credit column for these courses Once weight has been awarded no further credit columns will even be looked at In a temporary updating the entered weight will be multiplied by the percent that you have entered for each type of course For example if you are doing a temporary updating using the MIDYEAR grade column you may have entered 50 percent for how to weight your full year courses Consequently a full year course with a weight of 5 will in fact be weighted 2 5 After weight has been awarded according to the above criteria the OVR column in the student s transcript is examined for each course The following codes may be entered for each course in a student s transcript with the View Change Add Drop program Administrator s Plus x BLANK FULL CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDIT
517. when major courses stop and minor courses start If you enter a 2 then courses with priorities of 0 to 2 will be considered major courses and those with priorities from 3 to 5 will be considered minor courses INCLUDE WHICH COURSES IN AVERAGES You have three options See the explanation for specification 5 for the definition of MAJOR and MINOR courses ALL COURSES MAJOR COURSES ONLY MINOR COURSES Statistical Reports Honor Rolls Note that if you choose ALL COURSES all courses that have been set to be counted in the honor roll in Enter Courses View Edit Courses amp Sections will be counted in the honor roll See View Edit Courses amp Sections on page 2 3 for an explanation of how to set this option If you set the option to include MAJOR COURSES ONLY in the Honor Roll calculations even if you have set the Count in Honor Rolls option to Yes in Enter Courses the course will NOT be counted in the Honor Roll if it is not designated a major course The same is true of the MINOR COURSES ONLY option INCLUDE WHICH COURSES FOR OTHER CHECKS You have three options ALL COURSES MAJOR COURSES ONLY MINOR COURSES ONLY See Specification 5 on the previous page for the definition of MAJOR and MINOR courses Other Checks include minimum grade checks and having a comment code outside of a specified range as well as having grades of I or F NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES 0 TO 4 It is strongly recommended tha
518. which Report Card columns you want the bubbled in Scan Form data to go into First click on one of the Scan Form boxes above A list of Report Card columns will be displayed Click on the Check Box next to the Report Card column that you want the data associated with this Scan Form box sent to Report Card Columns 1 2 3 4 5 6 a 8 9 10 11 12 13 1st 2nd S1EX S1TGRD 3rd 4th S2bX JOB S2GRD ABS COM1 COM 2 When setting up the Specifications for scanning grades note that The list box displays the six items displayed on the scan form for each student Checking an item in the list box will highlight the corresponding report card column in the report card at the bottom Youcan check more then one report card column nthe center of the window are instructions to guide you through the setup process Below are views of numeric grade and alpha grade scan forms 4 16 Report Cards Manual Enter Grades Scanning Grades Alpha grade scan form sample PERIOD GRADE PERIOD _GRADE EXAM GRADE FINAL When you click lt FINISHED gt you will see the following window iw Administrator s Plus Grade Reporting Scan Form Kec Scanning Grade Reporting Plus Grade Report Form Numeric Alpha WORKSHOP HIGH SCHOOL Grade Reporting Scan Form Layout Ene eee e School Year 2002 03 Exam Grade i c iz 1516RD Final Grade oer EBEN The purpose for this screen i
519. will print Specifies the Comment cell height Auto will cause the cell height to Auto Calc Controls width of border around course cell 0 thin border 3 thick border Code TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center Print Border Y or N TitleBorder Y or N TitleAndFont lt TitleText gt PrintBodyAndFont Y or N CommentCellEnd ConceptsCellStart Print Y or N CellHeight inches or Auto BorderWidth 0 3 Left Right Top Bottom TitleHorizontalAlign Left Right or Center Print Border Y or N TitleBorder Y or N TitleAndFont lt TitleText gt PrintBodyAndFont Y or N Report Cards Report Writer Report Card Codes Description Determines the alignment left to right of the comment header Specifies whether or not comment cell border prints Designates whether or not a border will print around the comment title Determines the heading of the Comments cell Text in the report will adopt the specification line s font and size Determines whether or not comments print in the comment cell If set to N the comment cell will remain empty End of the codes that define what prints in the comment cells of the advanced box Start of the codes that define what prints in the Concept cell determines the Concept cell s print position after below the initial Course cell Determines whether or not the Concept cell will print Specifies the Conce
520. will be Administrator s Plus ARCHIVE 2 copy Year 0 to year 1 only 3 Unarchive 4 Change the numbers of archived courses 5 End program DD From this window select number 4 to move into the part of this program that actually changes the numbers of archived courses You will then see the Set Master Course Translation Table window T Set Master Course Translation Table EE E C NEW COURSE mmm foLo COURSE IMME New COURSE A cv course mmm foro COURSE IMME Nev COURSE NNN OLD Courses Imm cv courst mm foLo COURSE E A NEW courst mum FOLD COURSE E A cv course mmm foro counse E A NeW courst imum foro courses E A NcW courst umm POLO coURse INN NEW COURSE A Nev COURSE I foro counse IMM New COURSE A COURse i FOLD COURSE E A ucv course mmm Quit Task Clear This window allows you to enter up to 38 pairs of numbers If you have more than 38 course numbers to change you will have to run this procedure more than one time There is room for 19 pairs on the left side of the window and 19 pairs on the right side of the window Each pair consists of on OLD COURSE and a NEW COURSE For example if you wanted to change COURSE 123 to COURSE 923 and COURSE 900 to COURSE 850 you would enter the following Each time that you press ENTER after entering an OLD COURSE the cursor will move to the NEW COURSE next to it After pressing ENTER from a NEW CO
521. with two credit columns As with the other semester reports the only columns that print are the two semester columns along with the credits earned each semester and the total credits See Report 41 on Trans Plain RT Year on page 7 88 This report was designed especially for use with a laser printer Prints courses in four quadrants separated by year on narrow 8 5 x 11 paper The default report for Task 5 Print a NARROW Transcript by Year this report was designed for use with a laser printer Report Cards Manual 7 89 Chapter 7 Report Cards Report Writer The Pre defined Reports Report Name TR PrePrt RTYR LZFM TR Plain RTYR LZFRM Tran RT YR 2 pg 7 90 Report Cards Manual Description Prints courses in four quadrants separated by year on wide 11 x 8 5 pre printed forms available from Rediker Software Forms contain school name and address information Call Rediker Software for a sample Prints courses in four quadrants separated by year on wide 11 x 8 5 forms Forms are colored but do not have school name and address information pre printed on them The report contains codes to print school name and address information Prints courses separated by year in a single column putting heading information on 2nd page if 2nd page is needed Statistical Reports Introduction amp Main Menu 8 2 Using Honor Rolls 8 2 Grade Point Averages 8 3 Honor Rolls
522. y Forms Scanner Grade Entry Forms Specification Description 6 WHICH Choose the term designator that you would like to print at the top of TERM TO the form This is for reference purposes only PRINT 7 REPORT Choose the reporting period that you would like to print at the top of the PERIOD form 3 16 Report Cards Manual Entry Forms Scanner Grade Entry Forms After you accept the specifications the following window appears lt 3 Administrator s Plus SCANNER GRADE ENTRY FORMS PRINT WHICH SECTIONS 1 All sections re 2 2 2 9i s 9 C Report Cards Manual 3 17 Chapter 3 Entry Forms Scanner Grade Entry Forms Specification 3 18 Report Cards Manual Description These options allow you to print Scanner Grade Entry forms for individual teachers or sections or for a range of teachers as well as for all sections If you choose Option 1 All Sections Scanner Grade Entry Forms will be printed for the course range set in specification 1 INCLUDE SECTIONS MEETING WHEN See the previous page When you select a range of teachers the program prompts you to enter the starting teacher s ID and then it prompts you for the ending teacher s ID If you select Individual teachers or sections you will be able to type the teacher ID s or course section s or choose them from the F6 LOOKUP This feature also enables you to avoid printing forms for lunch sections and so on Simply enter as th
523. y for whom the reports should be printed For instance if you selected All Grades from the previous window you can now select all students individual students or students who meet a database criterion See below If your print job is interrupted for any reason you can select Resume Alphabetical Printing to pick up where you left off When you select this option the following window will appears where you can enter the ID number of the last student printed on the report Printing will resume with the next student alphabetically RESUMING GRADE 12 ALPHABETICALLY This option allows you to print reports sorted by a particular database criterion For example you could print report cards sorted by homeroom to simplify the distribution process You could even search on the homeroom field and sort on another field such as Team which would make it easier to distribute report cards to students in a homeroom who are on a particular team As in other Report Writers in Administrator s Plus this option is used to limit students for whom reports are printed to only those matching a database criterion You could use this option to print transcripts for only students applying to college after designating such in a database field and choose to sort on homeroom Report Cards Report Writer Print Menus PRINT WHICH SECTIONS If you choose to print a report by section the following window appears Administrator s Plus axi REPORT CARDS R
524. your report card not counting the comment columns The default report card column table which is set up for schools with four marking periods only uses eight of the 11 columns The three unused columns are used strategically to leave spaces on the report card so that it will look better The heading line of a report card using the default table could look like SUBJECT 1st 2nd MIDEX MIDGR 3rd 4th FINEX FINAL EFF CIT CRDTS TEACHER Report Cards Manual 1 5 Chapter Customize RC Customize Report Card Columns If your school has six marking periods you can modify the four marking period default table to read as follows ipi x NE N en ee ee m 1 FIRST MARKING PERIOD 1st 3 THIRD MARKING PERIOD ard N 4 SEMESTER 1 EXAM S1EX EXI EXAM N 5 SEMESTER 1 GRADE SEM1 SM1 SEMESTER Y B FOURTH MARKIING PERIOD 4th 4th PERIOD N 7 FIFTH MARKING PERIOD 5th Sth PERIOD N 8 SIXTH MARKING PERIOD 6th 6th PERIOD N 8 SEMESTER 2 EXAM S2bX EX2 EXAM N 10 SEMESTER 2 GRADE SEM2 SM2 SEMESTER Y 11 FINAL GRADE FINAL FIN FINAL N 12 COMMENT ONE COM 1 C1 COMMENT N 13 COMMENT TWO COM 2 C2 COMMENT N This report card column table does not have any unused columns The heading line of a report card using every possible column might appear as follows SUBJECT ist 2nd 3rd SYEX SEM1 4th 5th 6th S2EX SEM2 FINAL COM1COM2 CRDTS TEACHER You can change the title o

Reports Cards Plus Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents